SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide / 1.20
Transcription
SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide / 1.20
SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 Release 1.20 Confidential Business Information This documentation is proprietary information of SunGard SCT and is not to be copied, reproduced, lent or disposed of, nor used for any purpose other than that for which it is specifically provided without the written permission of SunGard SCT. Prepared By: SunGard SCT 4 Country View Road Malvern, Pennsylvania 19355 United States of America © SunGard 2005. All rights reserved. The unauthorized possession, use, reproduction, distribution, display or disclosure of this material or the information contained herein is prohibited. In preparing and providing this publication, SunGard SCT is not rendering legal, accounting, or other similar professional services. SunGard SCT makes no claims that an institution's use of this publication or the software for which it is provided will insure compliance with applicable federal or state laws, rules, or regulations. Each organization should seek legal, accounting and other similar professional services from competent providers of the organization's own choosing. SunGard, the SunGard logo, SCT, the SCT logo, and Banner, Campus Pipeline, Luminis, PowerCAMPUS, SCT Matrix, SCT Plus, SCT OnSite and SCT PocketRecruiter are trademarks or registered trademarks of SunGard Data Systems Inc. or its subsidiaries in the U.S. and other countries. All other trade names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders. Table of Contents Table of Contents 1 Welcome to SCT Plus Student Self-Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Two Versions of Student Self-Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 How This Manual is Organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Related Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 TouchNet Enterprise/Web Application User’s Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 T-Serve System Administration Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 2 Overview of SCT Plus Student Self-Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Functions and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Options for Prospects, Parents, and Guests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Options for Students . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Secure Login for Students . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Logging in for the First Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 When Students Forget Their PIN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Student Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Data Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Setting up Your System for Web Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Step 1: Defining User ID 9998 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Step 2: Setting Program Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Step 3: Setting up the Web Term Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Step 4: Setting up the Web Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Web Display Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Web Login Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Degree Audit Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Step 5: Setting up the Student Personal Information Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Step 6: Setting up the Student Records Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Student Records 1 (W21) Screen Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Student Records 2 (W22) Screen Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 iii Table of Contents Step 7: Setting up the Official Transcript Request Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Official Transcript Request 1 (W23) Screen Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Official Transcript Request 2 (W24) Screen Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 Step 8: Setting up the Additional Services Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 Additional Services - Groups (W27) Screen Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 Additional Services - Group Title/Description (W28) Screen Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 Additional Services - Fee Codes (W29) Screen Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31 Additional Services - Group Query (W50) Screen Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 Additional Services - Fee Code Query (W51) Screen Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 Step 9: Setting up Web Registration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 Web Registration Access Groups (W03) Screen Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 Registration and Schedule 1 (W25) Screen Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 Step 10: Setting up the Web Admissions System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40 Web Admissions System Options (WA2) Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40 Web Required Admissions Pages Screen (W04). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44 Web Admissions Page Display Options (W05). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49 Web Application Type/Term Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54 Step 11: Setting the Financial Aid Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57 Financial Aid 1 Screen (W26) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57 Fund Attribute Screen (331) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60 Tracking Messages Screen (337) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63 Step 12: Setting the Web Option for Academic Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64 Step 13: Setting the Web Option for Degree Audit (for OnCourse) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65 Step 14: Setting the Voice/Web Registration Available Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66 Step 15: Defining DV DBD Values for Admissions List Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66 Step 16: Reviewing DBD Values for Student Services List Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69 Personal Information List Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69 Student Records List Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69 Step 17: Customizing HTML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70 Customizing the Admissions Login Page if Not Using the CWID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70 Customizing the Web Page Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71 Customizing the Cascading Style Sheets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72 Step 18: Customizing Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72 Step 19: Setting ACINPM Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73 Step 20: Updating Institution-Specific Settings in TSRVWEB.INI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76 iv SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 Table of Contents Step 21: Customizing the Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85 Listing Menus on the Navigation Bar (MenuItems.js) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86 Listing Menus on the Site Map (asitemap.htm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87 Renaming Menus or Menu Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89 Removing Menu Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92 Adding a New Item to a Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97 Adding a New Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-104 Step 22: Removing Options from the Home Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-112 Step 23: Loading the T-Serve Tables for Voice and Kiosk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-113 Troubleshooting Errors During Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-114 Passing Profile Data from Student Self-Service to Other Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-115 System Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-116 Specifying Which Events to Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-117 Preparing Your Batch Update Programs for Event Creation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-119 Campus Pipeline/Luminis Profile Load Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-120 Extracting Course Meeting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-121 Extracting Data for Selected Students . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-121 Luminis Data Integration (LDI) Load Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-122 Extracting Course Meeting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-123 Extracting Data for Selected Students and/or Faculty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-123 WebCT Profile Load Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-124 On-Demand Data Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-126 4 Term Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Functional Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Using a Default Term. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Prompting Students to Select a Term. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Select Term . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 5 Personal Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Functional Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Addresses Including Emergency Contacts and Next of Kin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Adding a New Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Updating an Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Personal Phone Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 E-mail Addresses and Personal Web Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Change PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 PIN Question and Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Changing the PIN Question and Answer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Logging in After Forgetting a PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 v Table of Contents View/Update Marital Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Change Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Change Social Security Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 6 Student Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Functional Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Setting Viewing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Granting Web Access to Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Account Summary and Pay by Credit Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Account Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Setting Viewing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Pay by Credit Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Setting the Payment Subcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 When Using The TouchNet Credit Card Payment Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 If Not Using The TouchNet Credit Card Payment Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 Additional Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 How Additional Services are Defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 How Additional Services are Displayed on the Web. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 Degree Audit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 Sample Degree Audit for Primary Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19 Modeling to Obtain Degree Audit for a Different Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21 Holds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23 Unofficial Transcript . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25 Institutional Coursework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29 Transfer Credit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32 IRS Form 1098-T Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35 Bank Account Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39 Advisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43 Graduation Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45 Updating the Expected Graduation Term . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47 Requesting Graduation Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48 Official Transcript Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50 Setting Fees for Official Transcript Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54 Setting Fees for Delivery of Official Transcripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54 Viewing a List of Transcript Requests Made Via the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55 vi SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 Table of Contents 7 Registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Functional Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Turning Registration Options On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Setting Display Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Drop and Add Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Registering for a Class. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Dropping a Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Conditional Drop and Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Change Class Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Student Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 Detailed Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 Registration Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 8 Financial Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Functional Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Setting Display Options for the Personal Financial Aid Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Financial Aid Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Accept Awards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Available Actions for a Fund. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Award Acceptance Time Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 Award Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 General Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 Terms and Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 Award Information by Year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 Award History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19 Student Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 Cost of Attendance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23 Academic Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25 Financial Aid Transcript . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26 Application and Information Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28 Other Financial Aid Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30 Institution Financial Aid Opportunities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31 E-mail to Financial Aid Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33 Select Award Year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 vii Table of Contents 9 Courses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 Functional Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 Course Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Defining Which Course Information to Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Viewing the Course Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Course Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Course Section Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 WebCT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13 10 Prospective Students . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Functional Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 First Time Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Logged in Previously. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 11 Admissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Functional Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Web Page Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 Institution Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 Other Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 Navigation Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5 Creating a New Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6 Completing an Application for a New Applicant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 Enrollment Intentions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 Personal Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19 High School History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-29 College History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-32 Residency and Citizenship. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-35 For US Citizens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-35 For International Applicants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-39 Personal References. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-43 Employment History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-46 Client Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-50 Including Your Own Page in an Admissions Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-51 Review Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-57 Paying by Check or Money Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-63 Paying by Credit Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-63 Viewing Payments in SIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-65 viii SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 Table of Contents Completing or Reviewing an Existing Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-66 Viewing Applications When Auto-Admit Processing is in Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-68 Viewing Paper Applications on the Web. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-68 Allowing Applicants to View Paper Applications Via the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-69 Viewing Web Application Information on SIS Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-70 12 Parent or Guest Payment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 Functional Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 Setting the Payment Subcodes and Term . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Making a Payment Toward a Student’s Account. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 13 Creating Test and Production Web Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Setting up the Web Server Test Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 Setting up the T-Serve Test Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 Setting up the Host (Mainframe) Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 For IBM and/or AIX Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 For DEC Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 General Program Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Program Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Campus Pipeline/Luminis Profile Extract Program (ABKGEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 Student/Faculty Luminis Data Integration Extract Program (ABKLDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6 WebCT Profile Extract Program (ABKLSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10 AAFILE Update Program (AZKAAU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13 Address Display/Update Program (AZKADR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14 Advisor Display Program (AZKADV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15 AMFILE Update Program (AZKAMU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16 Student Holds Program (AZKHLD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17 Marital Status Display Program (AZKMSR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18 Marital Status Update Program (AZKMSU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18 Change PIN Program (AZKPIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19 Table Load Program (AZKTBL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20 Parent/Guest Payment Program (AZKVPA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23 Verify Student Program (AZKVST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-24 Student Account Balance Program (BZKBIL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-25 Credit Card Payment Program (BZKCCU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-29 Additional Services Program (BZKOPT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-35 Billing Tuition Calculation Program (BZKTCL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-36 TRA 1098-T Form Display Program (BZKTRA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-37 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 ix Table of Contents TRA Tax Year Selection Program (BZKTXY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-38 Degree Audit Program (DZKAUD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-39 Admissions Review Application Program (MZKADM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-41 Client Requirements Program (MZKCRQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-44 Admissions Navigation Program (MZKDIR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-45 Employment History Program (MZKEMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-46 Previous High School and College Program (MZKHCL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-47 Admissions Create Account Program (MZKINT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-48 Name and Personal Information Program (MZKNAM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-49 Enrollment Intentions & Select Application Program (MZKPGM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-50 Admissions Prospect Program (MZKPRO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-51 Personal References Program (MZKREF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-52 Residency and Citizenship Program (MZKRES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-52 Submit Application Program (MZKSAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-53 Identity Verification and Create PIN Program (MZKVST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-55 Course Catalog Program (RZKCAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-56 Course Availability Program (RZKCRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-58 Grading Program (RZKFGR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-60 Grade Report Program (RZKGRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-61 Official Transcript Request Program (RZKOTR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-63 Registration Program (RZKREG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-68 Student Schedule Program (RZKSCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-70 Detailed Schedule Program (RZKSCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-71 Registration Status Program (RZKSRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-73 Transfer Credit Program (RZKTCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-74 Unofficial Transcript Program (RZKTRN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-75 Institutional Coursework Program (RZKTSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-77 Accept Awards Program (SZKACC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-78 Financial Aid Applicant Award Information Program (SZKAWD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-82 Cost of Attendance Program (SZKCOA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-85 Academic Progress Program (SZKPRO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-86 Financial Aid Summary Program (SZKSUM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-87 Student Requirements Program (SZKTRK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-88 Unofficial Financial Aid Transcript Program (SZKTRN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-92 x SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 Table of Contents 15 Web Files Used By Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1 General Web Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5 Term Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7 Personal Information Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8 Student Records Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13 Registration Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-22 Financial Aid Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-26 Courses Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-30 Prospective Student Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-36 Admissions Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-38 Parent/Guest Payment Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-73 16 Known Browser Issues. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1 Macintosh Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1 Netscape Navigator 7.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1 Safari 1.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1 Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-1 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 xi 1 Welcome to SCT Plus Student Self-Service About This Manual 1 Welcome to SCT Plus Student Self-Service Welcome to SCT Plus Student Self-Service, SCT’s Web application for simplified student access to information in your SCT Plus Student Information System (SIS). This guide provides the information you need to implement and use SCT Plus Student Self-Service at your institution. About This Manual This guide is intended for the technician who is responsible for making the changes to the SIS base system to enable Web processing. Use this guide in conjunction with the SCT Plus Web/Kiosk Software Installation Guide when attempting to install SCT Plus Student SelfService. Two Versions of Student Self-Service Your institution has purchased one of two versions of Student SelfService: an SCT Campus Pipeline/Luminis-enabled version or a standalone version. This manual includes information and screen captures for each of the features of the stand-alone version of Student SelfService. The screens may look a little different for the Campus Pipeline/ Luminis-enabled version of Student Self-Service and a few of the options may not be available. For example, there is no need for a Change PIN option in the Campus Pipeline/Luminis-enabled version of Student Self-Service, since students would change their passwords via Campus Pipeline/Luminis. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 1-1 1 Welcome to SCT Plus Student Self-Service About This Manual How This Manual is Organized This guide includes information about the stand-alone and Campus Pipeline/Luminis-enabled versions of Student Self-Service, and is divided into the following chapters: Chapter Description 2 Overview of Student SelfService This chapter provides information on the functions and underlying architecture of SCT Plus Student Self-Service. 3 Implementing Student SelfService This chapter includes instructions for setting up Student Self-Service for your institution. 4 Term Selection This chapter describes how students can select/change the term for which to view and update their information. 5 Personal Information This chapter discusses the functionality of the options listed on the Personal Info menu. Students can view/update their addresses, personal phone numbers, e-mail addresses, next of kin and emergency contacts, marital status, etc. 6 Student Records This chapter discusses the functionality of the options listed on the Student Records menu. Students can view their grades, holds, transcript, account summary, or the data used to prepare their 1098-T form, ask for additional services, and request graduation checkout. 7 Registration This chapter discusses the functionality of the options listed on the Registration menu. Students can view their class schedule, a list of available course sections, or their account information, drop/add classes, or change class options. 8 Financial Aid This chapter discusses the functionality of the options listed on the Financial Aid menu. Students can accept or decline their awards, view their personal financial aid information (award history, cost of attendance, etc.), and access links to other useful financial aid sites. 9 Courses This chapter discusses the functionality of the options listed on the Courses menu. Students can view a list of the courses being offered for a specified subject area, view all the course sections available for a specified term, subject, and course title, or narrow down their search using additional search criteria (e.g., days of the week on which course sections are offered). 10 Prospective Students This chapter discusses how prospective students can request information about your institution. 11 Admissions This chapter discusses the components and functionality of the Admissions feature (completing, reviewing, and submitting an application to your institution). Table 1-1 Chapter Descriptions 1-2 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 1 Welcome to SCT Plus Student Self-Service Related Documentation Chapter Description 12 Parent/Guest Payment This chapter details how parents or guests of a student can make payments toward the student’s account at your institution. 13 Creating Test and Production Web Environments If you are running T-Serve 3.0 or higher and your system meets the other specified requirements, you can follow the instructions in this chapter for setting up two Web environments. 14 Student SelfService Programs This chapter includes descriptions of all the SCT Plus Student Self-Service programs. 15 Web Files Used By Function This chapter lists the files and Host programs used to build the Student Self-Service pages. 16 Known Browser Issues Since the various types and versions of Web browsers display the Student Self-Service pages a little differently, this chapter lists any known issues. Table 1-1 Chapter Descriptions (continued) Related Documentation The SCT Plus Student Self-Service Installation CD includes two TouchNet manuals which can be viewed and printed using Adobe Reader. The CD also includes a Windows version of Adobe Reader; versions for other platforms can be downloaded free from Adobe at http:\\www.adobe.com. TouchNet Enterprise/Web Application User’s Guide The TouchNet Enterprise/Web Application User’s Guide is intended for the person who may be designing, modifying, or working with the Student Self-Service application. The guide describes the use of the TouchNet Enterprise Web program (TSRVWEB), its corresponding configuration files, and its custom HTML tags. The guide is not intended to support HTML document development. Anyone using the guide should already be familiar with developing HTML documents. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 1-3 1 Welcome to SCT Plus Student Self-Service Related Documentation T-Serve System Administration Guide The T-Serve System Administration Guide is designed for the person responsible for installing and administering T-Serve. The guide describes the T-Serve software’s operations and its interaction with host operations, and provides instructions for the proper administration and maintenance of T-Serve. Prior knowledge of software operations and host systems is assumed. This documentation is not intended as a guide to host operations, nor does it address how to use software operating systems on which T-Serve may work. Online Help Student Self-Service provides one help page (SCTHELP.HTM). Selecting HELP on any Student Self-Service page displays this help page. SCT recommends that you customize this page to reflect your institution’s procedures and information. Some suggested ideas are: • Contact information for key personnel (phone numbers, e-mail addresses) • Frequently asked questions • Procedure information, such as registration procedures or financial aid procedures Providing such information may answer many of your students’ or prospects’ questions and reduce the number of calls to your helpdesk and administrative offices. 1-4 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 2 Overview of SCT Plus Student Self-Service Functions and Features 2 Overview of SCT Plus Student Self-Service This chapter provides an overview of the functions and architecture of the SCT Plus Student Self-Service application. Functions and Features Using a Web browser (for IBM-Compatible computers: Netscape Navigator 7.1, Internet Explorer 5.5/6.0, or Mozilla 1.6; for Macintosh computers: Netscape Navigator 7.1 or Safari 1.1), students and prospects navigate to your institution’s Student Self-Service site to find out information about your institution. Figure 2-1 SCT Plus Student Self-Service home page • Students use the secure login to find out when a class is being offered or who’s teaching a class, register for classes, check on the progress of their financial aid application, update their biographical information in your system, request an official transcript, and so on. • Prospects can retrieve financial aid information, find out what course sections are available, apply for admission, look at your course catalog, or request information about your institution. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 2-1 2 Overview of SCT Plus Student Self-Service Functions and Features This chapter provides a brief functional overview of the features of SCT Plus Student Self-Service. Note that your institution may choose to use all, or a customized set, of the delivered features. In Chapter 3, we’ll explain how to display and enable only the desired options. Options for Prospects, Parents, and Guests Prospective students, parents, and guests can access the public options listed on the Student Self-Service home page. Here’s a brief description of each of these options. Option Description Prospective This menu option allows prospective students to request specific Students information from your institution, such as a college catalog, undergraduate bulletin, financial aid application, or orientation letters. The prospective student’s biographic information (name, address, expected term of entry, date of birth, etc.) and information requests are recorded in the SIS system for your reference. Refer to Chapter 10 for more information about this feature. Apply for Admission Prospects use this link to apply for admission to your institution. After specifying the enrollment intentions (intended term of entry and desired course of study), applicants enter other information, such as: • personal information • high school history • previous college history • residency/citizenship information • personal references • employment history After a prospect submits an application, he/she can periodically check the status of his/her application. Refer to Chapter 11 for more information about the Admissions feature. Parent or Guest Payment Parents or guests can also make payments toward specified students’ accounts. The system will verify the student’s ID and date of birth before allowing the parent or guest to make the payment. Refer to Chapter 12 for more information about this feature. Table 2-1 Descriptions of Prospect Options 2-2 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 2 Overview of SCT Plus Student Self-Service Functions and Features Option Description Financial Aid Application and Information Links The Financial Aid Application and Information Links feature provides access to several Websites that contain valuable financial aid information and resources. The external Web links include links to the Free Application for Federal Student Aid (FAFSA) on the U.S. Department of Education’s Website, a free scholarship search service, and the College Scholarship Service’s (CSS) PROFILE program. The student who is new to the financial aid process will find the University Financial Aid Opportunities resource page to be very useful. You can customize this page for the types of financial aid that is available at your institution. Refer to Chapter 8 for more information about the financial aid feature. Course Sections Prospects use the Course Sections link to display a listing of all the course sections that are scheduled for a specified term, subject area, and course title. Refer to Chapter 9 for more information about the Available Course Sections feature. Course Section Search Lets prospects view a listing of the course sections scheduled for the selected term that meet specific search criteria (e.g., days of the week on which course sections are offered). Refer to Chapter 9 for more information about the Course Section Search feature. Course Catalog The Course Catalog provides a listing of all approved courses for the current academic year. (Courses with the Course Status (RI013) “Pending” are not listed in the catalog.) Prospects browsing through your institution’s Website are likely to look at the Course Catalog. Refer to Chapter 9 for more information about the Course Catalog feature. Table 2-1 Descriptions of Prospect Options (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 2-3 2 Overview of SCT Plus Student Self-Service Functions and Features Options for Students In addition to being able to access the options available to prospects, students can also access the secure Student Services options. Secure Login for Students Students must complete these steps in order to access the secure information from the Student Self-Service home page: 1. Select Enter Student Services on the Student Self-Service home page. 2. Enter their student ID and Personal Identification Number (PIN). Figure 2-2 Student Self-Service Login page 3. Select to view the Student Services page. Logging in for the First Time The first time students log in, they will probably use their SSN as the Student ID. If your institution is using the CWID (alternate CampusWide ID), you will specify two CWID options when you follow the implementation instructions in Chapter 3. • If you require students to: always use their CWID to log in, use their CWID after their first login with their SSN, log in with either their SSN or CWID. • If you want to display a student’s CWID whenever the student logs in with his/her SSN. For example: Figure 2-3 Student Login - CWID Notice page 2-4 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 2 Overview of SCT Plus Student Self-Service Functions and Features When Students Forget Their PIN You can also display I Forgot My PIN on the Login page. When students select this link, they will have to enter their ID and then answer a question (which they defined previously on the PIN Question and Answer page) in order to log in. For example: Figure 2-4 I Forgot My PIN - Answer page When they answer the question correctly, they will be able to specify a new PIN. Figure 2-5 I Forgot My PIN - Enter New PIN page This option allows students to obtain a new PIN if they forget their current one, without contacting anyone at your institution. Also, if you delete or change a student’s PIN without his/her knowledge on Screen 103 (Personal Data), the student will not be able to log in without the I Forgot My PIN option. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 2-5 2 Overview of SCT Plus Student Self-Service Functions and Features Student Services Student Services is the student’s link to the majority of his/her activities in the SCT Plus Student Self-Service application. Figure 2-6 Student Services page The following table provides a brief description of the Student Services options. Option Description Term Enables students to select a different term for which to view/update their information. Personal Info Lets students view/update their biographical information (such as, addresses, personal phone numbers, e-mail addresses, Personal Identification Number (PIN), PIN question and answer, and marital status). Refer to Chapter 5 for more information on the functionality of the Personal Information options. Student Records Enables students to submit a transcript request, view academic information (i.e., their grades, transcripts, degree audit, any holds in the system, account information, and the names of their advisors), update their bank account information, ask for additional services, and request graduation checkout. Refer to Chapter 6 for more information about Student Records. Registration Permits students to register for classes, check out available classes and sections, view and print their daily class schedule, drop classes, view their registration status, and view their account summary and make payments to their account. Refer to Chapter 7 for more information about the Registration option. Table 2-2 Descriptions of the Student Services options 2-6 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 2 Overview of SCT Plus Student Self-Service Functions and Features Option Financial Aid Description Allows students to view details of their personal financial aid information, as well as link to external Websites. From the Personal Financial Aid Information menu, students can look at award information, accept or decline their awards, inquire about required documents, view their unofficial financial aid transcript, estimate the cost of attendance at your institution, and check on their academic progress as it affects their award eligibility. Refer to Chapter 8 for more information about the financial aid option. Courses Allows students to view a listing of all the approved courses for the current academic year, the course sections that are scheduled for a specified term, subject area, and course title; search for courses that meet more-specific search criteria (e.g., days of the week on which course sections are offered), and access the WebCT Website. Refer to Chapter 9 for more information about the Courses option. Table 2-2 Descriptions of the Student Services options (continued) Note: For security purposes, the student’s ID does not display on any page, except on the Login page (when entered), the Admissions Create Account page (if you are using the SSN as the ID) and Application Account Confirmation page, and the 1098-T Summary and Detail Information page. The PIN does not appear on any page. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 2-7 2 Overview of SCT Plus Student Self-Service Architecture Architecture This section describes the overall architecture for SCT Plus Student Self-Service: the configuration, how data is exchanged between a Web client and SIS, and the use of four levels of data security. Configuration The SCT Plus Student Self-Service application supports a four-tier, client-server configuration and uses the same database access as the SCT Plus online programs. Some of the Student Self-Service programs are also utilized to provide information for the TouchNet Kiosk application. The following figure illustrates the four-tier configuration that best supports the Student Self-Service application. Figure 2-7 Four-tier Configuration Supporting Student Self-Service Data Exchange The steps in exchanging information between a Web client and the SCT Plus host are: 1. The Web client browser software accesses a Web page or completes an HTML form that is sent to your institution’s Web server. 2. Your institution’s Web server software interprets the URL (Uniform Resource Locator) and identifies it as either Common Gateway Interface (CGI)-compliant or as a procedure to access static HTML pages. If the program identified is CGI-compliant, the Web server software invokes the T-Serve Web Agent and passes the form contents to the Agent. 2-8 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 2 Overview of SCT Plus Student Self-Service Architecture 3. The T-Serve Web Agent software reads and decodes the passed data, connects to the T-Serve server via TCP/IP, and executes a transaction request to the SCT Plus host. 4. The COBOL program executes and retrieves or updates the requested information that will be passed back to the T-Serve Web Agent. 5. The T-Serve Web Agent merges the host information with the appropriate HTML and passes the data back to your institution’s Web server software that communicates with the Web client. Security The Student Self-Service application performs four levels of security: Level of Security Description Data encryption between the Web client and the Web server Unencrypted plain text passed between the client and the Web server can be read by network sniffers — that is, software and hardware that monitor and display data transmitted across a network. System administrators can choose Netscape Commerce Web server software (SSL or SHHTP) to encrypt data between the client and the Web server. Data encryption between the Web server and the T-Serve host The Web server and T-Serve processes have data encryption routines built in, which protect the data as it passes between the Web server and T-Serve. Transaction In Progress (TIP) TIP processing assigns a new session ID to each request from the client browser. The session ID is associated with the student ID and PIN. The student ID and PIN cross the network between the client browser and the Web server only when the student logs in. Once the student is validated, only the session IDs cross the public networks between the client browser and the Web server. Two levels of Application Security The first level is provided by the Web server which can either protect access to HTML pages via specific IP domains, or require a valid user name and password. This prevents unauthorized Web clients from accessing the page that connects to T-Serve and the SCT Plus host. The second level of security is provided at the application level in Student Self-Service, which requires a valid student ID and PIN. The student ID and PIN are stored in the SIS database and are used to authenticate the login information prior to gaining access to the Web application. Table 2-3 Levels of Security SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 2-9 2 Overview of SCT Plus Student Self-Service Architecture The following figure illustrates the SCT Plus Student Self-Service security processing flow: Figure 2-8 Four-part Security for Student Self-Service 2-10 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service This chapter discusses the modifications you need to make to the SCT Plus SIS system to implement and customize Student Self-Service for your institution. Setting up Your System for Web Access Use the following checklist to guide you through implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service. Implementation Checklist Step Description Page 1 Define user ID 9998. 3-2 2 Set program parameters. 3-3 3 Set up the Web Term Calendar on Screen W01. 3-3 4 Set up Web Student and Faculty Specifications (W02) screen. 3-6 5 Set up Student Personal Information (W20) screen. 3-12 6 For Student Records, set up: • Student Records 1 (W21) screen • Student Records 2 (W22) screen 3-14 7 For Official Transcript Request, set up: • Official Transcript Request 1 (W23) screen • Official Transcript Request 2 (W24) screen 3-22 8 For Additional Services, set up: • Additional Services - Groups (W27) screen • Additional Services - Group Title/Description (W28) screen • Additional Services - Fee Codes (W29) screen 3-26 9 For Registration, set up: • Web Registration Access Groups (W03) screen • Registration and Schedule 1 (W25) screen 3-33 10 For Admissions, set up: • Web Admissions System Options (WA2) screen • Web Required Admissions Pages (W04) screen • Web Admissions Page Display Options (W05) screen • Web Admissions Application Type/Term (W06) screen 3-40 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-1 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Implementation Checklist Step Description Page 11 For Financial Aid, set up: • Financial Aid 1 (W26) screen • Web options on Screen 331 for Accept Awards • Links to forms on Screen 337 for Student Requirements 3-57 12 Set Web option on Screen 134 for Approved Academic Programs. 3-64 13 If you are using OnCourse, set Web option on Screen 611 for Degree Audit. 3-65 14 Set Voice/Web Registration Available option on Screen 129. 3-66 15 Define DV DBD values shown in admissions list boxes. 3-66 16 Review DBD values/translations in Student Services list boxes. 3-69 17 Customize the delivered HTML, as needed. 3-70 18 Customize the error messages, as needed. 3-72 19 Set the ACINPM options. 3-73 20 Update the institution-specific settings in TSRVWEB.INI. 3-76 21 Customize the menus, as needed. 3-85 22 Remove options from the Home page, as needed. 3-112 23 Load the T-Serve tables (for Voice and Kiosk only; not Web). 3-113 Refer to the following sections for information on completing all the items listed in the implementation checklist. Step 1: Defining User ID 9998 The first step in implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service is to set up an operator number or ID for an interactive user in SCT Plus SIS. The operator number must allow registration updates, admissions updates, address updates, and PIN changes. • In ZSS Screen Builder Security, define 9998 as the operator number for system 001 (SIS), and set this ID to allow update and inquire access to information on all Web inquiry pages. • Set the Org Security Class to U on Security Screen 4 and set Screen Access to A*** on Security Screen 6. (Refer to Chapter 7 in the ZSS Technical Guide.) If you are running TouchNet’s Voice solution, the Registration module uses operator ID 9996 to identify records written to the Registration Audit. It is not necessary to add operator ID 9996 to ZSS Security. 3-2 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Step 2: Setting Program Parameters • Review the program parameters and determine the correct values. • Update the program parameter values for all programs. Step 3: Setting up the Web Term Calendar Use the Web Term Calendar Screen (W01) to specify the term and academic unit codes, dates for submitting and viewing applications for admission, dates for registration, dates for accepting parent/guest payments, availability of the billing, grading, course schedule, student schedule, and graduation information features, and add and drop dates for each session in the term. Figure 3-1 Web Term Calendar Screen (W01) The following table lists the Web Term Calendar Screen (W01) field entries that you can change and the appropriate formats for each. Field Academic Unit Description The 1-character code for the academic unit that administers the specified term. A C D M L Term Administrative Main Campus Dental School Medical School Law Center The academic term in the format YYT (e.g., 03S for Spring 2003). Together the Academic Unit and the Term uniquely identify a Term Calendar. Table 3-1 Screen W01 Field Entries SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-3 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Field Description Admissions Application Begin Update End Inquiry End The time frame within which prospects can submit and update applications for the term via the Web. Specify both the Begin and Update End dates in the format MM-DD-CCYY. After the Update End date has passed, admissions applications cannot be modified. The last day admissions applications can be viewed on the Web. Specify the Inquiry End date in the format MM-DD-CCYY. Registration Begin/End 1* Begin/End 2* Along with the Session dates, these dates provide for two time periods for the term within which students can register for classes on the Web. These dates are for Web registration restrictions only and do not need to be the same as the dates set up for online registration. If the current date is not in the add course start/end date ranges, the student cannot add courses to his/her schedule. Specify the Begin and End dates in the format MM-DD-CCYY. The registration begin and end dates are also used to control the terms available for the student schedule display, account summary, and fee assessment functions. Parent/Guest Payment Begin/End Set these fields if you are using the Parent/Guest Payment option and want to allow parents and guests to select the term for which they are making a payment. Specify the Begin and End dates (in the format MM-DD-CCYY) for the time period within which your institution will allow parents and guests to make payments for students’ accounts during the specified term. (You must enter the Begin date. If you do not know the End date, you may leave this field blank.) Availability The Availability options enable you to select which terms are displayed in the Term list boxes for the individual features. Billing* Set to Y to allow students to access the Account Summary page for the specified term. (Billing must be set to Y in order for the system to apply the charges for the fee selections made on the Additional Services page.) Grading* Set to Y to allow students to view their grades for the specified term on the Web. Course Schedule* Set to Y to make the term available for the Available Course Section feature on the Web. Table 3-1 Screen W01 Field Entries (continued) 3-4 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Field Description Student Schedule* Set to Y to allow students to view the Student Schedule, Detailed Schedule, and Registration Status for the specified term on the Web. Intent to Grad Set to Y to allow students to submit graduation information for the specified term via the Web. For Each Session in the Term Add Begin/End 1 Add Begin/End 2 Along with the Registration dates, these dates provide for two Web registration periods per term. These dates are for Web registration restrictions only and do not need to be the same as the dates set up for online registration. If the current date is not in the add course start/end date ranges, the student cannot add courses to his/her schedule. Specify the Begin and End dates in the format MM-DD-CCYY. Drop Begin/End 1 Specify the Begin and End dates (in the format MM-DD-CCYY) for the two time periods within which students can drop courses Drop Begin/End 2 for the term. Retain Date Specify the date (in the format MM-DD-CCYY) beyond which dropped courses are to be retained on the Student Registration record. Reason For drops that are retained on the Student Registration record after the specified Retain Date, you must enter the 2-character code for the reason why the course was dropped. * If you update any of these fields, you must perform an SLD table load on your Host system. Table 3-1 Screen W01 Field Entries (continued) The fields listed for Faculty (Term Available and Registration Functions), Advisor Registration Functions, and the Session fields on Screen W01 apply to SCT Plus Faculty and Advisor Self-Service. If your institution has implemented this application, refer to its implementation guide for more information on these fields. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-5 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Step 4: Setting up the Web Specifications Use the Web Student and Faculty Specifications Screen (W02) to set the Web options that are shared by Student Self-Service and Faculty and Advisor Self-Service. Figure 3-2 Web Student and Faculty Specifications Screen (W02) Web Display Options The following table lists the Web Student and Faculty Specifications Screen (W02) field entries used for setting display options. Field Case Description Specify whether data is to be passed unchanged (in mixed case) or converted to upper case before updating the SIS System. • INFO-ACCESS-CASE is delivered without a value. • If you specify a value for INFO-ACCESS-CASE, it will override the SIS AC-IN-CASE parameter (TBL-IN-CASE parameter in loaded tables). Y N Term Sort Specify the order in which terms are to be displayed in list boxes on Web pages: A D Midterm Grading Mixed case Upper case Ascending order, oldest term displayed first Descending order, most recent term displayed first (default) Specify whether your institution records midterm grades and wants to display midterm grades on the Grades page (and the Grade Courses and Grades pages in the Faculty and Advisor Self-Service application). Y N Display midterm grades. Do not display midterm grades. Table 3-2 Display Options on Screen W02 3-6 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Field Description Student Main Menu Specify whether the Student Services page or the Site Map is to be displayed after students successfully log into Student Self-Service. D S Faculty Main Menu Display the Student Services page after login (default). Display the Site Map after login. Used for Faculty and Advisor Self-Service. Table 3-2 Display Options on Screen W02 (continued) Web Login Options The following table lists the Web Student and Faculty Specifications Screen (W02) field entries used for setting login options. Field Description Maximum Number of Login Attempts Specify the maximum number of times (up to 9) a student may attempt to log in with an invalid personal identification number (PIN). The invalid attempts are tracked for each student ID. When this maximum number is reached, the student is locked out from further login attempts. Prior to lockout, if the student enters a correct student ID and PIN, the system resets the student’s counter to zero and updates the last access date. Reset on New Date Specify Y to automatically reset the number of attempts counter for a student who tries to log in on a date which is different than the lockout date. Specify N to not reset the counter on a date change. To reset the counter when this field is N, use the Student Electronic Access Screen (010). Table 3-3 Login Options on Screen W02 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-7 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Field CWID Login Description Specify whether students must log in with their CWID (the alternate Campus-Wide ID used instead of the SSN) and if the system should display their CWID after they successfully log in with their SSN. (This option is only used with the Stand-Alone version of Student SelfService; not with Campus Pipeline/Luminis.) N Do not display the student’s CWID (default). • If your institution does not use the CWID, use this option. • If your institution uses the CWID, use this option if you do not want to display a student’s CWID after he/she logs in successfully with his/her SSN. Y Allow students to log in with either their SSN or CWID. Whenever students log in successfully with their SSN, display their CWID. For example: Students should write down their CWID (so they remember to log in using their CWID in the future) and selecting to log in. R Require students to always use their CWID to log in. L Require students to use their SSN to log in the first time, and then use their CWID to log in thereafter. Table 3-3 Login Options on Screen W02 (continued) 3-8 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Field PIN Question and Answer Description Specify whether I Forgot My PIN should be displayed on the Login page, and if the PIN Question and Answer page should be displayed after their next successful login (for those students who have not already supplied the necessary PIN information). Y • Display I Forgot My PIN on the Login page. Whenever students select I Forgot My PIN, they will have to correctly answer the question they previously defined on the PIN Question and Answer page in order to log in. For example: • Display the PIN Question and Answer page for students who have not already specified the required PIN information. Students will specify the question that will be displayed whenever they select I Forgot My PIN on the Login page, and the answer that must be entered in order to log in. After students select I Forgot My PIN on the Login page and enter the correct PIN answer, they will be required to change their PIN. Thus, the PIN Question and Answer option also enables students to: • Obtain a new PIN • Log in even if you delete or change their PIN without their knowledge on Screen 103 (Personal Data) N Do not display I Forgot My PIN on the Login page and the PIN Question and Answer page. Table 3-3 Login Options on Screen W02 (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-9 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access In addition to the Login options on Screen W02, you can set other Login options on Screen 103 (Personal Data). Figure 3-3 Personal Data (103) Screen Field CWID Notify PIN Description This field indicates whether the specified student has been notified of his/her CWID. Y If your institution set CWID Login to L on Screen W02, Y will be displayed in this field to indicate that the student has been notified of his/her CWID. N The student has not been notified of his/her CWID (default). The Personal Identification Number (PIN) that is being assigned to the specified student. The student must use this PIN to log into Student SelfService for the first time. (This field can also be used to reset the student’s PIN.) PIN Specify whether the PIN is only a temporary PIN to be used by the Assigned student the first time he/she logs into Student Self-Service. Y The specified PIN is only to be used by the student to log in the first time. The student will then be required to change his/her PIN. N The student can continue to use the specified PIN and is not required to change it (default). Table 3-4 Login Options on Screen 103 3-10 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Degree Audit Options The following table lists the Web Student and Faculty Specifications Screen (W02) field entries used for setting Degree Audit options Field Test Scores Advisor Notes Advisor Name Program Term Modeling Catalog Description Specify whether you want to display the student’s test scores on the Analysis of Academic Progress report. Y Display the student’s test scores on the Analysis of Academic Progress report. N Do not display the student’s test scores on the report. Specify whether you want to display the advisor’s notes on the Analysis of Academic Progress report. Y Display the advisor’s notes on the Analysis of Academic Progress report. N Do not display the advisor’s notes on the report. Specify whether you want to display the advisor’s name on the Analysis of Academic Progress report. Y Display the advisor’s name on the Analysis of Academic Progress report. N Do not display the advisor’s name. Specify whether the student’s primary or secondary program is to be determined by the current term or his/her last chronological term. C Use the current term (the term on the CAL screen for which today’s date falls between the session begin and end dates) for the blank session code. L Use the last chronological term (the term with the student’s most recent registration activity). Specify which catalogs can be selected for Degree Audit Modeling. Only those programs set for modeling on Screen 611 can be selected from the catalogs. 1 List programs from the student’s primary program catalog. 2 List programs from the student’s primary program catalog and those programs that have become available for his/her primary program. 3 List programs from the current catalog. 4 List programs from all catalogs. Table 3-5 Degree Audit Options on Screen W02 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-11 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Step 5: Setting up the Student Personal Information Options Use the Student Personal Information Screen (W20) to define the settings for display of student names, street addresses, and e-mail addresses. Figure 3-4 Student Personal Information Screen (W20) The following table lists the Student Personal Information Screen (W20) field entries. Field Respect Directory Description If your institution has implemented the Faculty and Advisor SelfService application, specify whether this application should suppress display of addresses for students who have chosen not to have their addresses listed in the Student Directory. Y Suppress display of unlisted student addresses. N Do not suppress display of unlisted student addresses. Name Order Specify how names are to be displayed in Web page headings: 1 2 Display first, middle, last name (default). Display last, first, middle name. Table 3-6 Screen W20 Field Entries 3-12 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Field Description Street Addresses Type Specify up to 14 address types to be available for inquiry and/or update on the Web. The order in which the address types are entered determines their order in the list box on the Web page. B C E G K L M N P S T U 1 2 (not specified) Billing Emergency Contact 2 Emergency Contact 1 Grades Next of kin/Guardian 2 Local Temporary Next of kin/Guardian 1 Permanent (default) Special Tax (W-9S) User Most recent previous legal residence Prior legal residence Inquiry/ Update Specify whether each specified address type is updateable (U) or view-only (I). Def State/ Province Specify the 2-character code for the state in which your institution is located. The name of the state will be listed first in the State list boxes. Default Country Specify the 2-character code for the country in which your institution is located. The name of the country will be listed first in the Country list boxes. E-Mail Addresses Type Specify up to 5 e-mail address types to be available for inquiry and/or update on the Web. The order in which the address types are entered determines their order in the list box on the Web page. B C H P U Inquiry/ Update Business College Home Personal University Specify whether each specified e-mail address type is updateable (U) or view-only (I). Table 3-6 Screen W20 Field Entries (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-13 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Step 6: Setting up the Student Records Options Use the following screens to set up the Student Records options: • Student Records 1 (W21) • Student Records 2 (W22) Student Records 1 (W21) Screen Options Use the Student Records 1 Screen (W21) to specify the default term for Student Self-Service and define settings for the Course Catalog, Grades, Unofficial Transcript, Institutional Coursework, and Transfer Credit options. Figure 3-5 Student Records 1 Screen (W21) The following table lists the Student Records 1 Screen (W21) field entries. Field Student Default Term Description Specify the default term for Student Self-Service. The default term is usually set to the current term to save students from having to enter it each time they use Student Self-Service. Course Catalog Academic Year Specify the year (in format CCYY) for the courses to appear in the Web Course Catalog. Courses are selected from the Course Inventory on Screen 125 when the Catalog Academic Year matches at least one term in the Term Range on that screen. Table 3-7 Screen W21 Field Entries 3-14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Field Description Dept Specify whether you want to read the RJFILE (Course Description Description File) to get the long description of the department, as shown in screen 1D1, item=1. Item 1 Y Get the long description of the department for the Course Catalog (default). N Do not get the long description of the department. Specify whether you want to read the RJFILE (Course Description File) to get the title of the course, as shown in 1D4, item=1. Y N Item 2 Specify whether you want to read the RJFILE (Course Description File) to get the instructor name, as shown in screen 1D4, item=2. Y N Item 3 Get the notes, as shown in screen ID4, item=5 (default). Do not get the notes. Specify whether you want to read the RJFILE (Course Description File) to get the user-defined paragraph, as shown in screen ID4, item=6. Y N Item 7 Get the co-requisites (default). Do not get the co-requisites. Specify whether you want to read the RJFILE (Course Description File) to get the notes, as shown in screen ID4, item=5. Y N Item 6 Get the prerequisites (default). Do not get the prerequisites. Specify whether you want to read the RJFILE (Course Description File) to get the co-requisites, as shown in screen ID4, item=4. Y N Item 5 Get the instructor name (default). Do not get the instructor name. Specify whether you want to read the RJFILE (Course Description File) to get the prerequisites, as shown in screen ID4, item=3. Y N Item 4 Get the course title (default). Do not get the course title. Get the user-defined paragraph (default). Do not get the user-defined paragraph. Specify whether you want to read the RJFILE (Course Description File) to get the user-defined paragraph, as shown in screen ID4, item=7. Y N Get the user-defined paragraph (default). Do not get the user-defined paragraph. Table 3-7 Screen W21 Field Entries (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-15 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Field Item 8 Description Specify whether you want to read the RJFILE (Course Description File) to get the user-defined paragraph, as shown in screen ID4, item=8. Y N Item 9 Get the user-defined paragraph, (default). Get the user-defined paragraph. Specify whether you want to read the RJFILE (Course Description File) to get the user-defined paragraph, as shown in screen ID4, item=9. Y N Get the user-defined paragraph (default). Do not get the user-defined paragraph. Grades Name Specify whether the student name should be displayed on the Grades page. Y N Statistics Specify whether the current and cumulative statistics should be displayed on the Grades page. Y N Holds Display the student name on the Grades page (default). Do not display the student name on the Grades page. Display statistics on the screen (default). Do not display statistics on the screen. Specify whether a student with a transcript hold may view the Grades page. Y N Students with transcript holds can view their grades. Students with transcript holds cannot view their grades (default). Unofficial Transcript Name Holds Specify whether the student name should be displayed on the Unofficial Transcript page. Y Display the student name on the Unofficial Transcript page (default). N Do not display the student name on the Unofficial Transcript page. Specify whether a student with a transcript hold may view the Unofficial Transcript page. Y Students with transcript holds can view the Unofficial Transcript page. N Students with transcript holds cannot view the Unofficial Transcript page (default). Table 3-7 Screen W21 Field Entries (continued) 3-16 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Field Description Institutional Coursework Name Holds Specify whether the student name should be displayed on the Institutional Coursework page. Y Display the student name on the Institutional Coursework page (default). N Do not display the student name on the Institutional Coursework page. Specify whether a student with a transcript hold may view the Institutional Coursework page. Y Students with transcript holds can view the Institutional Coursework page. N Students with transcript holds cannot view the Institutional Coursework page (default). Transfer Credit Name Specify whether the student name should be displayed on the Transfer Credit page. Y N Holds Display the student name on the Transfer Credit page (default). Do not display the student name on the Transfer Credit page. Specify whether a student with a transcript hold may view the Transfer Credit page (default). Y Students with transcript holds can view the Transfer Credit page. N Students with transcript holds cannot view the Transfer Credit page (default). Bank Information Name Specify whether the student name should be displayed on the Bank Account Information page. Y Display the student name on the Bank Account Information page (default). N Do not display the student name on the Bank Account Information page. Additional Services Name Specify whether the student name should be displayed on the Additional Services page. Y Display the student name on the Additional Services page (default). N Do not display the student name on the Additional Services page. Table 3-7 Screen W21 Field Entries (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-17 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Student Records 2 (W22) Screen Options Use the Student Records 2 Screen (W22) to define settings for the Account Summary and Holds options, credit card payments made toward an account by a student or a Parent/Guest, and credit card receipts. Figure 3-6 Student Records 2 Screen (W22) The following table lists the Student Records 2 Screen (W22) field entries. Field Description Account Summary Disp Due Date Specify whether the due date is to be displayed on the Account Summary page. Y N Display the due date (default). Do not display the due date. Due Date Specify the due date (in format MMDDYYYY) for all student accounts. Tuition Calculation Specify when tuition calculation is to be performed. Y Always calculate tuition when an Account Summary is requested (default). R Only calculate tuition when Tuition Calc=Y on Screen 111 (Student Term Attributes) for the specified term. N Do not calculate tuition. Table 3-8 Screen W22 Field Entries 3-18 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Field Name View Account Description Specify whether the student name should be displayed on the Account Summary page. Y Display the student name on the Account Summary page (default). N Do not display the student name on the Account Summary page. Specify whether all students, or just active students may view the Account Summary page. If blank, all students may view the Account Summary page (default). A Subcode Grouping Only active students may view the Account Summary page. Specify whether subcode grouping is to be applied to the Account Summary. Y Summarize subcodes into subgroups in the Account Summary and display the subcode group instead of detail lines. If a particular subcode is not associated with any subcode group, it is displayed as a subcode detail line (default). N Display every detail subcode line in the Account Summary. Holds Effective Term Specify whether the effective term is to be displayed on the Holds page. Y N Display the effective term on the Holds page (default). Do not display the effective term on the Holds page. Waived Term Specify whether the waived term is to be displayed on the Holds page. Originating Office Specify whether the name of the office that originated the hold is to be displayed on the Holds page. Y N Y N Display the waived term on the Holds page (default). Do not display the waived term on the Holds page. Display the originating office on the Holds page (default). Do not display the originating office on the Holds page. Account Summary Credit Card Payment Default Subcode The default payment subcode (greater than 00102) used to identify credit card payments toward students’ account summaries. This subcode is only used when Credit Card Usage=B or D. Visa Subcode The payment subcode (greater than 00102) used to identify Visa credit card payments made toward students’ account summaries. This subcode is only used when Credit Card Usage=C or D. Table 3-8 Screen W22 Field Entries (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-19 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Field Description MasterCard The payment subcode (greater than 00102) used to identify Subcode Mastercard credit card payments made toward students’ account summaries. This subcode is only used when Credit Card Usage=C or D. American Express Subcode The payment subcode (greater than 00102) used to identify American Express credit card payments made toward students’ account summaries. This subcode is only used when Credit Card Usage=C or D. Discover Subcode The payment subcode (greater than 00102) used to identify Discover Card credit card payments made toward students’ account summaries. This subcode is only used when Credit Card Usage=C or D. Other Credit The payment subcode (greater than 00102) used to identify credit card Card payments (other than Visa, Mastercard, AMerican Express, or Subcode Discover Card) made toward students’ account summaries. This subcode is only used when Credit Card Usage=C or D. Credit Card Usage Specify how the credit card subcodes are to be used for account summary payments: B Use the Default Subcode for all credit card types (and disregard any subcodes entered for individual credit card types). C Only allow use of credit cards for which subcodes have been specified. This option allows you to restrict the types of credit cards used to make account summary payments. If your institution does not accept a particular credit card, do not specify a subcode for this credit card type. D Use the subcodes that have been specified for the various credit card types. Use the Default Subcode when an individual credit card subcode is not provided. This option allows you to accept all credit card types without specifying a subcode for each one. Parent/Guest Credit Card Payment Default Subcode The default payment subcode (greater than 00102) used to identify credit card payments made by parents or guests. This subcode is only used when Credit Card Usage=B or D. Visa Subcode The payment subcode (greater than 00102) used to identify Visa credit card payments made by parents or guests. This subcode is only used when Credit Card Usage=C or D. MasterCard The payment subcode (greater than 00102) used to identify Subcode Mastercard credit card payments made by parents or guests. This subcode is only used when Credit Card Usage=C or D. American Express Subcode The payment subcode (greater than 00102) used to identify American Express credit card payments made by parents or guests. This subcode is only used when Credit Card Usage=C or D. Table 3-8 Screen W22 Field Entries (continued) 3-20 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Field Discover Subcode Description The payment subcode (greater than 00102) used to identify Discover Card credit card payments made by parents or guests. This subcode is only used when Credit Card Usage=C or D. Other Credit The payment subcode (greater than 00102) used to identify credit card Card payments (other than Visa, Mastercard, AMerican Express, or Subcode Discover Card) made by parents or guests. This subcode is only used when Credit Card Usage=C or D. Credit Card Usage Payment Term Specify how the credit card subcodes are to be used for payments made by parents or guests: B Use the Default Subcode for all credit card types (and disregard any subcodes entered for individual credit card types). C Only allow use of credit cards for which subcodes have been specified. This option allows you to restrict the types of credit cards used to make payments by parents or guests. If your institution does not accept a particular credit card, do not specify a subcode for this credit card type. D Use the subcodes that have been specified for the various credit card types (default). Use the Default Subcode when an individual credit card subcode is not provided. This option allows you to accept all credit card types without specifying a subcode for each one. Specify how the payment term is determined for the Parent/Guest Payment option. S Parents and Guests can select the term for which they want to make a payment. They will be able to select any term for which the current date falls within the Parent/Guest Begin and End dates specified for the term on Screen W01. Note: If the current date only falls within the Parent/Guest Begin and End dates specified for one term on Screen W01, the Parent/Guest term will default to that term and parents/ guests will not need to select a term. D Default the Parent/Guest term to the current term for the student’s academic unit. All Credit Card Receipts Display Login ID Specify whether the student ID is to be displayed on all credit card receipts (for Account Summary, Admission Fee, Official Transcript Request, and Parent/Guest Payment). Y N Display the student ID on credit card receipts (default). Do not display the student ID on credit card receipts. Table 3-8 Screen W22 Field Entries (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-21 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Step 7: Setting up the Official Transcript Request Options Use the following screens to set up the Official Transcript Request options: • Official Transcript Request 1 (W23) • Official Transcript Request 2 (W24) Official Transcript Request 1 (W23) Screen Options Use the Official Transcript Request 1 Screen (W23) to set the fees for official transcript requests. Figure 3-7 Official Transcript Request 1 Screen (W23) The following table lists the Official Transcript Request 1 Screen (W23) field entries for up to two transcript fees. Field Description Transcript Fees 1 & 2 Title Specify the fee title that is to appear on the Official Transcript Request page: H S T Type Handling Service Transcript Specify the type of transcript fee: N FC FR GC GR No fee (any specified fees are ignored) Charge a flat fee per transcript copy Charge flat fee per transcript request Charge a graduated fee per transcript copy Charge a graduated fee per transcript request Table 3-9 Screen W23 Field Entries 3-22 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Field Description Fees: Amount 1-5 Specify the dollar amount for the transcript fee. • If you are charging a flat fee (Type=FC or FR), only enter one fee amount. • If you are charging graduated fees, enter up to 5 fee amounts. Limit 1-5 If you are charging graduated fees and you’ve specified a corresponding Amount, enter the maximum number of transcript copies or transcript requests (depending on the Fee Type of GC or GR) to be charged the corresponding Amount. Graduated Fee Per Copy Only: Count Date If you set Transcript Fee Type=GC (graduated fee per copy), specify the date from which transcript requests are to be counted: A Start counting transcript requests from the beginning of the academic year. You must then specify the Academic Unit. L Count transcript requests over the student’s lifetime. T Start counting transcript requests from the beginning of the term. You must then specify the Academic Unit. C Start counting transcript requests from the beginning of the calendar year. D Start counting transcript requests from the specified Date. If you set Transcript Fee Type=GC (graduated fee per copy) and Count=D, specify the beginning date for counting transcript requests. Academic Unit If you set the Transcript Fee Type=GC and Count=A or T, specify which academic unit is to be used to determine the academic unit or term start date from which transcript copies are to be counted. C D M L A Main Campus Dental School Medical School Law Center Administrative If you do not specify the academic unit, the system will use the academic unit associated with the student’s most recent career at the time the transcript request was made. Table 3-9 Screen W23 Field Entries (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-23 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Official Transcript Request 2 (W24) Screen Options Use the Official Transcript Request 2 Screen (W24) to set up the delivery charges for sending official transcript requests. Figure 3-8 Official Transcript Request 2 Screen (W24) The following table lists the Official Transcript Request 2 Screen (W24) field entries. Field Delivery Fee Charged Description Specify whether delivery fees are to be charged for transcript requests. Y N Charge delivery fees for transcript requests. Do not charge delivery fees for transcript requests. For up to 5 Delivery Fees Mode Specify the type of delivery that students can select for receiving their transcripts. F O 2 C Type Specify whether the delivery fee is to be charged per transcript copy or transcript request. C R Amt First Class Mail Overnight Express 2-Day Priority Certified Mail Charge the delivery fee per transcript copy. Charge the delivery fee per transcript request. Specify the dollar amount to be charged for delivery of the transcript. Table 3-10 Screen W24 Field Entries 3-24 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Field Description Credit Card Payments Default Subcode The default payment subcode (greater than 00102) used to identify credit card payments for transcripts. This subcode is only used when Credit Card Usage=B or D. Visa Subcode The payment subcode (greater than 00102) used to identify Visa credit card payments for transcripts. This subcode is only used when Credit Card Usage=C or D. MasterCard Subcode The payment subcode (greater than 00102) used to identify Mastercard credit card payments for transcripts. This subcode is only used when Credit Card Usage=C or D. American Express Subcode The payment subcode (greater than 00102) used to identify American Express credit card payments for transcripts. This subcode is only used when Credit Card Usage=C or D. Discover Subcode The payment subcode (greater than 00102) used to identify Discover Card credit card payments made for transcripts. This subcode is only used when Credit Card Usage=C or D. Other Credit The payment subcode (greater than 00102) used to identify credit Card Subcode card payments (other than Visa, Mastercard, AMerican Express, or Discover Card) made for transcripts. This subcode is only used when Credit Card Usage=C or D. Credit Card Usage Specify how the credit card subcodes are to be used for payments for transcripts: B Use the Default Subcode for all credit card types (and disregard any subcodes entered for individual credit card types). C Only allow use of credit cards for which subcodes have been specified. This option allows you to restrict the types of credit cards used to make payments for transcripts. If your institution does not accept a particular credit card, do not specify a subcode for this credit card type. D Use the subcodes that have been specified for the various credit card types (default). Use the Default Subcode when an individual credit card subcode is not provided. This option allows you to accept all credit card types without specifying a subcode for each one. Table 3-10 Screen W24 Field Entries (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-25 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Field Default Academic Unit Description Specify the academic unit to be used to determine the billing term for transcript requests dated outside the current term. When paying for transcripts with a credit card, the system will try to determine the current term by first retrieving the academic unit from the student’s most recent term record. The system will then search the session calendar to find the most recent term for that academic unit. If the date on the transcript request falls between the term begin and end dates, that term will be used for the credit card payment. If, however, the date on the transcript request does not fall between the term begin and end dates, the system will use the default academic unit to determine the billing term. C D M L A Main Campus Dental School Medical School Law Center Administrative Table 3-10 Screen W24 Field Entries (continued) Step 8: Setting up the Additional Services Options Use the following screens to set up the Additional Services options: • Additional Services - Groups (W27) • Additional Services - Group Title/Description (W28) • Additional Services - Fee Codes (W29) You can also use the following screens to view lists of the current groups and fee codes: • Additional Services - Group Query (W50) • Additional Services - Fee Code Query (W51) Additional Services - Groups (W27) Screen Options Use the Additional Services - Groups Screen (W27) to set up a group of additional services (e.g., parking permit, board, meal plan, insurance) for a specified term. 3-26 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Figure 3-9 Additional Services - Groups Screen (W27) The following table lists the Additional Services - Groups Screen (W27) field entries. Field Group Description Specify a 3-character name for the group of additional services. • The first character MUST either be M (if it is mandatory that students make a selection from this group) or O (if choosing services from this group is optional). • The remaining two characters may be any combination of alphanumeric characters in order to create a unique group code for the specified term. On the Additional Services page, the mandatory groups will be displayed first and the second and third characters that make up each group code will determine the sort order of the mandatory and optional groups (e.g., 01, 02, AA, A1, BB, B1). For each group you define on Screen W27, you should also specify a title and a description on Screen W28. First/Last Select Date If you are allowing students to make a selection from this group via the Web, specify the first and/or last dates within which they can select additional services from this group. The First Select Date should be on or before the Last Select Date. If you do not specify these dates, students will be able to select from this group for as long as the specified term is available via the Web. Table 3-11 Screen W27 Field Entries SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-27 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Field Last Deselect Date Description The last date (within the First/Last Select Date range) on which students can change their selection of services from this group via the Web. • If defined, the Last Deselect Date must be on or before the Last Select Date. • If not defined (or is the same date as the First Select Date), a student will not be able to deselect a service once a selection has been made. First Display Date The first date on which the specified additional services group should be displayed on the Additional Services page. • If the group is available for selection via the Web and the First Select Date is defined, the First Display Date must be on or before the First Select Date. • If you do not set the First Display Date, the group will be displayed on the Additional Services page for as long as the specified term is available via the Web. Type Select Fees Specify which type of services are in this group. This value will determine which fields will be updated on Screen 431 and the number of fees a student may select from this group. P I B M S Deferred Payment Plan (single-selection fees set on TDP) Insurance Plan (single-selection fees set on TOP) Board Plan (single-selection fees set on TBD) Other Multiple-selection Optional Fees (set on TOP) Other Single-selection Optional Fees (set on TOP) Y Students may select from this group via the Web (default). N Students may not select from this group via the Web. Students can only view information about the additional services in the group and then make their selection in person. Your school administrators would then enter the student’s selection on Screen 431. The group will be displayed from the First Display Date (if defined), or for as long as the specified term is available via the Web. If you set Select to N, DO NOT specify any dates other than the First Display Date. Enter the 2-character code for each service (up to 15) to be included in the additional services group (e.g., 24 - Student ID Card, 31 Parking Garage Permit). • You can only list fee codes that are valid for the specified group Type. • You must list at least one fee code for an Optional group. • You must list at least two fee codes for a Mandatory group. For each fee code you list on Screen W27, you must also enter a description on Screen W29. Table 3-11 Screen W27 Field Entries (continued) 3-28 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Field Description Include/ Exclude Specify which students should be included/excluded from selecting additional services for the group and term, based on academic unit and other academic attributes. When including/excluding student populations for a services group, make sure that a student is not valid for more than one service group of the same type. You do not want to display multiple groups for the same type of service on the Additional Services page for the student. For example, if you exclude all students except for Seniors for one service group and create a similar service group for all other students but forget to exclude seniors, the service group will be displayed twice for seniors. Note: Since Classification is not calculated until the student is initialized in the matriculation entry term (via activity on a term-specific screen, such as119, 111, or registration), transfer students could be omitted from the group when Classification is used as a delimiter. Copy To Term/Group If you want to copy the information for this group to another group in the same term or the same group in a different term, specify that Term and Group. The first character of the Copy To Group must be M (if it is mandatory that students make a selection) or O (if students have the option to select services). Table 3-11 Screen W27 Field Entries (continued) Additional Services - Group Title/Description (W28) Screen Options Use the Additional Services - Group Title/Description Screen (W28) to specify a title and description for a group of additional services, as it should be displayed on the Web. Figure 3-10 Additional Services - Group Title/Description Screen (W28) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-29 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access The following table lists the Additional Services - Group Title/ Description Screen (W28) field entries. Field Description Group Specify a 3-character name for the group of additional services. The first character MUST either be M (if it is mandatory that students make a selection from this group) or O (if choosing services from this group is optional). Title Specify the title (up to 30 characters) for the additional services group. This title will be displayed above the list of group services on the Additional Services page. Description Specify the description for the additional services group. This description will be displayed between the group title and the list of group services on the Additional Services page. The Description is very important for display of the group, since it should provide information about selecting/viewing the group. For example: • If a group is display only, you should use the description to tell students that they can view the information to help make their selection and then tell them how to inform your institution of their selection (e.g., go to your administrative office by a certain date to make their selection). • The system will use the Select and Deselect dates you have specified for the group to display auto-generated text which informs students when they can select options, if they cannot change their selection after a certain date, or if they can view the choices now and then come back after a specified date to make their selection. Specify any other information that students should know in order to make a selection from this group. Copy To Term/Group If you want to copy the title and description for this group to another group and/or term, specify that Term and Group. The first character of the Copy To Group must be M (if it is mandatory that students make a selection) or O (if students have the option to select services). Table 3-12 Screen W28 Field Entries 3-30 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Additional Services - Fee Codes (W29) Screen Options Use the Additional Services - Fee Codes Screen (W29) to specify a description for an additional service (fee code), as it should be displayed on the Additional Services page. Figure 3-11 Additional Services - Fee Codes Screen (W29) The following table lists the Optional Fees - Fee Codes Screen (W29) field entries. Field Description Description Enter a description for the specified fee code, as it should be displayed on the Additional Services page. The fee description should offer information (including the cost) that will help the student decide whether to select that fee, or provide details about a service that cannot be selected via the Web. Within the description, you can display a link to a document or another Website. To display a link, enter the text for the link within { } in the description. For example: Parking Permit - Main Lot. Refer to {Campus Map} for more information. Document If you display a link within the fee code Description, you MUST specify the location of the document (or the Website URL). • If you are providing a link to a document, the document file SHOULD be located in the WEBDOCS/FORMDOCS directory on your Web server. Specify the name of the file (e.g., CampusMap.pdf). • If you are displaying a link to a document that is not located in the WEBDOCS/FORMDOCS directory, specify the full pathname for the location of the document file. • If you are displaying a link to another Website, specify the URL address for the site (e.g., HTTP://www.mealplans.com or HTTPS://www.univplans.com). Copy To Term/Fee Code Specify the term and/or fee code to which you want to copy the information for this fee code. Table 3-13 Screen W29 Field Entries SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-31 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Additional Services - Group Query (W50) Screen Options Use the Additional Services - Group Query Screen (W50) to view a list of all the additional services groups for the specified term, group, and/ or fee type; transfer to screen W27 to view more details about a group, copy a group to a new group and/or term, and delete a group. You can copy (or delete) more than one group at a time. Figure 3-12 Additional Services - Group Query (W50) screen Additional Services - Fee Code Query (W51) Screen Options Use the Additional Services - Group Query Screen (W51) to view a list of all fee codes for the specified term and/or fee code; transfer to Screen W29 to view more details about a fee code, copy a fee code to a new fee code and/or term, or delete a fee code. You can copy (or delete) more than one fee at a time. Figure 3-13 Additional Services - Fee Code Query (W51) screen 3-32 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Step 9: Setting up Web Registration Options Use the following screens to set up the Student Records options: • Web Registration Access Groups (W03) • Registration and Schedule 1 (W25) Web Registration Access Groups (W03) Screen Options Use the Web Registration Access Groups Screen (W03) to designate specific registration conditions and to specify who registers and when. Figure 3-14 Web Registration Access Groups Screen (W03) You must define records for each term in which Web registration is available. The following table lists information about the first set of fields on Screen W03 that you can change. Field Term Value Format YYT Description Specify the term for which the Web Access Group applies. For example, 02S for Spring 2002. Table 3-14 Screen W03 Field Entries SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-33 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Field Priority Code Value Format 0001 to 9999 Description When defining more than one access group for the term, specify a Priority Code for each access group. Set up your access groups from most specific (with the most restrictive set of conditions) to least specific, and use Priority Code 0001 for the most specific group. If a student does not qualify under Priority Code 0001, the system will see if the student meets the criteria set for the next Priority Code(s) defined for the term. If a student does not match the criteria for any of the Priority Codes, the student will not be able to access registration via the Web for the specified term. Begin/End MM-DD-CCYY You may restrict access for a range of dates, and for a Date range of hours within those dates. Begin/End HHMMXX Hour For example, if you set Begin Date to 06-01-2003, End Date to 09-06-2003, Begin Hour to 0800AM and End Hour to 0430PM, students who meet the access group criteria could access registration via the Web between 8:00 in the morning and 4:30 in the afternoon each day from June 1, 2003 until September 6, 2003. If you do not specify an hour begin and end point, the system assumes the entire date range, all hours, for the specified restriction. Table 3-14 Screen W03 Field Entries (continued) Multiple records can be defined for date and time ranges. The system checks the restriction criteria against the student’s record. If no match is found, the system checks the next control record. This continues until either the student matches the criteria, or the date and time range is no longer valid (no match). 3-34 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Because the system processes the table in priority code sequence, restriction conditions should be listed from most specific to least specific. The system assumes blank date and hour fields to be a match. So, for example, if the first entry specified was 03F for term, with no dates specified, and the second entry was for term 03F with specified dates 04-01-03 to 04-05-03, the system would process the first record, because the term 03F and current date would make a match. The system would not continue to process the second, more specific entry unless the student did not match the criteria on the first record. You can use the Student Selection Criteria section of Screen W03 to specify which students can access registration via the Web for the specified time period, as follows: Value Format Field Last Name Begin/End X (3) Description You can specify a range of last names as a registration condition. For example, you may designate that only students whose last names begin with the letter range A to F may register, which would include all students whose last names begin with the letters A, B, C, D, E, and F. If these entries are left blank, the application uses the start and end of the alphabet as default entries. User Access Numbers Begin/End 9999999 You can specify a range of access numbers as a registration condition. For example, you may designate that only students whose access numbers fall within the numeric range 0000001 to 0000100 may register. Classification Begin/End Hours 9999.99 You can specify a range of classification hours as a registration condition. For example, you may designate that only students with classification hours within the range 1.00 - 99.0 may register during the designated time frame. Table 3-15 Web Registration - Student Selection Criteria SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-35 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access You can more clearly define the group of students who can access registration via the Web for the specified term by setting academic Group Delimiters. Specify the value for each Group Delimiter and whether each Group Delimiter is to be Included in, or Excluded from, the access group, as described in the following table. Value Format Field Description Academic Unit X Up to five Academic Units can be included or excluded. Level X Up to five Levels can be included or excluded. Classification X (3) Up to five Classifications can be included or excluded. Note: Because Classification is not calculated until the student is initialized in the matriculation entry term (via activity on a term-specific screen, such as 119, 111, or registration), transfer students could be denied access when Classification is used as a delimiter. Major X (4) Up to five Majors can be included or excluded. College X (3) Up to five Colleges can be included or excluded. Degree X (4) Up to five Degrees can be included or excluded. Department X (4) Up to five Departments can be included or excluded. Honors X (2) Up to five Honors can be included or excluded. Special Programs X (3) Up to five Special Programs can be included or excluded. Table 3-16 Web Registration - Access Group Delimiters You can also copy the information for the specified Term and Priority Code to another. Specify the Copy To Term and Priority Code and press ENTER. 3-36 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Registration and Schedule 1 (W25) Screen Options Use the Registration and Schedule 1 Screen (W25) to define the settings for the Registration, Student Schedule, Detailed Schedule, and Registration Status options. Figure 3-15 Registration and Schedule 1 Screen (W25) The following table lists the Registration and Schedule 1 Screen (W25) field entries. Field Description Registration Drop/Add Classes, Conditional Drop/Add, and Change Class Options: Name Term Status Specify whether the Student Name is to be displayed on the Registration Web pages. Y Display the student name on the Drop/Add Classes, Change Class Options, and Conditional Drop/Add pages. N Do not display the student name on the Drop/Add Classes, Change Class Options, and Conditional Drop/Add pages. Define up to five types of status a term can be in order to allow students to access the Drop/Add Classes, Conditional Drop/Add, and Change Class Options pages. G H P R S Grading History Pre-registration Registration Scheduling Table 3-17 Screen W25 Field Entries SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-37 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Field Description Change Class Options: Grade Types Specify up to five Grade Types which can be selected on the Change Class Options page. Valid values are the same as those for Grade Type (RT310). Normal grade rules. Students receive earned hours, quality hours, and quality points based on the grade received. AU Audit. No earned hours, quality hours or quality points received regardless of the grade submitted. CN Credit/No Credit. This is used for consortium. FT Full-Time Registration. Force the student to full-time status. NG Non-graded. Same effect as audit, except no grade is expected. PF Pass/Fail. Earned hours received based on the grade submitted. GPA is not affected. PT Part-Time Registration. Force the student to part-time status. RI Repeat (included in GPA). Remove the effect of a repeated course from earned hours only. The original grade is included in the GPA calculation. RX Repeat (excluded from GPA). Remove the effect of a repeated course from earned hours and GPA. SU Satisfactory/Unsatisfactory. Usually used with non-credit courses. XC Exclude Credit. Eliminate all credit for the course, both earned hours and GPA data. XE Exclude Earned Hours. Eliminate earned hours only. XG Exclude GPA data. Eliminate GPA data only. Table 3-17 Screen W25 Field Entries 3-38 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Field Description Student Schedule Name Time Increment Specify whether the Student Name is to be displayed on the Student Schedule. Y Student name is displayed on the screen for Web and Kiosk, and printed on the student schedule for Kiosk. P For Kiosk, student name is not displayed on the screen, but is printed on the student schedule. For Web, the name is displayed. N Student name is not displayed on the screen for Web and Kiosk, and not printed on the student schedule for Kiosk. Specify the time increment by which the Student Schedule is to be divided. Specify an increment of either 15 (default), 30, or 60 minutes. Detailed Schedule Name Specify whether the Student Name is to be displayed on the Detailed Schedule. Y Student name is displayed on the screen for Web and Kiosk, and printed on the student schedule for Kiosk. P For Kiosk, student name is not displayed on the screen, but is printed on the student schedule. For Web, the name is displayed. N Student name is not displayed on the screen for Web and Kiosk, and not printed on the student schedule for Kiosk. Registration Status Name Specify whether the Student Name is to be displayed on the Registration Status page. Y Display the student name on the Registration Status page. N Do not display the student name on the Registration Status page. Table 3-17 Screen W25 Field Entries SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-39 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Step 10: Setting up the Web Admissions System Options Use the following screens to set up the Admissions options: • Web Admissions System Options (WA2) • Web Required Admissions Pages (W04) • Web Admissions Page Display Options (W05) • Web Admissions Application Type/Term (W06) Web Admissions System Options (WA2) Screen Use the Web Admissions System Options Screen (WA2) to set up the login, display, and payment options for the Admissions feature. Figure 3-16 Web Admissions System Options Screen (WA2) The following table lists the Web Admissions System Options Screen (WA2) field entries that you can change. Field Description Login Options Generate SID Specify whether you want the system to generate an ID for any applicant who does not enter a Social Security Number on the Admissions Login page. Y Automatically generate IDs (default) N Do not generate IDs Table 3-18 Screen WA2 Field Entries 3-40 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Field Description Allow Web PIN Creation Specify whether you want the system to allow an applicant with a SID but no PIN on file to create a PIN. N Do not allow PIN creation by applicants who do not already have a PIN on file. Y Allow applicants who do not have a PIN to create a PIN (default). Then specify the weights for using the information the applicant enters on the Web to verify his/her identity before creating the PIN. If you allow Web PIN creation, set these weights: (If a weight is set at 0, the applicant will not be prompted to enter that information.) Name Specify a number from 0 to 9 for the weight to be assigned to the applicant’s name when verifying the applicant’s identity. Date of Birth Specify a number from 0 to 9 for the weight to be assigned to the applicant’s date of birth when verifying the applicant’s identity. Gender Specify a number from 0 to 9 for the weight to be assigned to the applicant’s gender when verifying the applicant’s identity. Perm Address Line 1 Specify a number from 0 to 9 for the weight to be assigned to the applicant’s first line of his/her permanent address when verifying the applicant’s identity. Perm Addr City/Postal Code Specify a number from 0 to 9 for the weight to be assigned to the applicant’s city and postal code of his/her permanent address when verifying the applicant’s identity. Perm Address Phone Specify a number from 0 to 9 for the weight to be assigned to the applicant’s phone number of his/her permanent address when verifying the applicant’s identity. Minimum Weight Value Specify the minimum weight (between 0 and 99) for applicants to be considered a near match in verifying their identity. Make sure the Min Value does not exceed the sum of the weighted field values (for Full Name, Gender, Perm Address Line 1, Perm City/Postal Code, and Perm Phone) or the Max Value. Maximum Weight Value If no exact match for the applicant is found in the system, the Max Value (between 0 and 99) will specify the weight necessary for the system to consider a near match as an exact match. The Max Value should not exceed the sum of the weighted values (for Full Name, Gender, Perm Address Line 1, Perm City/Postal Code, and Perm Phone) or be less than the specified Min Value. Table 3-18 Screen WA2 Field Entries (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-41 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Field Description Date of Birth Match Required Specify whether the applicant’s Date of Birth must match what is already on file. N The Date of Birth the applicant enters on the Web does not need to match what is on file (default). R Gender Match Required The Date of Birth the applicant enters on the Web must match what is on file. Specify whether the applicant’s Gender must match what is already on file. N The Gender the applicant enters on the Web does not need to match what is on file (default). R The Gender the applicant enters on the Web must match what is on file. Display Options Default State Code Specify the 2-character code for the state in which your institution is located. The name of the state will be listed first in the State list boxes. Def State Literal Specify the name of the state in which your institution is located. This value is displayed in the Are you a legal resident of [State] question on the Enrollment Intentions page. Default Country Code Specify the 2-character code for the country in which your institution is located. The name of the country will be listed first in the Country list boxes. Display Deadlines Specify whether you want to display application deadlines on the Completing Your Application and Review Application pages. Y Display application deadline dates (default). N Do not display application deadline dates. Payment Options Calculate/ Display Appl Fee Specify whether you want the system to calculate and display the Application Fee when an applicant reviews his/her application, submits an application, and pays an application fee. N Do not calculate and display the Application Fee. Only set this option to N if you are going to customize the system in order to calculate and display your fees. Y Calculate and display the Application Fee (default). When this option is set to Y, you must set the other Payment Options listed below. Table 3-18 Screen WA2 Field Entries (continued) 3-42 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Field Description Appl Fee Payment Term Specify the term (in format YYT) to which application fees should be applied if fees should not be applied to the first term the applicant is to attend your institution. Initial Fee Status Specify whether to charge a fee if no fee is specified for an application Type. R Charge a flat rate N No fee required Require Fee Before Submission Specify whether your institution requires applicants to pay their application fees before submitting their applications. Y Require applicants to pay their application fees before submitting their applications. This option is only available if you are using the TouchNet Gateway Credit Card payment processing. N Do not require application fees to be paid before submission (default). Def Appl FeesRes Specify the 3-digit default application fee for residents of your state (e.g., 025 for $25). Def Appl FeesNon-Res Specify the 3-digit default application fee for applicants who do not reside in your state (e.g., 050 for $50). Credit Card Types Allowed Specify the 1-character code for up to 5 credit card types that can be accepted by your institution. The names of the accepted credit cards will be displayed on the Review Application, Application Fee Payment, and Credit Card Payment pages to inform applicants of their payment options. A D M V O American Express Discover Card Master Card Visa Other Table 3-18 Screen WA2 Field Entries (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-43 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Web Required Admissions Pages Screen (W04) Use the Web Required Admissions Pages Screen (W04) to define the types of applications accepted by your institution via the Web, and to select (for each application type) some of the fields to be displayed and the sections of the application that an applicant must complete. Figure 3-17 Web Required Admissions Pages Screen (W04) You must define the Level and Rule for each application type. Also determine whether certain fields are to be displayed on applications for the specified application type. Select the Web pages to be displayed (Personal Information, High School History, College History, Residency/Citizenship, Personal References, Employment History, and/or Client Requirements) for a particular application type. You can also specify whether the Emergency Contact section should be displayed on the Personal Information page, and whether the Previous Address section should be displayed on the Residency/Citizenship page. 3-44 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Refer to the following table for information about the fields on the Web Required Admissions Pages Screen (W04). Field Description Application Type Define each type of student application that can be accepted via the Web. For each application type, enter a valid 1-character code according to your values for DBD element AC29E (e.g., Freshman, Graduate). The specified value will be used to determine the Fee Type (MM508) for the application, if your institution sets Calculation/Display Appl Fee to Y on Screen WA2 (Web Admissions System Options) to have the system calculate and display the application fee. Level Links a Web application type to a specific career level. Enter a valid 1-character code for the level according to your values for DBD element AC29T (e.g., Undergraduate, Graduate). Prospective students will then be able to select from programs with the same level (as set on Screen 134, with Web=Y). Address/Phone Specify which set of information (phone number, e-mail address, Number and mailing address) defined in the ACINPM copybook is to be displayed for the Admissions Office in the text on the Web pages for the specified Application Type. Up to three sets of Admissions Office information will be defined in the ACINPM copybook. Here are two sample sets: 1 Undergraduate Admissions office 2 Graduate Admissions office 3 International Admissions office 1 Two-Year Degree Admissions office 2 Four-Year Degree Admissions office 3 Continuing Education Admissions office Note: The name, e-mail address, and phone number of each of these offices must be defined for DBD element AC29M. Rule Links the Web application to a specific admissions rule. Enter a valid 1- or 2-character code for the rule according to your values for DBD element AC29U (e.g., Dentistry, Freshman, Law). Note: The Rule must be defined on the Admission Requirement Rules (MRR) Screen. Perform Auto-Admit Specify N if your institution does not want to execute auto-admit processing when an applicant submits the specified application type and fulfills all of the admission requirements. (Default is Y.) Table 3-19 Screen W04 Field Entries SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-45 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Field Description Early Decision Specify whether your institution wants to display the question Do you want to be considered for early decision on the Enrollment Intentions page. Y R N Default Housing Val Display the Early Decision question as optional. Display the Early Decision question as required. Do not display the Early Decision question (default). Specify the default value for applicants’ housing intentions to be displayed on the Enrollment Intentions page. This field is used to set a housing intention for a particular Application Type, which may not be changed by an applicant. For example, if your institution requires that all freshmen live on campus, you could set this field to O (on-campus housing). Then, On-campus housing required will be displayed as the housing intention on the Enrollment Intentions page. C H O R U Alternate Major Specify whether your institution wants to display the Alternate Major field on the Select Major page. Y R N Minor Display Intended Minor as an optional field (default). Display Intended Minor as a required field. Do not display the Intended Minor field. Specify whether your institution wants to display the question Will you be attending as a full-time or part-time student on the Enrollment Intentions page. Y R N Special Program Display Alternate Major as an optional field (default). Display Alternate Major as a required field. Do not display the Alternate Major field. Specify whether your institution wants to display the Intended Minor field on the Enrollment Intentions page. Y R N Full/Part-time Not specified (default) Commute from off-campus housing Live at home On-campus housing On-campus housing required Unknown Display the full/part-time question as optional (default). Display the full/part-time question as required. Do not display the full/part-time question. Specify whether your institution wants to display the Special Program field on the Enrollment Intentions page. Y R N Display Special Program as an optional field (default). Display Special Program as a required field. Do not display the Special Program field. Table 3-19 Screen W04 Field Entries (continued) 3-46 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Field Description Personal Information Page Specify whether your institution requires that all applicants (for the specified application type) complete the Personal Information page for their admissions application. Y N Emergency Contact Display the Personal Information page. Do not display the Personal Information page. If your institution requires that all applicants (for the specified application type) complete the Personal Information page, specify whether you want to display (and require them to complete) the Emergency Contact section on this Web page. Y N High School History Page Display the Emergency Contact section. Do not display the Emergency Contact section. Specify whether your institution requires that all applicants (for the specified application type) complete the High School History page for their admissions application. On the High School History page, applicants will enter information about the high school(s) they’ve attended and/or indicate if they’ve been home schooled, or received a GED. Y N College History Page Display the High School History page. Do not display the High School History page. Specify whether your institution requires that all applicants (for the specified application type) complete the College History page for their admissions application. On the College History page, applicants will either enter information about the colleges they’ve attended, or specify that they have not taken any college courses. Y N Residency/ Citizenship Page Display the College History page. Do not display the College History page. Specify whether your institution requires that all applicants (for the specified application type) complete the Residency/Citizenship page for their admissions application. Y N Previous Address Display the Residency/Citizenship page. Do not display the Residency/Citizenship page. If your institution requires that all applicants (for the specified application type) complete the Residency/Citizenship page, specify whether you want to display the Previous Address Information section on this Web page. Y N Display the Previous Address section. Do not display the Previous Address section. Table 3-19 Screen W04 Field Entries (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-47 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Field Personal References/ Number Employment History Description Specify whether your institution requires that all applicants (for the specified application type) complete the Personal References page for their admissions application. Y Display the Personal References page. Then specify the number of personal references that each applicant is required to provide (up to 3). N Do not display the Personal References page. Specify whether your institution requires that all applicants (for the specified application type) complete the Employment History page for their admissions application. Y N Client Requirements Specify whether your institution requires that all applicants (for the specified application type) complete the Client Requirements page that you have created. Y N Page Name Display the Employment History page. Do not display the Employment History page. Display the Client Requirements page. Do not display the Client Requirements page. If your institution requires that all applicants (for the specified application type) complete the Client Requirements page that you have created, specify the name of the page for your reference. The name may consist of up to 26 characters and will be displayed on two lines. Table 3-19 Screen W04 Field Entries (continued) 3-48 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Web Admissions Page Display Options (W05) Use the Web Admissions Page Display Options Screen (W05) to specify which optional fields are to be displayed on the Enrollment Intentions, Personal Information, and Residency/Citizenship pages, and the high school and address type preferences. Figure 3-18 Web Admissions Page Display Options Screen (W05) Refer to the following table for information about the fields on the Web Admissions Page Display Options Screen (W05). Field Description Enrollment Intentions Display ADM Link Specify whether you want to display a link to your institution’s Web page, that lists your admissions policies and the programs being offered, on the series of Enrollment Intentions pages. Y Display a link to your institution’s Web page on the series of Enrollment Intentions pages (default). Note: You will specify the name (AdmInfoPage^) and URL (AdmInfoPgURL^) for your institution’s Web page in the TSRVWEB.INI file in “Step 20: Updating InstitutionSpecific Settings in TSRVWEB.INI” on page 3-76. If you display this link, you must provide a link back to Student Self-Service: Admissions from your institution’s Web page. When applicants return to Student Self-Service: Admissions, they will have to log in again. Then, depending on whether they have applications on file or not, they will be guided to the appropriate Admissions Web page. N Do not display a link to your institution’s Web page on the series of Enrollment Intentions pages. Table 3-20 Screen W05 Field Entries SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-49 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Field Residency Status Description Specify whether your institution wants to display the question Are you a legal resident of [default state literal]? on the Enrollment Intentions page. Y Display the resident? question as optional (default). R Display the resident? question as required. N Do not display the resident? question. Fin Aid Intentions Specify whether your institution wants to display the question Do you plan to apply for financial aid? on the Enrollment Intentions page. Y Display the fin aid? question as optional (default). R Display the fin aid? question as required. N Do not display the fin aid? question. Prev Attendance Specify whether your institution wants to display the question Have you previously attended this university? on the Enrollment Intentions page. Y Display the attended? question as optional (default). R Display the attended? question as required. N Do not display the attended? question. Prev Applied Specify whether your institution wants to display the question Have you previously applied for admission to this university? on the Enrollment Intentions page. Y Display the applied? question as optional (default). R Display the applied? question as required. N Do not display the applied? question. Housing Intentions Specify whether your institution wants to display the question Where do you plan to live while attending this university? on the Enrollment Intentions page. Y Display the plan to live? question as optional (default). R Display the plan to live? question as required. N Do not display the plan to live? question. Personal Information Nickname Specify whether your institution wants to display the Enter your preferred nickname field on the Personal Information page. Y Display the nickname field as optional (default). N Do not display the nickname field. Gender Specify whether your institution wants to display the Gender field on the Personal Information page. Y Display the Gender field as optional (default). R Display the Gender field as required. N Do not display the Gender field. Table 3-20 Screen W05 Field Entries (continued) 3-50 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Field Birth Date Description Specify whether your institution wants to display the Date of Birth field on the Personal Information page. Y Display the Date of Birth field as optional (default). R Display the Date of Birth field as required. N Do not display the Date of Birth field. Marital Status Specify whether your institution wants to display the Marital Status field on the Personal Information page. Y Display the Marital Status field as optional (default). R Display the Marital Status field as required. N Do not display the Marital Status field. Selective Service Specify whether your institution wants to display the Selective Service Status field on the Personal Information page. Y Display the Selective Service field as optional (default). R Display the Selective Service field as required. N Do not display the Selective Service field. Veteran Status Specify whether your institution wants to display the Veteran Status field on the Personal Information page. Y Display the Veteran Status field as optional (default). R Display the Veteran Status field as required. N Do not display the Veteran Status field. Disability Specify whether your institution wants to display the Disability Type field on the Personal Information page. Y Display the Disability Type field as optional (default). R Display the Disability Type field as required. N Do not display the Disability Type field. Religion Specify whether your institution wants to display the Religion field on the Personal Information page. Y Display the Religion field as optional (default). R Display the Religion field as required. N Do not display the Religion field. Ethnicity Specify whether your institution wants to display the Ethnicity field on the Personal Information page. Y Display the Ethnicity field as optional (default). R Display the Ethnicity field as required. N Do not display the Ethnicity field. Table 3-20 Screen W05 Field Entries (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-51 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Field Description Criminal Specify whether your institution wants to display the question Have Convictions you ever been convicted of a felony? on the Personal Information page. Y Display the convicted? question as optional (default). R Display the convicted? question as required. N Do not display the convicted? question. Residency/Citizenship ResidenceBirth Specify whether your institution wants to display the Residency at Birth fields (county, state, and country of birth) on the Residency/ Citizenship page. Y Display Residency at Birth fields as optional (default). R Display Residency at Birth fields as required. N Do not display Residency at Birth fields. ResidenceOrigin Specify whether your institution wants to display the Residency at First Admission - Origin Information fields (county, state, and country of origin) on the Residency/Citizenship page. Y Display Origin fields as optional (default). R Display Origin fields as required. N Do not display Origin fields. State Legal Res Specify whether your institution wants to display the questions In what state is your legal residence? and How long have you lived at your legal residence? on the Residency/Citizenship page. Y Display the residence? questions as optional (default). R Display the residence? questions as required. N Do not display the residence? questions. High School Home Schooled Code Specify the 7-digit number to be used as the school code on the High School History page for applicants who have been home schooled. GED Code Specify the 7-digit number to be used as the school code on the High School History page for applicants who have earned a GED. Table 3-20 Screen W05 Field Entries (continued) 3-52 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Field Description Address Types When specifying which address to use for the permanent, temporary, emergency contact, previous legal, and prior legal addresses for your applicants, you may select any address type defined at your institution. The following address types are defined in the SIS base system: B C E G K L M Billing Emergency Contact 2 Emergency Contact 1 Grades Next of kin/Guardian 2 Local Temporary N P S T U 1 2 Next of kin/Guardian 1 Permanent Special Tax (W-9S) User Most recent previous legal residence Prior legal residence Permanent Specify the address type to be assigned to the Permanent Address applicants enter when they create their accounts or update their Permanent Address on the Personal Information page. (The Permanent address is the default.) Temporary Specify the address type to be assigned to the Temporary Address applicants enter on the Personal Information page. (The Temporary address is the default.) Emergency Contact Specify the address type to be assigned to the Emergency Contact Address applicants enter on the Personal Information page. (The Emergency Contact 1 address is the default.) Previous Legal Specify the address type to be assigned to the Previous Legal Address applicants enter on the Residency/Citizenship page. (The Most recent previous legal residence is the default.) Prior Legal Specify the address type to be assigned to the Prior Legal Address applicants enter on the Residency/Citizenship page. (The Prior legal residence is the default.) Table 3-20 Screen W05 Field Entries (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-53 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Web Application Type/Term Options Use the Web Admissions Application Type/Term Options Screen (W06) to define the application fee information, credit card subcodes, and deadlines for each application type, term, and academic unit. Figure 3-19 Web Admissions Application Type/Term Options Screen (W06) Refer to the following table for information about the fields on the Web Admissions Application Type/Term Options Screen (W06). Field Description Application Fee Calculations If you want to display different application fee amounts based on Application Type on the Review Application and Submit Application pages, specify the information for the Application Fee Calculations on this screen. If you do not enter fee information on this screen, the system will use the fee amounts specified on Screen WA2 (Web Admissions System Options). Initial Fee Status Value Specify whether applicants must pay an application fee for the selected application type. N No application fee for this application type. R Charge flat rate for all applications of this application type. T Special fee for additional applications submitted for the same term. (If you set this value, you must specify the Multiple App Indicator and Multiple App Fee Value). W Fee waived for this application type. Application Fee - Specify the 3-digit application fee for residents who are Resident submitting this application type (e.g., enter 050 for $50 fee, enter 100 for $100 fee). (No default.) Table 3-21 Screen W06 Field Entries 3-54 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Field Description Application Fee - Specify the 3-digit application fee for non-residents who are Non-Resident submitting this application type (e.g., enter 075 for $75 fee, enter 125 for $125 fee). (No default.) The system will set this fee if you are not using residency to determine the application fee amount. Multiple App $/% Indicator If you set the Initial Fee Status Value to T, you must specify whether the amount entered for the Multiple Application Fee Value is a dollar amount or a percentage. $ Specified Multiple App Fee Value is a dollar amount. % Specified Multiple App Fee Value is a percentage. Multiple App Fee If you set the Initial Fee Status Value to T, you must specify Value the 3-digit dollar amount or the percentage of the full application fee amount to be charged an applicant for all applications submitted after the first application for the same term. (For example, enter 035 for $35 fee, enter 050 for 50% of full application fee). Credit Card Auto-Charge Subcodes Subcode You may have up to five Credit Card Types, so you must specify the auto-charge subcode for each Credit Card Type that can be used to submit applications of any type. Deadline Dates Only the deadline dates for which you specify values will be displayed on the application Web pages. Web Submission Deadline Specify the last date on which students can submit the specified type of Web application (required). This deadline overrides the Admissions App Update End date specified on Screen W01 (Web Term Calendar). Students can update and submit Web applications until the Web Submission Deadline for the specified application type, even if the Admissions App Update End date for the term is later. International Student Deadline Specify the deadline for submitting applications of the specified type by international students (optional). Early Decision Deadline Specify the deadline for submitting applications of the specified type in order to be considered for early admission (optional). Transfer Student Deadline Specify the deadline for submitting applications of the specified type by transfer students (optional). Financial Aid Deadline Specify the deadline for submitting applications of the specified type by students who will require financial aid (optional). Table 3-21 Screen W06 Field Entries (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-55 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Field Description Copy options to another Application Type, Term, and Academic Unit Instead of re-entering the same options for other application types, terms, and academic units, you can copy the options currently displayed on Screen W06. Copy to Appl Type Specify the 1-character code for the Application Type to which you want to copy the current options on Screen W06. The following is a list of the values in the SIS base system: F G P X Y Z Freshman Graduate Professional Transfer Undergraduate Transfer Graduate Transfer Professional Term Specify the Term to which you want to copy the current options on Screen W06. Enter the term in the format YYT, where YY identifies the calendar year and T represents the term within that calendar year (e.g., 03S for the Spring term in 2003). Acad Unit Specify the Academic Unit to which you want to copy the current options on Screen W06. C D M L A Main Campus Dental School Medical School Law Center Administrative Table 3-21 Screen W06 Field Entries (continued) 3-56 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Step 11: Setting the Financial Aid Options Use the following screens to set up the Financial Aid options: • Financial Aid 1 (W26) • Fund Attribute (331) • Tracking Messages (337) Financial Aid 1 Screen (W26) Use the Financial Aid 1 Screen (W26) to define the settings for the Accept Awards, Award Info By Year/Award History, Student Requirements, Cost of Attendance, Academic Progress, and Financial Aid Summary options. Figure 3-20 Financial Aid 1 Screen (W26) The following table lists the Financial Aid 1 Screen (W26) field entries that you can change. Field Description Available Award Years Specify up to 5 award years (in format CCYY) for which students can view their financial aid information on the Web. The order in which the award years are entered determines their order in the list box on the Select Award Year page. Award years are referenced and updated in ACFILE. Default Award Year Specify the default award year for the Financial Aid features of Student Self-Service. The default award year is usually set to the current year to save students from having to enter it each time they use Student SelfService to view/update their financial aid information. Table 3-22 Screen W26 Field Entries SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-57 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Field Description Accept Awards Name Specify whether the student name is to be displayed on the Accept Awards page. Y N Time Control Display student name on the Accept Awards page (default). Do not display student name on the Accept Awards page. Specify whether you want the system to calculate how much time each student has to accept/decline his/her awards. Y The system will calculate how much time each student has to accept/decline his/her awards, and will display a message to let the student know how many days are left to take action on his/her awards. If you specify this option, you must also set Number of Days to Take Action. N No date calculation will be performed to determine the number of days a student has to take action on his/her awards. The student will have an unlimited number of days to view and accept/decline his/her awards via the Accept Awards page (default). Number of Days to Take Action If you set Time Control to Y, you must set this option. Specify the number of days students have to take action on their awards. The system will calculate the last day it will accept a response by using the date the award letter is printed as the start date. Since there may be more than one Award Letter Print Date within an Award Year, the system will use the most recent Award Letter Print Date in its calculation. (Default is 0, the setting that must be used if you set Time Control to N.) Set Offered Amount to Accept Amount Specify whether the system should set the amount of the award that was offered to the partial award amount that was accepted by the student. N Do not set the offered amount to the accepted partial amount (default). The student will be able to change the amount of the award he/she wants to accept until the award is disbursed. Y Set the offered amount to the partial amount the student accepted. The award amount will be locked in so that the student cannot change it via the Web. Table 3-22 Screen W26 Field Entries (continued) 3-58 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Field Description Terms & Specify whether students must agree to your institution’s Terms and Conditions Conditions before accepting their awards. N Do not display a link to the Terms and Conditions on the Accept Awards and the Award Information by Year pages (default). Y Display a link to the Terms and Conditions on the Accept Awards and the Award Information by Year pages. Also display an acceptance checkbox on the Accept Awards page. When students select the link, the system will display a new window with a list of your award Terms and Conditions for students to read. You should update the text in sactermcond.htm with your institution’s Terms and Conditions. Students must select the checkbox on the Accept Awards page to signify that they accept the terms and conditions before the system will process their awards. The checkbox will remain on the page until the student has taken action on all his/her awards or the only action he/she can take is to decline awards. The date on which the student last accepted the terms and conditions will be displayed in the Term/Cond field on Screen 325 (Packaging) Financial Aid Summary Name Specify whether the student name is to be displayed on the Financial Aid Summary page. Y Display the student name on the Financial Aid Summary page (default). N Do not display the student name on the Financial Aid Summary page. Award Info By Year/Award History Name Specify whether the student name is to be displayed on the Award Information By Year and Award History pages. Y Display the student name on the Award Information By Year and Award History pages (default). N Do not display the student name on the Award Information By Year and Award History pages. Student Requirements Name Specify whether the student name is to be displayed on the Student Requirements page. Y N Display student name on the Student Requirements page (default). Do not display the student name on the Student Requirements page. Table 3-22 Screen W26 Field Entries (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-59 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Field Description Cost of Attendance Name Specify whether the student name is to be displayed on the Cost of Attendance page. Y N Display student name on the Cost of Attendance page (default). Do not display student name on the Cost of Attendance page. Academic Progress Name Specify whether the student name is to be displayed on the Academic Progress page. Y N Display student name on the Academic Progress page (default). Do not display student name on the Academic Progress page. Table 3-22 Screen W26 Field Entries (continued) Fund Attribute Screen (331) The Fund Attribute Screen (331) defines the characteristics, features, and controls for a financial aid fund. Figure 3-21 Fund Attribute Screen (331) 3-60 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Specify the following settings on Screen 331: Field Description Web Lend Specify whether a preferred lender list for this fund is to be displayed Sel on the Accept Awards page. N Do not display a preferred lender list for this fund on the Accept Awards page (default). 1-9 Display a preferred lender list for this fund on the Accept Awards page with the specified number of lenders. The student can select one of the lenders. If you set Web Lend Sel to a number, you MUST list at least the same number of preferred lenders (for DBD element SW073) for display in the preferred lender list box on the Accept Awards page. Number and list your Preferred Lenders with one space between the A# and the lender name, as follows: A1 Name of 1st Preferred Lender A2 Name of 2nd Preferred Lender . . . A9 Name of 9th Preferred Lender You must list all your other lenders for B1 to B9, C1 to C9, ... Z1 to Z9. These lenders will not be displayed in the preferred lender list box on the Accept Awards page. All your lenders must, however, be listed in the DBD in order for you to be able to offer awards for them. You must also enter a 2-digit translate length in positions 45 and 46 of the DE card for DBD element SW073. This will enable the system to translate the lender IDs to the names of the lenders. If you do not enter a translate length, the names of the lenders will not appear on the Accept Awards page. Table 3-23 Accept Awards Settings on Screen 331 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-61 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Field Web Acc/Rej Description In order to display award information for this fund on the Web so it can be viewed by students who are being offered awards, you must set Web Acc/Rej, as follows: A Display the awards for the specified fund on the Web page and allow students to accept full or partial awards. B Display the awards for the specified fund on the Web page and allow students to accept full awards or decline awards. D Only display the awards for the specified fund on the Web page. M Display the awards for the specified fund on the Web page and allow students to accept full or partial awards, and decline awards. N Do not display the awards for the specified fund on the Web page (default). Table 3-23 Accept Awards Settings on Screen 331 Your settings for Pr on Awd Ltr and Min Award also determine what actions are available for students on the Web: • Set Pr on Awd Ltr to Y or X to display the specified fund on the Accept Awards, Award Information by Year, and Award History pages. • The system will not allow students to accept an award amount that is below the specified Min Award amount (the minimum amount the student loan lender will process). 3-62 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Tracking Messages Screen (337) The Tracking Messages Screen (337) is used to create a tracking message for each document that your institution needs to request from students. For each document that is incomplete or has not yet been received from the student, the Student Requirements page will list the name of the document/items, the corresponding tracking message, and (if both A and B are specified on Screen 337) a link to download the missing document. Figure 3-22 Sample Tracking Messages Screen (337) On the Student Requirements page, you can display links to required documents so that the student can download the documents needed to complete his/her requirements. You can display a link to any document in the /WEBDOCS/FORMDOCS subdirectory on your server, or to another Website. To display a link to a required document, you must complete these steps: 1. Place the documents that are being provided by your institution in the /WEBDOCS/FORMDOCS subdirectory on your server. Although you may use Microsoft Word or other software to create your documents, we highly recommend that you save your files as PDF files for placement in the /WEBDOCS/FORMDOCS directory, since PDF files cannot be altered. Note: The FORMDOCS subdirectory will have the same security permissions as the WEBDOCS directory. If you are concerned about unauthorized access to the documents, change the permissions for the FORMDOCS subdirectory. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-63 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access 2. For each required document (in /WEBDOCS/FORMDOCS or on a Website), specify the location and description on Screen 337. Field Description URL/Form On the A line, specify the location of the required document. Location • For a document in /WEBDOCS/FORMDOCS, you would specify a URL of: /FORMDOCS/[Document.pdf] • For a document in another Website, you would specify the site’s URL, for example: http://www.dlssonline.com URL/Form On the B line, specify the text for the document link as it is to be Description displayed on the Student Requirements page. Two examples: • Name the document (e.g., Stafford Loan Form). • Specify that more information can be found about the missing document (e.g., For More Information). Table 3-24 Setting Links to Required Documents Step 12: Setting the Web Option for Academic Programs The Approved Academic Programs Screen (134) defines the programs for which students can apply via the Web. On this screen, make sure: • Web is Y for all programs for which students can apply via the Web. • A valid TERM Beg date is specified for each program. • The TERM End date for each program is either blank or falls within the deadline date of the specified term. Figure 3-23 Approved Academic Programs Screen (134) 3-64 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Step 13: Setting the Web Option for Degree Audit (for OnCourse) If you are using the SIS OnCourse module, use the Degree Requirement Definition Screen (611) to specify which programs can be used for Degree Audit on the Web. Figure 3-24 Degree Requirement Definition Screen (611) ) Set WEB to: To: P Allow a student to view a degree audit for the specified program if it is the primary or secondary program in which he/she is currently enrolled. Y Allow a student to: • View a degree audit for the specified program if it is the primary or secondary program in which he/she is currently enrolled. • Perform degree audit modeling for the specified program to see how his/her credits would count if he/she changed to this program. Table 3-25 Setting the Web Option for Degree Audit SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-65 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Step 14: Setting the Voice/Web Registration Available Option Verify that the Voice/Web Reg OK option on Screen 129 (Course Section Maintenance) is set to Y for all courses and sections for which students can register via the Web. If it is not set to Y, the course will not display on the list of available courses and sections for the term. Figure 3-25 Course Section Maintenance Screen (129) Step 15: Defining DV DBD Values for Admissions List Boxes Many of the Admissions Web pages use list boxes to display predefined values. The values and translations defined in the DBD populate these list boxes with selections. The following table lists the element IDs of the translations used throughout the Admissions feature. Review these elements in your DBD. You may need to define DV records for elements that require different value lists for Web access. Web Page/Section Create Account List Box DBD Element ID State/Province A 064 Country A 065 Select Application Type Application Type AC29E Select Term Term of Entry A 020 Select Major Intended Major A 044 Alternate Major Table 3-26 DBD Values for Web Admissions List Boxes 3-66 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Web Page/Section Enrollment Intentions List Box DBD Element ID College A 030 Degree A 042 Intended Minor AA674 Special Program MM365 Housing Status MM55C Gender AA011 Marital Status AA012 Selective Service Status AA054 Veteran Status AA025 Disability Type AA020 Religion AA014 Ethnicity AA013 Primary Language A 070 Alumnus Relationship MM220 E-Mail Addresses & Personal Web Page E-Mail Address Type AD113 Permanent Address State/Province A 064 Country A 065 State/Province A 064 Country A 065 Relationship AMA32 State/Province A 064 Country A 065 State A 064 Country A 065 State A 064 Country A 065 Degree Sought RB320 Personal Information Temporary Mailing Address Emergency Contact Information High School History College History Table 3-26 DBD Values for Web Admissions List Boxes (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-67 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Web Page/Section Residency/Citizenship List Box US Citizen State of Legal Residence A 316 County of Birth A 063 State of Birth A 316 Country of Birth A 065 County of Origin A 063 State of Origin A 316 Country of Origin A 065 Non-US Citizen Country of Citizenship Most Recent Previous Legal Address Prior Legal Address Personal References Employment History DBD Element ID A 065 Native Country A 065 Current Visa Type AMD30 State/Province A 064 Country A 065 State/Province A 064 Country A 065 Relationship AMB24 State/Province A 064 Country A 065 State/Province A 064 Country A 065 Table 3-26 DBD Values for Web Admissions List Boxes (continued) Note: Since DBD values are listed in alphabetical order in list boxes, we have inserted leading blanks in those DBD values that are to be listed first in list boxes. 3-68 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Step 16: Reviewing DBD Values for Student Services List Boxes Review and modify (as necessary) the DBD values/translations that will be displayed in the list boxes on the Student Services Web pages. Personal Information List Boxes DBD Element ID List Box Update Addresses Update Next of Kin Update Marital Status State A 064 Country A 065 Next of kin relation AA032 State A 064 Country A 065 Marital Status AA012 Table 3-27 DBD Values for Personal Information List Boxes Student Records List Boxes DBD Element ID List Box Institutional Transcript/Transfer Transcript Career/Level AA615 Holds Hold type AM110 Reason AM130 Entry Office A 032 Table 3-28 DBD Values for Student Records List Boxes SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-69 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Step 17: Customizing HTML Although Student Self-Service is fully functional as delivered, you may wish to customize it to better reflect your institution’s procedures. You can modify the Admissions Login page and customize the Cascading Style Sheets used to set the overall look of the Web pages. Customizing the Admissions Login Page if Not Using the CWID If your institution has chosen not to protect the applicant’s/student’s Social Security Number (SSN) and generate a Campus-Wide ID (CWID) for use as the Login ID, you should customize the text on the Admissions Login page. SCT is delivering the following Admissions Login page: Figure 3-26 Admissions Login page Depending on whether or not your institution is allowing ID generation when an applicant does not have, or want to enter, an SSN, you need to modify the text on the corresponding Login page. For example, here is the way you might modify the Login page (which allows for ID Generation) for entry of the SSN. Figure 3-27 Sample Modification to Login page with ID Generation 3-70 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Remember to change the text to state that Your Social Security Number will be used as your Login identification number (ID). Customizing the Web Page Text Several Student Self-Service pages are delivered with generic text and may be more useful to your student body if they were customized with specific information. Including information such as contact information for key personnel (phone numbers, e-mail addresses) or referring to specific building names and office numbers can be quite useful. Providing such information may answer many of your students’ and prospects’ questions and reduce the number of calls to your helpdesk and administrative offices. Review each Web page and all HTML for customization needs, paying close attention to the following areas to make SCT Plus Student SelfService more useful to your students and applicants: • Info text on all pages • Error messages • Change Name page (ANAMDISP.HTM) • Change Social Security Number page (ASSNDISP.HTM) • Financial Aid Opportunities page (SFINAVLP.HTM) • Financial Aid Terms and Conditions page (SACTERMCOND.HTM) • Help page (SCTHELP.HTM) By including institution-specific policies and procedures, as well as specific building and office names and phone numbers, you can make the Web pages more useful to your students. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-71 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Customizing the Cascading Style Sheets Student Self-Service was built with Cascading Style Sheets (CSS). CSS is a recommended standard in Web design. The CSS defines styles for elements (color, alignment, margins, font, etc.). These styles are defined in the following files and are applied to all .htm files, allowing an administrator to change styles throughout an application quickly and easily. • web_home.css (home pages) • web_menu.css (menu pages) • web_app.css (all application pages) • web_print.css (when a page print is requested) • web_help.css (help pages) You can find the Student Self-Service CSS in the path /WEBDOCS/CSS. Refer to an HTML reference guide for more information on how to modify the delivered CSS. Step 18: Customizing Error Messages Customize the generic error messages in: • Each of the COBOL programs delivered with Student Self-Service • The T-Serve error message file (respcode.txt), which is located in the tserve/data directory Delete or customize the error messages in the COBOL programs and/or respcode.txt. For example, change messages which tell people to go to the Administrative Office to direct them to the appropriate person at your university. Recompile and link any modified COBOL programs. 3-72 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Step 19: Setting ACINPM Options You must set several institution-specific options in the ACINPM copybook for Admissions and other features. The options are listed in the following table in the same order in which they appear in ACINPM: Option Description Institution Information ADM-ADDR-PH Define up to three sets of information for up to three types of Admissions Offices (e.g., Undergraduate, Graduate, International): • INST-NAME (Institution Name) • INST-STREET1 (Mailing Address, Line 1) • INST-STREET2 (Mailing Address, Line 2) • INST-CSZ (City, State, Zip Code) • INST-CNTRY (Country) • PHONE (Area Code-Phone Number) • EMAIL-ADDR (E-mail Address) The name and address information is used for the mailing address when paying an application fee by check or money order. The telephone number and e-mail address are used for contacting the admissions office with questions about an application. Based on option settings on Screen W04, the system will display the corresponding Admissions Office information on the Web pages for the type of application being created. Note: The office designations for the e-mail addresses must be defined in the same order as those defined in the TSRVWEB.INI file. Course Availability Options RZKCRSKPRINT-BLDG Y Display the building and room when listing available course sections. N Do not display the building and room when listing available course sections. RZKCRSKPRINT-REG Y Display the Registration Call Number when listing available course sections. N Do not display the Registration Call Number when listing available course sections. Table 3-29 ACINPM Copybook Options SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-73 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Option RZKCRSKPRINT-OPEN Description Y Only display open sections on the Course Section page. The Sections search option will not be displayed on the Course Section Search page, since you will not need to specify whether to search for open or all sections. N Display all sections when listing available course sections. RZKCRSKDISPLAY-NOTES Y Display the course notes (from Screen 131) under the course section description. N Do not display the course notes. Course Section Search Options RZKCRSKMAX-DISPLAY Specify the maximum number of course sections to be displayed at one time on the Course Section Search page. The default is 50. RZKCRSKDISPLAY-ALLSUBJECTS Y Display the “All Subjects” option in the Subject list box on the Course Section Search page. RZKCRSKDISPLAY-SITE Y List Site as one of the search criteria on the Course Section Search page. MAIN-CAMPUS-SITE is the value for DBD element AA092 that designates the Main Campus site code. You must specify a value for all OffCampus site codes in order for the Site list box to be formatted correctly. N Do not display the “All Subjects” option in the Subject list box (default). N Do not list Site as one of the search criteria. RZKCRSKTIME-INCREMENT Specify the increments in which the times are to be displayed in the Earliest and Latest Start Time list boxes on the Course Section Search page. Specify a time increment of either 05, 10, 15, 30, or 60 (default). Table 3-29 ACINPM Copybook Options (continued) 3-74 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Option RZKCRSKDISPLAY-COURSELEVEL Description Specify the options to be displayed in the Level list box on the Course Section Search page. You can define the course levels in the DBD and/or specify up to 10 levels in the ACINPM copybook by entering the following information in the COURSE-LEVEL-TABLE for each level: CRS-LVL-FROM and CRS-LVL-THRU define the range of levels. CRS-LVL-DESC defines the name to be displayed in the Level list box for the specified range of levels. N Do not list Level as one of the search criteria on the Course Section Search page. RZKCRSKDISPLAY-WEBCT 1 Display the values for DBD element AA615 and any additional values defined in the COURSE-LEVELTABLE. 2 Display the values for DBD element AA615 only. 3 Display the values defined in the COURSE-LEVELTABLE. Y Display WebCT as one of the search criteria on the Course Section Search page, so students can just search for WebCT courses (default). N Do not display WebCT as one of the search criteria. Table 3-29 ACINPM Copybook Options (continued) Note: For more information on setting ACINPM options, refer to the descriptions of the individual programs in Chapter 14. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-75 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Step 20: Updating Institution-Specific Settings in TSRVWEB.INI Although you specified some of the institution-specific information (e.g., Login Contact e-mail address and phone number) when you installed Student Self-Service, you should verify and update all the institution-specific information in the TSRVWEB.INI (TouchNet Enterprise Web Program Configuration) file on your Web server. For example, you need to define which menu options you want to display, and the institution-specific information displayed on the Admissions Web pages (e.g., phone numbers and e-mail addresses for your offices, and URLs to your Web sites). • When an applicant selects one of the e-mail links (e.g., E-mail Financial Aid Office), the system will direct his/her e-mail to the specified person at your institution. For example, you could set the email address for your Financial Aid Office to someone in that office (FinAidMail^mailto:jones@school.edu). • When an applicant selects a link to another site (e.g., Return to Your Institution’s Home Page), the system will take him/her to the specified site. 3-76 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Verify and update the following options in the TSRVWEB.INI file for your institution. The options are listed in the order in which they are recorded in the TSRVWEB.INI file. (Skip the options not listed here.) Option InstNameHeader^ Description Student Self-Service is delivered with the sctu.gif graphic file as a placeholder at the top of each Web page: Select one of the three bulleted options: • Remove the sctu.gif graphic and use InstNameHeader to set the name of the institution to be displayed at the top of each Web page. You must also edit 3 files located on your Web server machine: > In WEB_APP.CSS, remove the “background image” attribute in the BODY text class, change the value for “color” and “font size >0%” in the H1 text class, and remove/change the value of the “margin top” attribute in the “pageheaderdiv1” text class. > In WEB_HOME.CSS, remove the “background image” attribute in the BODY text class and change the “font size” in the H1 text class from 0% to 300%. > In webdocs/ahomepg.htm, insert your institution name between <h1> and </h1>. • Replace the sctu.gif graphic file with your institution’s graphic for display at the top of each Web page. Do not specify the InstNameHeader.** • Replace the sctu.gif graphic file with a plain graphic and use InstNameHeader to display your institution’s name within the plain graphic at the top of each Web page.** ** If you replace the sctu.gif graphic, you must: > Move your graphic file to the webdocs/gifs directory on your Web server machine. > In 2 files (WEB_APP.CSS and WEB_HOME.CSS) in the webdocs/css directory on your Web server machine, replace references to sctu.gif with the name of your graphic file. Table 3-30 TSRVWEB.INI Settings SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-77 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Option Description PoweredBy^ Powered by SCT is the alternate text that will be displayed on the Web pages if the SCT .gif file is not available and will be spoken by screen readers unless you specify different text. Naming the Links Displayed at the Top of Web Pages HelpLinkText^ You can specify a different name for the HELP link. ExitLinkText^ You can specify a different name for the EXIT link. HomeLinkText^ You can specify a different name for the HOME link. SitemapLinkText^ You can specify a different name for the SITE MAP link. SiteMap^ Site Map will be displayed when students move the mouse over the Site Map link. You can specify different text for display on mouseover. Default Button Names SubmitName^ The default name for the Submit button displayed on the Web pages. Institution Home Page Link -- for Admissions InstHomePgDisp^ display (default) or nodisplay the link to your institution’s Home page. If you display this link, you must provide a link back to Student Self-Service: Admissions from your institution’s Home page. InstHomePage^ The title for the link to your institution’s Home page. InstHomePgURL^ The URL for your institution’s Home page. Institution Home Page URLs -- for Admissions InstHomePgZeroURL^ Specify the URL for your Student Self-Service Home page, your institution’s home page, or any URL. Make sure the text for the StuReturnHome setting correctly identifies the URL you specify for InstHomePgZeroURL. InstHomePgOneURL^ If you are using a multi-campus environment, specify the URLs for the Student Self-Service Home pages for the other campuses. Make sure the text for each link correctly identifies each campus URL. Note: If you have more than 4 campuses, you will need to modify the JavaScript. InstHomePgTwoURL^ InstHomePgThreeURL^ Table 3-30 TSRVWEB.INI Settings (continued) 3-78 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Option Description Misc. Display Information InfoText^ DO NOT make any changes to this option. This setting displays blank InfoText in the event that a Web page is changed and the InfoText is not included in the config file. Mail Link MailLink^mailto: DO NOT make any changes to this option. Campus Pipeline/Luminis CPhome^ If you are using the Campus Pipeline/Luminis-enabled version of Student Self-Service, set the URL for the Campus Pipeline/Luminis Home page. WebCT Webct^ display (default) or nodisplay the WebCT option on the Student Services page. If using WebCT, also update the WebctHome, WebctURL, and WebctInUseNoCP options. WebctHome^ Specify the URL for the WebCT Home page to be accessed when students select the WebCT option on the Student Services page. The URL should include the address, domain, and port number. WebctURL^ Set up the URL for the WebCT page to be accessed via any hyperlinked WebCT course title on the Student Schedule. The URL should include the address, domain, and port number. • If using the stand-alone version of Student SelfService, set WebctURL to the WebCT Login page. • If using the Campus Pipeline/Luminis-enabled version of Student Self-Service, set the WebctURL to the WebCT Student Course page. WebctInUseNoCP^ Set to true if you are using WebCT without Campus Pipeline/Luminis. Start of Student Options BeginStudent^ Marks the beginning of the TSRVWEB.INI settings that are only for Student Self-Service. Link to Financial Aid Office FinAidMail^ The e-mail address for your Financial Aid Office. FinAidMailTtl^ The text for the link to the Financial Aid Office, as it is to be displayed on the Web page (e.g., E-mail the Financial Aid Office). Table 3-30 TSRVWEB.INI Settings (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-79 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Option Description Setting the Common Links on the Admissions Pages StuAdmBeginSessionCfg^ The config filename that is used to execute the Begin a New Session link on the Exit page. StuAdmBeginSession^ The text to be displayed for the Begin a New Session link on the Exit page. StuAdmBeginSession MouseOver^ The text to be displayed when a user moves the mouse over the Begin a New Session link on the Exit page. Setting the Common Links on the Web Pages StuBeginSessionCfg^ The config filename that is used to execute the Begin a New Session link on the Exit page. StuBeginSession^ The text to be displayed for the Begin a New Session link on the Exit page. StuBeginSession MouseOver^ The text to be displayed when a user moves the mouse over the Begin a New Session link on the Exit page. StuCCPmt^ The text and Pay by Credit Card will be displayed as part of the menu option Account Summary and Pay by Credit Card. StuExitMouseover Text^ The text to be displayed when a user moves the mouse over the Exit link. StuHomeDisp^ display (default) or nodisplay the Home link. Set StuHomeDisp to display the Student Self-Service Home page when students select the HOME link. StuHomepg^ The config filename to be used to display the Student Self-Service Home page. StuHomePage^ Student Self-Service Home Page will be displayed when students move the mouse over the HOME link. You can specify different text for display on mouseover. Institution Information StuInstMessage1^ StuInstMessage2^ StuInstMsgEmail^ If desired, specify a message to be displayed on the Web pages to tell students how to contact your institution if they have problems with the Student SelfService application; otherwise, leave blank. If desired, specify the e-mail address students should use to report problems or submit comments about the Student Self-Service application; otherwise, leave blank. Table 3-30 TSRVWEB.INI Settings (continued) 3-80 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Option Description StuInstMsg Mouseover^ The text to be displayed when a student moves the mouse over the first institution message at the bottom of the Web pages. StuMailLink^mailto: Brings up the default mail program defined in your Web Browser. DO NOT make any changes to this option. StuInstMessage2nd1^ If desired, specify a second institution message to be displayed on the Web pages; otherwise, leave blank. StuInstMessage2nd2^ StuInstMsgEmail2nd^ If desired, specify the e-mail address students should use to reply to your second institution message; otherwise, leave blank. StuInstMsg Mouseover2nd^ The text to be displayed when a student moves the mouse over the second institution message at the bottom of the Web pages. StuOption1^ Future options; not currently used. StuOption2^ StuReturnHome^ Return to Student Home Page will be displayed as a link on the Logoff page to enable students to go to the Student Self-Service Home page. You can specify different text for the link on the Logoff page. StuSelectOnceMsg^ The text of the message to be displayed on the Web pages to remind students to only select buttons and links once. Displaying Optional Links StuSSALinkDisp^ Student Self-Service provides a link to the Social Security Website on the Name Change page, so your students can learn how to officially change their names. To disable the Social Security OnlineTM link, set StuSSALinkDisp to nodisplay. StuUSPSLinkDisp^ Student Self-Service provides a link to the United States Postal Service Website on the Update Addresses page, so your students can learn more about change of address procedures. . To disable the link to the United States Postal Service Website (MoversNetTM), set StuUSPSLinkDisp to nodisplay. Table 3-30 TSRVWEB.INI Settings (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-81 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Option Description Institution Home Page URLs for Student Self-Service StuHostZeroURL^ Specify the URL for your Student Self-Service Home page. Make sure the text for the StuReturnHome setting correctly identifies the URL you specify for StuHostZeroURL. StuHostOneURL^ If you are using a multi-campus environment, specify the URLs for the Student Self-Service Home pages for the other campuses. Make sure the text for each link correctly identifies each campus URL. Note: If you have more than 4 campuses, you will need to modify the JavaScript. StuHostTwoURL^ StuHostThreeURL^ *** Skip the Student Site Map Items *** Admissions Page Link to Your Institution’s Web Page AdmInfoPage^ If you set Display ADM Link to Y on Screen W05 (Web Admissions Page Display Options), specify the title for the link to your institution’s Web page that lists your admissions policies and the programs being offered. AdmInfoPgURL^ If you set Display ADM Link to Y on Screen W05, specify the URL for your institution’s Admissions information Web page. Display Credit Card Payment Link StuAcctSummaryCCPmt^ display (default) or nodisplay the Credit Card Payment option on the Account Summary page. Table 3-30 TSRVWEB.INI Settings (continued) 3-82 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Option Description E-Mail Address for up to 3 Admissions Offices You can display e-mail links on the Web pages for up to 3 Admissions offices. (A university may display e-mail links to Undergraduate, Graduate, and International Admissions offices. A community college may display e-mail links to 2-Year Degree, 4-Year Degree, and Continuing Education Admissions offices.) Note: The office designations for the e-mail addresses must be defined in the same order as those defined for the three sets of ADM-ADDR-PH options in the ACINPM copybook. First Admissions Office StuAdmEmailDisp1^ display (default) or nodisplay the e-mail address StuAdmEmail1^ The e-mail address for the first Admissions Office. (This address will also be displayed in an error message if an applicant attempts to create more than 9 applications.) StuAdmEmail1Ttl^ The text for the link to the first Admissions Office, as it is to be displayed on the Web page. Second Admissions Office StuAdmEmailDisp2^ display (default) or nodisplay the e-mail address StuAdmEmail2^ The e-mail address for the second Admissions Office. StuAdmEmail2Ttl^ The text for the link to the second Admissions Office, as it is to be displayed on the Web page. Third Admissions Office StuAdmEmailDisp3^ display (default) or nodisplay the e-mail address StuAdmEmail3^ The e-mail address for the third Admissions Office. StuAdmEmail3Ttl^ The text for the link to the third Admissions Office, as it is to be displayed on the Web page. E-Mail Business Office StuBusOfcEmail^ The e-mail address for your institution’s Business Office. StuBusOfcEmailTtl^ The text for the link to the Business Office, as it is to be displayed on the Web page. E-Mail Housing Office StuHousOfcEmail^ The e-mail address for your institution’s Housing Office. StuHousOfcEmailTtl^ The text for the link to the Housing Office, as it is to be displayed on the Web page. Table 3-30 TSRVWEB.INI Settings (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-83 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Option Description E-Mail Registrar’s Office StuRegOfcEmail^ The e-mail address for your Registrar’s Office. StuRegOfcEmailTtl^ The text for the link to the Registrar’s Office, as it is to be displayed on the Web page. Message Text StuEmailMsgExt^ The text of the message to be displayed after the Login Contact information (e.g., to ask a question). Login Contact StuAdmLoginEmail^ The e-mail Address an applicant should use to contact a Security Administrator at your institution when he/ she does not have (or remember) his/her Login ID or PIN. The e-mail address is displayed on: • Login page - for an applicant who does not remember his Login ID, or a new applicant who does not want to enter his SSN at an institution that does not allow automatic generation of Login IDs on the Web. • Login - PIN page - for an applicant who already has a Login ID on file (because he/she had test scores or a transcript sent to your institution), but who needs a PIN to use the Admissions feature for the first time. • Create Account page - for an applicant to e-mail the Security Administrator. (After an applicant completes the Enrollment Intentions page, the system will be able to display the e-mail address for the admissions office for his/her type of application.) StuAdmLoginEmailTtl^ The title for the link to be displayed on the Web page (e.g., E-mail the Admissions Office). StuAdmLoginPhone^ The phone number an applicant should call when he/ she does not have (or remember) his/her PIN. StuAdmissionsCCPmt^ display (default) or nodisplay the Credit Card Payment option on the Application Payment page. Table 3-30 TSRVWEB.INI Settings (continued) 3-84 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Step 21: Customizing the Menus If your institution has chosen not to use some of the Student SelfService features, has changed the names of features, and/or has added different features; you will need to pay particular attention to the information in the rest of this guide. The following sections include instructions on how to change the menus (on the navigation bar, Site Map, and Student Services page), as follows: • Rename the menus and the items listed • Remove items from the menus • Add a new item to a menu • Add a new menu Before you customize the menus, you need to understand how the menus and items are displayed on the navigation bar, Site Map, and Student Services page. Display Settings In the MenuItems.js file: Navigation Bar • Variables set the name of each menu and item. • Each menu and item is set to additem to display. The asitemap.htm file includes HTML code for each menu and item to be listed on the Site Map. • In the TSRVWEB.INI file, variables set the name of each menu and item. • On Screen WT1 (Student Web Transaction Security), each menu item is set to Y to display. Site Map SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-85 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Display Settings The menu descriptions for the Student Services page are in admnmenu.htm. Student Services Page Let’s take a closer look at how menus are listed on the navigation bar and the Site Map. Listing Menus on the Navigation Bar (MenuItems.js) The code for most menu items is listed in the MenuItems.js file in the following format: Menu name Item name additem(StuPersonalInfoMenu, StuChgNameText, directory, TipCommon + "&ConfigName=anamdisp","anamdisp.cfg",hostKey,tipHostKey); Config name Config filename For menu items that navigate back to another page (Select Term or Select Award Year), ConfigName= is not listed: Menu name Item name additem(StuRegistrationMenu, StuSelectTermText, directory, TipCommon, "regterm.cfg",hostKey,tipHostKey); Config filename 3-86 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Menu items that link to Websites outside Student Self-Service (e.g., WebCT), are listed as anchors. Target and a target name are used when you want a link to open in a new window: Menu name Item name additem(StuCourseMenu, StuWebctText, directory, "anchor",Webct,”target”, “Webct”); Listing Menus on the Site Map (asitemap.htm) The code for most menu items is listed in the asitemap.htm file in the following format: Item name <tr class="[StuChangeName]"> <td class="pldefault"><span class=”[StuChangeName]”> <a class="sitemaplevel2" href="[StuDir]?&tserve_tip_read_destroy &ConfigName=anamdisp Config name &tserve_tip_write=||WID|SID|PIN|Term|AwdYear|AdTyCode|ConfigName &tserve_trans_config=anamdisp.cfg Config filename &tserve_host_code=[tserve_host_key] Text name of the item &tserve_tiphost_code=[tserve_tiphost_key]" title="[StuChangeNameText]" onMouseover="window.status='[StuChangeNameText]'; return true" onMouseout="window.status='' ; return true" onFocus="window.status='[StuChangeNameText]'; return true" onBlur="window.status='' ; return true"> [StuChangeNameText]</a> </td></tr> SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-87 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access For menu items that navigate back to another page (Select Term or Select Award Year), ConfigName= is not listed: <tr class="[StuSelectTerm]"> <td class="pldefault"><span class=”[StuSelectTerm]”> <a class="sitemaplevel2" href="[StuDir]?&tserve_tip_read_destroy &tserve_tip_write=||WID|SID|PIN|Term|AwdYear|AdTyCode|ConfigName &tserve_trans_config=regterm.cfg &tserve_host_code=[tserve_host_key] &tserve_tiphost_code=[tserve_tiphost_key]" title="[StuSelectTermText]" onMouseover="window.status='[StuSelectTermText]'; return true" onMouseout="window.status='' ; return true" onFocus="window.status='[StuSelectTermText]'; return true" onBlur="window.status='' ; return true"> [StuSelectTermText]</a> </td></tr> Menu items that link to Websites outside Student Self-Service (e.g., WebCT), are listed with a reference to the URL (e.g., href=”[WebctHome]”) and without the tserve lines: <tr class="[StuWebct]"> <td class="pldefault"><span class=”[StuWebct]”> <a class="sitemaplevel2" href="[WebctHome]" target=”webct” title="[StuWebctText]" onMouseover="window.status='[StuWebctText]'; return true" onMouseout="window.status='' ; return true" onFocus="window.status='[StuWebctText]'; return true" onBlur="window.status='' ; return true"> [StuWebctText]</a> </td></tr> The next sections will detail how to edit these files to rename, remove, or add menus and items. 3-88 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Renaming Menus or Menu Items You can rename any drop-down menu or menu item that is displayed on the navigation bar and the Site Map by resetting the names in both the TSRVWEB.INI and MenuItems.js files. In MenuItems.js, set var [option] = [new name] To Rename In TSRVWEB.INI, set:^[new name] Term Menu Term menu var StuTermMenu = StuTermMenu^ Select Term option var StuSelectTermText = StuSelectTermText^ Personal Information Menu Personal Info menu var StuPersonalInfoMenu = StuPersonalInfoMenu^ Addresses Including Emergency Contacts and Next of Kin option var StuAddressText = StuAddressText^ Personal Phone Numbers option var StuPhoneNumsText = StuPhoneNumsText^ E-mail Addresses and var StuEMailAddressText = Personal Web Page option StuEMailAddressText^ Change PIN option StuChangePinText^ var StuChangePinText = PIN Question and Answer var StuChangePinQAText = option StuChangePinQAText^ View Marital Status option var StuMaritalStatViewText = StuMaritalStatViewText^ Update Marital Status option var StuMaritalStatUpdtText = StuMaritalStatUpdtText^ Change Name option var StuChgNameText = StuChangeNameText^ Change Social Security Number option var StuChgSSNText = StuChangeSSNText^ Student Records Menu Student Records menu var StuRecordsMenu = StuStuRecordsMenu^ Grades option var StuGradesText = StuGradesText^ Account Summary and var StuAcctSummaryText = Pay by Credit Card option StuAcctSummaryText^ Additional Services StuAddServicesText^ var StuAddServicesText = Table 3-31 Renaming Menus and Items SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-89 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access To Rename In MenuItems.js, set var [option] = [new name] In TSRVWEB.INI, set:^[new name] Degree Audit option var StuDegreeAuditText = StuDegreeAuditText^ Holds option var StuHoldsText = StuHoldsText^ Unofficial Transcript option var StuUnofTranscriptText = StuUnofTranscriptText^ Institutional Coursework option var StuInstCourseworkText = StuInstCourseworkText^ Transfer Credit option var StuTransferCreditText = StuTransferCreditText^ IRS Form 1098-T Information option var Stu1098TInfoText = Stu1098TInfoText^ Bank Account Information option var StuBankAcctInfoText = StuBankAcctInfoText^ Advisor option var StuAdvisorText = StuAdvisorText^ Graduation Information option var StuGraduationInfoText = StuGraduationInfoText^ Official Transcript Request option var StuOffTransRequestText = StuOffTransRequestText^ Registration Menu Registration menu var StuRegistrationMenu = StuRegistrationMenu^ Drop and Add Classes option var StuDropAddText = StuDropAddText^ Conditional Drop and Add var StuCondDropAddText = StuCondDropAddText^ Change Class Options option var StuChangeClassOptText = StuChangeClassOptText^ Student Schedule option var StuStudentSchedText = StuStudentSchedText^ Detailed Schedule option var StuDetailedSchedText = StuDetailedSchedText^ Registration Status option var StuRegStatusText = StuRegStatusText^ Table 3-31 Renaming Menus and Items (continued) 3-90 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access To Rename In MenuItems.js, set var [option] = [new name] In TSRVWEB.INI, set:^[new name] Financial Aid Menu Financial Aid menu var StuFinancialAidMenu = StuFinancialAidMenu^ Financial Aid Summary option var StuFinAidSummText = StuFinAidSummText^ Accept Awards option var StuFinAidAcceptAwdText = StuFinAidAcceptAwdText^ Award Information by Year option var StuAwardInfoText = StuAwardInfoText^ Award History option var StuAwardHistoryText = StuAwardHistoryText^ Student Requirements option var StuFinAidRequirementsText = StuFinAidRequirementsText^ Cost of Attendance option var StuCostofAttendText = StuCostofAttendText^ Academic Progress option var StuAcadProgressText = StuAcadProgressText^ Financial Aid Transcript option var StuFinAidTranscriptText = StuFinAidTranscriptText^ Application and Information Links option var StuFinAidApplInfoText = StuFinAidApplInfoText^ Institution Financial Aid Opportunities option var StuFinAidOppsText = StuFinAidOppsText^ E-mail to Financial Aid Office option var StuFinAidEmailText = StuFinAidEmailText^ Select Award Year option var StuSelAwardYearText = StuSelAwardYearText^ Courses Menu Courses menu var StuCourseMenu = StuCourseMenu^ Course Section Search option var StuCourseSectSrchText = StuCourseSectSrchText^ Course Sections option var StuCourseSectionsText = StuCourseSectionsText^ Course Catalog option var StuCourseCatalogText = StuCourseCatalogText^ WebCT option var StuWebctText = StuWebctText^ Table 3-31 Renaming Menus and Items (continued) Edit the menu description in admnmenu.htm. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-91 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Removing Menu Items SCT delivers Student Self-Service with all menu items displayed. You will be able to remove any item that you do not want to display on the drop-down menus on the navigation bar and on the Site Map by setting the menu item to noitem in the MenuItems.js file and to N on Screen WT1 (Student Web Transaction Security). Figure 3-28 Student Web Transaction Security (WT1) Screen Most of the options on Screen WT1 control security access to the features from the drop-down menus on the navigation bar (they do not remove them from the menus when set to N), determine if links to these features are displayed on the Site Map, and affect whether those items which require a term selection are listed on the Select Term page. Some of the options work a little differently, as follows: • The WT1 options for WebCT and E-Mail Fin Aid Office only determine if these features are displayed on the Site Map. • The WT1 options for Application/Info Links, Course Sections, Course Section Search, and Course Catalog control whether these features can be accessed from the Student Home page as well as the drop-down menus on the navigation bar and the Site Map. • If you set Credit Card Payment to Y, you must also set Account Summary to Y and set up the TouchNet Payment Gateway in order to process credit card payments toward students’ accounts. 3-92 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access To remove any of the menu items, set the corresponding options in the MenuItems.js file and on Screen WT1, as follows: To Remove This Option: In MenuItems.js, reset additem to noitem: On Screen WT1, reset to N: Student Home Page Student Services Login -- Student Services Login Prospective Students -- Prospective Students Admissions -- Admissions Parent and Guest Payment -- Parent/Guest Payment Application and Information Links -- Application/Info Links Course Sections -- Course Sections Course Section Search -- Course Section Search Course Catalog -- Course Catalog Term Menu The Term drop-down menu will be displayed on the navigation bar (and the Term heading will be displayed on the Site Map) unless none of its menu options are set for display. Select Term additem(StuTermMenu, StuSelectTermText -- Personal Information Menu The Personal Info drop-down menu will be displayed on the navigation bar (and the Personal Info heading will be displayed on the Site Map) unless none of its menu options are set for display. Addresses Including Emergency Contacts and Next of Kin additem(StuPersonalInfoMenu, StuAddressText Addresses Personal Phone Numbers additem(StuPersonalInfoMenu, StuPhoneNumsText Pers Phone Numbers E-mail Addresses and Personal Web Page additem(StuPersonalInfoMenu, StuEMailAddressText E-Mail/Pers Web Pg Change PIN additem(StuPersonalInfoMenu, StuChangePinText Change PIN PIN Question and Answer additem(StuPersonalInfoMenu, StuChangePinQAText PIN Question/Answer Table 3-32 Removing Menus and Items SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-93 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access To Remove This Option: In MenuItems.js, reset additem to noitem: On Screen WT1, reset to N: View Marital Status additem(StuPersonalInfoMenu, StuMaritalStatViewText View Marital Stat Update Marital Status additem(StuPersonalInfoMenu, StuMaritalStatUpdtText Update Marital Stat Change Name additem(StuPersonalInfoMenu, StuChgNameText Change Name Change Social Security additem(StuPersonalInfoMenu, Number StuChgSSNText Change SSN Student Records Menu The Student Records drop-down menu will be displayed on the navigation bar (and the Student Records heading will be displayed on the Site Map) unless none of its menu options are set for display. Grades additem(StuRecordsMenu, StuGradesText Grades Account Summary and additem(StuRecordsMenu, Pay by Credit Card StuAcctSummaryText • Account Summary • Credit Card Payment Additional Services additem(StuRecordsMenu, StuAddServicesText Additional Services Degree Audit additem(StuRecordsMenu, StuDegreeAuditText Degree Audit Holds additem(StuRecordsMenu, StuHoldsText Holds Unofficial Transcript additem(StuRecordsMenu, StuUnofTranscriptText Unofficial Trans Institutional Coursework additem(StuRecordsMenu, StuInstCourseworkText Inst Coursework Transfer Credit additem(StuRecordsMenu, StuTransferCreditText Transfer Credit IRS Form 1098-T Information additem(StuRecordsMenu, Stu1098TInfoText IRS Form 1098T Info Bank Account Information additem(StuRecordsMenu, StuBankAcctInfoText Bank Account Info Advisor additem(StuRecordsMenu, StuAdvisorText Advisor Graduation Information additem(StuRecordsMenu, StuGraduationInfoText Graduation Info Table 3-32 Removing Menus and Items (continued) 3-94 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access To Remove This Option: Official Transcript Request In MenuItems.js, reset additem to noitem: additem(StuRecordsMenu, StuOffTransRequestText On Screen WT1, reset to N: Official Trans Req Registration Menu The Registration drop-down menu will be displayed on the navigation bar (and the Registration heading will be displayed on the Site Map) unless none of its menu options are set for display. Drop and Add Classes additem(StuRegistrationMenu, StuDropAddText Drop/Add Classes Conditional Drop and Add additem(StuRegistrationMenu, StuCondDropAddText Conditional Drop/Add Change Class Options additem(StuRegistrationMenu, StuChangeClassOptText Change Class Options Student Schedule additem(StuRegistrationMenu, StuStudentSchedText Student Schedule Detailed Schedule additem(StuRegistrationMenu, StuDetailedSchedText Detailed Schedule Registration Status additem(StuRegistrationMenu, StuRegStatusText Registration Status Financial Aid Menu The Financial Aid drop-down menu will be displayed on the navigation bar (and the Financial Aid heading will be displayed on the Site Map) unless none of its menu options are set for display. Financial Aid Summary additem(StuFinancialAidMenu, StuFinAidSummText Financial Aid Summary Accept Awards additem(StuFinancialAidMenu, StuFinAidAcceptAwdText Accept Awards Award Information by Year additem(StuFinancialAidMenu, StuAwardInfoText Award Info By Year Award History additem(StuFinancialAidMenu, StuAwardHistoryText Award History Student Requirements additem(StuFinancialAidMenu, StuFinAidRequirementsText Student Requirements Cost of Attendance additem(StuFinancialAidMenu, StuCostofAttendText Cost of Attendance Academic Progress additem(StuFinancialAidMenu, StuAcadProgressText Academic Progress Table 3-32 Removing Menus and Items (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-95 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access To Remove This Option: In MenuItems.js, reset additem to noitem: On Screen WT1, reset to N: Financial Aid Transcript additem(StuFinancialAidMenu, StuFinAidTranscriptText Fin Aid Transcript Application and Information Links additem(StuFinancialAidMenu, StuFinAidApplInfoText Application/Info Links Institution Financial Aid Opportunities additem(StuFinancialAidMenu, StuFinAidOppsText Inst Fin Aid Opp E-mail to Financial Aid additem(StuFinancialAidMenu, Office StuFinAidEmailText Select Award Year E-Mail Fin Aid Office additem(StuFinancialAidMenu, StuSelAwardYearText -- Courses Menu The Courses drop-down menu will be displayed on the navigation bar (and the Courses heading will be displayed on the Site Map) unless none of its menu options are set for display. Course Section Search additem(StuCourseMenu, StuCourseSectSrchText Course Section Search Course Sections additem(StuCourseMenu, StuCourseSectionsText Course Sections Course Catalog additem(StuCourseMenu, StuCourseCatalogText Course Catalog WebCT additem(StuCourseMenu, StuWebctText WebCT Table 3-32 Removing Menus and Items (continued) If you remove a menu or menu item, you will need to change the description of the menu on the Student Services page. Edit the menu description in admnmenu.htm. Figure 3-29 Student Services page 3-96 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Adding a New Item to a Menu If there is another Web option that you want to add to an existing menu on the navigation bar and on the Site Map, you must add the menu item to three different displays: To Add a Menu Item to: Edit File(s): MenuItems.js Navigation Bar • Set a variable for the name of the new menu item • Set the menu item to additem to display it • asitemap.htm • TSRVWEB.INI (if setting variables for adding and naming the new menu item) Site Map Add information about the new item to the menu description in admnmenu.htm. Student Services Page SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-97 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access XAdd the New Menu Item to the Navigation Bar Figure 3-30 Sample New Menu Item on Navigation Bar 1. In the MenuItems.js file, you can create a variable for the text name of your new menu item; otherwise, skip to Step 4. 2. Search for the text name section that corresponds to the menu for which you want to add an item. For example, to add an item to the Personal Information Menu, you would locate the section labeled // Personal Information Menu Items text. 3. Create the variable for your new menu item (e.g., StuNewOption). // Personal Information Menu Items text var StuPersonalInfoMenu = "Personal Info"; var StuAddressText ="Addresses including Emergency Contacts and Next of Kin"; var StuPhoneNumsText = "Personal Phone Numbers"; var StuEMailAddressText = "E-mail Addresses and Personal Web Page"; var StuChangePinText = "Change PIN"; var StuChangePinQAText = "PIN Question and Answer"; var StuMaritalStatViewText = "View Marital Status"; var StuMaritalStatUpdtText = "Update Marital Status"; var StuChgNameText = "Change Name"; var StuChgSSNText = "Change Social Security Number"; var StuNewOption = “New Option”; 4. Search for the menu item section that corresponds to the menu for which you want to add an item. For example, to add an item to the Personal Information Menu, you would locate the section labeled // Personal Information Menu Items. 5. Block copy the code for one of the menu items, for example: additem(StuPersonalInfoMenu, StuChgNameText, directory, TipCommon + "&ConfigName=anamdisp","anamdisp.cfg",hostKey,tipHostKey); 6. Paste the block for the new item within the additem statements for the menu’s items so that the new item will be displayed in the correct order in the menu. (The menu items are displayed in the same order in which they are listed in the MenuItems.js file.) 3-98 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access 7. In the block, replace the text name of the existing item (e.g., StuChgNameText) with the text name of the new item in one of two ways: • Specify the name of the variable you created at the top of the MenuItems.js file for the name of the new item (e.g., StuNewOption), or • If you did not create a variable, hard-code the name of the new item, by specifying the name within quotes (e.g., “New Option”). 8. In the block, replace the name of the existing &ConfigName= file (e.g., anamdisp) with the name of the cfg file (without the .cfg extension) that you have created for the new menu item. 9. In the block, replace the name of the existing cfg file (e.g., anamdisp.cfg) with the name of the cfg file that you have created for the new menu item. XAdd the New Menu Item to the Site Map Figure 3-31 Sample Item Added to the Site Map SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-99 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access 1. You can display your new item on the Site Map with or without the same security access used for the other menu items. • To quickly display the item without security access, create a variable in the TSRVWEB.INI file for the name of your new menu item (e.g., StuNewOption^additem). Then skip to Step 2 on the next page. • To display the item with security (enabling you to turn the item on/off on Screen WT1), complete the steps in the following table. To Display 1. Modify WS Segment 035 in the ACFILE layout for the new the Item menu item. 2. Add a DBD element for the new menu item. 3. Add an option on Screen WT1 for the new menu item 4. Modify the asitemap.ddo file to add the variable name for the new menu item to be displayed. Add your new menu item in the same position in which it should be displayed. For example, if you wanted to add an item to the end of the Personal Information menu, you might specify: |StuPersonalInfo|StuAddress|StuPhoneNums|StuEMailAddress |StuChangePin|StuChangePinQA|StuMaritalStatView |StuMaritalStatUpdt|StuChangeName|StuChangeSSN |StuNewOption 5. Modify AZKTBL for the new menu item. First, add the new item to the list of IF statements which make sure that the menu name is not displayed if all its menu items are turned off. For example, to add your item to the Personal Information menu: IF AC-WS-S-ADDRESSES = "Y" OR AC-WS-S-PERSONAL-PHONE-NUM = "Y" OR AC-WS-S-E-MAIL-PERS-WEB-PG = "Y" OR AC-WS-S-CHANGE-PIN = "Y" OR AC-WS-S-CHANGE-PIN-QA = "Y" OR AC-WS-S-VIEW-MARITAL-STATUS = "Y" OR AC-WS-S-UPDT-MARITAL-STATUS = "Y" OR AC-WS-S-CHANGE-NAME = "Y" OR AC-WS-S-CHANGE-SSN = "Y" OR AC-WS-S-NEW-OPTION = "Y" Then add an IF statement for display of your new menu item: IF AC-WS-S-NEW-OPTION = "Y" PERFORM 3171-ADDITEM THRU 3171-A-EXIT ELSE PERFORM 3172-NOITEM THRU 3172-N-EXIT. 6. Re-compile the AZKTBL program. 3-100 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access To Add 7. Modify AZKCTL for the new menu item, so the system will Security call the program that will run the new item if the corresponding for the item option is set to Y on Screen WT1. **** * NEWOPTION * IF TRAN-CODE = [Your Transaction Code] IF AC-WS-S-NEWOPTION NOT = "Y" MOVE TRAN-UNAVAIL TO ERROR-PARAMETER PERFORM 7999-PROCESS-ERROR THRU 7999-PEEXIT GO TO 2000-PT-EXIT ELSE CALL [Your Program] USING DFHEIBLK DFHCOMMAREA, K-COMMAREA, REQ-BUFR, RESP-BUFR, LEN-BUFR, REQ-RESP GO TO 2000-PT-EXIT. **** 8. Re-compile the AZKCTL program. 2. You will now place a link for the new item on the Site Map. In the asitemap.htm file, search for the section that corresponds to the menu for which you want to add an item. For example, to add an item to the Personal Information Menu, you would locate the section labeled: summary=”This table displays all personal information links.” 3. Block copy the code for one of the menu items, for example: <tr class="[StuChangeName]"> <td class="pldefault"><span class=”[StuChangeName]”> <a class="sitemaplevel2" href="[StuDir]?&tserve_tip_read_destroy &ConfigName=anamdisp &tserve_tip_write=||WID|SID|PIN|Term|AwdYear|AdTyCode|ConfigName &tserve_trans_config=anamdisp.cfg &tserve_host_code=[tserve_host_key] &tserve_tiphost_code=[tserve_tiphost_key]" title="[StuChangeNameText]" onMouseover="window.status='[StuChangeNameText]'; return true" onMouseout="window.status='' ; return true" onFocus="window.status='[StuChangeNameText]'; return true" onBlur="window.status='' ; return true"> [StuChangeNameText]</a> </td></tr> SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-101 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access 4. Paste the block for the new item within the existing blocks for the menu so that the new item will be displayed in the correct order in the menu. (The menu items are displayed in the same order in which they are listed in the asitemap.htm file.) 5. In two places in the block, replace the existing item (e.g., StuChangeName) with the new item you want to add in one of three ways: • Specify the name of the variable you created in the TSRVWEB.INI file for adding the new item (e.g., StuNewOption), or • If you did not create a variable, hard-code the addition of the new item, by specifying ”additem” without the brackets. • If you are adding security access for the new menu item so that it can be turned on/off on Screen WT1, hard-code the name of the variable you defined in the asitemap.ddo file for the new item (e.g., StuNewOption). 6. In the block, replace the name of the existing &ConfigName= file (e.g., anamdisp) with the name of the cfg file (without the .cfg extension) that you have created for the new menu item. 7. In the block, replace the name of the existing cfg file (e.g., anamdisp.cfg) with the name of the cfg file you have created for the new menu item. 8. In 4 places in the block, replace the text name of the item (e.g., StuChangeNameText) with the text for the new item in one of two ways: • Specify the name of the variable you created in the TSRVWEB.INI file for the text name (e.g., StuNewOptionText), or • If you did not create a variable, hard-code the text for the new item, by removing the [ ] around the existing variable name and replacing the variable name with the text for the new item within quotes (e.g., “New Option”). 3-102 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access XAdd the New Item to the Menu Description In the admnmenu.htm file, add a description of the new menu item for display on the Student Services page. Figure 3-32 Sample New Menu Item on Student Services page SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-103 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Adding a New Menu If there are other Web options that you want to display on a new menu on the navigation bar and on the site map, you must add the menu to three different displays: To Add the Menu to: Edit File(s): MenuItems.js • Set variables for the names of the new menu and items Navigation Bar • Set the menu and items to additem to display them • asitemap.htm • TSRVWEB.INI (if setting variables for adding and naming the new menu and items) Site Map Add a description of the menu in admnmenu.htm. Student Services Page 3-104 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access XAdd the Menu and Items to the Navigation Bar Figure 3-33 Sample New Menu on Navigation Bar 1. You can create variables for the text names for your new menu and menu items in the MenuItems.js file; otherwise, skip to Step 5. 2. Block copy the code for one of the menus (e.g., the Courses menu, which has variables set for its 4 menu items. // Course Items Text var StuCourseMenu = "Courses"; var StuCourseSectSrchText = “Course Section Search”; var StuCourseSectionsText = “Course Sections”; var StuCourseCatalogText = "Course Catalog"; var StuWebctText = "WebCT"; 3. Paste the block after the code for the other menus. 4. Edit the block. List the variables you want to create for the name of the new drop-down menu to be displayed on the navigation bar and its menu items. For example: // Option Menu Items text var StuOptionMenu = “Option”; var StuItem1Text = “Item 1”; 5. Block copy the code that controls the items that are displayed in an existing menu (e.g., the code that adds/displays four menu items in the Courses menu): // Course Items additem(StuCourseMenu, StuCourseCatalogText, directory, TipCommon + "&ConfigName=rcolcat1s","rcolcat1s.cfg",hostKey,tipHostKey); additem(StuCourseMenu, StuCourseSectionsText, directory, TipCommon + "&ConfigName=rclstrms","rclstrms.cfg",hostKey,tipHostKey); additem(StuCourseMenu, StuCourseSectSrchText, directory, TipCommon + "&ConfigName=rclssrchtrms","rclssrchtrms.cfg",hostKey,tipHostKey); additem(StuCourseMenu, StuWebctText, directory, "anchor",Webct,hostKey,tipHostKey); 6. Paste the block for the new menu within the code for the other menus so that your new menu will be displayed in the correct order on the navigation bar. (The menus and items are displayed in the same order in which they are listed in the MenuItems.js file.) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-105 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access 7. In the block, replace the text name of the existing menu (e.g., StuCourseMenu) and items (e.g., StuCourseCatalogText) with the text names of the new menu and items in one of two ways: • Specify the names of the variables you created at the top of the MenuItems.js file for the text names of the menu and items, or • If you did not create variables for the text names for the menu and items, hard-code the text names of the new menu and items by specifying each text name within quotes. 8. For each item in your new menu, replace the name of the existing &ConfigName= file (e.g., rcolcat1s) with the name of the cfg file (without the .cfg extension) that you have created for the new menu item. 9. For each item in your new menu, replace the name of the existing cfg file (e.g., rcolcat1s.cfg) with the name of the cfg file you have created for the new menu item. XAdd the Menu and Items to the Site Map Figure 3-34 Sample Menu Added to the Site Map 3-106 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access 1. You can display your new items on the Site Map with or without the same security access used for the other menu items. • To quickly display the items without security access, create variables in the TSRVWEB.INI file for the names of your new menu items (e.g., StuItem1^additem). Then skip to Step 2 on the next page. • To display the items with security (enabling you to turn the items on/off on Screen WT1), complete the steps in the following table. To Display 1. Modify WS Segment 035 in the ACFILE layout for the new the Item menu items. 2. Add DBD elements for the new menu items. 3. Add options on Screen WT1 for the new menu items. 4. Modify the asitemap.ddo file to add the variable names for the new menu and items to be displayed. Add your new menu and items in the same position in which they should be displayed on the Site Map with the other menus. For example, if you wanted to add your new menu after the Courses menu, you might specify: |StuCourse|StuCourseCatalog|StuCourseSections |StuCourseSectSrch|StuWebct |StuOption|StuItem1|StuItem2|StuItem3 5. Modify AZKTBL for the new menu and items. First, add the new menu and items to the list of IF statements which make sure that the menu name is not displayed if all its menu items are turned off. For example: *************************************************** * OPTION - IF ALL ITEMS ARE ACTIVE, * ENABLE THE FUNCTION GROUP HEADING. *************************************************** 3170-OPTION. IF AC-WS-S-ITEM1 = "Y" OR AC-WS-S-ITEM2 = "Y" OR AC-WS-S-ITEM3 = "Y" PERFORM 3171-ADDITEM THRU 3171-A-EXIT ELSE PERFORM 3172-NOITEM THRU 3172-N-EXIT. Then add IF statements to display each of your new menu items. For each menu item, add a similar block of code: IF AC-WS-S-ITEM1 = "Y" PERFORM 3171-ADDITEM THRU 3171-A-EXIT ELSE PERFORM 3172-NOITEM THRU 3172-N-EXIT. 6. Re-compile the AZKTBL program. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-107 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access To Add 7. Modify AZKCTL for each new menu item, so the system will Security call the program that will run the new item if the corresponding for the item option is set to Y on Screen WT1. For each menu item, add a similar block of code: **** * ITEM1 * IF TRAN-CODE = [Your Transaction Code] IF AC-WS-S-ITEM1 NOT = "Y" MOVE TRAN-UNAVAIL TO ERROR-PARAMETER PERFORM 7999-PROCESS-ERROR THRU 7999-PEEXIT GO TO 2000-PT-EXIT ELSE CALL [Your Program] USING DFHEIBLK DFHCOMMAREA, K-COMMAREA, REQ-BUFR, RESP-BUFR, LEN-BUFR, REQ-RESP GO TO 2000-PT-EXIT. **** 8. Re-compile the AZKCTL program. 2. You will now place links for the new menu items on the Site Map. In the asitemap.htm file, search for the section that corresponds to a menu to use as a starting point. 3-108 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access 3. Each menu is displayed within a table on the Site Map. Block copy the code for a menu, for example the Courses menu, which includes four menu items. For brevity, we’re only going to show two of them in our example: Code for the menu Code for the first menu item <table class="plaintable" summary="This table displays all Course links."> <tr class="[StuCourse]"> <td class="pldefault"><span class=”[StuCourse]”> <span class="sitemaplevel1"> [StuCourseMenu] </span></td></tr> <tr class="[StuCourseCatalog]"> <td class="pldefault"><span class=”[StuCourseCatalog]”> <a class="sitemaplevel2" href="[StuDir]?tserve_tip_read_destroy &ConfigName=rcolcat1s &tserve_tip_write=||WID|SID|PIN|Term|AwdYear|AdTyCode|ConfigName &tserve_trans_config=rcolcat1s.cfg &tserve_host_code=[tserve_host_key] &tserve_tiphost_code=[tserve_tiphost_key]" title="[StuCourseCatalogText]" onMouseover="window.status='[StuCourseCatalogText]'; return true" onMouseout="window.status='' ; return true" onFocus="window.status='[StuCourseCatalogText]'; return true" onBlur="window.status='' ; return true"> [StuCourseCatalogText]</a> </td></tr> <tr class="[StuCourseSections]"> <td class="pldefault"><span class=”[StuCourseSections]”> <a class="sitemaplevel2" href="[StuDir]?tserve_tip_read_destroy &ConfigName=rclstrms &tserve_tip_write=||WID|SID|PIN|Term|AwdYear|AdTyCode|ConfigName &tserve_trans_config=rclstrms.cfg &tserve_host_code=[tserve_host_key] &tserve_tiphost_code=[tserve_tiphost_key]" title="[StuCourseSectionsText]" onMouseover="window.status='[StuCourseSectionsText]'; return true" onMouseout="window.status='' ; return true" onFocus="window.status='[StuCourseSectionsText]'; return true" onBlur="window.status='' ; return true"> [StuCourseSectionsText]</a> </td></tr> </table> 4. Paste the menu block within the existing blocks so that the new menu will be displayed in the correct order in the Site Map. (The menus and items are displayed in the same order in which they are listed in the asitemap.htm file.) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-109 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access 5. In the block, replace the name of the existing menu (e.g., StuCourseMenu) with the name of the new menu, in one of two ways: • Specify the name of the variable you created in the TSRVWEB.INI file for the text name of the new menu, or • If you did not create a variable, hard-code the name of the new menu by removing the [ ] and specifying the name within quotes (e.g., “Option”). 6. In two places in the block, replace the existing menu (e.g., StuCourse) with the new menu you want to add in one of two ways: • Specify the name of the variable you created in the TSRVWEB.INI file for adding the new menu (e.g., StuOption), or • If you did not create a variable, hard-code the addition of the new menu, by specifying “additem” (without the brackets) for the new menu. 7. In two places in the block, replace the existing items (e.g., StuCourseCatalog) with the new items you want to add in one of three ways: • Specify the names of the variables you created in the TSRVWEB.INI file for adding the new items (e.g., StuItem1). • If you did not create variables, hard-code the addition of the new items, by specifying additem for each item. • If you are adding security for the new menu items so that they can be turned on/off on Screen WT1, hard-code the names of the variables you defined in the asitemap.ddo file for the new menu items (e.g., StuItem1). 8. For each item in your new menu, replace the name of the existing &ConfigName= file (e.g., rcolcat1s) with the name of the cfg file (without the .cfg extension) that you have created for the new menu item. 9. For each item in your new menu, replace the name of the existing cfg file with the name of the cfg file you have created for the new menu item. 3-110 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access 10. For each item in your new menu (in 4 places in the block), replace the text name of the new item (e.g., StuCourseCatalogText) with the text for the new item in one of two ways: • Specify the name of the variable you created in the TSRVWEB.INI file for the text name (e.g., StuItem1Text), or • If you did not create a variable, hard-code the text for the new item, by removing the [ ] around the existing variable name and replacing the variable name with the text for the new item within quotes (e.g., “Item1”). XAdd a Menu Description to the Student Services Page In the admnmenu.htm file, add a description of the new menu for display on the Student Services page. Figure 3-35 Sample New Menu Option on Student Services page SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-111 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Step 22: Removing Options from the Home Page You can remove options from the Student Self-Service Home Page. 1. Set the corresponding Home page setting to N on Screen WT1. Figure 3-36 Student Web Transaction Security Screen (WT1) Note: The Application/Info Links, Course Sections, Course Section Search, and Course Catalog settings also control access to the options from the drop-down menus. 2. In ahomepg.htm in the WEBDOCS and ia-bin directories, remove or comment out the links you don’t want to list on the Home page. 3-112 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Setting up Your System for Web Access Step 23: Loading the T-Serve Tables for Voice and Kiosk To complete the implementation process for Voice and Kiosk, you must load the table information you defined on the SIS Web screens into T-Serve. Use the Web page ATBLLOAD.HTM to load the T-Serve tables for Voice and Kiosk (no longer needed for the Web). Figure 3-37 Administrative Table Load page The Web URL must be specified directly or you may choose to add it to another Web page that can only be accessed by your system administrators. You can load each table individually, or you can load All Tables with one selection. The following table lists which T-Serve tables must be loaded to record data changes for Voice and Kiosk: Load This Table: Each Time Information is Changed for: Admissions Inquiry Terms Admissions App - Inq End setting on Screen W01 Billing Terms Billing setting on Screen W01 Careers Values for DBD element AA615 (Career/Level) Course Schedule Terms Course Sched setting on Screen W01 Financial Aid Award Years Available Award Years on Screen W26 Grading Terms Grading setting on Screen W01 Registration Terms Registration Bgn/End 1 & 2 setting on Screen W01 Student Schedule Terms Student Sched setting on Screen W01 Subjects Values for DBD element A 035 (Subject Area) Table 3-33 Loading Web Tables for Voice and Kiosk SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-113 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Troubleshooting Errors During Implementation Troubleshooting Errors During Implementation During implementation you may encounter one or more error messages from the SCT Plus host. These messages are displayed on the Web page and contain an error code between 93 and 99. Refer to the following table for explanations of these error codes. Error Code Translation Description 93 System service error An error occurred while attempting to call an OpenVMS system service routine or execute a CICS command. 94 NAMEFL I/O error An error occurred while attempting to read the NAME file. 95 Security File I/O error An error occurred while attempting to read the ZCFILE. Each system has a designated Web operator ID that is used for value-based security. The security record for that Web operator ID is read from the ZCFILE. If a system does not have a designated Web operator ID, then the operator number will be blank and no records will be read from the Security File (ZCFILE). 96 Checkpointer error An error occurred while attempting to initialize the checkpointer for this system. 97 System not available The On-line system is temporarily unavailable. This is controlled through the use of the system availability logical names on OpenVMS and through the ZFOC transaction on IBM platforms. 98 Control program not found The control program for the system identified by the transaction code was not linked into the THOSTINT executable, or it could not be found in the PPT entries or LOADLIB on IBM platforms. 99 Invalid transaction code The system could not be determined. The first digit of the transaction code does not match one of the SCT Plus system number codes. Transaction codes are 4-digit numbers preceded by spaces for a total of six bytes. Table 3-34 Error Codes 3-114 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Passing Profile Data from Student Self-Service to Other Applications Passing Profile Data from Student Self-Service to Other Applications When SCT Plus Student Self-Service is used with target systems (e.g., Campus Pipeline/Luminis and/or WebCT) or an integrated external system which uses LDI protocol, Student Self-Service must pass profile data to the other systems in order to keep the profile data in sync with the Plus data. Data is kept in sync via the following methods: Data Synchronization Method System Events Description System Events occur when a change has been made to user profile information stored in SIS or another application. Refer to Page 3-116 Campus Pipeline/ You run the Campus Pipeline/Luminis Extract Luminis program (ABKGEM) to extract data (for all Profile Load Process students and faculty who have a valid Web PIN in SIS) to populate the Campus Pipeline/Luminis data repository. 3-120 Luminis Data Integration (LDI) Load Process 3-122 You run the Luminis Data Integration (LDI) Extract program (ABKLDI) to extract data (for all students and faculty who have a valid Web PIN in SIS) to populate the data repository for SCT Luminis or any other integrated external system which uses the LDI Protocol. WebCT You run the WebCT Extract program (ABKLSE) Profile Load Process to extract data (for all students and faculty who have a valid Web PIN in SIS) to populate the WebCT data repository. 3-124 On-Demand Data Synchronization 3-126 Use SIS Screen 1SE (Data Synchronization Events) to specify which information is to be passed for a particular student, faculty member, course section, and/or term. Table 3-35 Data Synchronization Methods We will detail each of these data synchronization methods on the following pages. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-115 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Passing Profile Data from Student Self-Service to Other Applications System Events System events occur when a change has been made to user profile information stored in SIS or another application. System events update the following information in target systems (e.g., Campus Pipeline/ Luminis): • Enrolled Course • Course Section ID • Course Department • PIN • Course Title • Course Instructor • Name • Course Instructor Role Change • Grade Change • SID • Course Meeting Data (for calendars • Major (not for LDI) For more details on system events, please refer to the corresponding guide: • Implementing the SCT Connected Learning Solution Guide - Volume II • LDI for e-Learning Plus Implementation Guide - Volume II You can view a list of the new events on Screen ZEF (List of Available Events). Figure 3-38 List of Available Events (ZEF) Screen 3-116 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Passing Profile Data from Student Self-Service to Other Applications On Screen ZEQ (Event Queue Administration), you can view a list of the events that have been created. Figure 3-39 Event Queue Administration (ZEQ) Screen • When a CPSYSTEM, CPBROADCAST, CPNOTIFY, or CPSMART event is successfully received by Campus Pipeline/Luminis, it is removed from Screen ZEQ. If an event cannot be processed by Campus Pipeline/Luminis, the Status is changed to Reject. • When a SYNC event is successfully received by WebCT, it is removed from Screen ZEQ. If WebCT rejects the event, the rejection information is listed in the error_log.txt file. Specifying Which Events to Create Use the options on the SIS Installation Specifications (SIN) screen to narrow down the terms and sections for which events are to be created. Figure 3-40 SIS Installation Specifications (SIN) screen SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-117 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Passing Profile Data from Student Self-Service to Other Applications Use these options according to the following information: Option Description Range It is important to note that system events are passed when changes are of active made to student records for any term. Specify the Range of active event terms event terms for which term-related events (changes in course, course section, enrollment, instructor, or calendar information) are to be passed to target systems. Enter the first and last terms in the format yyyys, where yyyy is the 4-digit year and s is the semester code (e.g., 2001S for the Spring 2001 term). Only changes made to course, course section, enrollment, instructor, or calendar data for the specified Range of active event terms will then be passed to the target systems. Events will not be created for terms that are earlier than the first term listed (AC718) for the Range of active event terms or later than the specified last term (AC713). Suppress INTCOMP sections Suppress LDI sections If you want to pass section-related INTCOMP events (changes in section, faculty assignment, or student enrollment) for only those sections which have a Delivery Code (RC186), set the Suppress INTCOMP sections field to Y. (If this field is blank or N, INTCOMP events will be created for all sections.) • If you do not have SCT Luminis and only synchronize LDI data with external Learning Management Systems, set the Suppress LDI sections field to Y. (If this field is blank or N, events will be created for all sections.) • If your LDI solution does integrate with SCT Luminis, set Suppress LDI sections field to N to synchronize data for all sections. Table 3-36 Specifying Which Events to Create 3-118 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Passing Profile Data from Student Self-Service to Other Applications Preparing Your Batch Update Programs for Event Creation During the processing of events, other records may be read in order to obtain data for the events. If you’ve developed batch programs that update records which may cause events to be created, these programs must follow these rules: • Do not open files directly within ASEVNT (the subroutine which creates events in batch). • Any batch programs which update the following record types, must also open certain files, as indicated in the following table: Batch Programs That Update This Record Type: Must Open These Files AA AVFILE AM (for holds) AVFILE AY AVFILE RC AIFILE AVFILE AYFILE RCFILE RT AVFILE RCFILE Table 3-37 Files to Open When Updating Certain Record Types • If your program or subroutine updates RC records, you must also pass your institution name to the ASEVNT subroutine. To do this, add the following line at the beginning of your calling program: CALL “ASNARI” USING Z-SERIES-Z-NAME. • Close the event queue file and the person ZK file that may have been opened by calls from the ASEVNT subroutine. To do this, add the following lines at the end of your batch program: MOVE “C” TO A-EVT-CMD. CALL “ASEVNT” USING BATCH-COMM-AREA. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-119 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Passing Profile Data from Student Self-Service to Other Applications Campus Pipeline/Luminis Profile Load Process The Campus Pipeline/Luminis profile load process is used to extract data to populate the Campus Pipeline/Luminis data repository. The output file is an XML format file used to populate the Campus Pipeline/Luminis profile. This profile determines access privileges to Campus Pipeline/Luminis functionality, SCT Plus applications, and WebCT. The Campus Pipeline/Luminis Profile Extract Program (ABKGEM) is run from the SIS Host to extract the data required for Campus Pipeline/ Luminis processing from the SIS master files. ABKGEM extracts information for all students and faculty who have a valid Web PIN in SIS. You will use the ABKGEM program parameters to specify which data is to be extracted for Campus Pipeline/Luminis. Here’s a brief description of each of the parameters. (For more information, refer to Chapter 14.) Parameter Description TERM Specify the term for which data is to be extracted. TERM1 - 6 If different academic units use different term codes for the same time period (as selected on the SIS CAL screen), specify these additional terms. OPTION2 Specify whether data is to be extracted about students and faculty members and/or all course sections for the specified terms. OPTION3 Specify whether data is to be extracted about enrolled courses and/or instructional assignments, or student majors. OPTION4 Specify whether course meeting data is to be extracted for display on the students’ and faculty members’ calendars via Campus Pipeline/ Luminis. OPTION5 Specify whether data is only to be extracted for students and faculty members whose IDs are listed in the WORKFL file. Table 3-38 Brief Description of ABKGEM Program Parameters 3-120 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Passing Profile Data from Student Self-Service to Other Applications Extracting Course Meeting Data If you specify OPTION4=Y when using ABKGEM, the following course meeting data is extracted for display in the students’ and faculty members’ personal calendars via Campus Pipeline/Luminis: • Course Reference # and Term • Course Meeting Days • Building • Start and End Dates • Start and End Times • Room If the Start Date, End Date, Begin Time, End Time, or Course Meeting Days is unknown, none of this information will be displayed in the calendars. If just the Building/Room is unknown, TBA will appear in the calendars with all the other information about the course meeting. Extracting Data for Selected Students If you specify OPTION5=Y when using ABKGEM, data will only be extracted for students and faculty whose IDs are listed in the WORKFL file. To compile the desired list of faculty/student IDs (e.g., all freshmen), use a software tool (e.g., FOCUS) or manually enter the IDs in the WORKFL file, as follows: • Leave the first line of the WORKFL file blank. • Enter one ID per line and leave the first position of each line blank. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-121 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Passing Profile Data from Student Self-Service to Other Applications Luminis Data Integration (LDI) Load Process The Luminis Data Integration load process is used to extract data to populate the data repository for SCT Luminis or any other integrated external system. The output file is an XML format file. This profile determines access privileges to Plus applications and the integrated external systems. The Luminis Data Integration Extract Program (ABKLDI) is run from the SIS Host to extract the data from the SIS master files that is required for external system processing. ABKLDI extracts information for all students and faculty who have a valid Web PIN in SIS. You will use the ABKLDI program parameters to specify which data is to be extracted for the external system. Here’s a brief description of each of the parameters. (For more information, refer to Chapter 14.) Parameter Description TERM Specify the term for which data is to be extracted. TERM1 - 6 If different academic units use different term codes for the same time period (as selected on the CAL screen), specify these additional terms. OPTION1 Specify which student and/or faculty data is to be extracted. OPTION2 Specify which course section data is to be extracted. OPTION3 Specify which cross-listing data is to be extracted. OPTION4 Specify which faculty assignment data is to be extracted. OPTION5 Specify which student enrollment data is to be extracted. OPTION6 Specify which course inventory data is to be extracted. OPTION7 Specify which college, department, and department faculty member data is to be extracted. USERCODES Specify the delivery codes for the particular information to be extracted when you set OPTION2, OPTION3, OPTION4, or OPTION5 to S. Table 3-39 Brief Description of ABKLDI Program Parameters 3-122 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Passing Profile Data from Student Self-Service to Other Applications Extracting Course Meeting Data Unless you specify OPTION2=N (to not extract course section information) when using ABKLDI, the following course meeting data is extracted for display in the students’ and faculty members’ personal calendars via the integrated external system. • Course Reference # and Term • Course Meeting Days • Building • Start and End Dates • Start and End Times • Room If the Start Date, End Date, Begin Time, End Time, or Course Meeting Days is unknown, none of this information will be displayed in the calendars. If just the Building/Room is unknown, TBA will appear in the calendars with all the other information about the course meeting. Extracting Data for Selected Students and/or Faculty If you specify OPTION1=L when using ABKLDI, data will only be extracted for faculty and students whose IDs are listed in the WORKFL file. To compile the desired list of faculty/student IDs (e.g., all freshmen), use a software tool (e.g., FOCUS) or manually enter the IDs in the WORKFL file, as follows: • Enter one ID per line • Leave the first position of each line blank. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-123 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Passing Profile Data from Student Self-Service to Other Applications WebCT Profile Load Process The WebCT profile load process is used to extract data to an XML format file which is then used to populate the WebCT profile. This profile determines access privileges to WebCT functionality and SCT Plus applications. The WebCT Profile Extract Program (ABKLSE) is run from the SIS Host to extract the data required for WebCT processing from the SIS master files. ABKLSE extracts information for students and faculty who have a valid Web PIN in SIS. You will use the ABKLSE program parameters to specify which data is to be extracted for WebCT. Here’s a brief description of each of the parameters. (For more detailed information, refer to Chapter 14.). Parameter Description TERM Specify the term for which data is to be extracted. TERM1 - 6 If different academic units use different term codes for the same time period (as selected on the SIS CAL screen), specify these additional terms. OPTION2 Select the students for which data is to be extracted (all students with valid PINs or students who are eligible to enroll during the specified term). OPTION3 Select the faculty members for which data is to be extracted (all faculty members with valid PINs or faculty members assigned to courses offered during the specified term). OPTION4 Select the course sections for which data is to be extracted. OPTION5 Specify whether instructor assignment data is to be extracted for the course sections listed with OPTION4. OPTION6 Specify whether student enrollment data is to be extracted for the course sections listed with OPTION4. OPTION7 Specify whether data is only to be extracted for the faculty/student IDs listed in the WORKFL file. USERCODE If you set OPTION4=S, specify the Delivery Code values for the course section data to be extracted. Table 3-40 Brief Description of ABKLSE Program Parameters 3-124 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Passing Profile Data from Student Self-Service to Other Applications If you specify OPTION7=Y when using ABKLSE, data will only be extracted for students whose IDs are listed in the WORKFL file. To compile the desired list of faculty and/or student IDs (e.g., all freshmen), use a software tool (e.g., FOCUS) or manually enter the Student IDs in the WORKFL file, as follows: • Leave the first line of the WORKFL file blank. • Enter one ID per line and leave the first position of each line blank. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-125 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Passing Profile Data from Student Self-Service to Other Applications On-Demand Data Synchronization You can use Screen 1SE (Data Synchronization Events) to pass data from SIS to Campus Pipeline, Luminis, or other integrated external system for a specific student, faculty member, course section, and/or term. Figure 3-41 Data Synchronization Events Screen (1SE) To use Screen 1SE, follow these steps: 1. In the Action line, specify all the data you need to synchronize (SID, Fac ID, Course, and/or Term). Figure 3-42 Screen 1SE - Data Specified To Synchronize: Specify on Action Line: Student’s ID, PIN, name, role, and demographics SID Student’s ID, PIN, name, role, demographics, and enrollment information (courses, majors, and enrollment status) SID Term Faculty member’s ID, PIN, name, role, and demographics Fac ID Faculty member’s ID, PIN, name, role, demographics, and teaching assignments Fac ID Term Information about the course section, all the students enrolled in the course, and the faculty members assigned to teach the course Course Term Table 3-41 Specifying Which Data to Synchronize 3-126 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Passing Profile Data from Student Self-Service to Other Applications 2. Press ENTER to display the descriptions for the data you have specified on the Action line. Figure 3-43 Screen 1SE - Data Descriptions Displayed 3. In each All data for field for which a description is displayed, specify whether you want to synchronize all data for that student, faculty member, and/or course section. Enter Y to synchronize all data, or N (or leave the field blank) if you do not want to create events for the specified student, faculty member, and/or course section. Figure 3-44 Screen 1SE - Specifying Which Data to Sync SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 3-127 3 Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service Passing Profile Data from Student Self-Service to Other Applications 4. In the Add/End Term field, specify whether you want to Add or End the specified term, or Not create term-related events. Enter To A Create an event to add the specified Term in the other applications you are using (Campus Pipeline/Luminis and/or WebCT). • You should add a term before you start working on the term in SIS (and term-related events are sent to the other applications). • Before you add a term, the term must be defined in SIS in the following order: 1. In the DBD with the corresponding translation (e.g., 2003F, Fall 2003) 2. On Screen CAL (Term Calendar) Note: You may also need to define the term on Screen W01 (Web Term Calendar). You may also need to extend the end of the Range of Active Event Terms (on Screen SIN) to include this term. E Create an event to end the specified Term in the other applications being used (Campus Pipeline/Luminis and/or WebCT). Note: If you end a term, make sure that you change the first term in the Range of Active Event Terms (on Screen SIN) to a later term, so events are not created for the term you’ve ended. N Do not create term events. Table 3-42 Screen 1SE Field Entries 5. Press ENTER to synchronize the specified data. The system will then display a list of the number of events that have been created. Figure 3-45 Screen 1SE - Synchronization Event Counts 3-128 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 4 Term Selection Functional Overview 4 Term Selection This chapter discusses the Select Term feature of SCT Plus Student Self-Service. Functional Overview The Select Term feature allows students to choose another term for which to view and/or update their information. Figure 4-1 Term menu When you followed the instructions for Implementing SCT Plus Student Self-Service (Chapter 3), you specified whether the Select Term option should be displayed on the Term menu. To rename the Select Term menu option, modify the settings in the TSRVWEB.INI and MenuItems.js files (page 3-89). To remove the Select Term menu option, modify the setting in the MenuItems.js file (page 3-93). Several Student Self-Service features require a term selection before they can be used: • The Grades and Account Summary features on the Student Records menu • All the features on the Registration menu • The Course Sections and Course Section Search features on the Courses menu For example, if students want to register for courses, they must first specify the term in which they want to take the course. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 4-1 4 Term Selection Functional Overview Using a Default Term When you followed the instructions in Chapter 3 for implementing Student Self-Service, you had the option of selecting a Student Default Term on Screen W21. Figure 4-2 Student Default Term Option on Screen W21 If your institution defined the Student Default Term on Screen W21, all the Student Self-Service features will use this default term as the basis for all the information that is found and displayed. The default term is usually set to the current term, so there may not be much need for a student to change it. A student will need to change the term if: • The student needs to view or enter information for a different term. For example, a student might want to view the fees for a different term. In this case, he/she would choose Select Term on the Term menu to change the term and then go to the Account Summary page to view the fees. • The Student Default Term is not available for the Student SelfService feature the student selects. In this case, the system would prompt the student to specify a different term from the list of terms that are available for the selected feature. Refer to the next section, Prompting Students to Select a Term. 4-2 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 4 Term Selection Functional Overview Prompting Students to Select a Term If you are not using the Student Default Term, students can use the Select Term feature to select the initial term. When a student selects a Student Self-Service feature that requires a term selection (e.g., Drop and Add Classes), the system will check to see if the last specified term is available for that feature. If no term has yet been selected, or the Student Default Term or last specified term is not available for the selected feature, the system will prompt the student to select a term. For example: Figure 4-3 Prompting for a Term The list box will display a list of the terms that are available for the specified feature. Once the student chooses a term from the list and selects : • The term will remain as the term selection for Student Self-Service until the student uses the Select Term feature (or is prompted) to choose a different term, or exits Student Self-Service. • The system will display the page for the feature the student originally selected (e.g., the Drop and Add Classes page). SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 4-3 4 Term Selection Select Term Select Term After a student chooses Select Term on the Term menu, he/she can view a list of the terms that are available for the Student Self-Service features that require a term selection. Figure 4-4 Select Term page The student will make sure that the term is currently available for the Student Self-Service feature he/she wants to use, and then select the term. The selected term will be retained until the student selects a different term or exits Student Self-Service. Whether or not a term is available for the various Self-Service features is determined by your settings on Screen W01 (Web Term Calendar). Figure 4-5 Web Term Calendar Screen (W01) 4-4 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 5 Personal Information Functional Overview 5 Personal Information This chapter discusses the Personal Information options of SCT Plus Student Self-Service and how to access them. Functional Overview The Personal Information feature allows students to view and update their information in the SIS system. Since students can update their own information, your administrative staff is relieved of these day-today maintenance activities. Figure 5-1 Personal Info menu All of these options are described on the following pages. When you followed the instructions for Implementing SCT Plus Student SelfService (Chapter 3), you specified which options should be displayed on the Personal Info menu. To rename a menu option, modify the settings in the TSRVWEB.INI and MenuItems.js files. To remove a menu option, modify the settings in the MenuItems.js file and on Screen WT1. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 5-1 5 Personal Information Functional Overview If you are reading this guide from a PDF file, use the corresponding page link to go directly to information about renaming or removing the menu option; otherwise, turn to the designated page in your printout. Menu Option To Rename: To Remove: Addresses Including Emergency Contacts and Next of Kin 3-89 3-93 Personal Phone Numbers 3-89 3-93 E-mail Addresses and Personal Web Page 3-89 3-93 Change PIN 3-89 3-93 PIN Question and Answer 3-89 3-93 View 3-89 3-94 Update 3-89 3-94 Change Name 3-89 3-94 Change Social Security Number 3-89 3-94 View/Update Marital Status Table 5-1 Changing Personal Info Menu Options Use the Personal Info settings on Screen WT1 (Student Transaction Security) to enable the options you are displaying on the Personal Info Menu (and disable those you are not displaying). Figure 4-2 Personal Info Options on Screen WT1 5-2 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 5 Personal Information Addresses Including Emergency Contacts and Next of Kin Addresses Including Emergency Contacts and Next of Kin The Addresses option allows a student to view and change his/her addresses. When you followed the implementation instructions in Chapter 3, you specified on Screen W20 (Student Personal Information) which types of addresses your students can view (I) and update (U). Figure 4-3 Student Personal Information (W20) Screen Refer to page 3-12 for information about setting addresses for inquiry and update. After the student selects Addresses on the Personal Info menu, the system displays the student’s address information. Figure 4-4 Address List page SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 5-3 5 Personal Information Addresses Including Emergency Contacts and Next of Kin The student can make any necessary address changes. He/she can: • Select Add a new address to enter information about a different type of address. • Select the Address Type that he/she needs to update. Adding a New Address Students will be able to add addresses which they do not already have on record (except previous and prior legal addresses) and which they are permitted to update, as you specified on Screen W20 (Student Personal Information). In addition to adding information about different addresses (for example, a new temporary address), students will use this option to specify information about their emergency contacts or next of kin. 1. Select Add a new address on the Address List page. 2. Specify which type of address is being added and select . Figure 4-5 Select Address page 3. Enter the information for the specified address type. The information that is to be entered depends on the type of address selected. For example, the following information would be displayed if the student chose to add information for his/her temporary address. 5-4 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 5 Personal Information Addresses Including Emergency Contacts and Next of Kin Figure 4-6 Update (Add) Address page 4. Select SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 to update the information in SIS. 5-5 5 Personal Information Addresses Including Emergency Contacts and Next of Kin Updating an Address 1. Select the Address Type on the Address List page to display the Update Address page with the information that has been recorded for the specified address. Figure 4-7 Update Address page The information that is displayed depends on the type of address. For example, the following information would be displayed if a student chose to update the data for his/her Emergency Contact. 5-6 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 5 Personal Information Addresses Including Emergency Contacts and Next of Kin Figure 4-8 Update (Emergency Contact) Address page In addition to being able to change the address of his/her emergency contact, the student can also change the name of his/her contact. The same fields are displayed when adding/updating next of kin. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 5-7 5 Personal Information Personal Phone Numbers 2. If the same address is also used for other Address Types, specify whether they should also be updated. (This field is not displayed on the Update Address page for all address types.) 3. Enter the correct information and select to update the address (and any specified shared addresses) in SIS. Personal Phone Numbers The Personal Phone Numbers option allows a student to change his/her personal phone numbers (those numbers that are not associated with an address). After the student selects Personal Phone Numbers on the Personal Info menu, the system displays the student’s personal phone number information. Figure 4-9 Personal Phone Numbers page The student can correct any of the phone numbers and then select to update the information in SIS. 5-8 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 5 Personal Information E-mail Addresses and Personal Web Page E-mail Addresses and Personal Web Page The E-mail Addresses and Personal Web Page option allows a student to change (or just view) his/her e-mail addresses and Web page URL. When you followed the implementation instructions in Chapter 3, you specified on Screen W20 (Student Personal Information) which types of e-mail addresses your students can view (I) and update (U). Figure 4-10 Student Personal Information (W20) Screen Refer to page 3-12 for information about setting e-mail addresses for inquiry and update. After the student selects E-mail Addresses and Personal Web Page on the Personal Info menu, the system displays the student’s e-mail addresses and personal Web page information. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 5-9 5 Personal Information E-mail Addresses and Personal Web Page Figure 4-11 E-mail Addresses and Personal Web Page information The student can correct any of the e-mail addresses and/or his/her Web Page URL, and then select to update the information in SIS. 5-10 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 5 Personal Information Change PIN Change PIN The Change PIN option allows a student to change his/her Personal Identification Number (PIN). After selecting Change PIN on the Personal Info menu, the student is prompted to enter his/her current PIN, and then the new PIN twice for verification. Figure 4-12 Change PIN page Once the student changes his/her PIN, he/she must log in again with the new PIN or exit the system. This is necessary to reset the Transaction in Process (TIP) values. PIN Question and Answer When a student selects I Forgot My PIN on the Login page, the system displays the PIN question the student has specified and will not let the student log in and access the Student Services menu until he/she enters the correct answer to the question and changes his/her PIN. The PIN Question and Answer option allows a student to change the question and/or answer that is used when he/she selects I Forgot My PIN on the Login page. Changing the PIN Question and Answer After selecting PIN Question and Answer on the Personal Information menu, the student is prompted to enter the PIN question he/she wants the system to display when he/she selects I Forgot My PIN on the Login page, and/or the answer he/she must enter in order to log in. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 5-11 5 Personal Information PIN Question and Answer Figure 4-13 PIN Question and Answer page Once the student changes his/her PIN question and/or answer, it will be used the next time the student selects I Forgot My PIN on the Login page. Logging in After Forgetting a PIN Students will follow these steps when they forget their PIN: 1. Select I Forgot My PIN on the Login page. Figure 4-14 Student Login page Note: I Forgot My PIN will only be displayed if you have set PIN Question and Answer to Y on Screen W02 (Web Student and Faculty Specifications). 2. Enter his/her Student ID. Figure 4-15 I Forgot My PIN - Student ID page 5-12 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 5 Personal Information PIN Question and Answer 3. Enter the answer to the question (they’ve already specified on the PIN Question and Answer page). Figure 4-16 I Forgot My PIN - Answer page 4. If he/she has entered the correct answer, enter a new PIN. Figure 4-17 I Forgot My PIN - Enter New PIN page 5. After the new PIN is accepted, select . Figure 4-18 I Forgot My PIN - Log In Again page 6. Log into Student Self-Service with his/her new PIN. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 5-13 5 Personal Information View/Update Marital Status View/Update Marital Status Typically an institution chooses to implement either View Marital Status or Update Marital Status. • The View Marital Status option allows students to view their information. Figure 4-19 View Marital Status page • The Update Marital Status option enables students to update their information. Figure 4-20 Update Marital Status page To update marital status information, the student just needs to choose the correct marital status from the list box and select . 5-14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 5 Personal Information Change Name Change Name Students cannot change their name in Student Self-Service. The Change Name page directs students to the appropriate administrative office where they can officially change the name on record at your institution. Figure 4-21 Change Name page You may wish to customize this page and the Change Social Security Number page to reflect your institution’s policies and procedures. When the student selects , the system will open a new window with access to the Social Security Website: Figure 4-22 Sample Social Security Website SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 5-15 5 Personal Information Change Social Security Number Change Social Security Number Students cannot change their Social Security Number in Student SelfService. The Change Social Security Number page directs students to the appropriate administrative office where they can officially change the information on record at your institution. Figure 4-23 Change Social Security Number page You may wish to customize this page to reflect your institution’s policies and procedures. When the student selects , the system will open a new window with access to the Social Security Website: Figure 4-24 Sample Social Security Website 5-16 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6 Student Records Functional Overview 6 Student Records This chapter discusses the Student Records options of SCT Plus Student Self-Service and how to access them. Functional Overview The Student Records feature allows students to view their academic information from the SIS system. Students can view their grades, any holds that may exist on their record, unofficial transcript, institutional coursework, transfer credits, degree audit data, or the names of their advisors; request additional services, look at their account summary and make payments with a valid credit card, review the information used to produce their 1098-T Form, request graduation checkout or copies of their official transcript, or update their bank account information for direct deposit of refunds. Because students can update their own data, your administrative staff is relieved of such day-to-day maintenance activities. Figure 6-1 Student Records menu All of these options are described on the following pages. When you followed the instructions for Implementing SCT Plus Student SelfService (Chapter 3), you specified which options should be displayed on the Student Records menu. To rename a menu option, modify the settings in the TSRVWEB.INI and MenuItems.js files. To remove a menu option, modify the settings in the MenuItems.js file and on Screen WT1. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6-1 6 Student Records Functional Overview If you are reading this guide from a PDF file, use the corresponding page link to go directly to information about renaming or removing the menu option; otherwise, turn to the designated page in your printout. Menu Option To Rename: To Remove: Grades 3-89 3-94 3-89 3-94 Additional Services 3-89 3-94 Degree Audit 3-90 3-94 Holds 3-90 3-94 Unofficial Transcript 3-90 3-94 Institutional Coursework 3-90 3-94 Transfer Credit 3-90 3-94 IRS Form 1098-T Information 3-90 3-94 Bank Account Information 3-90 3-94 Advisor 3-90 3-94 Graduation Information 3-90 3-94 Official Transcript Request 3-90 3-95 Account Summary and Pay by Credit Card Account Summary Credit Card Payment Table 6-1 Changing Student Records Menu Options Also, use the Student Records settings on Screen WT1 (Student Transaction Security) to enable the options you have chosen to display on the Student Records Menu (and disable those you have chosen not to display). Figure 6-2 Student Web Transaction Security (WT1) 6-2 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6 Student Records Grades Grades The Grades option enables students to view their grades for a specified term. After selecting Grades on the Student Records menu, the student will view his/her grades for the specified term. Figure 6-3 Grades page Setting Viewing Options Using settings on Screen W21 (Student Records 1) and Screen W02 (Web Specifications), you define which information is displayed on the Grades page. Your Grades settings on Screen W21 (Student Records 1) determine whether the student’s name and statistics are displayed on the page, and whether students with transcript holds can view the Grades page. Figure 6-4 Student Records 1 (W21) Screen SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6-3 6 Student Records Grades To display midterm grades, set Midterm Grading on Screen W02 (Web Specifications) to Y. (Refer to Chapter 14 for more information on the RZKGRD program.) Figure 6-5 Web Student and Faculty Specifications Screen (W02) Granting Web Access to Grades To grant access to grades for a specific term, set Grading to Y on Screen W01 (Web Term Calendar) for the selected term. Figure 6-6 Web Term Calendar Screen (W01) 6-4 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6 Student Records Account Summary and Pay by Credit Card Account Summary and Pay by Credit Card The Account Summary (and Pay by Credit Card, if you are using the TouchNet Payment Gateway) option allows a student to view the account summary for the specified term. Account Summary After selecting Account Summary and Pay by Credit Card on the Student Records menu, the student will view a listing of all the detail items or a summary line for each subcode group for the term. Figure 6-7 Account Summary page SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6-5 6 Student Records Account Summary and Pay by Credit Card If your system is in the modeling phase (not ready to do calculations), tuition calculation will not be performed and the system will only display the Account Summary information (and if you’re using the TouchNet Payment Gateway) at the top of the page: Field Description Due Date The Due Date is specified on Screen W22 (Student Records 2). The Due Date will only be displayed on the Account Summary page if you set Disp Due Date to Y on Screen W22 (Student Records 2). Previous Balance The student’s previous account balance. Amount Due Through Selected Term The amount due by the specified term. Account Balance Through Selected Term The amount the student owes for expenses accrued through the specified term. Total Account Balance The student’s total balance for all terms. Table 6-2 Description of Account Summary fields Setting Viewing Options Your other settings on Screen W22 (Student Records 2) define additional options for the Account Summary page. Figure 6-8 Student Records 2 (W22) Screen 6-6 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6 Student Records Account Summary and Pay by Credit Card Refer to the setting descriptions in the following table: Setting Tuition Calculation Description Determines whether a tuition calculation is performed prior to displaying the Account Summary page: Y Calculate the tuition R Only calculate the tuition if Tuition Calc is set to Y on Screen 111 (Student Term Attributes) for the specified term. N Do not calculate the tuition. Name If Name is Y, the student’s name will be displayed on the Account Summary page. View Account If View Account is blank all students can view the Account Summary page; if set to A, only active students can view the page. Subcode Grouping If Subcode Grouping is Y, information for payment subcodes will be summarized into subgroups unless a particular subcode is not associated with any subcode group. If set to N, the system will display every detail subcode line in the Account Summary. Table 6-3 Screen W22 Field Entries Pay by Credit Card Setting the Payment Subcodes On Screen W22 (Student Records 2), set the subcodes for the types of credit cards your institution will accept for making payments via the Account Summary and Pay by Credit Card feature. Figure 6-9 Student Records 2 (W22) Screen SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6-7 6 Student Records Account Summary and Pay by Credit Card When Using The TouchNet Credit Card Payment Gateway If you are running TouchNet’s Credit Card Payment Gateway, you can change the “Account Summary” function name by adding “and Pay by Credit Card” to the credit card payment parameter in TSRVWEB.INI, which is located in the ia-bin directory on your Web server. This will change the name of the function throughout Student Self-Service to be “Account Summary and Pay by Credit Card.” Using a credit card, a student can make a payment toward his/her account balance via the Web (even when your system is in the modeling phase). The student selects to display the Credit Card Payment page: Figure 6-10 Account Summary - Credit Card Payment page After the student selects , the system will disable this button and change its name to “Processing” to prevent the student from accidentally submitting a duplicate payment. 6-8 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6 Student Records Account Summary and Pay by Credit Card Once the required credit card information is specified, the TouchNet Payment Gateway Server verifies the information through a clearinghouse. If payment is authorized, the Credit Card Payment program (BZKCCU) posts a charge and payment to the applicant’s account, updates the admissions application fee paid fields, logs the transaction for settlement, and notifies the student that the payment is verified. Figure 6-11 Account Summary - Credit Card Receipt page If your setting for Display Login ID for All Credit Card Receipts on Screen W22 (Student Records 2) is Y, the student’s ID will be listed on the credit card receipt. Figure 6-12 Student Records 2 (W22) Screen If the credit card is rejected, the applicant is notified. Refer to the TouchNet document T-Serve Payment Gateway User Help Guide for more information about payment settlement. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6-9 6 Student Records Account Summary and Pay by Credit Card Payments made by applicants via the Web are classified under Operator Number 9998. To view information about payments made via the Student Self-Service application, log into the SIS system using Operator Number 9998. After the credit card payment has been made, you may review the payment on Screen 406 (Adjust Charge/Payment). Figure 6-13 Adjust Charge/Payment Screen (406) • The first line of text fields under Item Description contains the credit card expiration date. The fourth line of text contains the approval code from the external authorization processor. • The Print Control field is updated to an M and all the fields become protected. • The Cashier field is updated to Web, since the payment originated from Student Self-Service. (For payments that originate from TouchNet’s Voice solution, the Cashier is VOIC.) If Not Using The TouchNet Credit Card Payment Gateway If you are not running TouchNet’s Credit Card Payment Gateway, you must: • Set StuAcctSummaryCCPmt in TSRVWEB.INI to nodisplay to remove from the Account Summary page. • On Screen WT1, set the Credit Card Payment option to N. 6-10 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6 Student Records Additional Services Additional Services The Additional Services option enables students to request non-tuition related services, including any optional student fee that is maintained on the Screen 431. Figure 6-14 Optional Student Fees (431) screen How Additional Services are Defined Additional services (optional fees) are defined on the following screens: Screen: Description: TBD Board/meal plans are set up on Screen TBD (Board Rates). (This is for board plans that are part of the SIS system for housing; not the add-on Housing module. When you use the add-on Housing module, changes cannot be entered for the board plan on Screen 431.) Table 6-4 Screens Used to Define Optional Fees SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6-11 6 Student Records Additional Services Screen: Description: TDP Deferred Payment plans are set up on Screen TDP (Deferred Payment Schedules), with any applicable surcharges set up on Screen TOP using the corresponding payment plan code. TOP Insurance plans or other optional service are set up on Screen TOP (Optional Fees). Table 6-4 Screens Used to Define Optional Fees 6-12 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6 Student Records Additional Services When you followed the instructions for implementing Student SelfService in Chapter 3, you used the Additional Services setup screens (W27, W28, and W29), to define: • Which services are offered for a specified term • If and when services can be selected via the Web • Which students can select the services • Whether one or more services can be selected from a group • Whether selection of service(s) is mandatory or optional • The title and description of the fees and groups as they are to be displayed on the Additional Services page When you created an Additional Services Group on Screen W27, you specified the Type of services to be included in the group. Figure 6-15 Additional Services - Groups (W27) screen For example, if you created an additional services group for Insurance fees (Type is I), you listed the insurance fee codes (as defined on Screen TOP) for inclusion in the group. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6-13 6 Student Records Additional Services How Additional Services are Displayed on the Web After the student selects Additional Services on the Student Records menu, the system displays the list of services available for the student, term, and the current date. • The mandatory groups will be displayed first, followed by the optional groups. The system will display an auto-generated text line to inform students that they must select an option (for a Mandatory group), or that selection is optional. • The second and third characters that make up each group code will determine the sort order of the mandatory and optional groups (e.g., 01, 02, AA, A1, BB, B1). • The First/Last Select Dates and First Display Date you specified on Screen W27 for a group will determine the time period during which the group will be displayed on the Additional Services page. The system will use the First/Last Select Dates and the Last Deselect Date to display auto-generated text to inform students of when they can make a selection from the group and the last date on which they can change their selection. • The page will display the titles and descriptions of the groups and fees, as defined on Screens W28 and W29. Figure 6-16 Additional Services - Group Title/Description (W28) screen Figure 6-17 Additional Services - Fee Codes (W29) screen 6-14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6 Student Records Additional Services Since your many settings on the Additional Services setup screens determine which services are displayed for a particular student on the Additional Services page, we can only show you a sample Additional Services page. Figure 6-18 Additional Services page After the student selects his/her additional services and selects , the system will update the student’s RT record for billing purposes. (Billing must be set to Y on Screen W01 for the term in order for the charges to be applied to the student’s account.) You can view the updated information on Screen 431. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6-15 6 Student Records Degree Audit Degree Audit The Degree Audit option allows students to view degree audit information for the primary and secondary programs in which they are enrolled. This is the same information that is output by SIS batch program DBA100 (Analysis of Degree Progress Report). Students can view audit information for programs for which Web is set to Y or P on Screen 611 (Degree Requirement Definition). Figure 6-19 Degree Requirement Definition (611) Screen If Web is set to Y, students can also perform modeling to see how their credits would be considered if they changed to the program. Note: You can view a list of degrees with their Web settings on Screen 606. Figure 6-20 Degree Index List Screen (606) 6-16 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6 Student Records Degree Audit Figure 6-21 Degree Audit page Students just need to select Primary, Secondary, or Modeling, and select . Your Degree Audit settings on Screen W02 (Web Student and Faculty Specifications) determine what information will be displayed on the page and program information used for modeling. Figure 6-22 Web Student and Faculty Specifications (W02) Screen SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6-17 6 Student Records Degree Audit Field Description Test Scores Specify whether you want to display the student’s test scores on the Analysis of Academic Progress report. Advisor Notes Specify whether you want to display the advisor’s notes on the Analysis of Academic Progress report. Advisor Name Specify whether you want to display the advisor’s name on the Analysis of Academic Progress report. Program Term Specify whether the student’s primary or secondary program is to be determined by the current term or his/her last chronological term. C Use the current term (the term on the CAL screen for which today’s date falls between the session begin and end dates) for the blank session code. L Use the last chronological term (the term with the student’s most recent registration activity). Modeling Specify which catalogs can be selected for Degree Audit Modeling. Catalog Only those programs set for modeling on Screen 611 can be selected from the catalogs. 1 List programs from the student’s primary program catalog. 2 List programs from the student’s primary program catalog and those programs that have become available for his/her primary program. 3 List programs from the current catalog. 4 List programs from all catalogs. Table 6-5 Degree Audit Settings on Screen W02 6-18 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6 Student Records Degree Audit Sample Degree Audit for Primary Program Students can view a degree audit for the current program in which they are currently enrolled. For example: Figure 6-23 Sample Degree Audit - Primary Program - Part 1 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6-19 6 Student Records Degree Audit Figure 6-24 Sample Degree Audit - Primary Program - Part 2 The Degree Audit page displays the same information as the output of SIS batch program DBA100 (Analysis of Degree Progress Report). 6-20 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6 Student Records Degree Audit Modeling to Obtain Degree Audit for a Different Program Students can select the Modeling option to view a degree audit to determine how their current credits would be considered if they changed to another program. To perform the degree audit modeling, students will follow these steps: 1. Select the major and . Figure 6-25 Degree Audit - Select Major page 2. Select the program and . Figure 6-26 Degree Audit - Select Program page 3. View the modeling results. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6-21 6 Student Records Degree Audit Figure 6-27 Degree Audit - Modeling Program Results 6-22 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6 Student Records Holds Holds Students can view any holds that the institution has placed on their record. After the student selects Holds on the Student Records menu, the system displays the list of holds. Figure 6-28 Holds page If no holds exist on the student’s record, the system displays a no holds message. General holds (Hold Type G) are not displayed, and holds that carry a Privacy Code do not display the hold Reason. Holds affect Web processing of student information in these ways: • Registration holds will prevent Web registration. • Transcript holds will prevent the display of grades on the Web. • Transcript holds will prevent students from displaying their Institutional Transcript, Transfer Transcript, and Unofficial Transcript, and from using the Official Transcript Request feature on the Web. The amount of information displayed on the Holds page depends on your settings for the Hold options on Screen W22 (Student Records 2). SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6-23 6 Student Records Holds Figure 6-29 Student Records 2 Screen (W22) Option Description Effective Term Y Display the effective term on the Holds page. N Do not display the effective term. Waived Term Y Display the waived term on the Holds page. N Do not display the waived term. Originating Office Y Display the name of the office that originated the hold. N Do not display the name of the office that originated the hold. Table 6-6 Hold Options on Screen W22 (Student Records 2) The Holds Web page displays the same data as screens 048 (SIS Holds & Comments), 148 (Reg Holds & Comments), 248 (AM Holds & Comments), 348 (FAM Holds & Comments), 448 (BR Holds & Comments), and 548 (Housing Holds & Comments). Depending on how your institution sets up access, a user with a Dept ID of UNVR (University Registrar) would be able to update the holds on Screen 148, while a user with a Dept ID of ADM (Admissions) would be able to update the holds on Screen 248. If the Privacy Restrict field on the holds screens is set to P (Private Use), “Not Available” is displayed in the Reason field on the Holds page. 6-24 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6 Student Records Unofficial Transcript Unofficial Transcript The Unofficial Transcript option provides a way to view or print a copy of the student’s Unofficial Transcript information. After selecting Unofficial Transcript on the Student Records menu, the student is prompted to select a Level of Study (if he/she has more than one). Figure 6-30 Select Level of Study page Once the student selects , the system will display the transcript. Figure 6-31 Unofficial Transcript - part 1 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6-25 6 Student Records Unofficial Transcript Figure 6-32 Unofficial Transcript - part 2 6-26 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6 Student Records Unofficial Transcript Your Unofficial Transcript settings on Screen W21 (Student Records 1) determine whether the student’s name is displayed on the page and whether students with transcript holds can view the page. Figure 6-33 Student Records 1 (W21) Screen SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6-27 6 Student Records Unofficial Transcript The information is flagged as an Unofficial Transcript and lists the data found on SIS Screen 136 (Transcript Display). Figure 6-34 Transcript Display Screen (136) 6-28 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6 Student Records Institutional Coursework Institutional Coursework The Institutional Coursework option provides a way to view or print a list of the credits earned at your institution. After selecting Institutional Coursework on the Student Records menu, the student will: 1. Select a Level of Study (if he/she has more than one), and . Figure 6-35 Select Level of Study page 2. View the degree information and initial statistics. Figure 6-36 Institutional Coursework page - part 1 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6-29 6 Student Records Institutional Coursework 3. Scroll down and view the list of courses taken at your institution. Figure 6-37 Institutional Coursework page - part 2 Your Institutional Coursework settings on Screen W21 (Student Records 1) determine whether the student’s name is displayed on the page and whether students with transcript holds can view the page. Figure 6-38 Student Records 1 (W21) Screen 6-30 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6 Student Records Institutional Coursework The information is flagged as an Unofficial Transcript and shows only the credits earned at your institution. Transfer Credits are not included in any of the hours or GPA calculations. This page contains most of the data found on SIS Screen 136 (Transcript Display). Figure 6-39 Transcript Display Screen (136) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6-31 6 Student Records Transfer Credit Transfer Credit The Transfer Credit option provides a way for a student to view or print a list of the credits that were transferred to your institution from other institutions. Your Transfer Credit settings on Screen W21 (Student Records 1) determine whether the student’s name is displayed on the page, and whether students with transcript holds can view the page. Figure 6-40 Student Records 1 (W21) Screen After selecting Transfer Credit on the Student Records menu, the student is prompted to select a Level of Study (if he/she has more than one). Figure 6-41 Select Level of Study page Once the student selects information. 6-32 , the system will display the transfer SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6 Student Records Transfer Credit Figure 6-42 Transfer Credit page This information is flagged as an Unofficial Transcript and shows only transfer credits. Calculation of hours and GPAs only include Transfer Credits. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6-33 6 Student Records Transfer Credit The information displayed on the Transfer Credit page can also be found on Screen 142 (Transfer Credit Articulation) and Screen 144 (Transfer Credit Summary). Figure 6-43 Transfer Credit Articulation Screen (142) Figure 6-44 Transfer Credit Summary (144) 6-34 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6 Student Records IRS Form 1098-T Information IRS Form 1098-T Information Students can view the billing summary and detailed transactions used by your institution to produce their Tuition Payment Statement (IRS Form 1098-T). The information on the 1098-T form is used by each student or his/her guardian to complete the Education Credits (Hope and Lifetime Learning Credits) form (IRS Form 8863). To view the 1098-T information, the student needs to: 1. Select IRS Form 1098-T Information on the Student Records menu. 2. Specify the tax year for which information is to be viewed. Figure 6-45 Select Tax Year page Only the tax years for which 1098-T information is recorded for the student are listed in the Tax Year drop-down menu. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6-35 6 Student Records IRS Form 1098-T Information 3. View the tax information for the specified year: Figure 6-46 Sample 1098-T Summary Information for 2003 6-36 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6 Student Records IRS Form 1098-T Information Depending on the specified Tax Year, the system will display different information in the section titled Information Reported to the IRS. • For 2002 and 2003, the system will display the boxes and the amounts as they appear on the 1098-T form. • For 2001 and prior years, zeros were reported in similar boxes, as required by the IRS at those times. 4. Scroll down the page to review the Financial Detail Information. Figure 6-47 1098-T Detail Information for 2003 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6-37 6 Student Records IRS Form 1098-T Information The 1098-T Web page displays the same data as Screen 413 1098-T Audit Inquiry). Figure 6-48 1098-T Audit Inquiry Screen (413) 6-38 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6 Student Records Bank Account Information Bank Account Information Students can update their bank account information for electronic deposit of their refunds from your Accounts Payable office. After the student selects Bank Account Information on the Student Records menu, the system displays the current information on record for the student. Figure 6-49 Bank Account Information page SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6-39 6 Student Records Bank Account Information The student can then enter any of the incomplete or incorrect bank account information and select to record his/her bank information in the following DBD elements: Field Name Description DBD Element Bank Account Information Routing Number The 9-digit routing number assigned to the student’s banking institution. AM811 Account Number The student’s bank account number (without spaces or dashes). AM813 Type The type of bank account (CHK=checking account or SAV=savings account). AM815 Status Indicates if direct deposits are to be made to the specified bank account. AM839 A The student will set the account as Active if he/ she wants refunds to be direct deposited to the account. D The student will set the account as Deactivated if he/she does not want refunds to be direct deposited to the account. Bank Address Bank Name The formal name of the banking institution. AM817 Street Line 1 The first line of the bank’s street address. AM819 Street Line 2 The second line of the bank’s street address. AM821 City The city in which the bank is located. AM823 State The state in which the bank is located. AM825 Province The name of the international province in which the bank is located, if applicable. AM827 Zip or Postal Code The zip or postal code for the bank location. AM829 Country The 2-character code for the country in which the bank is located. AM831 Phone The phone number for the person at the bank to whom you should direct questions about the account. AM833 Contact The name of the person at the bank to whom you should direct questions about the account. AM835 Table 6-7 DBD Elements for Bank Information 6-40 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6 Student Records Bank Account Information The Bank Account Information page displays the same information as Screen 438 (Student Bank Account Information). Figure 6-50 Student Bank Account Information (438) screen On Screen 438, you have two more settings for Account Status: • Frozen -If your institution does not want refunds to be deposited to the specified student’s account, set the status as Frozen. • Invalid - If during EFT processing the routing and/or bank number prove to be invalid, enter I in this field to discontinue direct deposits to this account. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6-41 6 Student Records Bank Account Information When the Account Status is set to Frozen or Invalid, the student will only be able to view his/her current bank account information: Figure 6-51 Display of Bank Account Information Your setting for Bank Account Information Name on Screen W21 (Student Records 1) determines whether or not the student’s name is displayed on the Bank Account Information page. 6-42 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6 Student Records Advisor Advisor Once students select Advisor on the Student Records menu, they will view the names of their advisors, if any have been assigned. The advisor list will include the student’s primary advisor, secondary advisor, and/or those faculty members who have been included in an Advisor Group that has been assigned to the student. Figure 6-52 Advisor page - Primary and Secondary Advisors • If a faculty member is assigned as the student’s primary or secondary advisor and is also part of the advisor group assigned to the student, the faculty member’s name will only appear once (as the primary/ secondary advisor) in the list of advisors. • If a primary and/or secondary advisor and an advisor group have been assigned to the student, the primary and secondary advisors will be listed as Your assigned advisors and the advisors in the group will be identified as the student’s Other faculty advisors. Figure 6-53 Advisor page - Primary, Secondary, and Group Advisors SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6-43 6 Student Records Advisor Advisors are assigned to a student on Screen 119 (Term Report Flags). Figure 6-54 Advisor Assignment on Screen 119 6-44 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6 Student Records Graduation Information Graduation Information The Graduation Information option enables students to update their expected graduation term and/or request graduation checkout for their expected degree, major, and term of graduation. Students will be able to enter graduation information for any of their matriculation programs for which the Exit term meets both of the following requirements: • The term is not in the past • Intent to Grad is set to Y on Screen W01 for the term. (When you followed the instructions for implementing Student Self-Service in Chapter 3, you set Intent to Grad to Y for each term for which students may submit graduation information via the Web.) Figure 6-55 Screen W01 (Web Term Calendar) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6-45 6 Student Records Graduation Information Once a student selects Graduation Information on the Student Records menu, the system will display a list of the programs into which he/she has matriculated. Figure 6-56 Graduation Information page The program information displayed on the Graduation Information page corresponds to the data displayed on Screen 110 (Academic Program Maintenance). Figure 6-57 Screen 110 (Academic Program Maintenance) Note: Students can only submit graduation information for programs for which the Deg Ckout Status is blank and the Exit Action/ Reason is EG (Expected Graduation) or EP (End of Program). Students can use the Graduation Information feature to: • Update their Expected Graduation Term • Request graduation checkout 6-46 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6 Student Records Graduation Information Updating the Expected Graduation Term The student’s Exp Grad Term term (as displayed on Screen 110) will be listed as the first term in the Expected Graduation Term list box on the Graduation Information page. Figure 6-58 Screen 110 (Academic Program Maintenance) To update their Expected Graduation Term (the term in which they believe they will graduate), students will: 1. Select the correct Expected Graduation Term for the program. Figure 6-59 Graduation Information page 2. Select to record the new graduation term in SIS. The system will display a confirmation message. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6-47 6 Student Records Graduation Information Requesting Graduation Checkout Instead of asking students to fill out Personal Data Forms (PDFs) to specify their degree checkout term, and then having someone in the Registrar’s office verify or enter this information on Screen 117 (Graduation Checkout), students can request graduation checkout via the Web. To request graduation checkout, a student will: 1. Verify the Expected Graduation Term for the program. Figure 6-60 Graduation Information page 2. Select Yes for the Graduation Indicator for the program. Figure 6-61 Changing the Graduation Indicator 3. Select to record his/her graduation checkout request. Note: Once a student requests graduation checkout for a program, he/she will not be able to view or update his/her Graduation Information for that program via the Web. The student must contact the appropriate administrative office at your institution to change his/her graduation information for the program. 6-48 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6 Student Records Graduation Information The system will verify the information for the program, display a confirmation message for the student, record the information in SIS, and set the Degree Checkout Status to 1 (Filed Degree Application). You can view the updated graduation information for the student on Screen 110 (Academic Program Maintenance) and Screen 117 (Graduation Checkout). Figure 6-62 Screen 110 (Academic Program Maintenance) Figure 6-63 Screen 117 (Graduation Checkout) The Exp Grad Term field will display the term the student specified via the Web. The Deg Ckout Status field will display 1, to indicate that the student filed his/her degree application. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6-49 6 Student Records Official Transcript Request Official Transcript Request The Official Transcript Request option enables students to request that copies of their transcripts be sent from your institution to a specified address. The student will follow these steps in order to request a transcript: 1. Select Official Transcript Request on the Student Records menu. 2. View a list of their current transcript requests, if any. Figure 6-64 Official Transcript Requests On Record 3. Scroll down and view information about any requests that have not yet been submitted, if any. For example: Figure 6-65 Sample Unsubmitted Request 6-50 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6 Student Records Official Transcript Request The student can select the Action to Update the information for, or Submit, any of the unsubmitted requests. 4. Scroll down and view the New Request Form. Figure 6-66 New Request Form Students can select the following options: Option Action Settings • Add the transcript request to the student’s record, but do not submit it yet. • Submit the transcript request. Process • Process Immediately • Hold until final degree posted • Hold until final grades Transcript If the student has more than one transcript, he/she will select the transcript. Copies Enter the number of copies of the transcript that are needed. Delivery Method • • • • First Class Mail Overnight Express 2-Day Priority Certified Mail Table 6-8 Transcript Request Options SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6-51 6 Student Records Official Transcript Request 5. Enter information for the Official Transcript Request and select . Figure 6-67 New Request Being Submitted 6. Review the information about the transcript request and enter your credit card information. Figure 6-68 Official Transcript Request - Credit Card Payment 7. Select once and then wait as the credit card payment is processed. 6-52 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6 Student Records Official Transcript Request 8. Review and print the payment receipt. Figure 6-69 Official Transcript Request - Credit Card Receipt If your setting for Display Login ID for All Credit Card Receipts on Screen W22 (Student Records 2) is Y, the student’s ID will be listed on the credit card receipt. Figure 6-70 Student Records 2 (W22) Screen Based on your settings on Screen W23 (Official Transcript Request 1) and W24 (Official Transcript Request 2), the system automatically calculates the fee for the transcript request. If no fees are being charged for transcript requests and delivery, the system will ask the student to review the transcript request information (as in Step 6) and select . Instead of a credit card payment receipt, the system will display a list of the requests that have been submitted for processing. Your institution defines the fee per transcript request/copy on Screen W23 and sets up to five types of delivery fees on Screen W24. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6-53 6 Student Records Official Transcript Request Setting Fees for Official Transcript Requests When you followed the instructions for implementing Student SelfService in Chapter 3, you defined the fee per transcript request/copy on Screen W23 (Official Transcript Request 1). Figure 6-71 Official Transcript Request 1 (W23) Screen Refer to page 3-22 for more information on setting fees for official transcript requests. Setting Fees for Delivery of Official Transcripts During implementation of Student Self-Service, you set up to five types of delivery fees on Screen W24 (Official Transcript Request 2). Figure 6-72 Official Transcript Request 2 (W24) Screen Refer to page 3-24 for more information on setting delivery fees for official transcript requests. 6-54 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6 Student Records Official Transcript Request Viewing a List of Transcript Requests Made Via the Web You can view a list of the transcript requests that have been submitted via the Web, but have not been printed, on Screen 1T4 (Web Transcript Request Scroll). Figure 6-73 Web Transcript Request Scroll (1T4) You specify which Batch of transcript requests is to be viewed (e.g., enter ON to view official transcript requests that were submitted via the Web and should be processed now). Screen 1T4 displays the following information about the transcript requests submitted via the Web: Field Description Student ID The ID of the student who submitted the transcript request. Name The name of the student who submitted the transcript request. H Indicates whether the student has a hold on his/her transcript. There are no holds on the student’s transcript. Y There is a hold on the student’s transcript. O There is a hold on the student’s transcript, but it has been overridden on Screen 1T1 or 1T2. TR Indicates the type of transcript to be sent (e.g., Undergraduate transcript) # Cp The number of copies of the transcript to be sent. Submit Date The date on which the student submitted the transcript request. Table 6-9 Information Displayed on Screen 1T4 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 6-55 6 Student Records Official Transcript Request Field DO Description Indicates the delay option specified by the student. D Delay processing the transcript request until degrees are posted. G Delay processing the transcript request until final grades are posted. I Process the transcript request immediately. DM Indicates the delivery mode for sending the transcript. The delivery modes are defined on Screen W24 (Official Transcript Request 2). Total Fees Indicates the total fee for sending the transcript (fee for transcript copy/request plus the delivery fee, as defined on screens W23 and W24). Send to The name of the person to whom the transcript should be sent. Table 6-9 Information Displayed on Screen 1T4 (continued) You can also view a list of the transcript requests that have been recorded via the Web, but have not been submitted, on Screen 1T2 (Transcript Request Log). Figure 6-74 Transcript Request Log (1T2) 6-56 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 7 Registration Functional Overview 7 Registration This chapter discusses the Registration options of SCT Plus Student Self-Service and how to access them. Functional Overview Web Registration provides a way for a student to add a class, drop a class, view his/her class schedule, change class options, or look at his/ her registration status. Figure 7-1 Registration menu All of these options are described on the following pages. When you followed the instructions for Implementing SCT Plus Student SelfService (Chapter 3), you specified which options should be displayed on the Registration menu. To rename a menu option, modify the settings in the TSRVWEB.INI and MenuItems.js files. To remove a menu option, modify the settings in the MenuItems.js file and on Screen WT1. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 7-1 7 Registration Functional Overview If you are reading this guide from a PDF file, use the corresponding page link to go directly to information about renaming or removing the menu option; otherwise, turn to the designated page in your printout. Menu Option To Rename: To Remove: Drop and Add Classes 3-90 3-95 Conditional Drop and Add 3-90 3-95 Change Class Options 3-90 3-95 Student Schedule 3-90 3-95 Detailed Schedule 3-90 3-95 Registration Status 3-90 3-95 Table 7-1 Changing Registration Menu Options Turning Registration Options On/Off In addition to specifying in the TSRVWEB.INI file whether each of the Registration options should be displayed, use the settings (noted below) on Screen WT1 (Student Web Transaction Security) to enable the options you are displaying on the Registration Menu (and disable those you are not displaying). Figure 7-2 Student Web Transaction Security (WT1) Screen 7-2 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 7 Registration Functional Overview Setting Display Options When you followed the steps in Chapter 3 for implementing Student Self-Service, you set the display options on Screen W25 (Registration and Schedule 1). Figure 7-3 Registration and Schedule 1 (W25) Screen Your settings on Screen W25: Setting Description Name Determines whether the student’s name is displayed on the individual Web pages: Drop/Add Classes, Conditional Drop/Add, Change Class Options, Student Schedule, Detailed Schedule, and Registration Status. Term Status Defines up to five types of status a term can be in (Grading, History, Pre-registration, Registration, and/or Scheduling) in order to allow students to access the Drop/Add Classes, Conditional Drop/Add, and Change Class Options pages. Grade Types Defines up to five Grade Types that can be selected on the Change Class Options page. Table 7-2 Settings on Screen W25 Refer to page 3-37 for more information on Screen W25. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 7-3 7 Registration Drop and Add Classes Drop and Add Classes Students select Drop and Add Classes on the Registration menu if they wish to register for classes in the selected term. It also allows students to drop a course for which they are currently registered. Students will not be able to access this page if any of the following conditions exists: • Registration dates on Screen W01 prohibit Web registration for the term • The student’s enrollment status prohibits registration • The student has an active registration hold • The student’s academic standing prohibits registration • The student’s Web access on Screen W03 is not valid for the day and time If the student cannot register for a selected term, an error message displays. If there is a registration hold on the students record, the student should select the Holds option on the Student Records menu to view information about the hold which is preventing his/her registration. The student should contact the registrar’s office to follow up on any registration restrictions. All error checking that is done during online SIS registration is also performed during Web registration. In addition, if the Voice/Web Reg OK option (on Screen 129) is set to N for the course section, students cannot register for the section via the Web. If the student receives the message, “Student not eligible to register on the Web,” the student has failed to pass the registration restrictions that were established on Screen W03. 7-4 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 7 Registration Drop and Add Classes If the student has already registered for classes, they will be listed on the Drop and Add Classes page. Figure 7-4 Drop and Add Classes page • If your institution is allowing use of the Course Section and/or Course Section Search features, the Drop and Add Classes page will also display links to these features above the Add Class section, so students can look up the call numbers for the classes they want to add. • If any of the Currently Registered Classes can be taken for variable credit hours, and your institution is allowing use of the Change Class Options feature, the system will display a message with a link to the Change Class Options feature. Figure 7-5 Variable Credit Message SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 7-5 7 Registration Drop and Add Classes If your institution is not allowing use of the Change Class Options feature, this message will instruct students to contact the Registrar if they need to change their credit courses. Registering for a Class To add a class, the student will: 1. Enter the Call Number of the desired course and section under Add Class, and select . (The Call Number can be found on the Course Sections page.) Figure 7-6 Specifying the Call Number 2. Verify the course addition in his/her list of Currently Registered Classes. Figure 7-7 Verifying the Class Registration 7-6 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 7 Registration Drop and Add Classes Dropping a Class To drop a class, the student will: 1. Select Drop from the Action list box for the course in the list of Currently Registered Classes, and select . Figure 7-8 Dropping a Class 2. Verify that the course was dropped from his/her list of Currently Registered Classes. Figure 7-9 Verifying the Classes SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 7-7 7 Registration Conditional Drop and Add The class is dropped from the student’s schedule if the current date falls within the Registration Drop dates on Screen W01 (Web Term Calendar). Figure 7-10 Registration Drop Dates on Screen W01 Conditional Drop and Add The Conditional Drop and Add option allows a student to drop a class and register for an alternative class. This option functions as it does on SIS Screen CDA (Conditional Drop/Add). For example, a student is registered for the Intro to Math class at 9:00 am Monday/Wednesday/Friday but would prefer to take the same class at 11:00 am Monday/Wednesday/Friday. In this example, the student does not want to drop the Intro to Math class altogether; he/she only wishes to reschedule it for another time. Or perhaps a student is scheduled for a class in Intro to Writing to fulfill an English requirement but would rather take a course on 20th Century Literature. In either example, the student would go to the Conditional Drop/Add page and enter the Call Number for the sections to be dropped and added. The same error checking that is done during online SIS conditional drop/add is performed during conditional drop/add on the Web. In addition, if the Voice/Web Reg OK option (on Screen 129) is set to N for the course section, students cannot register for the section via the Web. If the student receives the message, “Student not eligible to register on the Web,” the student has failed to pass the registration restrictions that were established on Screen W03 (Web Registration Access Groups). 7-8 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 7 Registration Conditional Drop and Add After selecting Conditional Drop and Add on the Registration menu, the student will view the list of courses he/she is currently registered to take. Figure 7-11 Conditional Drop and Add page • If your institution is allowing use of the Course Section and/or Course Section Search features, the Conditional Drop and Add page will also display links to these features above the Drop and Add Call Number section, so students can look up the call numbers for the classes they want to add. • If any of the Currently Registered Classes can be taken for variable grade type and/or credit hours, and your institution is allowing use of the Change Class Options feature, the system will display a message about the variable grade type/credit course with a link to the Change Class Options feature. Figure 7-12 Variable Credit Message If your institution is not allowing use of the Change Class Options feature, this message will instruct students to contact the Registrar about their variable credit courses. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 7-9 7 Registration Conditional Drop and Add The student will: 1. Specify the Call Numbers of the course he/she wants to drop and the course he/she wants to take in its place, and select . Figure 7-13 Specifying Call Numbers 2. Verify the class change in the list of Currently Registered Classes. Figure 7-14 Verifying the Class Change If successful, the student is registered for the new class and dropped from the existing one. If the student cannot register for the new class, he/she is not dropped from the one he/she is already registered for. The student will not be dropped unless the add is successful. If the system was unable to add the course (e.g., because it required a prerequisite, there’s a time conflict with another registered course, etc.), a message will be displayed on the page. For example: Figure 7-15 Sample Course Registration Message 7-10 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 7 Registration Change Class Options Change Class Options If a student has registered for a class with variable or alternate credit hours, he/she uses the Change Class Options page to select the credit hours. Figure 7-16 Change Class Options page This page is also used to change the grading type, such as auditing a class, taking a class Pass/Fail, or selecting any other institution-defined grading types. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 7-11 7 Registration Change Class Options The student may select only those Grade Types that are specified for the Change Class Options feature on Screen W25 (Registration and Schedule 1). Figure 7-17 Registration and Schedule 1 Screen (W25) Note: If no Grade Types are specified on Screen W25, only normal grade rules can be selected on the Change Class Options page. The same registration restrictions that exist for Drop and Add Class and Course Sections exist on this page, except for Registration Status date. 7-12 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 7 Registration Student Schedule Student Schedule The Student Schedule displays the class schedule in a calendar format by the Time Increment (15, 30, or 60 minutes) set on Screen W25 (Registration and Schedule 1). For each class, this schedule displays the course number, along with the building and room (if available). Figure 7-18 Student Schedule page (15-minute Increment) Classes which have all of their meetings scheduled outside of the current date, or are not scheduled (either before or after the current date), are listed at the bottom of the Student Schedule. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 7-13 7 Registration Detailed Schedule Detailed Schedule The Detailed Schedule displays information about all the classes for which the student is registered. This detailed information about each course includes section, course title, instructor, credits, grade type, meeting days and times, course start and end dates, and meeting location. Figure 7-19 Detailed Schedule page • If the student has withdrawn from a course “WITHDRAWN” will appear in the Message column. 7-14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 7 Registration Detailed Schedule • If the student is registered for a WebCT course, the course title is displayed as a link. When the student selects the course title, the system accesses the WebCT Login page. Once the student enters his/ her WebCT ID and password, his/her WebCT MyPage will be displayed. When the student selects the course link, the Student Course page for the specified course will be displayed. The student can then access information about the specified course. • Classes which have all of their meetings scheduled outside of the current date, or are not scheduled (either before or after the current date), appear without meeting time assignments. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 7-15 7 Registration Registration Status Registration Status The Registration Status page displays the student’s registration status for the specified term. A student can check this page for information regarding holds, permits, academic standing, registration status, class, intended curriculum, and earned credit hours to date. Figure 7-20 Registration Status page The Registration Status page is useful when a student needs to determine if there are any restrictions he/she may have which may impact registration. If there are registration holds on the student’s record, the Registration Status page will display a link to the Holds page. 7-16 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 8 Financial Aid Functional Overview 8 Financial Aid This chapter discusses the Financial Aid options of SCT Plus Student Self-Service and how to access them. Functional Overview The financial aid feature of Student Self-Service allows students to access financial aid information. Figure 8-1 Financial Aid menu All of these options are described on the following pages. When you followed the instructions for Implementing SCT Plus Student SelfService (Chapter 3), you specified which options should be displayed on the Financial Aid menu. To rename a menu option, modify the settings in the TSRVWEB.INI and MenuItems.js files. To remove a menu option, modify the settings in the MenuItems.js file and on Screen WT1. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 8-1 8 Financial Aid Functional Overview If you are reading this guide from a PDF file, use the corresponding page link to go directly to information about renaming or removing the menu option; otherwise, turn to the designated page in your printout. Menu Option To Rename: To Remove: Financial Aid Summary 3-91 3-95 Accept Awards 3-91 3-95 Award Information by Year 3-91 3-95 Award History 3-91 3-95 Student Requirements 3-91 3-95 Cost of Attendance 3-91 3-95 Academic Progress 3-91 3-95 Financial Aid Transcript 3-91 3-96 Application and Information Links 3-91 3-96 Institution Financial Aid Opportunities 3-91 3-96 E-mail to Financial Aid Office 3-91 3-96 Select Award Year 3-91 3-96 Table 8-1 Changing Personal Financial Aid Options Use the Financial Aid settings on Screen WT1 (Student Web Transaction Security) to enable the options you are displaying on the Personal Financial Aid Information Menu and the Application and Information Links option on the Financial Aid Menu. Figure 8-2 Student Web Transaction Security (WT1) Screen 8-2 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 8 Financial Aid Functional Overview Setting Display Options for the Personal Financial Aid Pages When you followed the instructions in Chapter 3 for implementing Student Self-Service, you used Screen W26 (Financial Aid 1) to define the display options for the Financial Aid pages. Figure 8-3 Financial Aid 1 (W26) Screen • Available Award Years - Up to five award years for which students can view their financial aid information on the Web. (The award years are displayed on the Web page in the order in which they are listed on Screen W26.) • Default Award Year - If you specify a Default Award Year (e.g., the current year), students will not have to select an award year each time they use Student Self-Service to view/update their financial aid information. If they need to view/update information for a different year, they can use the Select Award Year feature to specify the year. • Name - Whether to display the student’s name on the Web pages. For each Financial Aid page, specify whether the student’s name is to be displayed. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 8-3 8 Financial Aid Financial Aid Summary Financial Aid Summary Students select Financial Aid Summary on the Financial Aid menu to view a quick recap of their financial aid information. Figure 8-4 Financial Aid Summary page Unless no financial aid information has been recorded for the student for the specified award year, the Financial Aid Summary page will display information that applies to the student: • If there are any requirements the student needs to complete before receiving his/her financial aid. The student can select student requirements to view the status of his/her requirements on the Student Requirements page (see page 8-20). • The estimated cost for the student to attend your institution. If no budget information has been recorded for the student, this message will not be displayed. The student can select cost of attendance to view the Cost of Attendance page (see page 8-23). • If the student still needs to accept any financial aid that he/she has been awarded. The student can select take action to display the Accept Awards page (see page 8-6). • The total amount of financial aid the student has been awarded. If the student has not been awarded financial aid, this message will not be displayed. The student can view the Award Information by Year page (refer to page 8-16). 8-4 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 8 Financial Aid Financial Aid Summary • The state of the student’s academic progress (from Screen 325, Packaging). If the Student Academic Progress (SAP) code on Screen 325 is blank, the message will state that the student’s academic progress is unknown. The student can select the academic progress link to view the Academic Progress page (see page 8-34). • A link to the financial aid information that has been recorded for them at your institution. If no financial aid history has been recorded for the student, this message will not be displayed. Students can select financial aid history to view the Award History page (see page 8-19). SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 8-5 8 Financial Aid Accept Awards Accept Awards Students select Accept Awards on the Financial Aid menu to accept or decline their financial aid awards. Figure 8-5 Accept Awards page 8-6 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 8 Financial Aid Accept Awards The Accept Awards page displays the following information about the student’s awards for each term in the specified award year, and enables the student to act on his/her award. Field Description Above the Award Table • An e-mail link to your institution’s Financial Aid Office. • If your institution has chosen to Set Offered Amount to Accept Amount (on Screen W26), the page will display a message to let students know that once they accept an award amount, they cannot change it via the Web. See the section, entitled “Award Acceptance Time” on page 8-11, for more information. • The last date on which someone in your Financial Aid Office modified the student’s award package. In the Award Table Award The name of the Award is displayed as a link to the Financial Aid Opportunities page, so the student can learn more about the type of aid he/she has been awarded. If your institution has chosen (on Screen 331) to display a list of preferred lenders for the specified fund, a lender list box will be displayed under the award name for students for whom no lender history is recorded in the system. Once a lender is selected (or if one was previously assigned on Screen 318), only the lender name will appear under the name of the award. See the section, entitled “Available Actions for a Fund” on page 8-9, for more information. Award Message The Award Message code that your institution specified for the fund in SIS. The award message code is displayed as a link to the message explanation that is shown farther down the page. See the section, entitled “Award Messages” on page 8-12, for more information. General messages are also displayed on the Accept Awards page. See the section, entitled “General Messages” on page 8-14, for more information. Status The current status of the award. Offered Amount The amount of financial aid that has been offered to the student. If your institution has chosen to Set Offered Amount to Accept Amount, the Offered Amount will be updated to the amount of the award that the student accepts. Accepted Amount The amount of financial aid that has been accepted by the student. Table 8-2 Information on the Accept Awards page SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 8-7 8 Financial Aid Accept Awards Field Description Paid Amount The amount of financial aid that has been disbursed (paid to the student). Once any amount of the award has been disbursed, Disbursed is displayed as the Status. If your institution has chosen not to Set Offered Amount to Accept Amount, students will be able to change the Accepted Amount until the award Status is Disbursed. Action For each award, the student selects one of the actions in the Action list box (accept or decline award) or enters a Partial Amount and then selects accept in the Action list. Accept Partial Amount The available Actions are controlled by your setting for Web Acc/Rej on Screen 331 (Fund Attribute) and Set Offered Amount to Accept Amount on Screen W26. • If you are not allowing students to accept or decline awards for a fund, these options will not be listed in the Action list box for this fund. • If you are not allowing students to accept partial award amounts for a fund, no entry field will appear in the Accept Partial Amount field for this fund. • If you have chosen to Set Offered Amount to Accept Amount, accept will not be listed in the Action list after the student accepts an award amount. See the section, entitled “Available Actions for a Fund” on page 8-9, for more information. Below the Award Table and Messages If your institution requires students to accept your financial aid Terms and Conditions before processing their awards (you set Terms & Conditions to Y on Screen W26), the page will display: • A link to your Terms and Conditions - so that students can review this information. This link will remain on the page so that students can always reread the terms and conditions. • An acceptance checkbox - so students who are accepting awards can acknowledge that they have read and accept your Terms and Conditions. The date on which the student last accepted the terms and conditions will be displayed in the Term/Cond field on Screen 325. After the student has taken action on all his/her awards or the only available action is to decline his/her awards, the checkbox will no longer be displayed on the page. See the section, entitled “Terms and Conditions” on page 8-15, for more information. Table 8-2 Information on the Accept Awards page (continued) 8-8 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 8 Financial Aid Accept Awards Available Actions for a Fund The actions that are available for a specified fund are determined by your settings on Screen 331 (Fund Attribute). Figure 8-6 Fund Attribute Screen (331) Field Description Pr on Determines if the specified fund is displayed on the Accept Awards page. Awd Ltr If Pr on Awd Ltr is Y or X, the award is displayed. Note: In order for the fund to be displayed, Awd Ltr Print must not be set to H on Screen 317, 318, or 325 for the specified student and award year. Web Determines whether or not students can view information for the specified Acc/Rej fund on the Accept Awards page, and accept full or partial awards and decline awards. Students can accept full or partial awards. Students can accept full awards or decline awards. Students can only view the awards on the Web page. Students can accept full or partial awards, and decline awards. Students cannot view their awards on the Web page (default). A B D M N Table 8-3 Accept Awards Settings on Screen 331 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 8-9 8 Financial Aid Accept Awards Field Web Lend Sel Description Specifies whether a preferred lender list for this fund is to be displayed on the Accept Awards page. N Do not display a preferred lender list for this fund on the Accept Awards page (default). 1-9 If you set Web Lend Sel to a number, you MUST list at least the same number of preferred lenders (for DBD element SW073) for display in the preferred lender list box on the Accept Awards page. Number and list your preferred lenders with one space between the A# and the lender name, as follows: A1 Name of 1st Preferred Lender A2 Name of 2nd Preferred Lender . . . A9 Name of 9th Preferred Lender You must list all your other lenders for B1 to B9, C1 to C9, ... Z1 to Z9. These lenders will not be displayed in the preferred lender list box on the Accept Awards page. All your lenders must, however, be listed in the DBD in order for you to be able to offer awards for them. You must also enter a 2-digit translate length in positions 45 and 46 of the DE card for DBD element SW073. This will enable the system to translate the lender IDs to the names of the lenders. If you do not enter a translate length, the names of the lenders will not appear on the Accept Awards page. Min Award The system will not allow students to accept an award amount that is below the specified Min Award amount (the minimum amount the lender will process). Table 8-3 Accept Awards Settings on Screen 331 8-10 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 8 Financial Aid Accept Awards Award Acceptance Time Period Your settings on Screen W26 determine when students can take action on their awards, and if they can continue to change their partial award amount until the award is disbursed. A student can change the action until the deadline for action on the award, as set by the Time Control and Number of Days to Take Action options on Screen W26 (Financial Aid 1). The award will not be displayed on the Accept Awards page after the specified date. Figure 8-7 Financial Aid 1 (W26) Screen Whether you Set Offered Amount to Accept Amount determines if students can change the accepted amount for funds that allow partial amounts. • When Set Offered Amount to Accept Amount is N, students can modify their award amounts until the award is disbursed. If a student accepts a partial amount (e.g., 4,000 is offered and the student accepts 2,000) and then decides to accept the full amount, the student can enter the full amount of the offer as the Accept Partial Amount (e.g., 4000) or just select Accept as the Action. • When Set Offered Amount to Accept Amount is Y, the system will change the offered amount to the specified partial amount after the student selects on the Accept Awards page. The accepted award amount will be locked in and the student will not be able to change it via the Web. To change the award amount, he/she will need to contact your institution. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 8-11 8 Financial Aid Accept Awards If a student declines an award, he/she will not be able to take any further action for that award. When students decide to accept awards that they’ve already declined, they have to contact your institution. Once you re-offer the award, the student will be able to accept it. Students can view/accept awards for up to five years of award information, as specified by Available Award Years on Screen W26 (Financial Aid 1). They just need to choose Select Award Year on the Financial Aid menu to select another year and then select Accept Awards. Award Messages Your institution sets up each award message on Screen 339 (Award Messages) for a specified fund. Figure 8-8 Screen 339 (Award Messages) On Screen 331 (Fund Attribute), you identify the Award Message code that is to be displayed for the specified fund. Figure 8-9 Specifying Fund’s Award Message on Screen 331 8-12 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 8 Financial Aid Accept Awards Unless a different message code is specified for the student in the Msg field on Screen 317 (Award Distribution) or Screen 318 (Award Entry), the Award Message code that was set up for the fund on Screen 331 is displayed on the Accept Awards page. Figure 8-10 Changing a Student’s Award Message on Screen 317 or 318 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 8-13 8 Financial Aid Accept Awards General Messages In addition to award messages, general messages may also be displayed on the Accept Awards page. Your institution sets up each general message on Screen 338 (General Messages) with a corresponding message code. Figure 8-11 Screen 338 (General Messages) On Screen 325 (Packaging), you identify up to 10 general messages that apply to a specified student for a specified award period, and should be printed on their Financial Aid Notification (FAN) letters. Figure 8-12 Specifying General Messages on Screen 325 If a general message is specified for a student, it is displayed without a message code above the award messages on the Accept Awards page. 8-14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 8 Financial Aid Accept Awards Terms and Conditions If your institution has set Terms & Conditions to Y on Screen W26, the system will display the following information above . Before selecting on the Accept Awards page to accept their awards, students MUST select the checkbox to indicate that they agree to your financial aid terms and conditions. (Students are not required to check the box when declining their awards.) Students can select Terms and Conditions to display your institution’s terms and conditions. For example: Figure 8-13 Sample Terms and Conditions Window Note: SCT delivers a sample set of terms and conditions with the Student Self-Service application. We recommend that you update the sactermcond.htm file with your institution’s terms and conditions. Students should read through all the terms and conditions for accepting financial aid at your institution and then Close the window to return to the Accept Awards page. Once they select the checkbox to acknowledge their acceptance of the terms and conditions, they can submit their changes on the Accept Awards page. The date on which the student accepted the terms and conditions will be listed in the Term/Cond field on Screen 325 (Packaging). SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 8-15 8 Financial Aid Award Information by Year Award Information by Year Students select Award Information by Year on the Financial Aid menu to look at their award information for the specified award year. The term, offered amount, accepted amount, paid amount, and award message will be displayed for each fund for which: • Pr on Awd Ltr is set to Y or X on Screen 331 (Fund Attribute) and • Awd Ltr Print is set to Y or N for the student on Screen 317, 318, or 325 for the specified award year Figure 8-14 Award Information by Year page 8-16 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 8 Financial Aid Award Information by Year Above the award table on the Award Information by Year page, the system displays the following information: • A link to the Accept Awards page so the student can take action on any remaining financial aid award amounts that he/she has yet to accept. This link will not be displayed if the only action the student can take is to decline his/her awards. • If you set Terms & Conditions to Y on Screen W26, the page will display a link to your institution’s financial aid Terms and Conditions. For example: Figure 8-15 Sample Terms and Conditions Window • The last date on which someone in your Financial Aid Office modified the student’s award package. Within the award table, the following information is displayed: • The name of the Award is displayed as a link to the Financial Aid Opportunities page, so the student can learn more about the type of aid he/she has been awarded. If your institution has chosen (on Screen 331) to display a list of preferred lenders for the specified fund, a lender list box will be displayed under the award name for students for whom no lender history is recorded in the system. Once a lender is selected (or if one was previously assigned on Screen 318), only the lender name will appear under the name of the award. • The Award Message is displayed as a link to the Message explanation that is displayed farther down the page. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 8-17 8 Financial Aid Award Information by Year • In addition to award messages, the Award Information by Year page will also display any general messages that have been specified for the student on Screen 325 (Packaging). The Award Information by Year page displays the same detailed award information found on Screen 318 (Award Entry). Figure 8-16 Award Entry Screen (318) Students can view up to five years of award information, as specified by your setting for Available Award Years on Screen W26 (Financial Aid 1). Figure 8-17 Financial Aid 1 (W26) Screen They just need to choose Select Award Year on the Financial Aid menu to select another year, and then select Award Information by Year. 8-18 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 8 Financial Aid Award History Award History Students select Award History on the Financial Aid menu to view all of their award information. The Award History page will list information about those funds for which: • Pr on Awd Ltr is set to Y or X on Screen 331 (Fund Attribute) and • Awd Ltr Print is set to Y or N for the student on Screen 317, 318, or 325 for the specified award year Figure 8-18 Award History page SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 8-19 8 Financial Aid Student Requirements Student Requirements Students select Student Requirements on the Financial Aid menu to view a list of the requirements they must complete before they can receive their financial aid award. Figure 8-19 Student Requirements page • The Documents Required section displays a list of the documents/ forms that are still required, the date each was received (if they are incomplete), and the status of each document. If the Status of a document is Not received and you have specified a URL/Form Location and Description on Screen 337, the page will display a link to download the document/form from your institution or acquire information from another Website. Completed and waived requirements are displayed in a separate table below the list of documents that are required and incomplete. 8-20 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 8 Financial Aid Student Requirements If the Status is blank on Screen 306, Not Received is displayed for the document Status on the Student Requirements page. Figure 8-20 Document Tracking Screen (306) The messages for the required documents and the links to these documents are set on Screen 337. Any documents your institution is providing students must be located in the /WEBDOCS/FORMDOCS directory on your server. On Screen 337, you specify (on line A) the location of the document as /FORMDOCS/[Filename.pdf]. You can also direct a student to another Website to acquire information/forms for a missing requirement. For example: Figure 8-21 Tracking Messages Screen (337) On line B, you specify the description for the document as it is to be displayed as a link on the Student Requirements page. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 8-21 8 Financial Aid Student Requirements • The Document Satisfied section lists the completed documents that have already been received. • The Financial Aid Transcripts Required From section (if applicable) lists the schools from which transcripts are required or incomplete, the dates each transcript covers, the date received, and their status. (Transcript requests which have a Current Status of Complete, Deleted, or Waived on Screen 305 are not listed.) Figure 8-22 Transcript Tracking Screen (305) 8-22 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 8 Financial Aid Cost of Attendance Cost of Attendance Students view the Cost of Attendance page for a list of the expenses they are likely to incur in the specified award year. Figure 8-23 Cost of Attendance page SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 8-23 8 Financial Aid Cost of Attendance The table shows the student’s class level, residency, and housing type for the specified award year, followed by the estimated expenses. This data is also found in the Budget Calculation Description and Budget Summary sections of Screen 312 (Budget). Figure 8-24 Budget Screen (312) If the student has an award in more than one award period within the award year, the primary award period information displays first and the secondary award period information displays below it. If the student has not submitted information regarding their class level, residency, and housing: • The Cost of Attendance will be listed as $0 on the Financial Aid Summary page • No amounts will be listed on the Cost of Attendance page. 8-24 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 8 Financial Aid Academic Progress Academic Progress Students select Academic Progress on the Financial Aid menu to view information about their academic progress for each academic period in which they are enrolled during the selected award year. Figure 8-25 Academic Progress page This page essentially displays the translation for the SAP (Student Academic Progress) code found on Screen 325 (Packaging). Figure 8-26 Screen 325 (Packaging) Status is Satisfactory (SAP=1, 2, or 3), Unsatisfactory (SAP=4), or Not Known (SAP is blank). A student may want to monitor his/her academic progress because poor academic performance can affect a student’s eligibility for financial assistance. If the academic progress cannot be determined because the student does not have a packaging segment in the SIS data files, the student is prompted to contact a financial aid administrator. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 8-25 8 Financial Aid Financial Aid Transcript Financial Aid Transcript Students select Financial Aid Transcript on the Financial Aid menu to view their unofficial financial aid transcript for the specified award year. Figure 8-27 Financial Aid Transcript - Sections A thru C 8-26 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 8 Financial Aid Financial Aid Transcript Figure 8-28 Financial Aid Transcript - Sections D & E SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 8-27 8 Financial Aid Application and Information Links Application and Information Links The Financial Aid Links page provides links to information that is available to anyone visiting your Website. Students can access this page by selecting either Application and Information Links on the Financial Aid menu or Financial Aid Application and Information Links on the Student Self-Service home page. Figure 8-29 Financial Aid Links page The links to the Financial Aid resources are provided as references for your students and applicants. Financial aid applicants can gather background information, estimate their need, and apply for financial aid from these external Websites. By providing applicants with these resources, you will save your financial aid administrators valuable time. 8-28 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 8 Financial Aid Application and Information Links Students can select the icons or the underlined links on the Financial Aid Links page to go to Web sites of other financial aid resources: Link or Federal Aid Application or Renewal Application or General Scholarship Search Tools or Student Government Services or General Financial Aid Information or National Student Loan Data System or Federal Direct Loan Information Description The Free Application for Federal Student Aid (FAFSA) form on the U.S. Department of Education’s Website. The Website describes some options for downloading the FAFSA form, filling it out, and sending it in via the Web. The Financial Aid Search Through the Web (FastWeb) site. The FastWeb is a free scholarship search service with a database including information about scholarships, fellowships, grants, and loans from thousands of sources. The U.S Government’s site for providing information to students about the government and its available services. This is another link to the FinAid Website (The SmartStudent Guide to Financial Aid). This site provides access to a variety of free information about financial aid, like resource materials, college planning, and award guides. The National Student Loan Data System (NSLDS), the U.S. Department of Education's central database for student aid. It receives data from various guaranty agencies, the Direct Loan program, and over 2,500 schools. Students can check the status of their loans and grants at this site. This is a link to the federal site for direct loans. Students can check the status of any direct loans on this Website. If your school does not participate in direct lending, you may wish to remove this link from the General Financial Aid Links page. This is a link to the ELM Resources Website which contains the latest loan status provided by lenders and servicers participating in ELM. or Education Loan Management System If your school does not participate in ELM, you may wish to remove this link from the General Financial Aid Links page. Table 8-4 Links to Financial Aid Resources SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 8-29 8 Financial Aid Other Financial Aid Resources Link Description This is a direct link to the U.S. Department of Education’s Website. This site includes a wealth of information about the offices and programs of the U.S. Department of Education. or Department of Education Information or CSS PROFILE Registration or Mapping Your Future This is a direct link to the Website for the College Scholarship Service’s (CSS) PROFILE program. Information collected on PROFILE is used by many colleges, universities, and scholarship programs to help them award non-federal student aid funds. If your school does not use CSS PROFILE, you may wish to remove this link from the General Financial Aid Links menu. This is a direct link to the Online Student Loan Counseling Website. It provides students and parents with information on financial strategies, career options, and college planning. This site allows borrowers to complete their entrance and exit counseling on-line. Table 8-4 Links to Financial Aid Resources (continued) Other Financial Aid Resources Students select the icons on the right side of the Personal Financial Aid Information page to go to sites of three other financial aid resources: Link Description The National Student Loan Data System (NSLDS), the U.S. Dept. of Education's central database for student aid. It receives data from various guaranty agencies, the Direct Loan program, and over 2,500 schools. Students can check the status of their loans and grants. The Free Application for Federal Student Aid (FAFSA) form on the U.S. Dept. of Education’s Website. The Website describes options for downloading the FAFSA form, filling it out, and sending it in. The U.S Government’s site for providing information to students about the government and its available services. Table 8-5 Other FinAid Sites 8-30 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 8 Financial Aid Institution Financial Aid Opportunities Institution Financial Aid Opportunities The first link on the Financial Aid Links page (Review University Financial Aid Opportunities) leads to information about financial aid that is available at your institution. Figure 8-30 Sample Financial Aid Opportunities page - part 1 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 8-31 8 Financial Aid Institution Financial Aid Opportunities Figure 8-31 Sample Financial Aid Opportunities page - part 2 8-32 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 8 Financial Aid E-mail to Financial Aid Office This page provides key background information about the sources and types of financial aid available to students at your institution. It includes general information about available aid from federal, state, and institutional sources, as well as various types of aid (grants, loans, scholarships, and work study programs). You should customize this page so that students and prospects will receive financial aid information that is specific to your institution. Additionally, you may wish to include details such as the phone number of your financial aid office, as well as any other institutionspecific information. E-mail to Financial Aid Office Using the second link on the Financial Aid Links page, applicants can e-mail your university’s financial aid office. This link allows a student to send a message to a pre-defined e-mail address or contact a person at your institution’s financial aid office. You need to update the TSRVWEB.INI file on your Web server to customize this link to directly reference an administrator at your university. Refer to page 3-79 for information on setting the FinAidMail option in the TSRVWEB.INI file. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 8-33 8 Financial Aid Select Award Year Select Award Year When you followed the instructions in Chapter 3 for implementing Student Self-Service, you had the option of selecting a Default Award Year. If your institution defined the Default Award Year on Screen W26 (Financial Aid 1), all the Financial Aid features will use this default year as the basis for all information that is found and displayed. Figure 8-32 Financial Aid 1 Screen (W26) Students can select a different award year for which to view financial aid information. Figure 8-33 Select Award Year page The list of award years is defined by your setting for Available Award Years on Screen W26. 8-34 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 9 Courses Functional Overview 9 Courses This chapter discusses the options on the Courses menu for SCT Plus Student Self-Service and how to access them. Functional Overview The Courses menu lists features that students can use to view information about the courses available at your institution. Figure 9-1 Courses menu Three of these features (Course Catalog, Course Sections, and Course Section Search) can also be accessed by prospective students from the Student Home page. All of these options are described on the following pages. When you followed the instructions for Implementing SCT Plus Student SelfService (Chapter 3), you specified which options should be displayed on the Courses menu. To rename a menu option, modify the settings in the TSRVWEB.INI and MenuItems.js files. To remove a menu option, modify the settings in the MenuItems.js file and on Screen WT1. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 9-1 9 Courses Functional Overview If you are reading this guide from a PDF file, use the corresponding page link to go directly to information about renaming or removing the menu option; otherwise, turn to the designated page in your printout. Menu Option To Rename: To Remove: Course Catalog 3-91 3-96 Course Sections 3-91 3-96 Course Section Search 3-91 3-96 WebCT 3-91 3-96 Table 9-1 Changing Courses Menu Options Use the settings on Screen WT1 (Student Transaction Security) to enable the options you are displaying on the Courses Menu (and disable those you are not displaying). Figure 9-2 Course Menu Options on Screen WT1 9-2 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 9 Courses Course Catalog Course Catalog The Course Catalog feature of Student Self-Service allows prospects and students to view information about all approved courses for the current academic year. Prospects and students can access the Course Catalog from the Student Home page. Students can also select this feature from the Courses menu once they have logged into Student Self-Service. Defining Which Course Information to Display On Screen W21 (Student Records 1), you specify what information is to be displayed for the Course Catalog: Figure 9-3 Student Records 1 (W21) Screen • For which Academic Year • How much information from the RJFILE to display for the courses (department description, course titles and descriptions, credit hours, prerequisites, and corequisites) Set to Y To List: Item 1 Course title Item 2 Instructor’s name Item 3 Prerequisites Item 4 Co-requisites Item 5 Notes Items 6 to 9 User-defined paragraphs Table 9-2 Course Catalog Settings on Screen W21 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 9-3 9 Courses Course Catalog Refer to page 3-15 for more information on these W21 settings. Viewing the Course Catalog A prospect or student will follow these steps in order to view a list of the courses being offered for the Academic Year specified on Screen W21 (Student Records 1). 1. Prospects and students can access the Course Catalog from the Student Home page. Students can also access this feature from the Courses menu once they have logged into Student Self-Service. 2. Specify the subject for which courses are to be listed and select . Figure 9-4 Course Catalog - Select Subject page 3. View the list of courses that are being offered for the specified subject and Academic Year. Figure 9-5 Sample Course Catalog List page 9-4 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 9 Courses Course Sections Course Sections Prospects and students can view a list of the courses that are available for a specified term and subject. 1. Prospects and students can select the Courses Sections feature from the Student Home page. Students can also select this feature from the Courses menu once they have logged into Student Self-Service. 2. Prospects must specify the term for which they want to view a list of available course sections and select . Students will only be prompted for a term if a valid term has not yet been specified. Figure 9-6 Course Sections - Select Term page 3. Choose the subject area for which to view available courses and select . (The system will only display those subject areas for which courses are being offered for the specified term.) Figure 9-7 Course Sections - Select Subject page SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 9-5 9 Courses Course Sections 4. Select the desired course. Figure 9-8 Course Sections - Select Course page 5. View the list of available course sections for the specified term, subject, and course. Figure 9-9 Course Sections - Available Sections List page 9-6 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 9 Courses Course Sections • The way the Course Title appears on the Available Course Sections page is determined by your setting for the Subtitle Print field on Screen 129 (Course Section Maintenance). Figure 9-10 Course Section Maintenance Screen (129) Set Subtitle Print to one of the following values: Set To To Display: Blank Course Section Title, followed by the extended subtitle (if present) S Course Inventory Title, followed by the Course Section Title E Extended Title only Table 9-3 Settings for Subtitle Print field SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 9-7 9 Courses Course Sections • The Course Sections page displays the course section’s call number, which is used when registering for a class on the Drop/ Add Classes page. • If you set the RZKCRSK-DISPLAY-NOTES option in the ACINPM copybook to Y, the system will display any course notes from Screen 131 (Section Registration Controls) under the course section description. Figure 9-11 Section Registration Controls Screen (131) • If course fees are specified on Screen TCF, they are displayed under any course notes. Figure 9-12 Course Fees Screen (TCF) • This page will also display the Course IDs that make up a Multiple Course Enrollment (MCE) section, as specified on Screen 12A (Multiple Course Enrollment Maintenance). 9-8 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 9 Courses Course Section Search Course Section Search Prospects and students can narrow down their search for courses by using a set of search options (e.g., time and location). 1. Prospects and students can select the Course Section Search feature on the Student Home page. Students can also select this feature on the Courses menu once they have logged into Student Self-Service. 2. Prospects must specify the term for which they want to view a list of available course sections and select . Students will only be prompted for a term if a valid term has not yet been specified. Figure 9-13 Course Section Search - Select Term page 3. Select the Subject area for which to view available courses. (The system will only display those subject areas for which courses are being offered for the specified term.) Figure 9-14 Course Section Search - Options page SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 9-9 9 Courses Course Section Search 4. Select the search criteria for finding the desired course sections. Note: The sample page shows all the search features available. The number of search features displayed on your page depends on which optional search features you selected in the ACINPM copybook (when implementing Student SelfService in Chapter 3). Option Day Used to Find Course Sections: ACINPM Setting Which meet on the specified day(s) of the week and/or are TBA (To Be Announced) -- Earliest Which begin on or after the specified time. RZKCRSKStart Time If “All Times” is specified, the system will TIME-INCREMENT search for all course sections which start between 7am and the specified Latest Start Time. Latest Which begin on or before the specified Start Time time. If “All Times” is specified, the system will search for all the course sections which start at or after the Earliest Start Time. -- Session Which are available for the specified term. The list of choices in the Session list box are the same as those listed on the SIS CAL Screen for the specified term. Sections Which are open to more students RZKCRSK-PRINT-OPEN Site Which are given at a specified site. You must define the list of valid sites in the DBD. RZKCRSKDISPLAY-SITE Level Which are offered for the specified course RZKCRSKDISPLAY-COURSE-LEVEL level. You must define the list of valid levels via DBD element AA615 and/or the Course Level Table in the ACINPM copybook. WebCT Which are only offered via WebCT RZKCRSKDISPLAY-WEBCT Table 9-4 Course Section Search Options 5. Select criteria. 9-10 to search for the course sections that meet the search SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 9 Courses Course Section Search 6. View the list of available courses, as determined by the specified search criteria. Figure 9-15 Course Section Search - List page • The way the Course Title appears on the Available Course Section Search page is determined by your setting for the Subtitle Print field on Screen 129 (Course Section Maintenance). • The Course Section Search page displays the course section’s call number, which is used when registering for a class on the Drop/ Add Classes page. • If you set the RZKCRSK-DISPLAY-NOTES option in the ACINPM copybook to Y, the system will display the course notes from Screen 131 (Section Registration Controls) under the course section description. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 9-11 9 Courses Course Section Search • If course fees are specified on Screen TCF, they are displayed under any course notes. Figure 9-16 Course Fees (TCF) Screen • This page will also display the Course IDs that make up a Multiple Course Enrollment (MCE) section, as specified on Screen 12A (Multiple Course Enrollment Maintenance). 9-12 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 9 Courses WebCT WebCT Students access WebCT.com, The e-Learning Hub to take a WebCT course. When a student selects the WebCT option on the Courses menu, he/she will view the WebCT.com Home page. Figure 9-17 Sample WebCT Home page After a student registers for a WebCT course, he/she will be able to access the WebCT Student Course page via his/her Detailed Schedule. The student can then view information (course materials, class schedules, class syllabus, etc.) about the WebCT course. Although the functionality of the stand-alone and Campus Pipeline/ Luminis-enabled versions of SCT Plus Student Self-Service is very similar, there is a difference in how these two versions access the WebCT Student Course page from the student’s Detailed Schedule. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 9-13 9 Courses WebCT When using the stand-alone version, students need to log into WebCT. Figure 9-18 WebCT Login window Campus Pipeline/Luminis and WebCT, however, share a single login so students do not need to log into WebCT. Figure 9-19 Accessing WebCT via Student Self-Service The steps for accessing WebCT from the stand-alone version are detailed in the Detailed Schedule section on page 7-14. 9-14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 10 Prospective Students Functional Overview 10 Prospective Students This chapter discusses the Prospective Students feature of SCT Plus Student Self-Service and how to access it. Functional Overview The Prospective Students feature of Student Self-Service allows prospective students to request information about your institution. Set the Prospective Students option to Y on Screen WT1 (Student Web Transaction Security) to allow access to the Prospective Students feature on the Student home page. Figure 10-1 Student Web Transaction Security Screen (WT1) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 10-1 10 Prospective Students Functional Overview The types of information that can be requested are listed on Screen 204 (Communication Flags) and Screen 2E5 (Prospect/Preapp Entry). Figure 10-2 Communication Flags Screen (204) Figure 10-3 Prospect/Preapp Entry Screen (2E5) These information types are defined by DBD element A 602. If your institution has made modifications to the communications flags, you will need to modify the delivered HTML to reflect these DBD changes. 10-2 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 10 Prospective Students First Time Users First Time Users Prospective students who have not used your Student Self-Service site before will be able to create a Login ID and PIN and request information from your institution. 1. Select Prospective Students on the Student Self-Service home page. 2. Select I am here for the first time on the Prospective Students Entry page. Figure 10-4 Prospective Students Entry page SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 10-3 10 Prospective Students First Time Users 3. Enter personal information about themselves and the prospective term in which they are interested in attending your institution. Figure 10-5 Request Information page - New Prospect - Part 1 10-4 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 10 Prospective Students First Time Users 4. Scroll down the page and specify which information they want to receive from your institution, and select . Figure 10-6 Request Information page - New Prospect - Part 2 Note: Prospective students must specify this information before selecting to create their Login ID and PIN: • SSN • Date of Birth • 6-digit PIN • Address (City, State, Zip Code) • First and Last Name • Prospective Term/Year • Requested Information 5. Review the Login confirmation page to make sure that their login ID and documentation requests were accepted. Figure 10-7 Login Confirmation page SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 10-5 10 Prospective Students First Time Users The new prospect’s personal information can be viewed on Screen 2E5 (Prospect/Preapp Entry). His/her information requests can be viewed on 2E5 and Screen 204 (Communications Flags). Figure 10-8 Prospect’s Information Requests on Screen 204 Figure 10-9 Prospect’s Information Requests on Screen 2E5 10-6 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 10 Prospective Students Logged in Previously Logged in Previously Prospective students who have used your Student Self-Service site before will be able to enter their previously created Login ID and PIN to request information from your institution. 6. After selecting Prospective Students on the Student Self-Service home page, previous users will select I have logged in previously on the Prospective Students Entry page. Figure 10-10 Prospective Students Entry page 7. Enter their Login ID and PIN, and select . Figure 10-11 Login page SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 10-7 10 Prospective Students Logged in Previously 8. Review the list of documents that they have already requested, and make any additional selections and select . Figure 10-12 Request Additional Information 9. Review the confirmation message to make sure that their request was accepted. Figure 10-13 Request Additional Information Confirmation page 10-8 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11 Admissions Functional Overview 11 Admissions This chapter discusses the Admissions options of SCT Plus Student Self-Service and how to access them. Functional Overview The Admissions options allow prospective students to apply for admission to your institution via the Web, and to view the status of an existing application. Set the Admissions option on Screen WT1 (Student Web Transaction Security) to allow prospective students to access the Admissions feature on the Student home page. Figure 11-1 Student Web Transaction Screen (WT1) When submitting an application to your institution, an applicant will: 1. Create an account at your institution 2. Complete an application 3. Review any of his/her existing Web applications 4. Submit a completed application 5. Pay the application fee The flowchart on the next page illustrates the automated flow, which leads the applicant from one section (Web page) of the application to the next (as is described in this chapter). An applicant can, however, skip from one section of his/her application to another using the links available on each Web page. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11-1 11 Admissions Functional Overview Select Apply for Admission link Enter Login ID SID in AAFILE? Yes Enter Correct PIN No Create an Account with your institution Specify Enrollment Intentions Any Applications on File? Select Application Yes No Start a New Application Continue Application Complete Application Sections Specify Personal Information Review Application Specify High School History Specify College History Enter any necessary changes Specify Residency and Citizenship Submit Application Pay Application Fee Specify Personal References Specify Employment History Specify Client Requirements Check or Money Order Credit Card Payment Print Payment Form Enter Credit Card Information Complete Form and Mail with Payment Figure 11-2 Admissions Automated Process Flow for Stand-alone Student Self-Service 11-2 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11 Admissions Web Page Design Web Page Design The Admissions Web pages have been carefully designed with both novice and experienced computer users in mind. Accordingly, each Web page follows a consistent design standard within an easy-tofollow series of pages. This design will make it easy for your applicants to enter the information your institution requires. Note: Microsoft Internet Explorer was used to display the sample Admissions Web pages in this chapter. Slight differences may appear when using other Web browsers. Institution Name The sample Web pages included in this chapter, display University in some of the Web page text. University will automatically be replaced by the name of your institution when you install Student Self-Service. Note: If for some reason, the name of your institution changes, update the InstName setting in the TSRVWEB.INI file. Other Links Other links are displayed at the bottom of many of the Admissions Web pages to make it easy for applicants to send an e-mail to an office at your institution, access general financial aid information, or go to your university’s home page. Here’s a sample set of links: Figure 11-3 Sample Other Links These links must be set by your institution when you install Student Self-Service. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11-3 11 Admissions Web Page Design In the TSRVWEB.INI file, you can update the names and e-mail addresses for the corresponding offices at your institution, and the names and URLs for the links, as we did for the sample links: This Sample Link E-mail Undergraduate Admissions1 E-mail Graduate Admissions1 E-mail International Admissions1 E-mail Financial Aid Office E-mail Registrar’s Office E-mail Billing Office E-mail Housing Office Return to University Home Page1,2 Is Specified By Using This field in TSRVWEB.INI Name of Link StuAdmEmail1Ttl^ E-mail Address StuAdmEmail1^ Name of Link StuAdmEmail2Ttl^ E-mail Address StuAdmEmail2^ Name of Link StuAdmEmail3Ttl^ E-mail Address StuAdmEmail3^ Name of Link FinAidMailTtl^ E-mail Address FinAidMail^ Name of Link StuRegOfcEmailTtl^ E-mail Address StuRegOfcEmail^ Name of Link StuBusOfcEmailTtl^ E-mail Address StuBusOfcEmail^ Name of Link StuHousOfcEmailTtl^ E-mail Address StuHousOfcEmail^ Name of Link InstHomePage^ URL InstHomePgURL^ 1You do not have to display these links. There is also a Disp field in the TSRVWEB.INI file for each of these links (e.g., StuAdmEmailDisp1^). Set the corresponding Disp field to nodisplay for any link you do not want to display on the Web pages. 2If you display this link, you must provide a link back to Student Self-Service: Admissions on your institution’s Home page. When applicants return to Student Self-Service: Admissions, they will have to log in again. Then, depending on whether they have applications on file or not, they will be guided to the appropriate Admissions Web page. Table 11-1 Sample Links Defined in TSRVWEB.INI Refer to “Step 20: Updating Institution-Specific Settings in TSRVWEB.INI” on page 3-76 for more information. 11-4 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11 Admissions Web Page Design Navigation Bar Once an applicant specifies his/her Enrollment Intentions, his/her application is created and the system begins to display a navigation bar near the top of the Admissions Web pages: Figure 11-4 Sample Navigation Bar The navigation bar consists of links an applicant may use to go to the various sections of his/her application, or to review his/her application. The number of links displayed in the navigation bar depends on your institution’s specifications on Screen W04. Figure 11-5 Web Required Admissions Pages screen (W04) Only those application sections you have chosen to display for the corresponding Application Type will be displayed in the navigation bar. The system will highlight the name of the application section currently being viewed by the applicant ( in this example). The to the left of the sample Navigation Bar indicates that the applicant has completed the Enrollment Intentions section of the application. After an applicant completes a section of an application, the system will display a to the left of the name of the completed section. This is an easy way for the applicant to keep track of the sections he/she has completed. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11-5 11 Admissions Creating a New Account Creating a New Account In order to apply for admission to your institution, an applicant must first create a new account at your institution. 1. Select Apply for Admission on the Student Self-Service home page. 2. View the Login page that corresponds to your institution’s setting for Generate SID on Screen WA2. (If you are using the SSN instead of the Campus-Wide ID (CWID) as the Login ID, you modified the text on the Login page when you implemented Student Self-Service.) • If you allow automated ID generation (the default), then the following Login page will be displayed. Figure 4-6 Login page for Institutions using ID Generation Most applicants will enter their Social Security Number (SSN) and select . If, however, an applicant does not have an SSN or prefers not to enter it, he/she will select I do not have a Social Security Number to have the system generate an ID for him/her. 11-6 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11 Admissions Creating a New Account • If you require all applicants to use their SSN as their ID and do not provide automated ID generation ( Generate SID is N on Screen WA2), another Login page will be displayed. Applicants will be required to enter their SSN, or call or e-mail your Admissions Office if they do not have (or remember) their SSN. Figure 11-7 Login page for Institutions not using ID Generation 3. If the specified SSN is already on file (because the applicant had his/her test scores or transcript sent to your institution), but the applicant does not have a PIN, he/she may need to call or e-mail your institution for a PIN before continuing. • If the applicant was never assigned a PIN and your institution set Allow Web PIN Creation to Y on Screen WA2, the applicant will be asked to enter information to verify his/her identity. The information the applicant enters (name, address, phone number, gender, and/or date of birth) will be checked against information that is already stored with his/her SSN in the system. If the information matches (according to the weights you set on Screen WA2), the system will allow the applicant to create a PIN so he/ she can use Student Self-Service: Admissions right away. Figure 11-8 Web Admissions System Options (WA2) screen SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11-7 11 Admissions Creating a New Account • If the applicant was never assigned a PIN and your institution set Allow Web PIN Creation to N on Screen WA2, the applicant will have to call or e-mail your institution for a PIN before continuing. • If the applicant does not have a PIN because an administrator at your institution deleted the applicant’s PIN on Screen 103 (Personal Data), the applicant will have to call or e-mail your institution for a PIN before continuing. An administrator will need to create a new PIN for the applicant on Screen 103 and then notify the applicant of his/her new PIN. Figure 11-9 Personal Data (103) screen 11-8 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11 Admissions Creating a New Account 4. Enter a PIN and the other required name and address information. Figure 11-10 Create Account page Note: If the applicant enters his/her SSN on the Login page, the Social Security Number field is displayed as a read-only field on the Create Account page. If the applicant did not enter his/her SSN on the Login page, the Social Security Number field is not displayed on the Create Account page. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11-9 11 Admissions Creating a New Account 5. Select to record the new account information in the following DBD elements. Field DBD Element Social Security Number STU_ID AA002 PIN PIN AA048 First/Given Name STU_NAME AA003 Middle Name Last/Family Name Suffix (Jr, Sr, etc.) Permanent Mailing Address Street Line 1 STREET_1 AD240 Street Line 2 STREET_2 AD245 US & Canadian City Addresses State/Province CITY AD250 STATE AD255 Zip/Postal Code ZIP_CODE_INTNTL AD260 Country COUNTRY AD263 Phone Number PHONE AD265 International Addresses Phone Number Preference PHONE_PREF AD26B City CITY AD250 Region PROVINCE AD257 Postal Code ZIP_CODE_INTNTL AD260 Country COUNTRY AD263 Phone Number PHONE AD265 Phone Number Preference PHONE_PREF AD26B Table 11-2 Applicant Account DBD Elements 11-10 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11 Admissions Creating a New Account 6. View the confirmation message. Figure 11-11 Application Account Confirmation page The Confirmation page displays the number that the applicant entered (or was assigned if your institution allows for ID generation and the applicant selected I do not have a Social Security Number on the Login page) and his/her Login ID. The applicant must enter this Login ID and his/her PIN to log into Admissions (or Student Services) in the future. The Login ID is determined by whether your institution is using the SSN or generating a CWID (Campus-Wide ID) for each student/ applicant. • If your institution has chosen to use the SSN as the Login ID, the Login ID will be the applicant’s 9-character SSN. • If your institution has chosen to protect the use of the SSN, the system will generate an 8-character CWID for use as the applicant’s Login ID. 7. Select application. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 to enter information for his/her 11-11 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant Completing an Application for a New Applicant Once an applicant has created an account at your institution, he/she can complete an application for admission. This section includes information about all of the application sections available: • Enrollment Intentions page • Personal Information page • High School History page • College History page • Residency and Citizenship page • Personal References page • Employment History page • Client Requirements page This section also includes information about reviewing and submitting an application. Note: If an applicant exits the Admissions feature before completing and submitting his/her application, he/she can log into the Admissions feature at a later date to complete the application. (Refer to the instructions for “Completing or Reviewing an Existing Application” on page 11-66.) Enrollment Intentions Each applicant must specify his/her enrollment intentions. After saving these details, an application in his/her name will be started. 1. Specify information about the type of application being submitted and select . Figure 11-12 Select Application Type page 11-12 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant Display of the text and link to your institution’s Admissions information Web page: on the Select Application Type, Select Application Term, and the other Enrollment Intention pages, is controlled by the following settings: Setting For Controls Display ADM Link Screen W05 Whether to display the text and link to your institution’s Web page that lists your admissions policies and the programs being offered. AdmInfoPage^ TSRVWEB.INI file The name of your institution’s See Page 3-49 3-82 Web page that displays Admissions information. AdmInfoPgURL^ TSRVWEB.INI file The URL for your institution’s Web page that displays Admissions information. 3-82 Table 11-3 Information on Select Application Type and Other Pages If you display this link, you must also provide a link back to Student Self-Service: Admissions from your institution’s Web page. When applicants return to Student Self-Service: Admissions, they will have to log in again. Then, depending on whether they have applications on file or not, they will be guided to the appropriate Admissions page. 2. Specify the intended term and select . Figure 4-13 Select Term page SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11-13 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant 3. Specify the intended and alternate major and select . Figure 4-14 Select Major page • Display of the Alternate Major is controlled by your setting on Screen W04. • In the Intended Major and Alternate Major fields, the system will list the programs for which the Web display option is Y and the Level matches the Level for the specified application type. You set the Level and Web options for programs on Screen 134. Figure 11-15 Undergraduate Level Courses on Screen 134 You set the Level for the application type on Screen W04. Figure 11-16 Settings for Undergraduate Applications on Screen W04 11-14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant 4. Enter the Enrollment Intentions information. Figure 11-17 Enrollment Intentions page SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11-15 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant Whether or not some of the fields are displayed on the Enrollment Intentions page depends on your settings on the following screens: Setting On Screen Controls Display of See Page Display ADM Link W05 “For more information on our programs, ...” 3-49 Minor W04 Intended Minor 3-46 Special Program W04 Special Program 3-46 Residency Status W05 Legal resident of [State]? 3-50 Full/Part-time W04 Full-time or part-time? 3-46 Early Decision W04 Early decision? 3-46 Fin Aid Intentions W05 Apply for financial aid? 3-50 Housing Intentions W05 Where do you plan to live? 3-50 Default Housing Val W04 The default setting for Where do you plan to live? 3-46 Prev Attendance W05 Previously attended university? 3-50 Prev Applied W05 Previously applied for admission at university? 3-50 Table 11-4 Optional Settings for Fields on Enrollment Intentions page 5. Select to save the data in these DBD elements. Field DBD Element Application Type APPL-WEB-TYPE MM55D Term of Entry APP_TERM MM301 Intended Major MAJOR_1 MM330 College/Degree COLLEGE_1 DEGREE_1 MM320 MM325 Intended Minor MINOR_1 MM350 Special Program SPECIAL_PGM_1 MM365 Alternate Major MAJOR_2 MM400 Alternate College/Degree COLLEGE_2 DEGREE_2 MM396 MM398 US Citizen? CITIZENSHIP AA015 Legal Resident of state? RESIDENT_STAT MM523 Full- or part-time student? AP_TIME_STAT MM505 Early Decision? APP_EARLY_DCSN_INT MM56I Table 11-5 Enrollment Intentions DBD Elements 11-16 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant Field DBD Element Financial Aid? APP_FIN_AID_INTNT MM56C Housing Intentions HOUS_STAT MM55C Previously Attended this Univ? ENRL_AT_INSTIT MM55A Previously Attended Date ENRL-DT MM55B Enrolled under another name? PREV_ENROLL_NAME AA03L Previously applied for admission? PREV_APPLIED AA03N Applied under another name? AA03M PREV_APPL_NAME Table 11-5 Enrollment Intentions DBD Elements (continued) The system also records the fact that the applicant has specified his/ her enrollment intentions by updating the WEB EI Completion option (MM-AP-WB-EI-FLAG) in DBD element MM56D. 6. View the Application Completion page. Figure 11-18 Completing Your Application page Note: If you turned off the Residence-Birth, Residence-Origin, Previous Legal, and Prior Legal options on Screen W05, applicants who answer Yes to the question “Are you a US citizen?” on the Enrollment Intentions page will not view the Residency and Citizenship page. The system will display a to the left of the Residency and Citizenship link on the Navigation Bar and display a message about the applicant’s Residency and Citizenship being completed. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11-17 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant The system displays the Deadline Dates that you specified on Screen W06. (The system will not specify any deadline for which you have not specified a date.) Figure 11-19 Web Admissions Application Type/Term screen (W06) 7. Select application. to continue with the next section of the Depending on the Application Type that was recorded when the applicant specified his/her enrollment intentions, the corresponding application sections are displayed for the applicant, as specified on Screen W04. Figure 11-20 Web Required Admissions Pages screen (W04) 11-18 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant Personal Information If your institution specified on Screen W04 that the Personal Information page should be displayed for the Application Type specified by the applicant, then the applicant is required to enter his/her personal information. 1. Verify the different names (Additional Name Information) that may be on file for him/her from the various academic records that may have been sent to your university. Figure 11-21 Personal Information page SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11-19 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant Display of some of the information on the page is determined by your Personal Information settings on Screen W05. Figure 11-22 Web Admissions Page Display Options Screen (W05) 2. Enter the additional personal information, scroll down the page, and enter the e-mail address information. Figure 11-23 E-mail Address Information 11-20 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant 3. Enter his/her personal phone numbers which are not associated with an address (e.g., cell phone, business phone, or fax number). Figure 11-24 Personal Phone Number Information SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11-21 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant 4. Enter his/her permanent address. (This will automatically be displayed for a new applicant who has completed the Create Account page.) Figure 11-25 Permanent Address Information Note: Address Types are defined on Screen W05. 11-22 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant 5. Enter the Temporary Mailing Address, if the applicant’s Current Mailing Address is not the same as his/her Permanent Mailing Address. Figure 11-26 Temporary Mailing Address Information SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11-23 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant 6. If your institution specified on Screen W04 that the Emergency Contact section should be displayed on the Personal Information page, the applicant must scroll down the page and enter the required emergency contact information. Figure 11-27 Emergency Contact Information 11-24 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant 7. Select to record the data from this page to the following DBD elements, and continue to the next section of the application. Field DBD Element Additional Name Information Other Last Name AA-PREV-NAME Other First Name (Up to 3 additional names) AA01B AA01C AA01D AA-NICKNAME AA053 Other Middle Name Other Suffix Preferred Nickname Personal Information Gender SEX AA011 Date of Birth BIRTH_DT AA010 Marital Status MARITAL_STAT AA012 Selective Service Status DRAFT_REGIS AA054 Veteran Status VET_CODE AA025 Disability Type HANDICAP_TYPE AA020 Religion RELIGION AA014 Ethnicity ETHNIC_ORIGIN AA013 Primary Language IN-NATIVE-LANGUAGE AMD48 How long studying English? IN-YEARS-STUDY-ENGL AMD49 Convicted of a felony? SPECIAL_PROFILE AA018 Name of Alumnus ALUM_NAME MM222 Alumnus Relationship ALUM_IN_FMLY MM220 E-Mail Addresses and Personal Web Page E-mail Address 1 EMAIL_1 AD110 Type EMA_TYPE_1 AD113 Preference EMA_PREF_1 AD111 E-mail Address 2 EMAIL_2 AD120 Type EMA_TYPE_2 AD123 Preference EMA_PREF_2 AD121 E-mail Address 3 EMAIL_3 AD130 Type EMA_TYPE_3 AD133 Preference EMA_PREF_3 AD131 Table 11-6 Personal Information DBD Elements SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11-25 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant Field DBD Element E-mail Address 4 EMAIL_4 AD140 Type EMA_TYPE_4 AD143 Preference EMA_PREF_4 AD141 E-mail Address 5 EMAIL_5 AD150 Type EMA_TYPE_5 AD153 Preference EMA_PREF_5 AD151 Personal Web Page URL PERS_WEB_PAGE AD160 Personal Phone Numbers Phone Number 1 PERS_NUMBER_1 AD010 Type PERS_NUM_TYPE_1 AD013 Preference PERS_NUM_PREF_1 AD011 Phone Number 2 PERS_NUMBER_2 AD020 Type PERS_NUM_TYPE_2 AD023 Preference PERS_NUM_PREF_2 AD021 Phone Number 3 PERS_NUMBER_3 AD030 Type PERS_NUM_TYPE_3 AD033 Preference PERS_NUM_PREF_3 AD031 Phone Number 4 PERS_NUMBER_4 AD040 Type PERS_NUM_TYPE_4 AD043 Preference PERS_NUM_PREF_4 AD041 Phone Number 5 PERS_NUMBER_5 AD050 Type PERS_NUM_TYPE_5 AD053 Preference PERS_NUM_PREF_5 AD051 Permanent Address Street Line 1 STREET_1 AD240 Street Line 2 STREET_2 AD245 City CITY AD250 State or Province STATE AD255 Zip or Postal Code ZIP_CODE_INTNTL AD260 Country COUNTRY AD263 Phone Number PHONE AD265 US or Canadian Addresses Phone Number Preference PHONE_PREF AD26B Table 11-6 Personal Information DBD Elements (continued) 11-26 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant Field DBD Element International City Addresses Region CITY AD250 PROVINCE AD257 Postal Code ZIP_CODE_INTNTL AD260 Country COUNTRY AD263 Phone Number PHONE AD265 Phone Number Preference PHONE_PREF AD26B Temporary Mailing Address Street Line 1 STREET_1 AD240 Street Line 2 STREET_2 AD245 City CITY AD250 State or Province STATE AD255 Zip or Postal Code ZIP_CODE_INTNTL AD260 Country COUNTRY AD263 Phone Number PHONE AD265 US or Canadian Addresses Phone Number Preference PHONE_PREF International City Addresses Region AD26B CITY AD250 PROVINCE AD257 Postal Code ZIP_CODE_INTNTL AD260 Country COUNTRY AD263 Phone Number PHONE AD265 Phone Number Preference PHONE_PREF AD26B Receive mail at address - From AD_BEGINDT AD268 Receive mail at address - To AD_ENDDT AD269 Table 11-6 Personal Information DBD Elements (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11-27 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant Field DBD Element Emergency Contact Information Emergency Contact Name EMERGENCY_CONTACT_1 AMA11 Relationship EMERGENCY_RELATION_1 AMA12 Personal Phone Number EMERGENCY_PHONE_1 AMA13 Type EMERGENCY_PH_TYPE_1 AMA14 Street Line 1 STREET_1 AD240 Street Line 2 STREET_2 AD245 City CITY AD250 State or Province STATE AD255 Zip or Postal Code ZIP_CODE_INTNTL AD260 Country COUNTRY AD263 Phone Number PHONE AD265 CITY AD250 PROVINCE AD257 Postal Code ZIP_CODE_INTNTL AD260 Country COUNTRY AD263 Phone Number PHONE AD265 Temporary address - From AD_BEGINDT AD268 Temporary address - To AD_ENDDT AD269 US or Canadian Addresses International City Addresses Region Table 11-6 Personal Information DBD Elements (continued) Note: When students return to the Personal Information page, they will also view the Status of each of their e-mail addresses, personal phone numbers, and Web page URL, and be able to change or Delete them. For example: Figure 11-28 Status Information for E-mail Addresses and Phone Numbers 11-28 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant High School History If your institution specified on Screen W04 that the High School History page should be displayed for the Application Type specified by the applicant, then the applicant is required to enter information about his/her high school. 1. Enter the name and location of the high school attended or indicate if home schooled or received a GED, and select . Figure 11-29 Locate High School page SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11-29 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant 2. Select his/her high school from the list displayed and select . Note: If no matches for the specified school name were found in the SIS School Index (AIFILE), the applicant can either choose locate your High School again or choose Institution Not Listed and select . Figure 11-30 Select High School page 3. Enter the required information about his/her dates of attendance at the specified high school. Figure 11-31 Add High School Information page Note: If the applicant selected a high school from the Institution Attended list box on the Select High School page, he/she will not be able to update the school name, city, state, or country on the Add High School Information page. The system will automatically display the information for schools found in the SIS School Index (AIFILE). 11-30 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant 4. Select to record the high school information in the following DBD elements: Field DBD Element Institution Attended - Name RB-AD-NAME RB610* Institution Attended - Code HS_INSTITUTION RB110* RB-AD-INST-CODE RB605* City RB-AD-CITY RB630* State RB-AD-STATE RB635* Country RB-AD-CNTRY RB645* Attended From HS_BEGIN_DT RB115 Attended To HS_END_DT RB120 Diploma Received? DIPLOMA_RCVD RB125 Home Schooled? -- -- Received a GED? -- -- * The name and address of the high school is only recorded in these DBD elements if the applicant specifies a school that is not listed in your institution’s AIFILE. Table 11-7 High School History DBD Elements 5. View the message verifying that his/her high school information has been recorded. Figure 11-32 High School History Information page 6. Either select to continue with the next section of the application or select add another High School to enter information about another high school attended. Note: The system will not display add another High School if the applicant already has 3 high schools on file. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11-31 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant College History If your institution specified on Screen W04 that the College History page should be displayed for the Application Type specified by the applicant, then the applicant is required to enter information about his/ her previous college coursework. 1. The applicant should indicate whether or not he/she has attended a college. Figure 11-33 Locate College page Either: • Enter the name and location of the college attended and select . Then continue with Step 2. • Select I have not taken any college or university courses and continue with the next section of the application. 11-32 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant 2. Select his/her college from the list displayed, and select . Note: If no matches for the specified school name were found in SIS, the applicant can either choose locate your college again or choose Institution Not Listed and select . Figure 11-34 Select College page 3. Enter information about the college attended. Figure 11-35 Add College Information page Note: If the applicant selected a college from the Institution Attended list box on the Select College page, he/she will not be able to update the school name, city, state, and country on the Add College Information page. The system will automatically display the information for schools found in the SIS School Index (AIFILE). SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11-33 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant 4. Select to record the college information in the following DBD elements: Field DBD Element Institution Attended - Name RB-AD-NAME RB610* Institution Attended - Code CO_INSTITUTION RB305* RB-AD-INST-CODE RB605* City RB-AD-CITY RB630* State RB-AD-STATE RB635* Country RB-AD-CNTRY RB645* Attended From CO_BEGIN_DT RB310 Attended To CO_END_DT RB315 Diploma Received? DEGREE_RCVD RB325 Degree Sought DEGREE_SOUGHT RB320 * The name and address of the college is only recorded in these DBD elements if the applicant specifies a school that is not listed in your institution’s AIFILE. Table 11-8 College History DBD Elements 5. View the message indicating that his/her college information has been recorded. Figure 11-36 College History Information page 6. Either choose Add another College to enter information about another college attended, or select to go onto the next section of the application. Note: The system will not display Add another College if the applicant already has 10 colleges on file. 11-34 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant Residency and Citizenship If your institution specified on Screen W04 that the Residency and Citizenship page should be displayed for the Application Type specified by the applicant, then the applicant is required to enter information about his/her background. If an applicant specified on the Enrollment Intentions page that he/she is a US citizen, the system will display the US Citizen page; otherwise, the International Applicant page will appear. For US Citizens 1. Answer the first set of residency and citizenship questions: Figure 11-37 US Citizens page Note: The County of Birth and County of Origin list boxes display the values your institution uses to determine residency. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11-35 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant Whether or not some of the fields are displayed on the US Citizens page depends on the following settings on Screen W05: Setting Controls Display of State Legal Res State of legal residence? How long have you lived at your legal address? Residence-Birth Residency at Birth section Residence-Origin Residency at First Admission - Origin Information section Table 11-9 Optional Settings for Fields on US Citizens page 2. If you specified on Screen W04 that the Previous Address information should be displayed on the Residency and Citizenship page, the applicant would scroll down to complete the Previous Address Information and Prior Legal Address Information sections. Figure 11-38 Previous Legal Address Information - US 11-36 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant Figure 11-39 Prior Legal Address Information - US 3. Select DBD elements. to record the information in the following Field DBD Element State of Legal Residence? APP_LEGL_RES_STATE MM56N Residency at Birth County of Birth BIRTH_COUNTY AA01H State of Birth BIRTH_STATE AA01F Country of Birth BIRTH_COUNTRY AA01G Residency at First Admission - Origin Information County of Origin COUNTY_ORIG AA017 State of Origin STATE_ORIG AA016 Country of Origin COUNTRY_RESID AA02D Table 11-10 US Citizen DBD Elements SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11-37 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant Field DBD Element Previous Legal Address Information How long at legal residence? APP_LEGAL_RES_TIME MM56O Street Line 1 AD-STREET-1 AD240 Street Line 2 AD-STREET-2 AD245 City CITY AD250 State or Province STATE AD255 Zip or Postal Code ZIP_CODE_INTNTL AD260 Country AD-CNTRY AD263 City CITY AD250 Region PROVINCE AD257 Postal Code ZIP_CODE_INTNTL AD260 Country COUNTRY AD263 Lived at this address - From: AD_BEGINDT AD268 Lived at this address - To: AD_ENDDT AD269 For US or Canadian Addresses: For International Addresses: Prior Legal Address Information Street Line 1 AD-STREET-1 AD240 Street Line 2 AD-STREET-2 AD245 City CITY AD250 State or Province STATE AD255 Zip or Postal Code ZIP_CODE_INTNTL AD260 Country COUNTRY AD263 City CITY AD250 Region PROVINCE AD257 Postal Code ZIP_CODE_INTNTL AD260 Country COUNTRY AD263 Lived at this address - From: AD_BEGINDT AD268 Lived at this address - To: AD_ENDDT AD269 For US or Canadian Addresses: For International Addresses: Table 11-10 US Citizen DBD Elements (continued) 11-38 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant For International Applicants 1. Answer the first set of residency and citizenship questions. Figure 11-40 International Applicants page SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11-39 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant 2. If you specified on Screen W04 that the Previous Address information should be displayed on the Residency and Citizenship page, the applicant would scroll down and complete that section: Figure 11-41 Previous Address Information - International 11-40 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant 3. Select DBD elements. to record the information in the following Field DBD Element Country of Citizenship CITIZENSHIP AA015 Native Country BIRTH_COUNTRY AA01G Permanent Resident of US? IN-PERMANENT-RESIDENT AMD34 If resident, Resident Alien Card Number IN-RES-ALIEN-CARD-NUM AMD35 Presently living in US? LIVING_IN_US AMD38 If living in US, date of entry? US_ENTRY_DT AMD43 Current Visa Type IN-PASSPORT-VISA-TYPE AMD30 Visa Issuance Date CURR_VISA_ISSUE_DT AMD32 Visa Expiration Date IN-CURR-VISA-EXPIR-DT AMD33 Did another institution issue your I-20? I20_STATUS AMD39 Assigned a SEVIS Number? TRACKING_IND AMD21 SEVIS Number SEVIS_ID AMD20 Previous Legal Address Information How long at legal residence? APP_LEGAL_RES_TIME MM56O Street Line 1 AD-STREET-1 AD240 Street Line 2 AD-STREET-2 AD245 City CITY AD250 State or Province STATE AD255 Zip or Postal Code ZIP_CODE_INTNTL AD260 Country AD-CNTRY AD263 City CITY AD250 Region PROVINCE AD257 Postal Code ZIP_CODE_INTNTL AD260 Country COUNTRY AD263 Lived at this address - From: AD_BEGINDT AD268 Lived at this address - To: AD_ENDDT AD269 For US or Canadian Addresses: For International Addresses: Table 11-11 International Applicants DBD Elements SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11-41 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant Field DBD Element Prior Legal Address Information Street Line 1 AD-STREET-1 AD240 Street Line 2 AD-STREET-2 AD245 City CITY AD250 State or Province STATE AD255 Zip or Postal Code ZIP_CODE_INTNTL AD260 Country COUNTRY AD263 City CITY AD250 Region PROVINCE AD257 Postal Code ZIP_CODE_INTNTL AD260 Country COUNTRY AD263 Lived at this address - From: AD_BEGINDT AD268 Lived at this address - To: AD_ENDDT AD269 For US or Canadian Addresses: For International Addresses: Table 11-11 International Applicants DBD Elements (continued) 11-42 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant Personal References If your institution specified on Screen W04 that the Personal References page should be displayed for the Application Type specified by the applicant, then the applicant is required to enter information for the number of personal references (up to three) specified on Screen W04. 1. Enter information for the required number of personal references (up to three, as specified on Screen W04). Figure 11-42 Personal References page SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11-43 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant 2. Select to save the following information (for each personal reference) in the following DBD elements. Field DBD Element Name REFERENCE_NAME AMB23 Relationship REFERENCE_RELATION AMB24 Title REFERENCE_TITLE AMB25 School or Company Name REFERENCE_COMPANY AMB26 E-mail Address REFERENCE_EMAIL AMB27 Street Line 1 STREET_1 AMB28 Street Line 2 STREET_2 AMB29 For US or Canadian Addresses: City CITY AMB30 State or Province STATE AMB31 Zip or Postal Code ZIP_CODE AMB33 Country COUNTRY AMB34 Phone Number PHONE AMB35 For International Addresses: City CITY AMB30 Region PROVINCE AMB32 Postal Code ZIP_CODE AMB33 Country COUNTRY AMB34 Phone Number PHONE AMB35 Table 11-12 Personal References DBD Elements 11-44 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant You can review the applicant’s personal references on Screen 2PR (Personal References). Figure 11-43 Personal References screen (2PR) Screen 2PR will display personal references that have been entered via a Web application (as noted by Operator ID 9998) or via online entry. Each personal reference that is entered via a Web application appears as a separate entry on Screen 2PR. Accordingly, the same personal reference could appear more than once if an applicant has specified the personal reference on more than one Web application. When viewing personal references for an applicant, page through each entry and note the Term, College, Degree, and Major for the associated application. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11-45 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant Employment History If your institution specified on Screen W04 that the Employment History page should be displayed for the Application Type specified by the applicant, then the applicant is required to enter information about his/her employment. 1. If the applicant specifies that he/she has been employed in the past two years, he/she must enter information about his/her most recent employer. Figure 11-44 Employment History page 11-46 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant 2. Enter information about his/her previous employer. Figure 11-45 Previous Employer information 3. Select to save the data in these DBD elements. Field DBD Element Most Recent Employer Dates of Employment - From EH_BEGINDT AMC20 Dates of Employment - To EH_ENDDT AMC21 Full-time or Part-time? EH_FULL_PART AMC24 Your Title EMPLOYMENT_TITLE AMC22 Company Name EMPLOYMENT_COMPANY AMC26 Contact Name EH_CONTACT_NAME AMC23 Contact’s Business Title EH_CONTACT_TITLE AMC25 Contact’s E-mail Address EH_CONTACT_EMAIL AMC27 Street Line 1 STREET_1 AMC28 Street Line 2 STREET_2 AMC29 Table 11-13 Employment History DBD Elements SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11-47 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant Field DBD Element For US or Canadian addresses: City CITY AMC30 State or Province STATE AMC31 Zip or Postal Code ZIP_CODE AMC33 Country COUNTRY AMC34 Phone Number PHONE AMC35 City CITY AMC30 Region PROVINCE AMC32 Postal Code ZIP_CODE AMC33 Country COUNTRY AMC34 Phone Number PHONE AMC35 For International addresses: Previous Employer Dates of Employment - From EH_BEGINDT AMC20 Dates of Employment - To EH_ENDDT AMC21 Full-time or Part-time? EH_FULL_PART AMC24 Your Title EMPLOYMENT_TITLE AMC22 Company Name EMPLOYMENT_COMPANY AMC26 Contact Name EH_CONTACT_NAME AMC23 Contact’s Business Title EH_CONTACT_TITLE AMC25 Contact’s E-mail Address EH_CONTACT_EMAIL AMC27 Street Line 1 STREET_1 AMC28 Street Line 2 STREET_2 AMC29 City CITY AMC30 State or Province STATE AMC31 Zip or Postal Code ZIP_CODE AMC33 Country COUNTRY AMC34 Phone Number PHONE AMC35 For US or Canadian addresses: Table 11-13 Employment History DBD Elements (continued) 11-48 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant Field DBD Element For International addresses: City CITY AMC30 Region PROVINCE AMC32 Postal Code ZIP_CODE AMC33 Country COUNTRY AMC34 Phone Number PHONE AMC35 Table 11-13 Employment History DBD Elements (continued) You can review the applicant’s employment history on Screen 021 (Employment History). Figure 11-46 Employment History screen (021) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11-49 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant Client Requirements If your institution requires any additional information from students who are applying for admission (e.g., freshman essay), you can add a Client Requirements Web page to the application. You can have one Client Requirements page per Application Type and this page will display only if Client Requirements is set to Y for that Application Type on Screen W04. Two sample pages (Freshman Essay and Publications & Honors) are included with Student Self-Service. Use these pages as templates for the pages you need to add to your various admissions applications. Figure 11-47 Sample Client Requirements - Freshman Essay page Figure 11-48 Sample Client Requirements - Publications & Honors page 11-50 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant Design your own pages, modify the html on the Client Requirements page, and then follow the instructions for “Including Your Own Page in an Admissions Application” below. Including Your Own Page in an Admissions Application Complete the following steps to include your Client Requirements page in an admissions application. After you follow these instructions, the name you assign your Client Requirements Web page will be displayed in the navigation bar and the page will be displayed for applicants for the specified Application Type. 1. In the MCKAMW copybook: • Under WS-APPL-TYPE, add any new application types, as follows: 03 WS-APPL-TYPE 88 FRESHMAN 88 GRADUATE PIC X(01). VALUE “F”. VALUE “G”. • Under WEB-PAGE-CODES, add the Web page code for each new Client Requirements page by application type. 01 WEB-PAGE-CODES . . . 03 FRESHMAN-REQUIREMENTS 03 GRADUATE-REQUIREMENTS PIC X(02) VALUE “FR”. PIC X(02) VALUE “GR”. • Under WEB-PAGE-TRAN-CODE, add the new transaction codes for your new Client Requirements pages. 01 WEB-PAGE-TRAN-CODE . . . 03 FRESHMAN-CL-REQ-CODE 03 GRADUATE-CL-REQ-CODE PIC X(04) VALUE “1280”. PIC X(04) VALUE “1281”. • Under BUTTON-LITERALS, add a -LIT as needed and change the wording displayed on the button to whatever you need for your Client Requirements page. 03 BUTTON-LITERALS . . . 05 CLIENT-REQ-BUTTON-LIT PIC X(35) VALUE “I am ready to review my application”. • Under WS-PAGE-DISPLAY-FLAGS, add a new page display flag for your Client Requirements page. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11-51 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant 2. In the MCKAMP copybook: • In section 2710-BUILD-NAV-BAR, add sections for any new application types, as listed under the following comments: *********************************************************************************** * IF APPL TYPE = FRESHMAN OR GRADUATE, PERFORM THE * APPROPRIATE SECTIONS.... *********************************************************************************** IF FRESHMAN PERFORM 2711-FRESHMAN-NAV-BAR THRU 2711-FNB-EXIT ELSE IF GRADUATE PERFORM 2712-GRADUATE-NAV-BAR THRU 2712-GNB-EXIT ELSE . . . • For each new Client Requirements page, copy and modify the code that is listed under the following sections for the Freshman Client Requirements page. **************************************************************************************** IF FRESHMAN REQUIREMENTS IS COMPLETE.... **************************************************************************************** and **************************************************************************************** IF CURRENT PAGE IS FRESHMAN REQUIREMENTS, HIGHLIGHT LINK.... **************************************************************************************** Note: Be careful how the NODISPLAY-LIT is coded so the Navigation Bar is displayed correctly for each application type. • For each new Client Requirements page add code under the following comments after WS-GR-PAGE-DISP, as specified below: *********************************************************************************** * MOVE DISPLAY-LIT OR NODISPLAY-LIT FOR EACH PAGE EXCEPT * FOR ENROLLMENT INTENTIONS AND REVIEW APPLICATION IN * ORDER FOR THE SCREEN READERS TO SPEAK THE NAV BAR * CORRECTLY. *********************************************************************************** EIComplete|EINavLink|PIComplete|PINavLink|HSComplete|HSNavLink| COComplete|CONavLink|RCComplete|RCNavLink|PRComplete|PRNavLink| EHComplete|EHNavLink|FRComplete|FRNavLink|GRComplete|GRNavLink| [add a __Complete and __NavLink for each of your Client Req pages] RevApplNavLink|ApplNum|PINNavDisp|HSNavDisp|CONavDisp|RCNavDisp PRNavDisp|EHNavDisp|FRNavDisp|GRNavDisp [add a __NavDisp for each of your Client Req pages] 11-52 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant 3. In the trxattrs.txt file, add a new transaction code for each Client Requirements page. Transaction codes 1280 - 1299 are reserved for Client Requirements pages. 4. Following the standards set in the file, list the names of the html, ddo, and cfg files used by your Client Requirements page. For example: mcreq____.cfg mcreq____.ddo mcreq____.htm where _____ is the Application Type 5. For each new Application type you have added, add new application complete and navlink fields in the mnavstat.ddo file (e.g., |FRComplete|FRNavLink (freshman)). 6. If you added new Application Types, in the mnavstat.htm file (for the navigation bar), copy the code that is in this file (e.g., freshman requirements) and then add and modify the code for each new type. 7. In the AZKCTL program: • Add your new transactions in the ADM-WEB-PAGE-CODES section. 03 ADM-WEB-PAGE-CODES. 05 CL-REQ-FR-CODE 05 CL-REQ-GR-CODE PIC X(04) VALUE “1280” PIC X(04) VALUE “1281” • Add your new trans code to the 2000-PROCESS-TRAN section under: * * * ADMISSIONS FUNCTION FOR CLIENT RQUIREMENTS IF TRAN-CODE = “ 1280” OR TRAN-CODE = “ 1281” 8. In the mnextpg.cfg file, add any new ddo and htm files. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11-53 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant 9. In the MZKDIR program: • Add the necessary code for your new application types in the 2200-GET-NEXT-PAGE section, as we did for the sample Client Requirements pages: 2200-GET-NEXT-PAGE SECTION. . . . IF MM-AP-APP-WEB-TYPE (WF-APPL-NUM) = “F” MOVE FRESHMAN-CL-REQ-CODE TO NEXT-PAGE-CODE END-IF IF MM-AP-APP-WEB-TYPE (WF-APPL-NUM) = “G” MOVE GRADUATE-CL-REQ-CODE TO NEXT-PAGE-CODE END-IF • Add the necessary code for your new application types in the 2300-GET-CURRENT-PAGE section, as we did for the sample Client Requirements pages: 2300-GET-CURRENT-PAGE SECTION . . . IF NEXT-PAGE-FOUND = “N” IF INP-PAGE-CODE = “FR” MOVE “Y” TO NEXT-PAGE-FOUND MOVE FRESHMAN-CL-REQ-CODE TO NEXT-PAGE-CODE. IF NEXT-PAGE-FOUND = “N” IF INP-PAGE-CODE = “GR” MOVE “Y” TO NEXT-PAGE-FOUND MOVE GRADUATE-CL-REQ-CODE TO NEXT-PAGE-CODE. 10. In the MZKCRQ program: • In the MZKCRQ-WS section, add Working Storage fields for the titles of your new Client Requirements pages, or modify the titles for the sample Client Requirements pages: 03 FRES-CR-TITLE PIC X(14) VALUE “Freshman Essay”. 03 GRAD-CR-TITLE PIC X(23) VALUE “Publications and Honors”. • In the WS-LITERALS section, add new -LIT fields for the new ddo files you created for the different application types. For example, the following -LIT fields were added for the sample Client Requirements pages: 03 03 11-54 MCREQF-LIT MCREQG-LIT PIC X(08) PIC X(08) VALUE “@mcreqf=”. VALUE “@mcreqg=”. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant • Add code for new application types so the corresponding Client Requirements page is generated as the next required page for the application type. IF THE TRANSACTION CODE IS 1221, THEN THIS PAGE IS BEING GENERATED AS THE NEXT REQUIRED PAGE.... ** IF REQ-RESP = “ 1221” IF INP-PAGE-CODE = “FR” PERFORM 1200-PARSE-CLREQFINP THRU 1200-PCF-EXIT END-IF IF INP-PAGE-CODE = “GR” PERFORM 1205-PARSE-CLREQGINP THRU 1205-PCG-EXIT END-IF END-IF • As necessary, add code for the fields to be parsed on the Client Requirements page for each new application type. IF THERE ARE ANY FIELDS TO PARSE FOR THE FRESHMAN PAGE, PUT THEM IN THIS SECTION. * 1200-PARSE-CLREQFINP SECTION. 1200-PCF-010. * IF YOU HAVE INPUT FIELDS, THIS IS WHERE YOU WOULD ENTER THE CODE * MOVE “Y” TO UPDATEABLE. * 1200-PCF-EXIT. EXIT. • For each new application type for which you want to display a Client Requirements page, add the move of the page title. IF MM-AP-APP-WEB-TPE (WF-APPL-NUM) = “F” MOVE FRES-CR-TITLE TO WS-BUFFER END-IF IF MM-AP-APP-WEB-TYPE (WF-APPL-NUM) = “G” MOVE GRAD-CR-TITLE TO WS-BUFFER END-IF • Add code for any additional ddo files you’ve created for different application types (e.g., undergraduate). Use the code for the sample Client Requirements pages as a guide: IF MM-AP-APP-WEB-TYPE (WF-APPL-NUM) = “F” MOVE MCREQF-LIT TO WS-BUFFER ELSE IF MM-AP-APP-WEB-TYPE (WF-APPL-NUM) = “G” MOVE MCREQG-LIT TO WS-BUFFER. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11-55 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant • In the 2760-DISPLAY-BUTTONS section, specify MBUTTONLIT to display just your button on the Client Requirements page, or specify MBUTTONS-LIT to display your button and a Reset button. PERFORM 3100-FIRST THRU 3100-F-EXIT. MOVE MBUTTON-LIT TO WS-BUFFER. PERFORM 3000-FIND-LENGTH THRU 3000-EXIT. PERFORM 3100-MOVE-BUFFER THRU 3100-MB-EXIT. PERFORM 3300-THIRD THRU 3300-T-EXIT. For any new button you create in MCKAMW for display on a Client Requirements page, you must move that button (e.g., CLIENT-REQ-BUTTON-LIT), as follows: MOVE CLIENT-REQ-BUTTON-LIT TO WS-BUFFER. PERFORM 3000-FIND-LENGTH THRU 3000-EXIT. PERFORM 3100-MOVE-BUFFER THRU 3100-MB-EXIT. • Add code for new application types so the corresponding Client Requirements page is generated as the current required page for the application type. IF MM-AP-APP-WEB-TYPE (WF-APPL-NUM) = “F” MOVE FRESHMAN-REQUIREMENTS TO WS-CURRENT-PAGE ELSE IF MM-AP-APP-WEB-TYPE (WF-APPL-NUM) = “G” MOVE GRADUATE-REQUIREMENTS TO WS-CURRENT-PAGE. 11. On Screen W04 (Web Required Admissions Pages), specify your new Client Requirements Page Name (up to 26 characters) for the Application Type for which you want to display your new Client Requirements page. 11-56 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant Review Application After an applicant completes and saves the information in the last section of his/her application (as defined by the application sections selected for the Application Type on Screen W04), he/she must review his/her application and enter any necessary changes before submitting his/her application to your institution. The Review Application page is long (depending on the number of application sections specified for the Application Type on Screen W04), so we’ll show the page in sections on the following pages. The Application Fee amount (displayed in the table near the top of the Review Application page) is controlled by your settings for the following options on Screen WA2 and the fees listed for the specified Application Type on Screen W06: Setting Screen Description Calculate/Display Appl Fee WA2 Set to Y if you want the system to calculate and display the application fee. Appl Fee Payment Term WA2 Specify the term to which application fees should be applied. Initial Fee Status WA2 Specify whether to charge a fee if no fee is specified. Require Fee Before Submission WA2 Specify whether your institution requires applicants to pay their application fee before submitting their application. Def ApplFees -Res WA2 Specify the default application fee for residents of your state. Def Appl Fees -Non-Res WA2 Specify the default application fee for applicants who do not reside in your state. Credit Card Types Allowed WA2 Specify up to 5 credit cards that your institution will accept for payment of application fees. Initial Fee Status Value W06 For the specified Application Type, specify whether applicants must pay an application fee. Application Fee -Resident W06 For the specified Application Type, specify the fee for residents of your state. Application Fee -Non-resident W06 For the specified Application Type, specify the fee for applicants who do not reside in your state. Multiple App $/% Indicator W06 Specify whether the amount listed for the Multiple Application Fee Value is a dollar amount or a percentage. Multiple App Fee Value W06 Specify the dollar amount or percentage of the full fee amount to be charged an applicant for submitting additional applications for the same term. Table 11-14 Settings for Application Fee SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11-57 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant Figure 11-49 Review Application - part 1 11-58 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant Figure 11-50 Review Application - part 2 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11-59 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant Figure 11-51 Review Application - part 3 1. The applicant can select any of the Go to... links to display the corresponding Web page and update his/her information. Note: The applicant will not be able to make changes to a submitted application. (The Go to... links will not appear to the right of the information on the Review Application page.) If your institution wants to display information from your Client Requirements page on the Review Application page, you must customize the Review Application Web page. 2. After reviewing all the information for his/her application, the applicant selects . Note: This button is only displayed if the applicant has completed all required sections of his/her application. 11-60 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant 3. Confirm that he/she wants to officially submit his/her application as it is, by selecting on the Submit Application page. Figure 11-52 Submit Application page 4. View the Application Fee Payment page and decide how he/she will pay the application fee (if one is required). Figure 11-53 Application Payment page (fee required before submission) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11-61 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant Depending on your setting for the Require Fee Before Submissions option on Screen WA2 (Web Admissions System Options), one of two Application Fee Payment pages will be displayed. • If you set the Require Fee Before Submissions option to N, the Thank You page will be displayed to let the applicant know that he/she has the option to pay for the application now. Figure 11-54 Thank You page (fee not required before submission) If you set Rule to QA (Quick Admit) and Perform Auto-Admit to Y on Screen W04, the Thank You page will also display a message to let the student know that he/she has been admitted and may register for classes. When he/she selects Register for classes, the Student Login page is displayed. • If you set the Require Fee Before Submission option to Y, the Application Fee Payment page will be displayed to let the applicant know that he/she must pay the application fee before the application can be submitted to your institution. Note: If an application fee is not required, the Application Fee Payment Options will not be displayed. Pay the application fee with a credit card only appears if you set the StuAdmissionsCCPmt option to display in TSRVWEB.INI. If this link is not displayed, the applicant will not be able to view the Credit Card Payment page and pay his/her application fee with a credit card. 11-62 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant Paying by Check or Money Order If paying by check or money order, print out the form and complete the payment mailing instructions displayed on the page. Figure 11-55 Check or Money Order Payment Form Paying by Credit Card If paying by credit card, select Pay the application fee with a credit card. Then enter the credit card number and expiration date, and the card holder’s billing address information on the Credit Card Payment page, and select . Figure 11-56 Credit Card Payment page Note: If your institution’s bank does not accept international credit cards, you should let your applicants know by including a note on the Credit Card Payment page. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11-63 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant After the applicant selects , the system will disable this button and change its name to “Processing” to prevent the applicant from accidentally submitting a duplicate payment. Once credit card information is supplied, the TouchNet Payment Gateway Server verifies the information through a clearinghouse. • If the credit card is rejected, the applicant is notified. • If the payment is authorized, the Credit Card Payment program (BZKCCU) posts a charge and payment to the applicant’s account, updates the admissions application fee paid fields, logs the transaction for settlement, and notifies the student that the payment has been processed successfully. Figure 11-57 Credit Card Payment Receipt Note: If your setting for Display Login ID for All Credit Card Receipts on Screen W22 (Student Records 2) is Y, the student’s ID will be listed on the credit card receipt. If you do not require payment before application submission and you set Rule to QA (Quick Admit) and Perform Auto-Admit to Y on Screen W04, the Credit Card Receipt will also display a message to let the student know that he/she has been admitted and may register for classes. When he/she selects Register for classes, the Student Login page is displayed. Payment of the application fee by credit card is immediately updated in SIS. The amount and date of payment will be displayed in the table near the top of the Review Application page. (Refer to the TouchNet document T-Serve Payment Gateway User Help Guide for more information about payment settlement.) 11-64 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11 Admissions Completing an Application for a New Applicant Viewing Payments in SIS Payments made by applicants via the Web are classified under Operator Number 9998. To view information about payments made via Student Self-Service, log into the SIS system using Operator Number 9998. After the credit card payment has been made, you may review the payment on Screen 406 (Adjust Charge/Payment). Figure 11-58 Adjust Charge/Payment Screen (406) • The first line of text fields under Item Description contains the credit card expiration date. • The fourth line of text contains the approval code from the external authorization processor. • The Print Control field is updated to an M and all the fields become protected. If the payment originated from Student Self-Service, the Cashier ID is “Web.” If the payment originated from TouchNet’s Voice solution, the Cashier ID is “VOIC.” SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11-65 11 Admissions Completing or Reviewing an Existing Application Completing or Reviewing an Existing Application An applicant can review and complete any of his/her applications (submitted or unsubmitted). 1. Enter his/her Login ID and select . Figure 11-59 Login page 2. Enter his/her Personal Identification Number (PIN) and select . Figure 11-60 Enter Your PIN page 11-66 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11 Admissions Completing or Reviewing an Existing Application 3. View the list of his/her applications in progress, submitted applications, and/or applications past their deadline date. Figure 11-61 Select Application page • To start a new application, select create a new application. If the applicant has less than 9 applications on file, the system will display the Select Application Type page and then the Select Term page, so the applicant can start another application. The system will then redisplay much of the information already entered for the first application (personal information, high school information, college information, and residency and citizenship) for the applicant’s verification. • To complete the next required section of an unsubmitted application, the applicant will select Continue Application to the right of the application to be continued. The system will then display the Web page for the next section of the application that needs to be completed (Personal Information, High School History, College History, Residency and Citizenship, Personal References, Employment History, or your Client Requirements). • To view a list of the information that has been entered for an application (submitted or unsubmitted), the applicant will select Review Application to the right of the application to be reviewed. When viewing an unsubmitted application, the applicant will be able to update sections of his/her application. When viewing a submitted application, the applicant will be able to Pay Application Fee (if he/she has not already done so). This link will also appear in the Fee Status box on the Select Application page. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11-67 11 Admissions Completing or Reviewing an Existing Application Viewing Applications When Auto-Admit Processing is in Use If your institution is using auto-admit processing and an administrator at your institution specifies on Screen 206 (Admission Decision), 207 (Admission Requirements), or 11A (Quick Admit), that an applicant has satisfied all the requirements, auto-admit processing will set the Web Status of the application to S (Submitted to institution via the Web). Figure 11-62 Admission Decision Screen (206) If your institution is using auto-admit processing and also requires that an applicant pay his/her application fee before submitting his/her application, you can change the Web Status of the application back to C (Created via the Web) so that the applicant can still pay the fee via the Web. Viewing Paper Applications on the Web If the applicant has submitted a paper application to your university and you have made the required Web entries for the application on Screen 206 (Admission Decision), the application will also be listed as a Submitted Application on the Select Application page. The applicant can select Review Application to the right of the application and view it on the Web. Refer to the instructions for “Allowing Applicants to View Paper Applications Via the Web” on page 11-69. 11-68 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11 Admissions Allowing Applicants to View Paper Applications Via the Web Allowing Applicants to View Paper Applications Via the Web Along with their Web applications, you can allow your applicants to view paper applications they have submitted to your university. To make a paper application viewable on the Web, make the following entries on Screen 206 (Admission Decision) for that application: Figure 11-63 Admission Decision Screen (206) 1. In the Web Type field, enter the type of application. The following is a list of the types of applications specified in the SIS base system: •F Freshman • G Graduate •P Professional • X Transfer Undergraduate • Y Transfer Graduate •Z Transfer Professional 2. Leave the Web Stat field blank to specify that the application was entered online. 3. Enter the appropriate value for Appl Fee Stat. If the application fee was not submitted with the paper application and you want to allow the applicant to be able to pay the fee via the Web, set Appl Fee Stat to R (Fee Required). SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11-69 11 Admissions Viewing Web Application Information on SIS Screens Viewing Web Application Information on SIS Screens The information that an applicant enters using the Admissions feature of Student Self-Service can be viewed on the following SIS screens. The fields are listed in the order they are displayed on the Review Application page. Field DBD Element SIS Screen Personal Information Name AA003 003 Previous Name AA01B AA01C AA01D 007, 103 Nickname AA053 003 Gender AA011 007, 103, 2E5, 2G6, 2U6 Date of Birth AA010 007, 103, 2E5, 2G6, 2U6 Marital Status AA012 007, 103, 2G6, 2U6 Selective Service Status AA054 2G6, 2U6 Veteran Status AA025 103 Disability Type AA020 009, 103, 2G6, 2U6 Religion AA014 103 Ethnicity AA013 007, 103, 246, 2E5, 2G6, 2U6 Primary Language AMD48 009 Years Studying English AMD49 009, 2G6, 2U6 Felony Conviction AA018 2G6, 2U6 Alumnus in Family MM222 205, 2G6, 2U6 Alumnus Relationship MM220 2E5, 2G6, 2U6, 205 Table 11-15 Application Information on SIS Screens 11-70 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11 Admissions Viewing Web Application Information on SIS Screens Field DBD Element SIS Screen Street Line 1 AD240 003 Street Line 2 AD245 Permanent Address For US Addresses City AD250 State or Province AD255 Zip or Postal Code AD260 Country AD263 Phone Number AD265 003 For International Addresses City AD250 Region AD257 Postal Code AD260 Country AD263 Phone Number AD265 E-Mail Addresses (5) AD110 AD120 AD130 AD140 AD150 010 Personal Phone Numbers (5) AD010 AD020 AD030 AD040 AD050 020 Personal Web Page URL AD160 010 Street Line 1 AD240 003 Street Line 2 AD245 003 Temporary Mailing Address For US Addresses City AD250 State or Province AD255 Zip or Postal Code AD260 Country AD263 Phone Number AD265 003 Table 11-15 Application Information on SIS Screens (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11-71 11 Admissions Viewing Web Application Information on SIS Screens Field DBD Element SIS Screen City AD250 003 Region AD257 Postal Code AD260 Country AD263 Phone Number AD265 For International Addresses Emergency Contact Name AMA11 Relationship AMA12 Street Line 1 AD240 Street Line 2 AD245 017 For US Addresses City AD250 State or Province AD255 Zip or Postal Code AD260 Country AD263 Phone Number AD265 Personal Phone Number AMA13 Personal Phone Type AMA14 017 For International Addresses City AD250 Region AD257 Postal Code AD260 Country AD263 Phone Number AD265 Personal Phone Number AMA13 Personal Phone Type AMA14 017 Table 11-15 Application Information on SIS Screens (continued) 11-72 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11 Admissions Viewing Web Application Information on SIS Screens Field DBD Element SIS Screen Enrollment Intentions Intended Program Preferred Major MM330 Preferred College MM320 Degree MM325 206, 2G6, 2U6 Alternate Program Alternate Major MM400 Alternate College MM396 Alternate Degree MM398 Intended Minor MM350 Special Program MM365 Citizen of AA015 103, 206, 2G6, 2U6 Resident Status MM523 206, 2G6, 2U6 Full-time/Part-time MM505 Applying for Early Decision MM56I 2U6 Applying for Financial Aid MM56C 2G6, 2U6 Housing Intentions MM55C 206, 2G6, 2U6 Previously Applied to University AA03N 2G6, 2U6 Name you previously applied under AA03M Previously Attended University MM55A Name you previously attended under AA03L Start Date of Previous Attendance MM55B 206, 2U6 206, 2G6, 2U6 Table 11-15 Application Information on SIS Screens (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11-73 11 Admissions Viewing Web Application Information on SIS Screens Field DBD Element SIS Screen High School History Name* AI015 or RB610 City* AI045 or RB630 State* AI050 or RB635 Country* AI060 or RB645 213 Attended - From Date RB115 2U6, 209 Attended - To Date RB120 GPA RB145 209 Diploma Received RB125 2U6, 209 College History Name* AI015 or RB610 City* AI045 or RB630 State* AI050 or RB635 Country* AI060 or RB645 213 Attended - From Date RB310 211, 2G6 Attended - To Date RB315 Hours Earned RB335 GPA RB349 Diploma Received RB325 211, 2G6 Degree Sought RB320 211, 2G6 211 * Depending on the school name and address information specified by an applicant, the school information viewed on the SIS screens will either come from your institution’s AIFILE or RBFILE. If the applicant specifies a school that is not listed in your institution’s AIFILE, the school name and address information will be recorded in (and displayed from) your institution’s RBFILE. Table 11-15 Application Information on SIS Screens (continued) 11-74 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11 Admissions Viewing Web Application Information on SIS Screens Field DBD Element SIS Screen Residency and Citizenship - US Citizens Residency at Birth County of Birth AA01H State of Birth AA01F Country of Birth AA01G 007 Residency at First Admission County of Origin AA017 007, 103 State of Origin AA016 007, 103 Country of Origin AA02D 007 Street Line 1 AD240 003 Street Line 2 AD245 Previous Legal Address For US or Canadian Addresses City AD250 State or Province AD255 Zip or Postal Code AD260 Country AD263 003 For International Addresses City AD250 Region AD257 Postal Code AD260 Country AD263 003 Prior Legal Address Street Line 1 AD240 Street Line 2 AD245 003 For US or Canadian Addresses City AD250 State or Province AD255 Zip or Postal Code AD260 Country AD263 003 Table 11-15 Application Information on SIS Screens (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11-75 11 Admissions Viewing Web Application Information on SIS Screens Field DBD Element SIS Screen City AD250 003 Region AD257 Postal Code AD260 Country AD263 For International Addresses Residency and Citizenship - International Applicants Native Country AA01G 007 Permanent Resident of US? AMD34 009 Permanent Residence Number AMD35 Presently Living in the US? AMD38 Date of Entry to US AMD43 Visa Type AMD30 007, 009, 103, 2G6, 2U6, 216 Visa Issuance Date AMD32 009 Visa Expiration Date AMD33 009, 103, 2G6, 2U6, 216 I-20 From Another Institution AMD39 009 SEVIS Number Assigned AMD21 SEVIS Number AMD20 Personal References Name AMB23 Relationship AMB24 Title AMB25 School or Company Name AMB26 Street Line 1 AMB28 Street Line 2 AMB29 2PR For US or Canadian Addresses City AMB30 State or Province AMB31 Zip or Postal Code AMB33 Country AMB34 Phone Number AMB35 2PR Table 11-15 Application Information on SIS Screens (continued) 11-76 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11 Admissions Viewing Web Application Information on SIS Screens Field DBD Element SIS Screen City AMB30 2PR Region AMB32 Postal Code AMB33 Country AMB34 Phone Number AMB35 For International Addresses E-mail Address AMB27 Employment History Dates of Employment - From AMC20 Dates of Employment - To AMC21 Full-time or Part-time? AMC24 Your Title AMC22 Company Name AMC26 Contact Name AMC23 Contact’s Business Title AMC25 Contact’s E-mail Address AMC27 Street Line 1 AMC28 Street Line 2 AMC29 021 For US or Canadian Addresses City AMC30 State or Province AMC31 Zip or Postal Code AMC33 Country AMC34 021 For International Addresses City AMC30 Region AMC32 Postal Code AMC33 Country AMC34 Phone Number 021 AMC35 Table 11-15 Application Information on SIS Screens (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 11-77 11 Admissions Viewing Web Application Information on SIS Screens You can also use Screen 222 (Web Application Scroll) to view a list of the applications that have been submitted via the Web. Figure 11-64 Web Application Scroll Screen (222) On Screen 222, specify the Term for which you want to view applications and enter the WEB Status as S (Submitted to institution via the Web). 11-78 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 12 Parent or Guest Payment Functional Overview 12 Parent or Guest Payment This chapter discusses the Parent or Guest Payment feature of SCT Plus Student Self-Service and how to access it. Functional Overview The Parent or Guest Payment feature of Student Self-Service allows students’ parents or guests to make a credit card payment toward their account at your institution. Set Parent/Guest Payment to Y on Screen WT1 to allow security access to this feature. Figure 12-1 Student Web Transaction Security (WT1) Screen SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 12-1 12 Parent or Guest Payment Setting the Payment Subcodes and Term Setting the Payment Subcodes and Term When you followed the instructions in Chapter 3 for implementing Student Self-Service, you set the Parent or Guest Payment options on Screen W22 (Student Records 2). Figure 12-2 Student Records 2 (W22) Screen • The subcodes for the types of credit cards your institution will accept for making payments via the Parent or Guest Payment feature. • If Payment Term is D, parents/guests can only make payments for the default term (the current term for the student’s academic unit). If Payment Term is S, they can select the term. If Payment Term is set to S and more than one term falls within the PAR/GST PAY Bgn/End dates specified on Screen W01, parents/ guests will be asked to select the term for which they are making their payment. Figure 12-3 Web Term Calendar (W01) screen 12-2 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 12 Parent or Guest Payment Making a Payment Toward a Student’s Account Making a Payment Toward a Student’s Account A parent or guest of a student will follow these steps in order to make a payment toward a student’s account: 1. Select Parent or Guest Payment on the Student Self-Service home page. 2. Enter the ID number and birth date of the student for whom he/she wants to make a payment and select . Figure 12-4 Parent or Guest Payment Student Identification page 3. Verify the name of the student. If the correct student name is not displayed, the parent or guest needs to log in again using the correct Student ID. Figure 12-5 Parent or Guest Payment Student ID Confirmation page 4. Select the term for which he/she is making the payment (only if your school is allowing parents/guests to select the term for which they are making a payment and more than one term falls within the dates for which you are allowing parent or guest payments). 5. Select SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 . 12-3 12 Parent or Guest Payment Making a Payment Toward a Student’s Account 6. Enter the amount of the payment and the credit card information, and select . Figure 12-6 Parent or Guest Credit Card Payment page 7. Verify and print the credit card payment information. Figure 12-7 Parent or Guest Credit Card Payment Receipt page The Display Login ID on All Credit Card Receipts on Screen W22 (Student Records 2) determines whether the Login ID is displayed on the Parent or Guest Credit Card Payment Receipt (and on all other credit card payment receipts). 12-4 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 13 Creating Test and Production Web Environments 13 Creating Test and Production Web Environments This chapter includes instructions for setting up a test Web/Kiosk/ Voice environment when using a TCP/IP connection to the Plus mainframe, and all of the following assumptions are true: • The test and the production T-Serves are on the same machine, and the test and production Web Servers are on the same machine, but the T-Serves need not be on the same machine as the Web Servers. • The Host test and production databases are located in separate Host accounts (DEC) or CICS regions (IBM or AIX). • Your first environment is up and running (after completing the setup instructions in Chapter 3) and will be your production environment. The new environment you are adding will be your test environment. • You are running TouchNet T-Serve, Version 3.0 or higher. • The operating system syntax is for Windows NT. For the most part, this means that all backward slashes (\) will be a forward slash (/) when installing on a Solaris or AIX T-Serve/Web server machine. (All other NT versus UNIX differences are noted.) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 13-1 13 Creating Test and Production Web Environments Setting up the Web Server Test Environment Setting up the Web Server Test Environment Complete these steps to set up the Web Server in your test environment: 1. Depending on which Plus product you are setting up in the test environment, create a duplicate ia-bin, fac-bin, hr-bin, or ad-bin directory. 2. The webdocs directory (and all the directories below it) can be shared by all Plus products in your test environment. Create test webdocs, webdocs\gifs, webdocs\css, webdocs\help, and webdocs\script directories. Then copy the contents of the production version of these directories to the new test directories. 3. Configure your Web Server to reference the new entry point into the test product (i.e., the test home page in the test webdocs directory). 4. Modify the TSRVWEB.INI file in the test ia-bin, fac-bin, hr-bin, or ad-bin directory, as follows: • Change the value for &Port from 8000 to 8001. • Change the value for &ClientId from webserve to webservet. 13-2 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 13 Creating Test and Production Web Environments Setting up the T-Serve Test Environment Setting up the T-Serve Test Environment Complete these steps to set up T-Serve in your test environment: 1. Create duplicate tserve, tserve\bin, and tserve\data directories. Then copy the contents of the production version into the new test directories. 2. For UNIX environments, create a duplicate tserve/lib directory. Then copy the contents of the production version into the new test directory. 3. For Kiosk for Students or TouchNet Voice, modify the SCT table load command files in the new tserve\bin directory. The command files will have a file extension of *.bat (if your T-Serve is on Windows NT), or no file extension (if your T-Serve is on Sun or AIX). Student Self-Service In EACH of the files: billtrms_0 1. Change the -p parameter from 8000 to 8001. madmterm_0 2. Change the -c parameter from tserve to tservet. rcareers_0 3. Change the -f parameter to reflect the complete path to the new tserve\data*.tdt files. regterms_0 rgrdterm_0 rschdtrm_0 rstuschd_0 rsubjtbl_0 sawdyear_0 sistabls_0 Table 13-1 Setting Student Self-Service files SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 13-3 13 Creating Test and Production Web Environments Setting up the T-Serve Test Environment 4. Modify the new tserve\data\clientid.txt file, as follows: • Change webserve to webservet. • Change the IP address to that of your test Web Server. • Change tserve to tservet. • Change admin to admint. 5. Modify the new tserve\data\serverid.txt file, as follows: • Change tipmgr to tipmgrt. • For the Self-Service product(s) you are running, modify the specified file and verify that each entry contains the correct mainframe IP address: For: Change: To: Alumni and Friends Self-Service adweb adwebt Employee Self-Service hrweb hrwebt Faculty and Advisor Self-Service facweb facwebt Student Self-Service iaweb iawebt Table 13-2 serverid.txt File Changes 6. For Alumni and Friends Self-Service, complete the following steps: • Change the port from 8110 to 8111, and then verify that the IP address on that entry is the one for your T-Serve machine. • Change all 3 occurrences of plusweb to pluswebt. • For the pluswebt entry that contains an IP address, verify that the IP address is correct for your T-Serve machine. 13-4 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 13 Creating Test and Production Web Environments Setting up the T-Serve Test Environment 7. Modify the new tserve\data\trxattrs.txt file, as follows: • Change all occurrences of tipmgr to tipmgrt. • For the Self-Service product(s) you are running, change all occurrences, as specified: For: Change: To: Alumni and Friends Self-Service adweb adwebt Employee Self-Service hrweb hrwebt Faculty and Advisor Self-Service facweb facwebt Student Self-Service iaweb iawebt Table 13-3 trxattrs.txt File Changes • If you are creating a test Payment Gateway for Student or Alumni Self-Service credit card payments, in transactions 1405 and 4017, change the -H parameter to the test Payment Gateway machine IP address. Also, change the -C parameter to the Client ID name of the test T-Serve machine (just as it was entered in the clientid.txt table on the Payment Gateway machine). • For Alumni and Friends Self-Service, change all the occurrences of plusweb to pluswebt. In all the muxtrans between 4000 and 4999, change the -p parameter from 8000 to 8001, and the -c parameter from tserve to tservet. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 13-5 13 Creating Test and Production Web Environments Setting up the T-Serve Test Environment 8. Modify the TouchNet T-Serve process startup command files in the new tserve\bin directory. (For NT, these files will have a .bat file extension. For UNIX, they will not have any file extension.) For File: proxy Change: From: To: -p parameter 8100 8101 -n parameter tsrvtcp tsrvtcpt -P parameter 8000 8001 -a parameter admin admint texit Depending on your version of T-Serve, modify the paths to reflect the location of the T-Serve directories. tip or tipm (TIP Manager Command File) Modify the path to the test tserve\bin directory. -n parameter tipmgr tipmgrt Modify the -d parameter to the path to the tserve\data directory. tmgr -p parameter 8000 8001 -a parameter admin admint Modify the path to the test tserv\bin directory. -p parameter 8000 8001 -a parameter admin admint Modify the -d parameter to the path to the test tserv\data directory. Table 13-4 TouchNet T-Serve Command File Changes 13-6 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 13 Creating Test and Production Web Environments Setting up the Host (Mainframe) Environment Setting up the Host (Mainframe) Environment Follow the steps for setting up the Host (mainframe) environment on IBM and/or AIX machines or DEC machines, as specified below. For IBM and/or AIX Machines 1. Follow the instructions in the Installation Guide for setting up the Host environment. You will install in your test CICS region. 2. Modify the programs, as specified in the following table: For: In Program: Alumni and Friends Self-Service TPRMWEB4 Employee Self-Service TPRMWEB3 Faculty and Advisor SelfService TPRMWEB2 Student Self-Service TPRMWEB1 Change: From: To: SERVERNAME adweb adwebt PORT 8100 8101 SERVERNAME hrweb hrwebt PORT 8100 8101 SERVERNAME facweb facwebt PORT 8100 8101 SERVERNAME iaweb iawebt PORT 8100 8101 Table 13-5 IBM and/or AIX Host File Changes SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 13-7 13 Creating Test and Production Web Environments Setting up the Host (Mainframe) Environment For DEC Machines 1. Follow the instructions in the Installation Guide for setting up the Host environment. You will create a separate host account. 2. Modify the LOGIN_THOST.COM file, as follows:At the bottom of For: Change: From: To: Alumni and Friends Self-Service THOSTALM symbol host ID adweb adwebt Host PORT number 8100 8101 Employee Self-Service THOSTEMP symbol host ID hrweb hrwebt Host PORT number 8100 8101 Faculty and Advisor SelfService THOSTFAC symbol host ID facweb facwebt Host PORT number 8100 8101 Student Self-Service THOSTSTU symbol host ID iaweb iawebt Host PORT number 8100 8101 Table 13-6 DEC Host File Changes the LOGIN_THOST.COM file, modify the names of the COM files so they define your test ZSS, SIS, HRS, and ADS files. 13-8 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs General Program Options 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs This chapter provides functional and technical information for the programs in the SCT Plus Student Self-Service application. General Program Options In addition to selecting the options used by each program, your institution can also specify general options which are used by several programs. Option on Screen Case W02 Description Specify whether data is to be passed unchanged (in mixed case) or converted to upper case before updating the SIS System. • Case is delivered without a value. • If you specify a value for Case, it will override the SIS AC-IN-CASE parameter (TBL-IN-CASE parameter in loaded tables). Term Sort Name Order W02 W20 Y Mixed case N Upper case Specify the order in which terms are to be displayed in list boxes on Web pages: A Ascending order, oldest term displayed first D Descending order, most recent term displayed first (default) Specify how names are to be displayed in Web page headings: 1 First, middle, last name (default) 2 Last, first, middle name Table 14-1 General Program Options SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-1 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Program Listing Program Listing The following is a list of the programs in SCT Plus Student SelfService. The programs are listed in alphabetical order by program name. Program Name Refer to Page Campus Pipeline/Luminis Profile Extract ABKGEM 14-4 Luminis Data Integration Extract ABKLDI 14-6 WebCT Profile Extract ABKLSE 14-10 AAFILE Update AZKAAU 14-13 Address Display/Update AZKADR 14-14 Advisor Display AZKADV 14-15 AMFILE Update AZKAMU 14-16 Student Holds AZKHLD 14-17 Marital Status Display AZKMSR 14-18 Marital Status Update AZKMSU 14-18 Change PIN AZKPIN 14-19 Table Load AZKTBL 14-20 Parent/Guest Payment AZKVPA 14-23 Verify Student AZKVST 14-24 Student Account Balance BZKBIL 14-25 Credit Card Payment BZKCCU 14-29 Additional Services BZKOPT 14-35 Billing Tuition Calculation BZKTCL 14-36 TRA 1098-T Form Display BZKTRA 14-37 TRA Tax Year Selection BZKTXY 14-38 Degree Audit DZKAUD 14-39 Admissions Review Application MZKADM 14-41 Client Requirements MZKCRQ 14-44 Admissions Navigation MZKDIR 14-45 Program Function Table 14-2 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs 14-2 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Program Listing Program Name Refer to Page Employment History MZKEMP 14-46 Previous High School and College MZKHCL 14-47 Admissions Create Account MZKINT 14-48 Name and Personal Information MZKNAM 14-49 Enrollment Intentions & Select Application MZKPGM 14-50 Admissions Prospect MZKPRO 14-51 Personal References MZKREF 14-52 Residency and Citizenship MZKRES 14-52 Submit Application MZKSAP 14-53 Identity Verification and Create PIN MZKVST 14-55 Course Catalog RZKCAT 14-56 Course Availability RZKCRS 14-58 Grading RZKFGR 14-60 Grade Report RZKGRD 14-61 Official Transcript Request RZKOTR 14-63 Registration RZKREG 14-68 Student Schedule RZKSCD 14-70 Detailed Schedule RZKSCH 14-71 Registration Status RZKSRS 14-73 Transfer Credit RZKTCD 14-74 Unofficial Transcript RZKTRN 14-75 Institutional Coursework RZKTSC 14-77 Accept Awards SZKACC 14-78 Financial Aid Applicant Award Information SZKAWD 14-82 Cost of Attendance SZKCOA 14-85 Academic Progress SZKPRO 14-86 Financial Aid Summary SZKSUM 14-87 Student Requirements SZKTRK 14-88 Unofficial Financial Aid Transcript SZKTRN 14-92 Program Function Table 14-2 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-3 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Campus Pipeline/Luminis Profile Extract Program (ABKGEM) Campus Pipeline/Luminis Profile Extract Program (ABKGEM) The Campus Pipeline/Luminis Profile Extract Program (ABKGEM) extracts biographic and demographic profile data from SIS for use with the Campus Pipeline/Luminis-enabled versions of Student Self-Service and Faculty and Advisor Self-Service. This program is executed on the host machine. ABKGEM extracts profile data for all students and faculty members with a valid Web PIN in SIS. Additionally, this program extracts all necessary course-related data for students enrolled in the specified term. The output file, XMLFIL, is an XML format file to be transmitted to the Campus Pipeline/Luminis data repository. ABKGEM must be run during Campus Pipeline/Luminis integration. Your institution should determine how often to run ABKGEM (at least once for each new term). Refer to On-line Reference Topic ID ABKGEMBP in SCT Plus SIS for more information. Program Parameters to Enter Program parameter values must be modified in the parameter file ABKGEM.PRM for the IBM AIX platform, or AJKGEM for DEC or IBM MVS/VSE platforms. Parameter Attribute Required TERM Description The term for which data is to be extracted. The format is YYT (e.g., 99F for Fall 1999). Valid values are from data element A 020. If the same time period is defined by more than one term code for different academic units on the Term Calendar screen (CAL), use the optional TERM1-6 parameters to specify the other terms. TERM1 TERM2 TERM3 TERM4 TERM5 TERM6 Optional Only use these optional TERM1-6 parameters (format YYT) if different academic units use different term codes for the same time period (as specified on the CAL screen). For example, an institution may define the spring term as 99S for Academic Unit C (Main Campus), but as 991 for Academic Unit L (Law School). Since both terms are within the same time period, you would need to extract data for both terms. Table 14-3 CP Profile Extract Program (ABKGEM) Parameters 14-4 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Campus Pipeline/Luminis Profile Extract Program (ABKGEM) Parameter Attribute OPTION2 Optional Description Specify whether data is to be extracted about Users (students and faculty members) and/or Courses (all sections for the specified terms). U Users C Courses B Users & Courses N Do not extract User or Course data OPTION3 Optional Specify whether data is to be extracted about enrolled courses and/or instructional assignments, or student majors. E Enrolled courses I Instructional assignments B Enrolled courses & Instructional assignments (default) M Student Majors N Do not extract Other Term Data OPTION4 Optional Specify whether course meeting data is to be extracted for display on students’ and faculty members’ calendars via Campus Pipeline/Luminis. Y Extract course meeting information (course reference # and term, meeting days, meeting start and end times, building and room, and course start and end dates). N Do not extract course meeting information. OPTION5 Optional If you set OPTION2 to U or B, specify whether data is only to be extracted for students and faculty whose IDs are listed in the WORKFL input file. To generate the list of IDs (e.g., IDs of all freshmen), use a software tool (e.g., FOCUS) or manually list the IDs in a file named WORKFL, as follows: • Leave the first line of the WORKFL file blank • Enter one ID per line and leave the first position of each line blank Y Only extract data for the faculty/student IDs listed in the WORKFL file. N Extract data for all students and faculty members. Table 14-3 CP Profile Extract Program (ABKGEM) Parameters (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-5 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Student/Faculty Luminis Data Integration Extract Program (ABKLDI) Student/Faculty Luminis Data Integration Extract Program (ABKLDI) The Student/Faculty Luminis Data Integration Extract program (ABKLDI) extracts biographic and demographic profile data from SIS for use with the external systems that accept the Luminis Data Integration (LDI) protocol. These systems include SCT Luminis, WebCT Campus Edition, WebCT Vista, SCT TracDat by Nuventive, iWebfolio, and Blackboard. You can use this extract in conjunction with events to synchronize data between SIS and the external systems. This program is executed on the host machine. ABKLDI extracts profile data for all students and faculty with a valid Web PIN number in SIS. You can choose to extract information about course sections, course section cross-listings, faculty assignments, student enrollment, course inventory, colleges, departments, and department faculty. During LDI integration you must run ABKLDI and load the XML output file into each external system that will be part of your LDI solution. You can run ABKLDI once to create a single XML output file or you can run it multiple times creating a separate XML output file for each integrated external system. Your institution will also need to determine the frequency of subsequent program runs, minimally once for each new term. Refer to On-line Reference Topic ABKLDIBP in SCT Plus SIS for more information. Program Parameters to Enter Program parameter values must be modified in the parameter file ABKLDI.PRM for the IBM AIX platform, or AJKLDI for DEC or IBM MVS/VSE platforms. Parameter TERM Attribute Description Required The term for which data is to be extracted. The format is YYT (e.g., 04F for Fall 2004). Valid values are from data element A 020. If the same time period is defined by more than one term code for different academic units on the Term Calendar screen (CAL), use the optional TERM1-6 keywords to specify the other terms. Table 14-4 LDI Extract (ABKLDI) Parameters 14-6 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Student/Faculty Luminis Data Integration Extract Program (ABKLDI) Parameter Attribute Description TERM1 TERM2 TERM3 TERM4 TERM5 TERM6 Optional Only use these optional TERM1-6 parameters (format YYT) if different academic units use different term codes for the same time period (as specified on the CAL OPTION1 Optional screen). For example, an institution may define the spring term as 04S for Academic Unit C (Main Campus), but as 041 for Academic Unit L (Law School). Since both terms are within the same time period, you would need to extract data for both terms. Specify whether data is to be extracted about students and/or faculty members. You can enter multiple values. F Extract faculty members only. S Extract students only. B Extract faculty and students. N Do not extract faculty or students (default). Do not use this value in combination with any other OPTION1 value except L or the program will abort. T Only extract students who are eligible for enrollment and faculty who are assigned to teach in the specified term. You must use this value in combination with another OPTION1 value. L Only extract students and faculty who are specified in the WORKFL file. You can use this value in combination with another OPTION1 value: • LB will extract information for every person in the WORKFL who has a student and/or faculty role. • LF will extract information for every person in the WORKFL who has a faculty role. • LS will extract information for every person in the WORKFL who has a student role. • LN will not extract any person data. Use the WORKFL to limit faculty assignments (OPTION4), student enrollments (OPTION5), and faculty members (OPTION7) if requested. To generate the list of student and/or faculty IDs (e.g., IDs of all instructors in the English department), use a software tool (e.g., FOCUS) or manually list the IDs in the WORKFL file, as follows: • Enter one ID per line • Leave the first position of each line blank Table 14-4 LDI Extract (ABKLDI) Parameters (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-7 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Student/Faculty Luminis Data Integration Extract Program (ABKLDI) Parameter OPTION2 Attribute Optional Description Specify whether data is to be extracted about course sections. Y Extract data for all course sections for the specified term(s). N Do not extract any course section data (default). L Only extract data for course sections which have a valid delivery code for the specified term(s). S OPTION3 Optional Only extract data for course sections which have the delivery codes specified in the USERCODES parameter for the specified term(s). Specify whether data is to be extracted for cross-listed course sections. Y Extract all cross-listing information for the specified term(s). N Do not extract cross-listing information (default). L Only extract cross-listing data for those course sections which have a valid delivery code for the specified term(s). S OPTION4 Optional Only extract cross-listing data for course sections which have the delivery codes specified in the USERCODES parameter for the specified term(s). Specify whether data is to be extracted about faculty assignments. If you set OPTION1=L, faculty assignment data will only be extracted for the faculty IDs listed in the WORKFL. Y Extract information for all faculty assignments for the specified term(s). N Do not extract faculty assignment information (default). L Only extract faculty assignment data for those courses which have a valid delivery code for the specified term(s). S Only extract faculty assignment data for course sections which have the delivery codes specified in the USERCODES parameter for the specified term(s). Table 14-4 LDI Extract (ABKLDI) Parameters (continued) 14-8 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Student/Faculty Luminis Data Integration Extract Program (ABKLDI) Parameter OPTION5 Attribute Description Optional Specify whether student enrollment data is to be extracted. If you set OPTION1=L, student enrollment data will only be extracted for the student IDs listed in the WORKFL. Y Only extract student enrollment data for the specified term(s). N Do not extract student enrollment data (default). L Only extract student enrollment data for those courses which have a valid delivery code for the specified term(s). S OPTION6 Optional Only extract student enrollment data for course sections which have the delivery codes specified in the USERCODES parameter for the specified term(s). Specify whether course inventory data is to be extracted. A Extract all approved course inventory data for the specified term(s). Y Extract all course inventory data for the specified term(s). N Do not extract course inventory information (default). OPTION7 Optional Specify whether college, department, and department faculty data should be extracted. If you set OPTION1=L, department faculty data will only be extracted for the faculty IDs listed in the WORKFL. C Extract information for all colleges. D Extract information for all departments. F Extract information for all departments and their faculty members. B Extract college and department information. A Extract all information for colleges, departments, and department faculty members. N Do not extract any college, department, or faculty member information (default). Table 14-4 LDI Extract (ABKLDI) Parameters (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-9 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs WebCT Profile Extract Program (ABKLSE) Parameter Attribute USERCODES Required * Description * This parameter is required if you set OPTION2, OPTION3, OPTION4, or OPTION5 to S. Specify valid section delivery codes for which course section (OPTION2), cross-listing (OPTION3), faculty assignments (OPTION4), and/or student enrollment (OPTION5) information is to be extracted. When specifying more than one section delivery code, separate them by a space (e.g., WC BB). Table 14-4 LDI Extract (ABKLDI) Parameters (continued) WebCT Profile Extract Program (ABKLSE) The WebCT Profile Extract Program (ABKLSE) extracts personal and course data from SIS for use with WebCT. ABKLSE is executed on the host machine. ABKLSE extracts profile data for students and faculty members with a valid Web PIN in SIS. Additionally, this program extracts courserelated data for the specified terms. The output file, XMLFIL, is an IMScompliant XML format file which will be transmitted to the WebCT data repository. ABKLSE must be run initially during WebCT integration. Your institution should determine how often to run ABKLSE (at least once for each new term) in order to maintain data synchronization. Refer to On-line Reference Topic ID ABKLSEBP in SCT Plus SIS for more information. 14-10 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs WebCT Profile Extract Program (ABKLSE) Program Parameters to Enter Program parameter values must be modified in the parameter file ABKLSE.PRM for the IBM AIX platform, or AJKLSE for DEC or IBM MVS/VSE platforms. Parameter Attribute TERM Required Description The term for which data is to be extracted. The format is YYT (e.g., 99F for Fall 1999). Valid values are from data element A 020. If the same time period is defined by more than one term code for different academic units on the Term Calendar screen (CAL), use the optional TERM1-6 parameters to specify the other terms. TERM1 TERM2 TERM3 TERM4 TERM5 TERM6 Optional OPTION2 Optional Only use these optional TERM1-6 parameters (format YYT) if different academic units use different term codes for the same time period (as specified on the CAL screen). For example, an institution may define the spring term as 99S for Academic Unit C (Main Campus), but as 991 for Academic Unit L (Law School). Since both terms are within the same time period, you would need to extract data for both terms. Select the students for which data is to be extracted. Y All students with valid PINs (default) L Students who are eligible to enroll during the specified term(s) N Do not extract data for any students OPTION3 Optional Select the faculty members for which data is to be extracted. Y All faculty members with valid PINs (default) L Faculty members who are assigned to courses offered during the specified term(s). (This option will require more time to run.) N Do not extract data for any faculty members Table 14-5 WebCT Profile Extract (ABKLSE) Parameters SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-11 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs WebCT Profile Extract Program (ABKLSE) Parameter Attribute OPTION4 Optional Description Select the course sections for which data is to be extracted. Y All course sections offered during the specified term(s) (default) L All course sections that have a Delivery Code (RC186) assigned on the Course Section Maintenance Screen (129). N Do not extract data for any course sections S Course sections with the Delivery Code values specified with the USERCODE parameter. (In order to use this option, you must list at least one value for the USERCODE parameter.) OPTION5 Optional Specify whether instructor assignment data is to be extracted for the course sections listed with OPTION4. If OPTION4=N, instructor assignment data will be extracted for all course sections, regardless of the Delivery Code values specified with the USERCODE parameter. Y Extract instructor assignment data N Do not extract instructor assignment data OPTION6 Optional Specify whether student enrollment data is to be extracted for the course sections listed with OPTION4. If OPTION4=N, student enrollment data will be extracted for all course sections, regardless of the Delivery Code values specified with the USERCODE parameter. Y Extract student enrollment data N Do not extract student enrollment data OPTION7 Optional Specify whether data is only to be extracted for the student and/or faculty IDs listed in the WORKFL input file. To generate the list of IDs (e.g., IDs of all freshmen), use a software tool (e.g., FOCUS) or manually list the IDs in the WORKFL file, as follows: • Leave the first line of the WORKFL file blank • Enter one ID per line and leave the first position of each line blank Y Only extract data for the faculty/student IDs listed in the WORKFL file. N Do not use the IDs listed in the WORKFL file to determine which information is to be extracted. USERCODE Optional If you set OPTION4=S, specify the Delivery Code values for the course section data to be extracted. Specify USERCODE=WC to select only WebCT courses. Table 14-5 WebCT Profile Extract (ABKLSE) Parameters (continued) 14-12 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs AAFILE Update Program (AZKAAU) AAFILE Update Program (AZKAAU) The AAFILE Update program (AZKAAU) adds or updates information in the Attributes File (AAFILE) according to data entered by students via the Web. Currently, AZKAAU updates the AAFILE with the student’s expected graduation term and graduation checkout request, as specified via the Graduation Information feature. The Web page displays the current information to update. When the student clicks the Submit button, the new information is edited and is stored in the Attributes File (AAFILE). AZKAAU extracts the information needed, using inquiry mode to generate the update. Then AZKAAU sends the results to the Web Common Gateway Interface (CGI) program for merging with the HTML. Required Program Input The required input for the AAFILE Update program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student PIN SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-13 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Address Display/Update Program (AZKADR) Address Display/Update Program (AZKADR) The Address Display/Update program (AZKADR) provides information to the Addresses, Personal Phone Numbers, and E-mail Addresses/ Personal Web Page options, and updates specified address data for different mailing address types, e-mail addresses, and personal phone numbers. Option Mailing Addresses Description On the Web Specifications Screen (W20), your institution specifies which address types your students can view/update. A student chooses the Addresses option on the Personal Information menu and AZKADR displays a list of his/her mailing addresses. The student then selects the address type to view/update (including information about next of kin and emergency contacts). Students can also Add a new address. AZKADR will record any address changes in SIS. E-mail Addresses On the Web Specifications Screen (W20), your institution specifies which e-mail address types your students can view/update. A student chooses the E-mail Addresses/Personal Web Page option on the Personal Information menu and updates his/her e-mail address(es) and/or Personal Web page URL. AZKADR will record any e-mail address changes in SIS. Personal Phone Numbers A student chooses the Personal Phone Numbers option on the Personal Information menu and updates his/her personal phone numbers. AZKADR will record any phone number changes in SIS. Table 14-6 Description of Address Types Required Program Input The required input for the Address Display/Update program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student PIN • Mailing Address Type • E-mail Type • Personal Phone Type 14-14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Advisor Display Program (AZKADV) Advisor Display Program (AZKADV) The Advisor Display program (AZKADV) displays a list of the faculty members who have been assigned as the student’s primary and secondary advisors and/or faculty members who are in the advisor group assigned to the student. Required Program Input The required input for the Address Display/Update program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student PIN SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-15 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs AMFILE Update Program (AZKAMU) AMFILE Update Program (AZKAMU) The AMFILE Update program (AZKAMU) updates information in the AMFILE (including students’ bank account information) according to data entered by students via the Web. The Web page displays the current information to update. When the student clicks the Submit button, the new information is edited and is stored in SIS. AZKAMU extracts the information needed, using inquiry mode to generate the update. Then AZKAMU sends the results to the Web Common Gateway Interface (CGI) program for merging with the HTML. Required Program Input The required input for the AMFILE Update program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student PIN Program Parameters to Enter The following Program parameter value should be set on Screen W21 (Student Records 1). Parameter Bank Account Information Name Attribute Optional Valid Values Y Display the student’s name on the Bank Account Information page (default). N Do not display the student’s name. Table 14-7 AMFILE Update Program (AZKAMU) Parameter 14-16 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Student Holds Program (AZKHLD) Student Holds Program (AZKHLD) The Holds program (AZKHLD) displays information about any holds your institution has placed on a student’s record (hold type, reason for hold, effective term, waived term, and entry office). • If no holds exist on the student’s record, AZKHLD displays a “No holds” message. • AZKHLD does not display general holds (Hold Type G). • AZKHLD does not display the Hold Reason for holds that carry a Privacy Code. Required Program Input The required input for the Student Holds program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student PIN • Term Program Parameters to Enter Program parameter values must be set on Screen W22 (Student Records 2). Parameter Effective Term Waived Term Originating Office Attribute Required Required Required Valid Values Y Display the effective term on the Holds page (default). N Do not display the effective term. Y Display the waived term on the Holds page (default). N Do not display the waived term. Y Display the name of the office that originated the hold (default). N Do not display the name of the office that originated the hold. Table 14-8 Student Holds Program (AZKHLD) Parameters SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-17 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Marital Status Display Program (AZKMSR) Marital Status Display Program (AZKMSR) The Marital Status Display program (AZKMSR) displays the student’s current marital status. AZKMSR extracts the necessary information from the Attributes File (AAFILE), using inquiry mode to generate the Marital Status Display. AZKMSR then sends the results to the Web Common Gateway Interface (CGI) program for merging with the HTML. Required Program Input The required input for the Marital Status Display program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student PIN Marital Status Update Program (AZKMSU) The Marital Status Update program (AZKMSU) adds or updates the student’s current marital status. The Update Marital Status page displays the current status information to update. When the student clicks the Submit button, the new information is edited and is stored in the Attributes File (AAFILE). AZKMSU extracts the information needed, using inquiry mode to generate the Marital Status Update. Then AZKMSU sends the results to the Web Common Gateway Interface (CGI) program for merging with the HTML. Required Program Input The required input for the Marital Status Update program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student PIN 14-18 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Change PIN Program (AZKPIN) Change PIN Program (AZKPIN) The Change PIN program (AZKPIN) allows students to change their personal identification number (PIN). The student must enter his or her current PIN and a new PIN, and then re-type the new PIN for verification. If the current PIN matches the PIN on the student’s record and the new PIN matches the PIN verification, the system updates the student’s record and displays the message “Your PIN was updated successfully.” If the entries do not match, the system displays an error message. Required Program Input The required input for the Change PIN program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student PIN • New PIN • PIN Verification SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-19 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Table Load Program (AZKTBL) Table Load Program (AZKTBL) The Table Load program (AZKTBL) loads tables for Voice and Kiosk, and determines which terms and award years are available for selection, and whether the Student Services menu or the Site Map is displayed after a student logs into Student Self-Service. Note: The AZKTBL program is also used by Faculty and Advisor Self-Service. For this application, AZKTBL is used to perform different functions other than loading tables. For more information about how AZKTBL is used by Faculty and Advisor Self-Service, please refer to the corresponding implementation guide. Loading Tables for Voice and Kiosk AZKTBL will load the following tables from SIS into T-Serve for use for Voice and Kiosk: • Billing Term Table • Registration Term Table • Grade Term Table • Career Table • Course Schedule Term Table • Student Schedule Term Table • Admissions Term Inquiry Table • Financial Aid Award Year Table AZKTBL will load an individual table based on the transaction ID sent from T-Serve. A special table load Web page is provided to allow your institution to load a specified table or all tables. This Web page is not selected from any of the student access pages. The Web URL must be specified directly or you may choose to add it to another institutional Web page. Table data is loaded into the appropriate table data file (*.tdt) on T-Serve and is available for student access. 14-20 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Table Load Program (AZKTBL) Determining Term and Award Year Availability On the Select Term page, AZKTBL will list the terms that are available for the various Student Self-Service features that require term selection. On the Select Award Year page, AZKTBL will list the award years that are available for viewing/updating financial aid information, as determined by your setting for Available Award Years on Screen W26. Displaying the Main Menu or Site Map AZKTBL uses the Student Main Menu setting on Screen W02 (Web Student and Faculty Specifications) to determine whether to display the Student Services menu or the Site Map after a student logs in. AZKTBL will also create the list of options to be displayed on the Site Map. Program Parameters to Enter The following program parameter values should be set on Screen W01 (Web Term Calendar), W02 (Web Student and Faculty Specifications), and W26 (Financial Aid 1). Parameter on Screen Valid Values Term Availability Registration: Begin/End 1* Begin/End 2* W01 Along with the Session dates, these dates provide for two time periods for the term within which students can register for classes on the Web. These dates are for Web registration restrictions only and do not need to be the same as the dates set up for online registration. If the current date is not in the add course start/end date ranges, the student cannot add courses to his/her schedule. Specify the Begin and End dates in the format MMDD-CCYY. The registration begin and end dates are also used to control the terms available for the student schedule display, account summary, and fee assessment functions. Billing* W01 Set to Y to allow students to view their account summary for the specified term on the Web. Grading* W01 Set to Y to allow students to view their grades for the specified term on the Web. Course Schedule* W01 Set to Y to make the term available for the Course Sections and Course Section Search features on the Web. Table 14-9 Table Load Program (AZKTBL) Parameters SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-21 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Table Load Program (AZKTBL) Parameter Student Schedule* on Screen Valid Values W01 Set to Y to allow students to view the Student Schedule, Detailed Schedule, and Registration Status for the specified term on the Web. Award Year Availability Available Award Years W26 Specify up to 5 award years for which students can view/update their financial aid information. Page Display After Login Student Main Menu W02 Specify whether the Student Services menu or the Site Map is to be displayed after students log in. D S Display the Student Services menu (default). Display the Site Map. * If you update any of these fields, you must perform an SLD table load on your Host system. Table 14-9 Table Load Program (AZKTBL) Parameters (continued) Required Program Input The only required input for the Table Load program is a transaction code. 14-22 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Parent/Guest Payment Program (AZKVPA) Parent/Guest Payment Program (AZKVPA) The Parent/Guest Payment program (AZKVPA) enables a student’s parent or guest to enter the required student ID and birth date for the student for whom they want to make a credit card payment. AZKVPA then verifies this information against the SIS database to determine whether the parent or guest should be allowed to make a payment for the student. Once AZKVPA has verified the student ID and birth date, the Credit Card Payment Program (BZKCCU) processes the credit card payment information. Required Program Input The required input for the Verify Student program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student birth date SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-23 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Verify Student Program (AZKVST) Verify Student Program (AZKVST) The Verify Student program (AZKVST) checks the student ID and PIN against the SIS database to determine whether the login attempt will be permitted. The Web display prompts for information needed by AZKVST, including student ID and PIN. AZKVST reads the necessary master file information, updates the Web last access date, and returns a message indicating success or failure of the login attempt. When the PIN is invalid, the invalid PIN counter is also updated. Your institution determines the login choices available by setting login values on the Web Student and Faculty Specifications Screen (W02). After a student chooses the Login to Student Services or Apply for Admission option, he/she must enter his/her ID and PIN. For the Apply for Admission option, AZKVST determines if the specified SID is listed in the AAFILE. • If the SID is not listed in the AAFILE, MZKINT will display the Create Account page. • If only the SID (no PIN) is in the AAFILE and the Allow Web PIN Creation option is set to N on Screen WA2, AZKVST asks the applicant to contact your institution for a PIN. • If only the SID (no PIN) is in the AAFILE and the Allow Web PIN Creation option is set to Y on Screen WA2, MZKVST displays the Identity Verification page. • If a PIN is listed with the SID in the AAFILE, AZKVST will display the Login PIN page. AZKVST will then verify the applicant’s PIN. If the PIN matches what is in the AAFILE for the SID, AZKVST will display the Select Application Type and Select Term pages (or the Select Application page if the applicant has more than one application). Once the PIN is verified, the system will display the next page. If your institution is using the Campus-Wide ID (CWID), the system will display the student’s CWID under either of these conditions: • If you allow students to use their SSN or CWID to log in, the system will display their CWID each time they log in with their SSN. • If you allow students to use their SSN the first time they log in and then require them to use their CWID thereafter, the system will display their CWID after they log in the first time. 14-24 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Student Account Balance Program (BZKBIL) If your institution chooses to display I Forgot My PIN on the Login page, AZKVST will also handle user verification by his/her PIN Question and Answer. After the student enters the exact Answer to the PIN Question, he/she will be able to change his/her PIN, log in with the new PIN, and then access Student Self-Service. Required Program Input The required input for the Verify Student program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student PIN Student Account Balance Program (BZKBIL) The Student Account Balance program (BZKBIL) displays the billing statement and account balance for a specified term. On the Web, a student is prompted for the information needed for the student account balance, including student ID, PIN, and term. BZKBIL extracts the necessary information, using inquiry-only mode to generate the student account balance. Then BZKBIL sends the data to the Web Common Gateway Interface (CGI) program for merging with the HTML. Your institution determines the term choices available by entering Y (Yes) in the Billing field on the Web Term Calendar Screen (W01). For any updates to the Billing field to take effect on the Web, you must use Screen SLD to load the changes. After a student chooses the Account Summary option from the Registration menu or the Student Records menu, the billing information displays on the Web page. Required Program Input The required input for the Student Account Balance program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student PIN • Term SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-25 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Student Account Balance Program (BZKBIL) Program Parameters to Enter Different program parameters need to be entered for the Web and Kiosk applications. Refer to the separate parameter lists on the following pages. Program Parameters to Enter - for Web Program parameter values must be entered on Screen W22 (Student Records 2) for Student Self-Service. Parameter Disp Due Date Attribute Optional Valid Values Y Display the due date on the Account Summary page (default). N Do not display the due date on the Account Summary page. Due Date Optional Specify the due date (in format MMDDYYYY) for all student accounts. Tuition Calculation Optional Specify when tuition calculation is to be performed. Name Optional View Account Subcode Grouping Y Always calculate tuition when an Account Summary is requested (default). R Only calculate tuition when Tuition Calc=Y on Screen 111 (Student Term Attributes) for the specified term. N Do not calculate tuition. Y Display the student name on the Account Summary page (default). N Do not display the student name on the Account Summary page. Optional Optional If blank, all students can view their account balance on the Account Summary page (default). A Only active students can view the Account Summary page. Y Summarize subcodes into subgroubs in the Account Summary and display the subcode group instead of detail lines. If a particular subcode is not associated with any subcode group, it is displayed as a subcode detail line (default). N Display every detail subcode line in the Account Summary. Table 14-10 Student Account Balance (BZKBIL) Parameters 14-26 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Student Account Balance Program (BZKBIL) Program Parameters to Enter - for Kiosk Program parameter values must be entered in the copybook ACINPM for BZKBIL. Then BZKBIL must be recompiled (and linked on DEC machines) to the TouchNet host program. Parameter PRINT-SID (Kiosk only) PRINT-ADDR (Kiosk only) ADDR-TYPE (Kiosk only) Attribute Required Required Required ADDRPREF Valid Values Y Student ID is displayed on the screen and printed on the student balance report. P Student ID is not displayed on the screen, but is printed on the student balance report. N Student ID is not displayed on the screen or printed on the student balance report. Y Student address is displayed on the screen and printed on the student balance report. P Student address is not displayed on the screen, but is printed on the student balance report. N Student address is not displayed on the screen or printed on the student balance report. The Address type to be printed on the grade report and displayed on the screen. Multiple requests are allowed and must be entered in priority sequence. For example, PB will first print/display the permanent address, and if none is found, will print/display the billing address. Valid values are the same as the values from Address Type Code, element AD215. OPTION7 (Kiosk only) PHONE (Kiosk only) Optional, used with text transcript only Y Print only default parameter text. N Print specific account text code messages for specific students. Optional # If the Text Code is entered on screen 404 or 414, the code will be matched with the corresponding message text that is submitted as a job input parameter (default). The phone number to print with the message (for example, For Questions Regarding This Statement, Call nnn-nnnn). If blank, no message appears. Table 14-11 Student Account Balance (BZKBIL) Parameters SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-27 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Student Account Balance Program (BZKBIL) Parameter SUBCODESEL (Kiosk only) HIGHSUBCODE (Kiosk only) Attribute Required Required Valid Values A Selects all subcodes; print/display text message from Text Transactions for all selected accounts (default). T Selects all accounts; print/display text message from Text Transactions for accounts with items in the subcode range specified in the SUBCODEHI and SUBCODELO fields. High subcode used for Text Transaction message displaying/printing. Subcodes < the subcode entered will have Text Transaction message displayed/printed if SUBCODESE=T. (Default is 99999.) LOW-SUBCODE (Kiosk only) Required Low subcode used for Text Transaction message displaying/printing. Subcodes > the subcode entered will have Text Transaction message displayed/printed if SUBCODESE=T. (Default is 0001.) TEXT1 TEXT2 TEXT3 (Kiosk only) Optional Three 77-character lines of text to be displayed on the student’s billing statement. Table 14-11 Student Account Balance (BZKBIL) Parameters (continued) Transaction Definitions Refer to BBB300 in the On-line Reference System for the transaction definitions for the free-form text. 14-28 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Credit Card Payment Program (BZKCCU) Credit Card Payment Program (BZKCCU) The Credit Card Payment program (BZKCCU) allows users to make payments via the Web using a credit card. A student or their parent/ guest can make payments toward the student’s account, a student can pay for transcript requests, and applicants can pay the admissions application fee. Whoever is making the credit card payment must supply his/her credit card number and expiration date, and the payment amount. Before posting a payment to a student’s or applicant’s file, the payment gateway verifies all information with an external authorization processor. To allow correct posting of payments, the administrator must assign subcodes via the program parameters. Required Program Input The required input for the Credit Card Payment program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student PIN • Term • Credit card information • Current balance • Account balance Program Parameters to Enter To set up credit card payments for the Account Summary, Parent/Guest payment, transcript request, and Admissions options, you must enter the following program parameter values. Parameter on Screen Valid Values Account Summary Credit Card Payment Default Subcode W22 The default payment subcode (greater than 00102) used to identify credit card payments toward students’ account summaries. This subcode is only used when Credit Card Usage=B or D. Table 14-12 Credit Card Program (BZKCCU) Parameters SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-29 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Credit Card Payment Program (BZKCCU) Parameter on Screen Valid Values Visa Subcode W22 The payment subcode (greater than 00102) used to identify Visa credit card payments made toward students’ account summaries. This subcode is only used when Credit Card Usage=C or D. MasterCard Subcode W22 The payment subcode (greater than 00102) used to identify MasterCard credit card payments made toward students’ account summaries. This subcode is only used when Credit Card Usage=C or D. American Express Subcode W22 The payment subcode (greater than 00102) used to identify American Express credit card payments made toward students’ account summaries. This subcode is only used when Credit Card Usage=C or D. Discover Subcode W22 The payment subcode (greater than 00102) used to identify Discover Card credit card payments made toward students’ account summaries. This subcode is only used when Credit Card Usage=C or D. Other Credit Card Subcode W22 The payment subcode (greater than 00102) used to identify credit card payments (other than Visa, MasterCard, AMerican Express, or Discover Card) made toward students’ account summaries. This subcode is only used when Credit Card Usage=C or D. Credit Card Usage W22 Specify how the credit card subcodes are to be used for account summary payments: B Use the Default Subcode for all credit card types (and disregard any subcodes entered for individual credit card types). C Only allow use of credit cards for which subcodes have been specified. This option allows you to restrict the types of credit cards used to make account summary payments. If your institution does not accept a particular credit card, do not specify a subcode for this credit card type. D Use the subcodes that have been specified for the various credit card types. Use the Default Subcode when an individual credit card subcode is not provided. This option allows you to accept all credit card types without specifying a subcode for each one. Table 14-12 Credit Card Program (BZKCCU) Parameters (continued) 14-30 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Credit Card Payment Program (BZKCCU) Parameter on Screen Valid Values Parent/Guest Credit Card Payment Default Subcode W22 The default payment subcode (greater than 00102) used to identify credit card payments made by parents or guests. This subcode is only used when Credit Card Usage=B or D. Visa Subcode W22 The payment subcode (greater than 00102) used to identify Visa credit card payments made by parents or guests. This subcode is only used when Credit Card Usage=C or D. MasterCard Subcode W22 The payment subcode (greater than 00102) used to identify MasterCard credit card payments made by parents or guests. This subcode is only used when Credit Card Usage=C or D. American Express Subcode W22 The payment subcode (greater than 00102) used to identify American Express credit card payments made by parents or guests. This subcode is only used when Credit Card Usage=C or D. Discover Subcode W22 The payment subcode (greater than 00102) used to identify Discover Card credit card payments made by parents or guests. This subcode is only used when Credit Card Usage=C or D. Other Credit Card Subcode W22 The payment subcode (greater than 00102) used to identify credit card payments (other than Visa, MasterCard, AMerican Express, or Discover Card) made by parents or guests. This subcode is only used when Credit Card Usage=C or D. Credit Card Usage W22 Specify how the credit card subcodes are to be used for payments made by parents or guests: B Use the Default Subcode for all credit card types (and disregard any subcodes entered for individual credit card types). C Only allow use of credit cards for which subcodes have been specified. This option allows you to restrict the types of credit cards used to make payments by parents or guests. If your institution does not accept a particular credit card, do not specify a subcode for this credit card type. D Use the subcodes that have been specified for the various credit card types (default). Use the Default Subcode when an individual credit card subcode is not provided. This option allows you to accept all credit card types without specifying a subcode for each one. Table 14-12 Credit Card Program (BZKCCU) Parameters (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-31 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Credit Card Payment Program (BZKCCU) Parameter on Screen Valid Values Transcript Request Credit Card Payment Default Subcode W24 The default payment subcode (greater than 00102) used to identify credit card payments for transcripts. This subcode is only used when Credit Card Usage=B or D. Visa Subcode W24 The payment subcode (greater than 00102) used to identify Visa credit card payments for transcripts. This subcode is only used when Credit Card Usage=C or D. MasterCard Subcode W24 The payment subcode (greater than 00102) used to identify MasterCard credit card payments for transcripts. This subcode is only used when Credit Card Usage=C or D. American Express Subcode W24 The payment subcode (greater than 00102) used to identify American Express credit card payments for transcripts. This subcode is only used when Credit Card Usage=C or D. Discover Subcode W24 The payment subcode (greater than 00102) used to identify Discover Card credit card payments made for transcripts. This subcode is only used when Credit Card Usage=C or D. Other Credit Card Subcode W24 The payment subcode (greater than 00102) used to identify credit card payments (other than Visa, MasterCard, AMerican Express, or Discover Card) made for transcripts. This subcode is only used when Credit Card Usage=C or D. Credit Card Usage W24 Specify how the credit card subcodes are to be used for payments for transcripts: B Use the Default Subcode for all credit card types (and disregard any subcodes entered for individual credit card types). C Only allow use of credit cards for which subcodes have been specified. This option allows you to restrict the types of credit cards used to make payments for transcripts. If your institution does not accept a particular credit card, do not specify a subcode for this credit card type. D Use the subcodes that have been specified for the various credit card types (default). Use the Default Subcode when an individual credit card subcode is not provided. This option allows you to accept all credit card types without specifying a subcode for each one. Table 14-12 Credit Card Program (BZKCCU) Parameters (continued) 14-32 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Credit Card Payment Program (BZKCCU) Parameter on Screen Default Academic Unit W24 Valid Values Specify the academic unit to be used to determine the billing term for transcript requests dated outside the current term. When paying for transcripts with a credit card, the system will try to determine the current term by first retrieving the academic unit from the student’s most recent term record. The system will then search the session calendar to find the most recent term for that academic unit. If the date on the transcript request falls between the term begin and end dates, that term will be used for the credit card payment. If, however, the date on the transcript request does not fall between the term begin and end dates, the system will use the default academic unit to determine the billing term. C D M L A Main Campus Dental School Medical School Law Center Administrative Admissions Application Fee Credit Card Payment Subcode W06 You may have up to five Credit Card Types, so you must specify the auto-charge subcode for each Credit Card Type that can be used to submit applications of any type. Table 14-12 Credit Card Program (BZKCCU) Parameters (continued) You can record whether a payment was applied to a bill, an admissions fee, or a transcript fee. For billing payments, you can keep more specific records by tracking the type of credit card used for a payment (Visa, Master Card, etc.). Admissions and transcript fee subcodes must be set up as auto charge subcodes. Since payments are categorized as billing, Admissions, or Transcript, the related HTML files are set up to hardcode a “B” for Billing, “A” for Admissions, or “T” for Transcript in the HTML page. This lets the program know what type of payment is being requested and how the payment should be posted to the student’s record. Note: If your institution does not accept a particular credit card, leave the subcode value blank. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-33 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Credit Card Payment Program (BZKCCU) Setting up Subcodes with Credit Card Payment Here are some suggestions for setting up subcodes for processing credit card payments via the Web. For: Billing Follow This Suggestion: Set up unique payment subcodes for payment of bills as a result of registration. Use different subcodes than the ones used for admissions or transcripts. We recommend you use the last digit in the subcode to identify which credit card a student used. Subcode nnnn3 nnnn4 nnnn5 nnnn6 nnnn9 or nnnn0 Transcript Requests Credit Card Type American Express Visa MasterCard Discover Other types of credit cards Set up a unique payment subcode for payment of transcript requests. Use a different subcode than the ones used for billing or admissions. You must set up this subcode as an auto charge subcode so that the offsetting charge is created at the time of the credit card payment. Table 14-13 Suggestions for Setting up Subcodes for Credit Card Processing In each case these subcodes should be distinct and different payment subcodes from those used in processing either online or batch transactions. By using distinct subcodes, you can easily identify those used for Web transactions. 14-34 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Additional Services Program (BZKOPT) Additional Services Program (BZKOPT) The Additional Services program (BZKOPT) allows students to select additional services (optional fees) via the Web. A student can select insurance plans, parking permits, board/meal plans, and so on. BZKOPT reads the student’s RT record, retrieves data about the additional services that are available and/or have been selected by the student for the specified term, and sends the information to the Web Common Gateway Interface (CGI) program for merging with the HTML. BZKOPT will list the mandatory additional service groups first, above the optional groups, and will sort the groups by group code. Selectable and non-selectable services are displayed with their corresponding titles and descriptions. BZKOPT will enable students to make selections/changes according to the dates specified for the groups and the current date. Required Program Input The required input for the Additional Services program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student PIN • Term Program Parameters to Enter Program parameter values should be entered on the following screens: Parameter on Screen Valid Values Name W21 If set to Y, the student’s name will be displayed on the Additional Services page. Billing W01 Billing must be set to Y for the specified term in order for the selected Additional Services to be billed to the students’ accounts. Table 14-14 Additional Services Program (BZKOPT) Parameters SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-35 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Billing Tuition Calculation Program (BZKTCL) Billing Tuition Calculation Program (BZKTCL) The Billing Tuition Calculation program (BZKTCL) calculates an individual student’s tuition. The Web display prompts the student for the student ID, PIN, and term. BZKTCL processes the students registration records and other information, and updates their billing records with new tuition calculation information. When the tuition calculation finishes successfully, the Student Balance program (BZKBIL) is executed to send the updated billing information to the Web Common Gateway Interface (CGI) program for merging with the HTML. Required Program Input The required input for the Billing Tuition Calculation program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student PIN • Term Program Parameters to Enter Program parameter values must be entered on Screen W22 (Student Records 2). Parameter Tuition Calculation Attribute Optional Valid Values Y Calculate tuition whenever a student clicks Account Summary on the Registration or Student Records menu (Default.) R Only calculate tuition when Tuition Calc=Y on Screen 111 (Student Term Attributes) for the specified term. N Do not calculate tuition for students; only calculate for SIS administrative users. Table 14-15 Billing Tuition Calculation Program (BZKTCL) Parameters 14-36 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs TRA 1098-T Form Display Program (BZKTRA) TRA 1098-T Form Display Program (BZKTRA) The TRA 1098-T Form Display program (BZKTRA) displays the summary information which was used to complete a student’s 1098-T Form and the transaction detail used in the calculations for the specified tax year. Once the tax year is specified, the system will display the 1098-T Form boxes and the amounts reported for that year, as required by the IRS. BZKTRA extracts the necessary information from the Student Miscellaneous File (AMFILE) and the Financial Detail File (BDFILE), using inquiry mode to generate the 1098-T Summary and Detail Information. Then BZKTRA sends the results to the Web Common Gateway Interface (CGI) program for merging with the HTML. Required Program Input The required input for the TRA 1098-T Form Display program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student PIN • Tax Year SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-37 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs TRA Tax Year Selection Program (BZKTXY) TRA Tax Year Selection Program (BZKTXY) The TRA Tax Year Selection program (BZKTXY) displays a list of tax years for which a 1098-T Form was processed for the student. Once the student selects a tax year and selects the Submit button, his/her 1098-T Summary and Detail Information is displayed. BZKTXY extracts the necessary information from the Student Miscellaneous File (AMFILE), using inquiry mode to generate the list of tax years. Then BZKTXY sends the results to the Web Common Gateway Interface (CGI) program for merging with the HTML. Required Program Input The required input for the TRA Tax Year Selection program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student PIN 14-38 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Degree Audit Program (DZKAUD) Degree Audit Program (DZKAUD) The Degree Audit program (DZKAUD) lists degree audit information for a selected student. This process extracts the necessary information and sends it to the Web Common Gateway Interface (CGI) program for merging with the HTML. Required Program Input The required input for the Degree Audit program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student PIN Program Parameters to Enter Different program parameters need to be entered for the Web and Kiosk applications. Refer to the separate parameter lists below and on the next page. Program Parameters to Enter - for Web Program parameter values must be entered on Screen W02 (Web Student and Faculty Specifications) for Student Self-Service. Parameter Test Scores Advisor Notes Attribute Required Required Advisor Name Required Valid Values Y Display the student’s test scores on the Analysis of Academic Progress report. N Do not display the student’s test scores on the report. Y Display the advisor’s notes on the Analysis of Academic Progress report. N Do not display the advisor’s notes on the report. Y Display the advisor’s name on the Analysis of Academic Progress report. N Do not display the advisor’s name. Table 14-16 Degree Audit Program (DZKAUD) Parameters SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-39 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Degree Audit Program (DZKAUD) Parameter Program Term Attribute Required Modeling Catalog Required Valid Values Specify whether the student’s primary or secondary program is to be determined by the current term or his/her last chronological term. C Use the current term (the term on the CAL screen for which today’s date falls between the session begin and end dates) for the blank session code. L Use the last chronological term (the term with the student’s most recent registration activity). Specify which catalogs can be selected for Degree Audit Modeling. Only those programs set for modeling on Screen 611 can be selected from the catalogs. 1 List programs from the student’s primary program catalog. 2 List programs from the student’s primary program catalog and those programs that have become available for his/her primary program. 3 List programs from the current catalog. 4 List programs from all catalogs. Table 14-16 Degree Audit Program (DZKAUD) Parameters Program Parameters to Enter - Kiosk Program parameter values must be entered in the copybook ACINPM for DZKAUD. Then DZKAUD must be recompiled (and linked on DEC machines) to the TouchNet host program. Program parameters are identified in the following table. Parameter PRINT-ADDR (Kiosk only) Attribute Required Valid Values Y Display the student’s local (L) and permanent (P) address on the Analysis of Academic Progress report. N Do not display the student’s local (L) and permanent (P) address on the report. Table 14-17 Degree Audit Program (DZKAUD) Parameters 14-40 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Admissions Review Application Program (MZKADM) Admissions Review Application Program (MZKADM) The Admissions Review Application program (MZKADM) displays admissions application information. On the Web, a student is prompted to enter his/her student ID and PIN, and then select the application to be reviewed or continued. MZKADM extracts the student’s admissions application data and displays it on the Web. You can determine the term choices by entering the Admissions Application Begin and Inquiry End dates on the Web Calendar Screen (W01) for each available term. For any updates to these dates to take effect on the Web, you must use Screen SLD to load the changes. Required Program Input The required input for the Admissions Review Application program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student PIN • Application to review or continue Program Parameters to Enter Program parameter values must be entered in copybook ACINPM for MZKADM. Then MZKADM must be recompiled (and linked on DEC machines) to the TouchNet host program. Parameter Attribute Description ADMADDR-PHPHONE Required The telephone number to be used by an applicant to contact the admissions office with questions about an application. ADMADDR-PHEMAILADDR Required The e-mail address to be used by an applicant to contact the admissions office with questions about an application. Table 14-18 Admissions Review Application (MZKADM) Parameters SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-41 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Admissions Review Application Program (MZKADM) Parameter Attribute MZKADMK -STU-IDREQ (Kiosk only) Required MZKADMK -STUNAME-REQ (Kiosk only) MZKADMK -STUADDR-REQ (Kiosk only) Required Required MZKADMK -ADDRTYPE (Kiosk only) Required - MZKADMK -PIN-REQ (Kiosk only) Required ADDRPREF Description Y Student ID is displayed on the screen and printed on the admissions report. P Student ID is not displayed on the screen, but is printed on the admissions report. N Student ID is not displayed on the screen or printed on the admissions report. Y Student name is displayed on the screen and printed on the admissions report. P Student name is not displayed on the screen, but is printed on the admissions report. N Student name is not displayed on the screen or printed on the admissions report. Y Student address is displayed on the screen and printed on the admissions report. P Student address is not displayed on the screen, but is printed on the admissions report. N Student address is not displayed on the screen or printed on the admissions report. Address type to be printed on the financial aid award report and displayed on the screen. Multiple requests are allowed and must be entered in priority sequence. For example, PB will first print/display the permanent address and, if none is found, will print/ display the billing address. Valid values are the same as values from Address Type Code, element AD215. Y PIN is required to be entered to match the student’s record. N PIN is not required to be entered if one does not exist on the student’s record. B PIN is required if it exists on the student’s record, or Birth Date if PIN does not exist. Table 14-18 Admissions Review Application (MZKADM) Parameters 14-42 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Admissions Review Application Program (MZKADM) Parameter Attribute MZKADMK -ADDRNAME (Kiosk only) Required Description D Last name, first name, middle name. F First name only. L Last name only. M Salutation, Last name. If the salutation is blank, provide the salutation based on the value in the gender field. N Nickname only. R First name, middle name, last name. S Salutation, first name, middle name, last name. If the salutation is blank, provide the salutation based on the value in the gender field. Y Print/display the Admissions Representative. N Do not print/display the Admissions Representative. Y Print/display the Application Status. N Do not print/display the Application Status. D Do not print the Application Status, but print the Application Not Eligible message. MZKADMK -ADM-REQ (Kiosk only) Required MZKADMK -ADMSTAT (Kiosk only) Required MZKADMK -NOT-ELIG (Kiosk only) Optional The message (up to 30 characters) to be printed in the Application Status field for status codes that are not eligible to be provided on the Web. This is a freeform field that is not validated against a validation form. MZKADMK -TYPE-2 (Kiosk only) Required Specify the message to be displayed about students’ admission status. Table 14-18 Admissions Review Application (MZKADM) Parameters SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-43 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Client Requirements Program (MZKCRQ) Client Requirements Program (MZKCRQ) The Client Requirements program (MZKCRQ) allows an applicant to record information in the Client Requirements section that your institution has created as part of his/her admissions application. Required Program Input The required input for the Client Requirements program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student PIN • The information that your institution requires on the page 14-44 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Admissions Navigation Program (MZKDIR) Admissions Navigation Program (MZKDIR) The Admissions Navigation program (MZKDIR) checks the specified application type and determines which application sections are required and are to be listed in the navigation bar and displayed on the Web page (as determined by the Web Required Admissions Pages (W04) screen). MZKDIR also keeps track of which Admissions Web page is to be displayed next and acts as the navigational mechanism for the continuous flow process that leads the applicant from one section of an application to another. Based on the Web page being processed and the state of the Web page function (finished successfully or errors occurred), MZKDIR determines which Web page is to be processed next. Required Program Input The required input for the Admissions Navigation program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student PIN • Application number • Application type In some cases, the following input is also required: • Major • College • Degree • Term • Navigation Code SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-45 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Employment History Program (MZKEMP) Employment History Program (MZKEMP) The Employment History program (MZKEMP) allows an applicant to record information in the Employment History section of his/her admissions application. Required Program Input The required input for the Employment History program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student PIN • Employment History information 14-46 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Previous High School and College Program (MZKHCL) Previous High School and College Program (MZKHCL) The Previous High School and College program (MZKHCL) is used to retrieve and update a student’s previous high school and college information. The applicant is prompted for the school’s name and location, and his/ her period of attendance at the specified school. The program extracts the information and generates the page display of college/high school information. The results are sent to the Web Common Gateway Interface (CGI) for merging with the HTML. If the applicant is modifying the information, the new information is edited and stored in the Previous High School/College file when he/she clicks the Save and Continue button. The input is processed and returned to the Web Common Gateway Interface (CGI) for merging with the HTML. Required Program Input The required input for the Previous High School and College program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student PIN • Previous high school/college code • Previous high school/college information Program Parameters to Enter Program parameter values must be entered in the copybook ACINPM for MZKHCL. Then MZKHCL must be recompiled (and linked on DEC machines) to the TouchNet host program. Parameter Attribute Description ADMADDR-PHPHONE Required The telephone number to be used by an applicant to contact the admissions office with questions about an application. Table 14-19 HS and College Program (MZKHCL) Parameters SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-47 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Admissions Create Account Program (MZKINT) Parameter Attribute Description ADMADDR-PHEMAILADDR Required The e-mail address to be used by an applicant to contact the admissions office with questions about an application. Table 14-19 HS and College Program (MZKHCL) Parameters (continued) Admissions Create Account Program (MZKINT) The Admissions Create Account program (MZKINT) allows an applicant to enter name and permanent address information when he/ she logs into the Admissions feature by either: • Entering a Social Security Number on the Login page that is not already listed in AAFILE. • Selecting I do not have a Social Security Number on the Login page. (If your institution did not change the default setting for the Generate SID option on Screen WA2 to automatically generate SIDs for applicants who do not want to enter (or don’t have) a Social Security Number.) Required Program Input The required input for the Admissions Create Account program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student PIN • Name and address information 14-48 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Name and Personal Information Program (MZKNAM) Name and Personal Information Program (MZKNAM) The Name and Personal Information program (MZKNAM) allows an applicant to record his/her nickname, additional information (e.g., gender, date of birth), address/e-mail information, personal phone numbers, and family/emergency contact information on his/her application for admission. (You specify on Screen W04 if the Personal Information page is to be displayed and if the Emergency Contact section is to be displayed on the Personal Information page.) Required Program Input The required input for the Name and Personal Information program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student PIN • Name and personal information Program Parameters to Enter Program parameter values must be entered in the copybook ACINPM for MZKNAM. Then MZKNAM must be recompiled and (linked on DEC machines) to the TouchNet host program. Parameter Attribute Description ADMADDR-PHPHONE Required The telephone number the applicant uses to contact the admissions office with questions about an application. ADMADDR-PHEMAILADDR Required The e-mail address the applicant uses to contact the admissions office with questions about an application. Table 14-20 Name and Personal Information (MZKNAM) Parameters SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-49 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Enrollment Intentions & Select Application Program (MZKPGM) Enrollment Intentions & Select Application Program (MZKPGM) The Enrollment Intentions & Select Application program (MZKPGM) allows applicants to record course of study information (e.g., application type, term of entry, and major), and specify whether he/she: • Wants to be considered for early decision • Plans to apply for financial aid • Plans to live on-campus while attending your institution • Has previously attended your institution • Has previously applied for admission to your institution After all this information is entered and the applicant clicks the Save and Continue button, the program generates the admissions application. Required Program Input The required input for the Enrollment Intentions & Select Application program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student PIN • Application number 14-50 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Admissions Prospect Program (MZKPRO) Admissions Prospect Program (MZKPRO) The Admissions Prospect program (MZKPRO) updates student and admissions files when students or prospective students enter their name, address, and academic information and/or request institutional material. Required Program Input The required input for the Admissions Prospect program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student PIN • Term • Information entered on the Web page SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-51 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Personal References Program (MZKREF) Personal References Program (MZKREF) The Personal References program (MZKREF) allows an applicant to record information in the Personal References section of his/her admissions application. Required Program Input The required input for the Personal References program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student PIN • Personal References information Residency and Citizenship Program (MZKRES) The Residency and Citizenship program (MZKRES) allows an applicant to record information in the Residency and Citizenship section of his/ her admissions application. Required Program Input The required input for the Residency and Citizenship program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student PIN • Residency and Citizenship information 14-52 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Submit Application Program (MZKSAP) Program Parameters to Enter Program parameter values must be entered in the copybook ACINPM for MZKRES. Then MZKRES must be recompiled (and linked on DEC machines) to the TouchNet host program. Parameter Attribute Description ADMADDR-PHPHONE Required The telephone number the applicant uses to contact the admissions office with questions about an application. Table 14-21 Residency/Citizenship Program (MZKRES) Parameters Submit Application Program (MZKSAP) The Submit Application program (MZKSAP) allows applicants to submit their applications for admission to your institution. Required Program Input The required input for the Submit Application program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student PIN • Entry of all required application information SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-53 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Submit Application Program (MZKSAP) Program Parameters to Enter Program parameter values must be entered in the copybook ACINPM for MZKSAP. Then MZKSAP must be recompiled (and linked on DEC machines) to the TouchNet host program. Parameter ADM-ADDR-PH- Attribute Required Description Define up to three sets of information for up to three types of Admissions Offices (e.g., Undergraduate, Graduate, International): • • • • • • • INST-NAME (Institution Name) INST-STREET1 (Mailing Address, Line 1) INST-STREET2 (Mailing Address, Line 2) INST-CSZ (City, State, Zip Code) INST-CNTRY (Country) PHONE (Area Code-Phone Number) EMAIL-ADDR (E-mail Address) The name and address information is used when paying an application fee by check or money order. The telephone number and e-mail address are used for contacting the admissions office with questions about an application. Based on options set on SIS Screen W04, the system will display the corresponding Admissions Office information on the Web pages for the type of application being created. Note: The office designations for the e-mail addresses must be defined in the same order as those defined in the TSRVWEB.INI file. Table 14-22 Submit Application Program (MZKSAP) Parameters 14-54 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Identity Verification and Create PIN Program (MZKVST) Identity Verification and Create PIN Program (MZKVST) The Identity Verification and Create PIN program (MZKVST) displays the Login page to verify an applicant’s identity in order to gain access to the Student Self-Service: Admissions application. After an applicant enters his/her SSN, MZKVST will check to see if the SSN is already included in the AAFILE. • If the SSN is already listed in the AAFILE without a corresponding PIN and your institution allows Web PIN Creation, MZKVST will display the Identity Verification page. This page will only display those verification fields for which you have assigned a weight on Screen WA2 (Web Admissions System Options). MZKVST will check the information entered on the Identity Verification page. - If the information is not correct, MZKVST will display a message to let the applicant know that his/her identity could not be verified, allow the applicant to re-enter the information, and advise him/her to call or e-mail your Admissions Office to have a PIN assigned. - If the information is correct, MZKVST will display the Create PIN page and display a Confirmation page with a message stating that the new PIN has been created. • If the SSN is already listed in the AAFILE without a corresponding PIN and your institution does not allow Web PIN Creation, MZKVST will display the Login PIN page. A message will inform the applicant that he/she has a Student ID (SID) on file, but he/she must call or email the Admissions Office to obtain a PIN in order to use the Student Self-Service: Admissions application. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-55 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Course Catalog Program (RZKCAT) Required Program Input The required input for the Identity Verification and Create PIN program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Identity verification data (First Name, Middle Initial, Last Name, Address Line 1, City, Zip/Postal Code, Phone Number, Gender, and/or Date of Birth) Course Catalog Program (RZKCAT) The Course Catalog program (RZKCAT) displays college course information. The first Web page prompts a student to select a particular subject. The second Web page displays all the courses for that subject. Your institution determines which academic year catalog to display by entering the value for Catalog Academic Year on Screen W21. Required Program Input The required input for the Course Catalog program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Subject 14-56 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Course Catalog Program (RZKCAT) Program Parameters to Enter Program parameter values must be entered on Screen W21 (Student Records 1). Parameter Attribute Description Dept Description Optional If Y (default), the system reads the RJFILE (Course Description File) to get the long description of the department, as shown in screen 1D1, item=1. Item 1 Optional If Y (default), the system reads the RJFILE to get the title of the course, as shown in 1D4, item=1. Item 2 Optional If Y (default), the system reads the RJFILE to get the instructor name, as shown in screen 1D4, item=2. Item 3 Optional If Y (default), the system reads the RJFILE to get the prerequisites, as shown in screen ID4, item=3. Item 4 Optional If Y (default), the system reads the RJFILE to get the co-requisites, as shown in screen ID4, item=4. Item 5 Optional If Y (default), the system reads the RJFILE to get the notes, as shown in screen ID4, item=5. Item 6 Optional If Y (default), the system reads the RJFILE to get the user-defined paragraph, as shown in screen ID4, item=6. Item 7 Optional If Y (default), the system reads the RJFILE to get the user-defined paragraph, as shown in screen ID4, item=7. Item 8 Optional If Y (default), the system reads the RJFILE to get the user-defined paragraph, as shown in screen ID4, item=8. Item 9 Optional If Y (default), the system reads the RJFILE to get the user-defined paragraph, as shown in screen ID4, item=9. Table 14-23 Course Catalog Program (RZKCAT) Parameters SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-57 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Course Availability Program (RZKCRS) Course Availability Program (RZKCRS) The Course Availability program (RZKCRS) displays information about available course sections, including status, meeting days and times, building, room, start/end dates, and instructor. This program runs when students select the Course Sections or Course Section Search option on the Courses menu or the Student Self-Service home page. After students select the Course Sections option, they must select the term, subject area, and course title (if more than one course is offered for the specified subject). The system will then display a list of available course sections. After students select the Course Section Search option, they must select the term. The system then displays a list of search criteria (as specified by your institution using options in the ACINPM copybook). Once the students select the search criteria and select the Submit button, the system will display a list of the courses that meet the search criteria. A term’s course sections may be viewed on the Web if the Course Schedule field on the Web Term Calendar Screen (W01) contains a Y (Yes). For any updates to the Course Schedule field to take effect on the Web, you must use Screen SLD to load the changes. Required Program Input The required input for the Course Availability program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Term • Subject area • Course Title • Search Criteria (for Course Section Search option) If this program is used by the secured access functions, required input also includes student ID and PIN. 14-58 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Course Availability Program (RZKCRS) Program Parameters to Enter Program parameter values must be entered in the copybook ACINPM for RZKCRS. Then RZKCRS must be recompiled (and linked on DEC machines) to the TouchNet host program. Parameter PRINTBLDG PRINT-REG PRINT-OPEN Attribute Required Required Required Valid Values Y Display/print the building and room on the course availability report. N Do not display/print the building and room on the course availability report. Y Display/print the Registration Call Number on the course availability report. N Do not display/print the Registration Call Number on the course availability report. Y Only display/print open sections on the course availability report. The Sections search option will not be displayed on the Course Section Search Web page, since you will not need to specify whether to search for open or all sections. N Display/print all sections on the course availability report. Y Display the course notes (from SIS Screen 131) under the course section description. N Do not display the course notes. DISPLAYNOTES (Web only) Required MAXDISPLAY Optional Specify the maximum number of course sections to be displayed at one time on the Course Section Search page. The default is 50. DISPLAYALLSUBJECTS Optional Y Display the “All Subjects” option in the Subject list box on the Course Section Search page. N Do not display the “All Subjects” option in the Subject list box (default). DISPLAYSITE Required Y List Site as one of the search criteria on the Course Section Search page. MAIN-CAMPUSSITE is the value for DBD element AA092 that designates the Main Campus site code. You must specify a value for all Off-Campus site codes in order for the Site list box to be formatted correctly. N Do not list Site as one of the search criteria. Table 14-24 Course Availability Program (RZKCRS) Parameters SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-59 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Grading Program (RZKFGR) Parameter Attribute Valid Values TIMEINCREMENT Optional Specify the increments in which the times are to be displayed in the Earliest and Latest Start Time list boxes on the Course Section Search page. Specify a time increment of either 05, 10, 15, 30, or 60 (default). DISPLAYCOURSELEVEL Required Specify the options to be displayed in the Level list box on the Course Section Search page. You can define the course levels in the DBD and/or specify up to 10 levels in the ACINPM copybook by entering the following information in the COURSELEVEL-TABLE for each level: CRS-LVL-FROM and CRS-LVL-THRU define the range of levels. CRS-LVL-DESC defines the name to be displayed in the Level list box for the specified range of levels. N Do not list Level as one of the search criteria on the Course Section Search page. 1 Display the values for DBD element AA615 and any additional values defined in the COURSELEVEL-TABLE. 2 Display the values for DBD element AA615 only. 3 Display the values defined in the COURSELEVEL-TABLE. DISPLAYWEBCT Optional Y Display WebCT as one of the search criteria on the Course Section Search page, so students can just search for WebCT courses (default). N Do not display WebCT as one of the search criteria. Table 14-24 Course Availability Program (RZKCRS) Parameters (continued) Grading Program (RZKFGR) The Grading program (RZKFGR) records grades in SIS for students who are taking WebCT courses. 14-60 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Grade Report Program (RZKGRD) Grade Report Program (RZKGRD) The Grade Report program (RZKGRD) displays a student’s grade report for both Web and Kiosk. A student is prompted to enter a student ID and PIN, and specify a term. This process extracts the information needed to generate the grade report and sends it to the Web Common Gateway Interface (CGI) program for merging with the HTML. Your institution determines the term choices available by setting Grading to Y on the Web Term Calendar Screen (W01) for each term available. For any updates to the Grading field to take effect on the Web, you must use Screen SLD to load the changes. Required Program Input The required input for the Grade Report program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student PIN • Term Program Parameters to Enter Different program parameters need to be entered for the Web and Kiosk applications. Refer to the separate parameter lists on the following pages. Program Parameters to Enter - for Web Program parameter values must be entered on Screen W21 (Student Records 1) and Screen W02 (Web Student and Faculty Specifications) for Student Self-Service. Parameter on Screen Name W21 Statistics W21 Valid Values Y Display the student name on the Grades page (default) N Do not display the student name on the Grades page. Y Display statistics (current and cumulative) on the Grades page (default). N Do not display statistics on the Grades page. Table 14-25 Grade Report Program (RZKGRD) Parameters SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-61 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Grade Report Program (RZKGRD) Parameter Holds on Screen W21 Midterm Grading W02 Valid Values Y Students with transcript holds can view their grades. N Students with transcript holds cannot view their grades (default). Y Display midterm grades on the Grades page (default). If you are using Faculty and Advisor Self-Service, this setting will also display midterm grades on the Grade Courses and Grades pages. N Only display final grades on the Grades page. Table 14-25 Grade Report Program (RZKGRD) Parameters (continued) Program Parameters to Enter - for Kiosk Program parameter values must be entered in the copybook ACINPM for RZKGRD. Then RZKGRD must be recompiled (and linked on DEC machines) to the TouchNet host program. Parameter Attribute PRINT-SID (Kiosk only) Required PRINTADDR (Kiosk only) ADDRTYPE (Kiosk only) Required Required Valid Values Y Student ID is displayed on the screen and printed on the grade report. P Student ID is not displayed on the screen, but is printed on the grade report. N Student ID is not displayed on the screen or printed on the grade report. Y Student address is displayed on the screen and printed on the grade report. P Student address is not displayed on the screen, but is printed on the grade report. N Student address is not displayed on the screen or printed on the grade report. Address type to be printed on the grade report and displayed on the screen. Multiple requests are allowed and must be entered in priority sequence. For example, PB will first print/display the permanent address, and if none is found, will print/display the billing address. Valid values are from the Address Type Code (AD215). Table 14-26 Grade Report Program (RZKGRD) Parameters 14-62 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Official Transcript Request Program (RZKOTR) Parameter Attribute ACADACTION (Kiosk only) Required Valid Values * Don’t print/display Academic Action or Dean’s List. A Print/display only Academic Action. B Print/display Academic Action and Dean’s List. D Print/display only Dean’s List. Table 14-26 Grade Report Program (RZKGRD) Parameters (continued) Official Transcript Request Program (RZKOTR) The Official Transcript Request Program (RZKOTR) enables students to submit requests for copies of their official transcript be sent to specified recipients, and pay for the transcripts via credit card. Your institution defines the fees for transcript copies/requests on Screen W23 (Official Transcript Request 1) and sets the delivery fees on Screen W24 (Official Transcript Request 2). Required Program Input The required input for the Accept Awards program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student PIN • Name and address of the person who is to receive the transcript • Credit card information in order to submit the request SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-63 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Official Transcript Request Program (RZKOTR) Program Parameter Values to Enter Program parameter values must be entered on screens W23 and W24 (Official Transcript Request 1 & 2). Field Description Screen W23 - For Transcript Fees 1 & 2 Title Specify the title that is to appear on the Official Transcript Request page: H S T Type Handling Service Transcript Specify the type of transcript fee: N FC FR GC GR No fee Charge a flat fee per transcript copy Charge flat fee per transcript request Charge a graduated fee per transcript copy Charge a graduated fee per transcript request Fees: Amount 1-5 Specify the dollar amount for the transcript fee. • If you are charging a flat fee (Type=FC or FR), only enter one fee amount. • If you are charging graduated fees, enter up to 5 fee amounts. Limit 1-5 If you are charging graduated fees and you’ve specified a corresponding Amount, enter the maximum number of transcript copies or transcript requests (depending on the Fee Type of GC or GR) to be charged the corresponding Amount. Graduated Fee Per Copy Only: Count If you set Transcript Fee Type=GC (graduated fee per copy), specify the date from which transcript requests are to be counted: A Start counting transcript requests from the beginning of the academic year. You must then specify the Academic Unit. L Count transcript requests over the student’s lifetime. T Start counting transcript requests from the beginning of the term. You must then specify the Academic Unit. C Start counting transcript requests from the beginning of the calendar year. D Start counting transcript requests from the specified Date. Table 14-27 Official Transcript Request 1 Screen (W23) Entries 14-64 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Official Transcript Request Program (RZKOTR) Field Date Description If you set Transcript Fee Type=GC (graduated fee per copy) and Count=D, specify the beginning date for counting transcript requests. Academic Unit If you set the Transcript Fee Type=GC and Count=A or T, specify which academic unit is to be used to determine the academic unit or term start date from which transcript copies are to be counted. C D M L A Main Campus Dental School Medical School Law Center Administrative If you do not specify the academic unit, the system will use the academic unit associated with the student’s most recent career at the time the transcript request was made. Screen W24 - For Delivery Fees 1 - 5 Delivery Fee Charged Specify whether delivery fees are to be charged for transcript requests. Y N Mode Specify the first type of delivery that students can select for receiving their transcripts. F O 2 C Type First Class Mail Overnight Express 2-Day Priority Certified Mail Specify whether the delivery fee is to be charged per transcript copy or transcript request. C R Amt Charge delivery fees for transcript requests. Do not charge delivery fees for transcript requests. Charge the delivery fee per transcript copy. Charge the delivery fee per transcript request. Specify the dollar amount to be charged for delivery of the transcript. Table 14-27 Official Transcript Request 1 Screen (W23) Entries(continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-65 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Official Transcript Request Program (RZKOTR) Field Description Credit Card Payment Information Default Subcode The default payment subcode (greater than 00102) used to identify credit card payments for transcripts. This subcode is only used when Credit Card Usage=B or D. Visa Subcode The payment subcode (greater than 00102) used to identify Visa credit card payments for transcripts. This subcode is only used when Credit Card Usage=C or D. MasterCard Subcode The payment subcode (greater than 00102) used to identify Mastercard credit card payments for transcripts. This subcode is only used when Credit Card Usage=C or D. American Express Subcode The payment subcode (greater than 00102) used to identify American Express credit card payments for transcripts. This subcode is only used when Credit Card Usage=C or D. Discover Subcode The payment subcode (greater than 00102) used to identify Discover Card credit card payments made for transcripts. This subcode is only used when Credit Card Usage=C or D. Other Credit Card Subcode The payment subcode (greater than 00102) used to identify credit card payments (other than Visa, Mastercard, AMerican Express, or Discover Card) made for transcripts. This subcode is only used when Credit Card Usage=C or D. Credit Card Usage Specify how the credit card subcodes are to be used for payments for transcripts: B Use the Default Subcode for all credit card types (and disregard any subcodes entered for individual credit card types). C Only allow use of credit cards for which subcodes have been specified. This option allows you to restrict the types of credit cards used to make payments for transcripts. If your institution does not accept a particular credit card, do not specify a subcode for this credit card type. D Use the subcodes that have been specified for the various credit card types (default). Use the Default Subcode when an individual credit card subcode is not provided. This option allows you to accept all credit card types without specifying a subcode for each one. Table 14-27 Official Transcript Request 1 Screen (W23) Entries(continued) 14-66 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Official Transcript Request Program (RZKOTR) Field Description Default Specify the academic unit to be used to determine the billing term Academic Unit for transcript requests dated outside the current term. When paying for transcripts with a credit card, the system will try to determine the current term by first retrieving the academic unit from the student’s most recent term record. The system will then search the session calendar to find the most recent term for that academic unit. If the date on the transcript request falls between the term begin and end dates, that term will be used for the credit card payment. If, however, the date on the transcript request does not fall between the term begin and end dates, the system will use the default academic unit to determine the billing term. C D M L A Main Campus Dental School Medical School Law Center Administrative Table 14-27 Official Transcript Request 1 Screen (W23) Entries(continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-67 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Registration Program (RZKREG) Registration Program (RZKREG) The Registration program (RZKREG) allows students to add courses, drop courses, change course options, and conditionally drop and add courses. The drop/add page displays the registered courses and requested courses. An error message displays if any problems are encountered. If a class is in hold status, the student will be waitlisted in the class. For the change course option, you may change the grade type (if allowed) and credit hours for variable and alternate credit hours. You are only allowed to change normal grade type to selected grade types. Once the grade type is changed, it may not be changed back to normal on the Web. The terms available for registration are determined by your institution and entered using the Registration date ranges on the Web Term Calendar Screen (W01). For any updates to the Registration dates to take effect on the Web, you must use Screen SLD to load the changes. The date ranges on Screen W01 determine which terms appear in the term selection list that is displayed when the student selects one of the registration functions on the Registration menu. Registration controls are set on Screen W03. For more information, see Chapter 7, Registration. Required Program Input The required input for the Registration program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student PIN • Term 14-68 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Registration Program (RZKREG) Program Parameters to Enter Program parameter values must be entered on Screen W25 (Registration and Schedule 1). Parameter Name (Web only) Attribute Optional Valid Values Y Display the student name on the Drop/ Add Classes, Change Class Options, and Conditional Drop/Add pages (default). N Do not display the student name on the Drop/Add Classes, Change Class Options, and Conditional Drop/Add pages. Term Status Required Define up to five terms which are to be open for registration. Grade Types Required Specify up to five Grade types which can be selected from the Change Class Options function on the Web. Valid values are the same as values from Grade Type, element RT310. Table 14-28 Registration Program (RZKREG) Parameters SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-69 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Student Schedule Program (RZKSCD) Student Schedule Program (RZKSCD) The Student Schedule program (RZKSCD) displays a student’s schedule for both the Web and Kiosk applications. A student is prompted to enter a student ID and PIN, and specify a term. This process extracts the information needed to generate the student schedule and then sends it to the Web Common Gateway Interface (CGI) program for merging with the HTML. Your institution determines the term choices available by entering Y (Yes) in the Student Schedule field on the Web Term Calendar Screen (W01). For any updates to the Student Schedule field to take effect on the Web, you must use Screen SLD to load the changes. Required Program Input The required input for the Student Schedule program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student PIN • Term Program Parameters Values to Enter Program parameter values must be entered on Screen W25 (Registration and Schedule). Parameter Name Attribute Required Time Increment Optional Valid Values Y Student name is displayed on the screen for Web and Kiosk, and printed on the student schedule for Kiosk. P For Kiosk, student name is not displayed on the screen, but is printed on the student schedule. For Web, the name is displayed. N Student name is not displayed on the screen for Web and Kiosk, and not printed on the student schedule for Kiosk. Specify the time increment by which the Student Schedule is to be divided. Specify an increment of either 15 (default), 30, or 60 minutes. Table 14-29 Student Schedule Program (RZKSCD) Parameters 14-70 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Detailed Schedule Program (RZKSCH) Detailed Schedule Program (RZKSCH) The Detailed Schedule program (RZKSCH) displays a student’s detailed schedule for both the Web and Kiosk applications. A student is prompted to enter a student ID and PIN, and specify a term. This process extracts the information needed to generate the student schedule and then sends it to the Web Common Gateway Interface (CGI) program for merging with the HTML. RZKSCH also passes the Course Section Delivery Code to help determine if a course is a WebCT course. If you are not using Campus Pipeline/Luminis, WebCT courses will be displayed on the Detailed Schedule as links to the WebCT Course Login page. Your institution determines the term choices available by entering Y (Yes) in the Student Schedule field on the Web Term Calendar Screen (W01). For any updates to the Student Schedule field to take effect on the Web, you must use Screen SLD to load the changes. Required Program Input The required input for the Detailed Schedule program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student PIN • Term Program Parameters to Enter Different program parameters need to be entered for the Web and Kiosk applications. Refer to the separate parameter lists on the following pages. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-71 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Detailed Schedule Program (RZKSCH) Program Parameters to Enter - for Web The following program parameter value should be entered on Screen W25 (Registration and Schedule). Parameter Name Attribute Required Valid Values Y Student name is displayed on the screen for Web and Kiosk, and printed on the detailed schedule for Kiosk. P For Kiosk, student name is not displayed on the screen, but is printed on the detailed schedule. For Web, the name is displayed. N Student name is not displayed on the screen for Web and Kiosk, and not printed on the detailed schedule for Kiosk. Table 14-30 Detailed Schedule Program (RZKSCH) Parameters Program Parameters Values to Enter - Kiosk Program parameter values must be entered in the copybook ACINPM for RZKSCH. Then RZKSCH must be recompiled (and linked on DEC machines) to the TouchNet host program. Parameter PRINT-SID (Kiosk only) PRINT-ADDR (Kiosk only) Attribute Required Required Valid Values Y Student ID is displayed on the screen and printed on the detailed schedule. P Student ID is not displayed on the screen, but is printed on the detailed schedule. N Student ID is not displayed on the screen or printed on the detailed schedule. Y Student address is displayed on the screen and printed on the detailed schedule. P Student address is not displayed on the screen, but is printed on the detailed schedule. N Student address is not displayed on the screen or printed on the detailed schedule. Table 14-31 Detailed Schedule Program (RZKSCH) Parameters - Kiosk 14-72 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Registration Status Program (RZKSRS) Parameter ADDR-TYPE (Kiosk only) Attribute Valid Values Required- Address type to be printed on the detailed schedule report and displayed on the screen. Multiple requests are allowed and must be entered in priority sequence. For example, PB will first print/display the permanent address and, if none is found, will print/display the billing address. ADDRPREF Valid values are from the Address Type Code, element AD215. Table 14-31 Detailed Schedule Program (RZKSCH) Parameters - Registration Status Program (RZKSRS) The Registration Status program (RZKSRS) displays the student’s registration status for the selected term. After the student selects a term, RZKSRS reads the Student Term File (RTFILE), Attributes File (AAFILE), and the Academic Auxiliary File (RAFILE) for the student’s information regarding holds, academic standing, registration status, class, curriculum, and earned credit hours to date. Then the program generates the display and sends the results to the Web Common Gateway Interface (CGI) program for merging with the HTML. Required Program Input The required input for the Registration Status program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student PIN • Term SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-73 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Transfer Credit Program (RZKTCD) Program Parameter Values to Enter The following program parameter value should be entered on Screen W25 (Registration and Schedule). Parameter Name (Web only) Attribute Optional Valid Values Y Student name is displayed on the Registration Status page (default). N Student name is not displayed on the Registration Status page. Table 14-32 Registration Status Program (RZKSRS) Parameters Transfer Credit Program (RZKTCD) The Transfer Credit program (RZKTCD) displays a list of the courses which have been accepted as transfer credit at your institution for a previously selected career. A student is prompted for his/her student ID, PIN, and level of study. RZKTCD extracts the information needed, using inquiry-only mode to generate the Transfer Credit Display. Then RZKTCD sends the results to the Web Common Gateway Interface (CGI) program for merging with the HTML. The Level of Study choices are extracted from the Level/Career data element (AA630) in the DBD via a table load Web transaction. After a student chooses the Transfer Credit option on the Student Records menu and selects a level of study, the information displays on the Web page. Required Program Input The required input for the Transfer Credit program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student PIN • Level of Study 14-74 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Unofficial Transcript Program (RZKTRN) Program Parameter Values to Enter Program parameter values should be entered on Screen W21 (Student Records 1). Parameter Name (Web only) Holds Attribute Optional Optional Valid Values Y Student name is displayed on the Transfer Credit page (default). N Student name is not displayed on the Transfer Credit page. Y Students with transcript holds can view the Transfer Credit page. N Students with transcript holds cannot view the Transfer Credit page (default). Table 14-33 Transfer Credit Program (RZKTCD) Parameters Unofficial Transcript Program (RZKTRN) The Unofficial Transcript program (RZKTRN) displays an unofficial student academic transcript. A student is prompted for his/her student ID, PIN, and level of study. RZKTRN extracts the information needed, using inquiry-only mode to generate the Unofficial Transcript Display. Then RZKTRN sends the results to the Web Common Gateway Interface (CGI) program for merging with the HTML. The Level of Study choices are extracted from the Level/Career data element (AA630) in the DBD via a table load Web transaction. After a student chooses the Unofficial Transcript option on the Student Records menu and selects a level of study, the information displays on the Web page. Required Program Input The required input for the Unofficial Transcript program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student PIN • Level of Study SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-75 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Unofficial Transcript Program (RZKTRN) Program Parameters to Enter Different program parameters need to be entered for the Web and Kiosk applications. Refer to the separate parameter lists on the following pages. Program Parameters to Enter - for Web The following program parameter values should be entered on Screen W21 (Student Records 1). Parameter Attribute Name (Web only) Optional Holds Optional Valid Values Y Student name is displayed on the Unofficial Transcript page (default). N Student name is not displayed on the Unofficial Transcript page. Y Students with transcript holds can view the Unofficial Transcript page. N Students with transcript holds cannot view the Unofficial Transcript page (default). Table 14-34 Unofficial Transcript Program (RZKTRN) Parameters Program Parameter Values to Enter - for Kiosk Program parameter values must be entered in the copybook ACINPM for RZKTRN. Then RZKTRN must be recompiled (and linked on DEC machines) to the TouchNet host program. Parameter Attribute Valid Values ADDR-TYPE (Kiosk only) Required Address type to be printed on the Unofficial Transcript report and displayed on the screen. Multiple requests are allowed and must be entered in priority sequence. For example, PB will first print/display the permanent address, and if none is found, will print/display the billing address. Valid values are from the Address Type Code (AD215). FONTS (Kiosk only) Required 1 Bold 2 Regular 3 Italic Y Student name is displayed on the Unofficial Transcript page. N Student name is not displayed on the Unofficial Transcript page. PRINT-NAME (Web only) Required Table 14-35 Unofficial Transcript Program (RZKTRN) Parameters - Kiosk 14-76 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Institutional Coursework Program (RZKTSC) Institutional Coursework Program (RZKTSC) The Institutional Coursework program (RZKTSC) displays courses taken by a student during tenure at your institution for a previously selected career. A student is prompted for his/her student ID, PIN, and level of study. RZKTSC extracts the information needed, using inquiryonly mode to generate the Institutional Coursework Display. Then RZKTSC sends the results to the Web Common Gateway Interface (CGI) program for merging with the HTML. The Level of Study choices are extracted from the Level/Career data element (AA630) in the DBD via a table load Web transaction. After a student chooses the Institutional Coursework option on the Student Records menu and selects a level of study, the information displays on the Web page. Required Program Input The required input for the Institutional Coursework program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student PIN • Level of Study Program Parameter Values to Enter Program parameter values should be entered on Screen W21 (Student Records 1). Parameter Name (Web only) Holds Attribute Optional Optional Valid Values Y Student name is displayed on the Institutional Coursework Web page (default). N Student name is not displayed on the Institutional Coursework Web page. Y Students with transcript holds can view the Institutional Coursework page. N Students with transcript holds cannot view the Institutional Coursework page (default). Table 14-36 Institutional Coursework Program (RZKTSC) Parameters SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-77 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Accept Awards Program (SZKACC) Accept Awards Program (SZKACC) The Accept Awards Program (SZKACC) displays information about each of the financial aid awards that have been offered to the student for the specified award year (award message, status, offered amount, accepted amount, and paid amount) and general messages specified for the student. Depending on the options that have been set for each fund, students can then accept or decline their awards. SZKACC extracts the information needed, using inquiry-only mode to generate the Accept Awards Display. Then SZKACC sends the results to the Web Common Gateway Interface (CGI) program for merging with the HTML. After a student chooses the Accept Awards option on the Financial Aid menu and selects the award year, the information displays on the Web page. The Action options that are displayed for a fund on the Accept Awards page are specified for the Web Acc/Rej option on Screen 331 (Fund Attribute) for that fund. Your setting for Web Acc/Rej determines whether SZKACC will display the fund on the Accept Awards page and allow students to accept full or partial awards and decline awards. If a student attempts to accept a partial amount that is less than the Min Award amount specified for the fund on Screen 331, SZKACC will display an error message. Required Program Input The required input for the Accept Awards program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student PIN • Award Year 14-78 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Accept Awards Program (SZKACC) Program Parameter Values to Enter Program parameter values should be entered on Screen 331 (Fund Attribute) and on Screen W26 (Financial Aid 1). Parameter Attribute Valid Values Settings on Screen 331 Pr on Awd Ltr Optional Determines if the specified fund is displayed on the Accept Awards page. If Pr on Awd Ltr is Y or X, the award is displayed. Note: In order for the fund to be displayed, Awd Ltr Print must not be set to H on Screen 317, 318, or 325 for the specified student and award year. Web Acc/Rej Optional Determines whether or not students can view their awards for the specified fund on the Accept Awards page, and accept full or partial awards and decline awards. A B D M N Web Lend Sel Optional Accept full or partial awards Accept full awards or decline awards Only view the awards on the Web page Accept full or partial awards, and decline awards Cannot view their awards on the Web page (default) Specifies whether a preferred lender list for this fund is to be displayed on the Accept Awards page. N 1-9 Do not display a preferred lender list for this fund on the Accept Awards page (default). If you set Web Lend Sel to a number, you MUST list at least the same number of preferred lenders (for DBD element SW073). Number and list your Preferred Lenders with one space between the A# and the lender name, as follows: A1 Name of 1st Preferred Lender A2 Name of 2nd Preferred Lender . . . A9 Name of 9th Preferred Lender You may list other lenders for B1 to B9, C1 to C9, ... Z1 to Z9, but these will not be displayed in the Preferred Lender list box. Min Award Optional The system will not allow students to accept an award amount that is below the specified Min Award amount (the minimum amount the lender will process). Table 14-37 Accept Awards Program (SZKACC) Parameters SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-79 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Accept Awards Program (SZKACC) Parameter Attribute Valid Values Settings on Screen W26 Name Time Control Optional Optional Y Student name is displayed on the Accept Awards page (default). N Student name is not displayed on the Accept Awards page. Y The system will calculate how much time each student has to accept/decline his/her awards, and will display a message to let the student know how many days are left to take action on his/her awards. If you specify this option, you must also set Number of Days to Take Action. N No date calculation will be performed to determine the number of days a student has to take action on his/her awards. The student will have an unlimited number of days to view and accept/decline his/her awards via the Accept Awards page (default). Number of Days to Take Action Optional If you set Time Control to Y, you must set this option. Specify the number of days students have to take action on their awards. The system will calculate the last day it will accept a response by using the date the award letter is printed as the start date. Since there may be more than one Award Letter Print Date within an Award Year, the system will use the most recent Award Letter Print Date in its calculation. (Default is 0, the setting that must be used if you set Time Control to N.) Set Offered Amount to Accept Amount Optional Specify whether the system should set the amount of the award that was offered to the partial award amount that was accepted by the student. N Do not set the offered amount to the accepted partial amount (default). The student will be able to change the amount of the award he/she wants to accept until the award is disbursed. Y Set the offered amount to the partial amount the student accepted. The award amount will be locked in so that the student cannot change it via the Web. Table 14-37 Accept Awards Program (SZKACC) Parameters (continued) 14-80 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Accept Awards Program (SZKACC) Parameter Attribute Terms & Conditions Optional Valid Values Specify whether students must agree to your institution’s Terms and Conditions before accepting their awards. N Do not display a link to the Terms and Conditions along with an acceptance checkbox on the Accept Awards page (default). Y Display a link to the Terms and Conditions along with an acceptance checkbox on the Accept Awards page. When students select the link, the system will display a new window with a list of your award Terms and Conditions for students to read. You should update the text in sactermcond.htm with your institution’s Terms and Conditions. Students must select the checkbox on the Accept Awards page to signify that they accept the term and conditions before the system will process their awards. After the student has taken action on all his/her awards or the only available action is to decline his/her awards, the checkbox will no longer be displayed on the page. The date on which the student last accepted the terms and conditions will be listed in the Term/Cond field on Screen 325 (Packaging) Table 14-37 Accept Awards Program (SZKACC) Parameters (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-81 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Financial Aid Applicant Award Information Program (SZKAWD) Financial Aid Applicant Award Information Program (SZKAWD) The Financial Aid Applicant Award Information program (SZKAWD) displays a list of the student’s financial aid awards by term, including offered amount, paid amount, and messages. On the Web, a student is prompted to enter the student ID, PIN, and award year. SZKAWD extracts the information needed to generate the financial aid award information, and sends it to the Web Common Gateway Interface (CGI) program for merging with the HTML. The Award Information by Year page will also display a link to the Accept Awards page, so students can take action on their awards. If your institution requires that students accept your financial aid terms and conditions (set Terms & Conditions to Y on Screen W26), the page will also display a link to your terms and conditions. Your institution determines the award year choices available by listing the award years in presentation order on the Financial Aid 1 Screen (W26). These award years are then loaded into a table on T-Serve via a Web transaction. Once the T-Serve table is loaded, the award years are available on the Web. Required Program Input The required input for the Financial Aid Applicant Award Information program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student PIN • Aid award year 14-82 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Financial Aid Applicant Award Information Program (SZKAWD) Program Parameters to Enter Different program parameters need to be entered for the Web and Kiosk applications. Refer to the separate parameter lists on the following pages. Program Parameters to Enter - for Web The following program parameter value should be entered on Screen W26 (Financial Aid 1). Parameter Name Attribute Optional Valid Values Y Display the student name on the Award Information By Year and Award History pages (default). N Do not display the student name on the Award Information By Year and Award History pages. Table 14-38 Applicant Award Program (SZKAWD) Parameters Program Parameters to Enter - for Kiosk Program parameter values must be entered in the copybook ACINPM for SZKAWD. Then SZKAWD must be recompiled and linked (on DEC machines) to the TouchNet host program. Parameter STU-ID-REQ Attribute Required Valid Values Y Student ID is displayed on the screen and printed on the financial aid award report. P Student ID is not displayed on the screen, but is printed on the financial aid award report. N Student ID is not displayed on the screen or printed on the financial aid award report. Y Student address is displayed on the screen and printed on the financial aid award report. P Student address is not displayed on the screen, but is printed on the financial aid award report. N Student address is not displayed on the screen or printed on the financial aid award report. (Kiosk only) STU-ADDRREQ (Kiosk only) Required Table 14-39 Applicant Award Program (SZKAWD) Parameters SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-83 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Financial Aid Applicant Award Information Program (SZKAWD) Parameter ADDRPREF (Kiosk only) Attribute RequiredADDRPREF Valid Values Address type to be printed on the financial aid award report and displayed on the screen. Multiple requests are allowed and must be entered in priority sequence. For example, PB will first print/display the permanent address and, if none is found, will print/display the billing address. Valid values are from the Address Type Code, element AD215. STU-PIN-REQ (Kiosk only) ADDR-NAME (Kiosk only) Required Required COUN-NAMEREQ (Kiosk only) Required INPUT-DATA (Kiosk only) Required Y PIN is required to be entered to match the student’s record. N PIN is not required to be entered if one does not exist on the student’s record. B PIN is required if it exists on the student’s record; Birth Date is required if a PIN does not exist. D Last name, first name, middle name. F First name only. L Last name only. M Salutation, Last name. If the salutation is blank, provide the salutation based on the value in the gender field. N Nickname only. R First name, middle name, last name. S Salutation, first name, middle name, last name. If the salutation is blank, provide the salutation based on the value in the gender field. Y Print/display the Financial Aid Counselor and title. N Do not print/display the Financial Aid Counselor and title. Specify the name of the person to be listed on the Financial Aid award letters. Table 14-39 Applicant Award Program (SZKAWD) Parameters (continued) 14-84 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Cost of Attendance Program (SZKCOA) Cost of Attendance Program (SZKCOA) The Cost of Attendance program (SZKCOA) estimates the likely expenses a student will incur in the specified award year. SZKCOA retrieves the cost of attendance information from the Institutional Budget segment of the Student Aid File (SAFILE) and sends the results to the Web Common Gateway Interface (CGI) program for merging with the HTML. If the student has more than one award period within the award year, the primary award period information displays first, and the second award period information displays below it. The primary award period for an award year is based on the value in the field “AC-AW-PRIMARY,” which is in the Award Period segment of the System Control File (ACFILE). Required Program Input The required input for the Cost of Attendance program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student PIN • Award year Program Parameter Values to Enter The following program parameter value should be entered on Screen W26 (Financial Aid 1). Parameter Name (Web only) Attribute Optional Valid Values Y Student name is displayed on the Cost of Attendance page (default). N Student name is not displayed on the Cost of Attendance page. Table 14-40 Cost of Attendance Program (SZKCOA) Parameters SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-85 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Academic Progress Program (SZKPRO) Academic Progress Program (SZKPRO) The Academic Progress program (SZKPRO) displays the status of a student’s academic progress for each term in which the student is enrolled. Poor academic performance can affect a student’s eligibility for federal, state, and institutional financial assistance. SZKPRO retrieves the student’s academic progress information from the packaging segment in SIS and sends the results to the Web Common Gateway Interface (CGI) program for merging with the HTML. If the student does not have a packaging segment in the SIS data files, the student is prompted to contact a financial aid administrator. Required Program Input The required input for the Academic Progress program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student PIN • Award year Program Parameter Values to Enter The following program parameter value should be entered on Screen W26 (Financial Aid 1). Parameter Name (Web only) Attribute Optional Valid Values Y Student name is displayed on the Academic Progress page (default). N Student name is not displayed on the Academic Progress page. Table 14-41 Academic Progress Program (SZKPRO) Parameters 14-86 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Financial Aid Summary Program (SZKSUM) Financial Aid Summary Program (SZKSUM) The Financial Aid Summary program (SZKSUM) displays a quick recap of the student’s financial aid information (whether he/she has outstanding requirements, his/her estimated cost for attending your institution, whether he/she needs to take action on any awards, the total amount of financial aid awarded, his/her academic progress, and a link to his/her financial aid history). SZKSUM retrieves the student’s financial aid information and sends the results to the Web Common Gateway Interface (CGI) program for merging with the HTML. Required Program Input The required input for the Financial Aid Summary program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student PIN • Award year Program Parameter Values to Enter The following program parameter value should be entered on Screen W26 (Financial Aid 1). Parameter Name (Web only) Attribute Optional Valid Values Y Student name is displayed on the Financial Aid Summary page (default). N Student name is not displayed on the Financial Aid Summary page. Table 14-42 Financial Aid Summary Program (SZKSUM) Parameters SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-87 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Student Requirements Program (SZKTRK) Student Requirements Program (SZKTRK) The Student Requirements program (SZKTRK) displays a list of the required documents that must be received by your institution before the student can obtain his/her financial aid award. SZKTRK will list those documents that must be completed by the student and the financial aid transcripts that must be sent from other schools. If your institution has specified on Screen 337 the name and location of the required documents (located in the /WEBDOCS/FORMDOCS directory on your server) or the URL and name of another Website, links to these Attachments will also be displayed on the Student Requirements page for documents with a Status of Not received. A student is prompted to enter the student ID, PIN, and award year. SZKTRK extracts the information needed to generate the financial aid required documents status information and then sends it to the Web Common Gateway Interface (CGI) program for merging with the HTML. Your institution determines the award year choices available by listing the award years in presentation order on the Financial Aid 1 Screen (W26). These award years are then loaded into a table on T-Serve via a Web transaction. Once the T-Serve table is loaded, the award years are available on the Web. Required Program Input The required input for the Student Requirements program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student PIN • Award year Program Parameters to Enter Different program parameters need to be entered for the Web and Kiosk applications. Refer to the separate parameter lists on the following pages. 14-88 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Student Requirements Program (SZKTRK) Program Parameters to Enter - for Web The following program parameter values should be entered on Screen W26 (Financial Aid 1) and Screen 337 (Tracking Messages). Parameter Attribute Valid Values Setting on Screen W26 Name Optional Y Display student name on the Student Requirements page (default). N Do not display the student name on the Student Requirements page. Settings on Screen 337 URL/Form Location Optional On the A line, specify the location of the required document. • For a document in /WEBDOCS/FORMDOCS, you would specify a URL of: [Server Name]/WEBDOCS/FORMDOCS/ [Document.pdf] • For a document in another Website, you would specify the site’s URL, for example: http://www.dlssonline.com URL/Form Description Optional On the B line, specify the text for the document link as it is to be displayed on the Student Requirements page. Two examples: • Name the document (e.g., Stafford Loan Form). • Specify that more information can be found about the missing document (e.g., For More Information). Table 14-43 Student Requirements Program (SZKTRK) Parameters SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-89 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Student Requirements Program (SZKTRK) Program Parameters to Enter - for Kiosk Program parameter values must be entered in the copybook ACINPM for SZKTRK. Then SZKTRK must be recompiled (and linked on DEC machines) to the TouchNet host program. Parameter PRINT-SID (Kiosk only) PRINT-ADDR (Kiosk only) ADDR-TYPE (Kiosk only) Attribute Required Required Required ADDRPREF Valid Values Y Student ID is displayed on the screen and printed on the financial aid required documents status report. P Student ID is not displayed on the screen, but is printed on the financial aid required documents status report. N Student ID is not displayed on the screen or printed on the financial aid required documents status report. Y Student address is displayed on the screen and printed on the financial aid tracking report. P Student address is not displayed on the screen, but is printed on the financial aid tracking report. N Student address is not displayed on the screen or printed on the financial aid tracking report. Address type to be printed on the financial aid tracking report and displayed on the screen. Multiple requests are allowed and must be entered in priority sequence. For example, PB will first print/display the permanent address and, if none is found, will print/display the billing address. Valid values are from the Address Type Code, element AD215. PIN-BIRTH (Kiosk only) Required Y PIN must be entered and match the student’s record. N PIN does not have to be entered if one does not exist on the student’s record. B PIN must be entered if it exists on the student’s record; Birth Date must be entered if a PIN does not exist. Table 14-44 Student Requirements Program (SZKTRK) Parameters 14-90 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Student Requirements Program (SZKTRK) Parameter ADDRESSNAME (Kiosk only) FINAID-CID (Kiosk only) TEXT1 - 10 (Kiosk only) FINAIDOFFICER (Kiosk only) Attribute Required Required Valid Values D Last name, first name, middle name. F First name only. L Last name only. M Salutation, Last name. If the salutation is blank, provide the salutation based on the value in the gender field. N Nickname only. R First name, middle name, last name. S Salutation, first name, middle name, last name. If the salutation is blank, provide the salutation based on the value in the gender field. Y Print/display the Financial Aid Counselor and title. N Do not print/display the Financial Aid Counselor and title. Optional Up to ten 60-character lines of text to be displayed on the financial aid documents. Optional The ID, name, and title of the Financial Aid Officer. Table 14-44 Student Requirements Program (SZKTRK) Parameters SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-91 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Unofficial Financial Aid Transcript Program (SZKTRN) Unofficial Financial Aid Transcript Program (SZKTRN) The Unofficial Financial Aid Transcript program (SZKTRN) displays the Unofficial Financial Aid Transcript. A student is prompted to enter his/her student ID, PIN, and award year. SZKTRN extracts the information needed to generate the Unofficial Financial Aid Transcript and sends it to the Web Common Gateway Interface (CGI) program for merging with the HTML. Your institution determines the award year choices available by listing the award years in presentation order on the Financial Aid 1 Screen (W26). These award years are then loaded into a table on T-Serve via a Web transaction. Once the T-Serve table is loaded, the award years are available on the Web. Required Program Input The required input for the Unofficial Financial Aid Transcript program includes: • Access indicator (W for Web, K for Kiosk) • Student ID • Student PIN • Aid award year (needed in processing as current year for calculations) Program Parameters to Enter Different program parameters need to be entered for the Web and Kiosk applications. Refer to the separate parameter lists on the following pages. 14-92 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Programs Unofficial Financial Aid Transcript Program (SZKTRN) Program Parameters to Enter - for Web The following program parameter values should be entered on Screen W21 (Student Records 1). Parameter Name Holds Attribute Optional Optional Valid Values Y Display the student name on the Unofficial Transcript page. N Do not display the student name on the Unofficial Transcript page. Y Students with transcript holds can view the Unofficial Transcript page. N Students with transcript holds cannot view the Unofficial Transcript page (default). Table 14-45 Unofficial Transcript Program (SZKTRN) Parameters Program Parameters to Enter - for Kiosk Program parameter values must be entered in the copybook ACINPM for SZKTRN. Then SZKTRN must be recompiled (and linked on DEC machines) to the TouchNet host program. Transaction Definitions Refer to SBA640 in the On-line Reference System for the transaction definitions for the financial aid counselor and title, aggregate fund mnemonics, award year, start and end dates, and Federal Pell Grant fund subcodes. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 14-93 15 Web Files Used By Function 15 Web Files Used By Function For each Web function, the following tables define all the pieces that are referenced to build the Web page and process the request. Files marked with an asterisk (*) are the HTML templates for the Campus Pipeline/Luminis-enabled version of SCT Plus Student Self-Service. If you want to create additional institution-specific functions, note that host transaction codes 8000 to 8099 are reserved for Student Self-Service. Consult the TouchNet Enterprise/Web Application User’s Guide for information on customizing HTML. For a List of: Refer to Page General Web files Home Page 15-5 Student Services Login 15-5 Site Map 15-5 Student Services 15-5 Logout 15-5 Table Load 15-6 Term Selection files Select Term 15-7 Personal Information files Change PIN 15-8 PIN Question and Answer 15-8 E-mail Addresses and Personal Web Page 15-8 Select Address 15-9 View Address List 15-9 Update Address 15-10 Personal Phone Numbers 15-11 View Marital Status 15-12 Update Marital Status 15-12 Change Name 15-12 Change Social Security Number 15-12 Table 15-1 List of Web Files by Function SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15-1 15 Web Files Used By Function Refer to Page For a List of: Student Records files Graduation Information 15-13 Grades 15-13 Institutional Coursework 15-14 Transfer Credit 15-14 Unofficial Transcript 15-15 Account Summary 15-15 Select Tax Year 15-16 1098-T Summary Information 15-16 Bank Account Information 15-17 Degree Audit 15-17 Official Transcript Request 15-18 Advisor 15-21 Holds 15-21 Additional Services 15-21 Registration files Drop and Add Classes 15-22 Change Class Options 15-23 Conditional Drop and Add 15-24 Detailed Schedule 15-24 Student Schedule 15-25 Registration Status 15-25 Financial Aid files Financial Aid Opportunities 15-26 Financial Aid Links - What do you want to do? 15-26 Select Award Year 15-26 Financial Aid Summary 15-26 Accept Awards 15-27 Award Information by Year 15-28 Award History 15-28 Student Requirements 15-28 Unofficial Financial Aid Transcript 15-29 Academic Progress 15-29 Cost of Attendance 15-29 Table 15-1 List of Web Files by Function (continued) 15-2 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15 Web Files Used By Function For a List of: Refer to Page Course files Course Catalog 15-30 Course Sections 15-31 Course Section Search 15-33 Prospective Student files Prospective Students 15-36 Admissions files Create Account 15-38 Login 15-38 Identity Verification 15-39 Create PIN 15-39 Login - PIN Create Account SSN/PIN Error Page 15-40 Login - Enter PIN 15-41 Review Application 15-42 Select Application Type 15-43 Select Term 15-43 Select Major 15-44 Enrollment Intentions 15-44 Personal Information 15-48 Personal Information 15-48 Select Application 15-52 Previous College Information 15-52 College Information - Locate College 15-53 Select College Name 15-54 Add Previous College 15-54 High School Information 15-55 Locate High School 15-56 Add High School Information 15-57 Submit Application 15-58 Submit Application - Thank You 15-58 Continuous Flow Process 15-58 Residency/Citizenship 15-67 Personal References 15-69 Employment History 15-71 Client Requirements -Freshman Essay 15-72 Client Requirements -Publications and Honors 15-72 Table 15-1 List of Web Files by Function (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15-3 15 Web Files Used By Function Refer to Page For a List of: Admissions - Credit Card Payment 15-72 Admissions - Credit Card Receipt 15-72 Admissions - Logoff 15-73 Parent or Guest Payment files Parent or Guest Payment 15-73 Parent or Guest Payment - Credit Card Payment 15-73 Parent or Guest - Credit Card Receipt 15-73 Table 15-1 List of Web Files by Function (continued) 15-4 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15 Web Files Used By Function General Web Files General Web Files Web Function Host Trans Code Configuration Files Home Page -1 ahomepg.cfg ahomepg.htm Student Services Login 1000 astulog.cfg acaution.htm alogin.ddo acommstulog.htm astuinfo.ddo Site Map 1008 asitemap.cfg HTML Files Data Definition Input Object Files Output acaution.ddo acwid.htm acwid.ddo admnmenu.htm admnmenu.ddo aerrmsg.htm aerrmsg.ddo apinqa.htm apinqa.ddo apinqamsg.htm apinqamsg.ddo asitemap.htm asitemap.ddo astulog.htm astulog.ddo astulogfp1.htm astulogfp1.ddo astulogfp2.htm astulogfp2.ddo astulogfp3.htm astulogfp3.ddo astuloghdr.htm astuloghdr.ddo astuloghdr2.htm astuloghdr2.ddo astulogpin.htm astulogpin.ddo astulogpinok.htm astulogpinok.ddo rinfotxt.htm rinfotxt.ddo rinfotxt2.htm rinfotxt2.ddo rinfotxt3.htm rinfotxt3.ddo rinfotxt4.htm rinfotxt4.ddo rinfotxt5.htm rinfotxt5.ddo acommhtm.htm astuinfo.ddo Host Program AZKVST AZKTBL acommhtmcp.htm* asitemap.htm Student Services Logout 1010 admnmenu.cfg acommhtm.htm asitemap.ddo astuinfo.ddo AZKVST acommhtmcp.htm* -1 alogout.cfg admnmenu.htm admnmenu.ddo asitemap.htm asitemap.ddo alogout.htm Table 15-2 General Web Files SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15-5 15 Web Files Used By Function General Web Files Web Function Host Trans Code Configuration Files Table Load -1 atblload.cfg HTML Files Data Definition Input atblload.htm allload.cfg reqmsg.ddo atblload.htm aupdtmsg.htm 1013 rsubload.cfg reqmsg.ddo atblload.htm aupdtmsg.htm 1106 aregload.cfg reqmsg.ddo atblload.htm aupdtmsg.htm 1108 rschload.cfg reqmsg.ddo atblload.htm aupdtmsg.htm 1118 agrdload.cfg reqmsg.ddo atblload.htm aupdtmsg.htm 1119 acrrload.cfg reqmsg.ddo atblload.htm aupdtmsg.htm 1126 aschload.cfg reqmsg.ddo atblload.htm aupdtmsg.htm 1204 admiload.cfg reqmsg.ddo atblload.htm aupdtmsg.htm 1305 sfawload.cfg reqmsg.ddo atblload.htm aupdtmsg.htm 1406 billload.cfg Host Program AZKTBL aupdtmsg.htm 1009 Object Files Output reqmsg.ddo atblload.htm aupdtmsg.htm reqmsg.ddo Table 15-2 General Web Files (continued) 15-6 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15 Web Files Used By Function Term Files Term Files Host Web Tran Function Code Select Term 1128 Configuration Files aterm.cfg HTML Files acommhtm.htm Data Definition Input Object Files Output aconfig.ddo Host Program AZKTBL acommhtmcp.htm* aconfig.htm aconfig.ddo aerrmsg.htm aerrmsg.ddo arowftr.htm arowftr.ddo atableftr.htm atableftr.ddo rinfotxt.htm rinfotxt.ddo rterment.htm rterment.ddo rtermentbr.htm rtermentbr.ddo rtermentcrs.htm rtermentcrs.ddo rtermentgrd.htm rtermentgrd.ddo rtermentreg.htm rtermentreg.ddo rtermentsch.htm rtermentsch.ddo rtermentsep.htm rtermentsep.ddo rtermhdr.htm rtermhdr.ddo rtermhdrbr.htm rtermhdrbr.ddo rtermhdrcrs.htm rtermhdrcrs.ddo rtermhdrgrd.htm rtermhdrgrd.ddo rtermhdrreg.htm rtermhdrreg.ddo rtermhdrsch.htm rtermhdrsch.ddo rtermhdrterm.htm rtermhdrterm.ddo Table 10-1 Term Files SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15-7 15 Web Files Used By Function Personal Information Files Personal Information Files Web Function Host Tran Code Change PIN -1 Configuration Files achgpin.cfg HTML Files Data Definition Input apinchg.htm achgpin.ddo apinchgcp.htm* achgpinsrc.ddo Object Files Output Host Program astuinfo.ddo 1001 achpin2.cfg achgpin.htm achgpin.ddo achgpin2.htm achgpinsrc.ddo achgpin2cp.htm* astuinfo.ddo AZKPIN apinerr.ddo achgpincp.htm* achgpincp.ddo achpin2.htm astuinfo.ddo achpin2cp.htm* apinmsg.htm apinmsg.ddo apinmsgcp.ddo PIN Question and Answer E-mail Addresses and Personal Web Page 1007 1015 achgpinqa.cfg aemailupd.cfg acommhtm.htm achgpinqa.ddo aerrmsg.htm astuinfo.ddo AZKPIN aerrmsg.ddo apinqa2.htm apinqa2.ddo aupdtmsg.htm aupdtmsg.ddo rinfotxt.htm rinfotxt.ddo acommhtm.htm aemailinp.ddo acommhtmcp.htm* astuinfo.ddo AZKADR aemaili1.htm aemaili1.ddo aemaili2.htm aemaili2.ddo aemaili3.htm aemaili3.ddo aemaili4.htm aemaili4.ddo aemaili5.htm aemaili5.ddo aemailinfo.htm aemailinfo.ddo aemailu1.htm aemailu1.ddo aemailu2.htm aemailu2.ddo aemailu3.htm aemailu3.ddo aemailu4.htm aemailu4.ddo aemailu5.htm aemailu5.ddo amalerr.htm amalerr.ddo apref1.htm apref1.ddo apref2.htm apref2.ddo apref3.htm apref3.ddo apref4.htm apref4.ddo Table 15-3 Personal Information Files 15-8 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15 Web Files Used By Function Personal Information Files Web Function Host Tran Code Configuration Files E-mail Addresses and Personal Web Page (continued) Select Address 1004 addrtyup.cfg HTML Files Data Definition Input apref5.htm apref5.ddo aprefen1.htm aprefen1.ddo aprefen2.htm aprefen2.ddo aprefen3.htm aprefen3.ddo aprefen4.htm aprefen4.ddo aprefen5.htm aprefen5.ddo atype1.htm atype1.ddo atype2.htm atype2.ddo atype3.htm atype3.ddo atype4.htm atype4.ddo atype5.htm atype5.ddo atypeen1.htm atypeen1.ddo atypeen2.htm atypeen2.ddo atypeen3.htm atypeen3.ddo atypeen4.htm atypeen4.ddo atypeen5.htm atypeen5.ddo aupdtmsg.htm aupdtmsg.ddo awebdelim.htm awebdelim.ddo awebpage.htm awebpage.ddo rsubmit.htm rsubmit.ddo acommhtm.htm addractn.ddo acommhtmcp.htm* addrinp1.ddo addrent.htm addrtype.ddo addrent.ddo addrerr.htm astuinfo.ddo addrerr.ddo addrtab.htm View Address List 1003 addrinq.cfg Object Files Output Host Program AZKADR AZKADR addrtab.ddo acommhtm.htm addrinp1.ddo acommhtmcp.htm* astuinfo.ddo AZKADR addrdisp.htm addrdisp.ddo addrdispent.htm addrdispent.ddo addrdisph.htm addrdisph.ddo addrerr.htm addrerr.ddo Table 15-3 Personal Information Files (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15-9 15 Web Files Used By Function Personal Information Files Web Function Update Address Host Tran Code 1005 Configuration Files addrupdt.cfg HTML Files Data Definition Input Object Files Output acommhtm.htm addractn.ddo acommhtmcp.htm* addrcontinp.ddo addractn.htm addrinp1.ddo addractn.ddo addrcnen.htm addrtype.ddo addrcnen.ddo addrcnenf.htm addrupdate.ddo addrcnenf.ddo addrcntr.htm astuinfo.ddo addrcntr.ddo Host Program AZKADR addrcntrf.htm addrcntrf.ddo addrcont.htm addrcont.ddo addrcontphty.htm addrcontphty.ddo addrcontphtyen.htm addrcontphtyen.ddo addrerr.htm addrerr.ddo addrform.htm addrinfo.ddo addrformp.htm addrinfop.ddo addrlink.htm addrlink.ddo addrph1fpr.htm addrph1fpr.ddo addrph1fpren.htm addrph1fpren.ddo addrph1pr.htm addrph1pr.ddo addrph1pren.htm addrph1pren.ddo addrrelatn.htm addrrelatn.ddo addrrelatnt.htm addrstat1.htm addrstat1.ddo addrsten1.htm addrsten1.ddo addrtype.htm addrtype.ddo addrtype2.htm addrtype2.ddo addrusps.htm addrusps.ddo amalerr.htm amalerr.ddo aupdtmsg.htm aupdtmsg.ddo rinfotxt.htm rinfotxt.ddo rinfotxt2.htm rinfotxt2.ddo rsubmit.htm rsubmit.ddo Table 15-3 Personal Information Files (continued) 15-10 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15 Web Files Used By Function Personal Information Files Web Function Personal Phone Numbers Host Tran Code 1016 Configuration Files aphoneupd.cfg HTML Files Data Definition Input acommhtm.htm aphoneinp.ddo acommhtmcp.htm* astuinfo.ddo Object Files Output Host Program AZKADR amalerr.htm amalerr.ddo aphone1.htm aphone1.ddo aphone2.htm aphone2.ddo aphone3.htm aphone3.ddo aphone4.htm aphone4.ddo aphone5.htm aphone5.ddo aphoneinfo.htm aphoneinfo.ddo apref1.htm apref1.ddo apref2.htm apref2.ddo apref3.htm apref3.ddo apref4.htm apref4.ddo apref5.htm apref5.ddo aprefen1.htm aprefen1.ddo aprefen2.htm aprefen2.ddo aprefen3.htm aprefen3.ddo aprefen4.htm aprefen4.ddo aprefen5.htm aprefen5.ddo atype1.htm atype1.ddo atype2.htm atype2.ddo atype3.htm atype3.ddo atype4.htm atype4.ddo atype5.htm atype5.ddo atypeen1.htm atypeen1.ddo atypeen2.htm atypeen2.ddo atypeen3.htm atypeen3.ddo atypeen4.htm atypeen4.ddo atypeen5.htm atypeen5.ddo aupdtmsg.htm aupdtmsg.ddo rsubmit.htm rsubmit.ddo Table 15-3 Personal Information Files (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15-11 15 Web Files Used By Function Personal Information Files Web Function View Marital Status Host Tran Code 1020 Configuration Files amstinq.cfg HTML Files acommhtm.htm Data Definition Input Object Files Output astuinfo.ddo Host Program AZKMSR acommhtmcp.htm* amstdisp.htm amstdisp.ddo amsterr.htm amsterr.ddo amstent.ddo amstcntr.ddo amstinqxml.cfg acommhtmcp.htm* astuinfo.ddo acommxml.xml amstdisp.xml amstdisp.ddo amsterr.xml amsterr.ddo amstent.ddo amstcntr.ddo Update Marital Status 1021 amstupdt.cfg acommhtm.htm amstcntr.ddo AZKMSU acommhtmcp.htm* amstdisp.ddo amstcntr.htm amstent.ddo amstcntr.ddo amstent.htm astuinfo.ddo amstent.ddo amstform.htm aupdtmsg.htm aupdtmsg.ddo amstdisp.ddo Change Name 1011 anamdisp.cfg acommhtm.htm astuinfo.ddo acommhtmcp.htm* anamdisp.htm Change Social Security Number 1019 assndisp.cfg acommhtm.htm anamdisp.ddo astuinfo.ddo acommhtmcp.htm* assndisp.htm assndisp.ddo Table 15-3 Personal Information Files (continued) 15-12 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15 Web Files Used By Function Student Records Files Student Records Files Web Function Graduation Information Grades Host Tran Code 1026 1111 Configuration Files HTML Files rgradinfo.cfg rgrades.cfg Data Definition Input Object Files Output acommhtm.htm astuinfo.ddo acommhtmcp.htm* rgradinp.ddo aerrmsg.htm rgradnumrows.ddo aerrmsg.ddo aupdtmsg.htm rgradpgcd.ddo aupdtmsg.ddo AZKAAU rgradindent.htm rgradindent.ddo rgradindtab.htm rgradindtab.ddo rgradinfo.htm rgradinfo.ddo rgradinfohdr.htm rgradinfohdr.ddo rgradterment.htm rgradterment.ddo rgradtermtab.htm rgradtermtab.ddo rsubmit.htm rsubmit.ddo rtblclose.htm rtblclose.ddo acaution.htm astuinfo.ddo Host Program acaution.ddo RZKGRD acommhtm.htm acommhtmcp.htm* aerrmsg.htm aerrmsg.ddo astuname.htm astuname.ddo atableftr.htm atableftr.ddo aterment.htm aterment.ddo atermtab.htm atermtab.ddo atermtrn.htm atermtrn.ddo rgcumstt.htm rcumstat.ddo rgradcrs.htm rgradcrs.ddo rgradhdr.htm rgradary.ddo rgtermst.htm rtermstt.ddo rinfotxt.htm rinfotxt.ddo rmgcumstt.htm rmcumstat.ddo rmgradcrs.htm rmgradcrs.ddo rmgradhdr.htm rmgradary.ddo rmgtermst.htm rmtermstt.ddo Table 15-4 Student Records Files SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15-13 15 Web Files Used By Function Student Records Files Web Function Institutional Coursework Host Tran Code 1113 Configuration Files rinstcrd.cfg HTML Files Data Definition Input acaution.htm astuinfo.ddo acommhtm.htm rcarreq.ddo Object Files Output acaution.ddo Host Program RZKTSC acommhtmcp.htm* Transfer Credit 1114 rtrncrd.cfg aerrmsg.htm aerrmsg.ddo astuname.htm astuname.ddo atermtn2.htm atermtrn.ddo rcarrent.htm rcarrent.ddo rcarrtab.htm rcarrtab.ddo rcumstat.htm rcumstat.ddo rdeginfo.htm rdeginfo.ddo rdegrecr.htm rdegrecr.ddo rinfotxt.htm rinfotxt.ddo rinfotxt2.htm rinfotxt2.ddo rinstat.htm rinstat.ddo rinsthdr.htm rinsthdr.ddo rtermara.htm rtermara.ddo rtermcrs.htm rtermcrs.ddo rtermstt.htm rtermstt.ddo acaution.htm astuinfo.ddo acommhtm.htm rcarreq.ddo acaution.ddo RZKTCD acommhtmcp.htm* aerrmsg.htm aerrmsg.ddo astuname.htm astuname.ddo rcarrent.htm rcarrent.ddo rcarrtab.htm rcarrtab.ddo rcrsrecr.htm rcrsrecr.ddo rdeginfo.htm rdeginfo.ddo rdegrec2.htm rdegrecr.ddo rinfotxt.htm rinfotxt.ddo rinfotxt2.htm rinfotxt2.ddo rtfrcrs.htm rtfrcrs.ddo rtfrsubt.htm rtfrsubt.ddo rtfrtot.htm rtfrtot.ddo Table 15-4 Student Records Files (continued) 15-14 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15 Web Files Used By Function Student Records Files Web Function Unofficial Transcript Host Tran Code 1115 Configuration Files rtranscr.cfg HTML Files Data Definition Input acaution.htm astuinfo.ddo acommhtm.htm rcarreq.ddo Object Files Output acaution.ddo Host Program RZKTRN acommhtmcp.htm* aerrmsg.htm aerrmsg.ddo astuname.htm astuname.ddo rcarrent.htm rcarrent.ddo rcarrtab.htm rcarrtab.ddo rinfotxt.htm rinfotxt.ddo rinfotxt2.htm rinfotxt2.ddo rtranscr1.htm rtranscr1.ddo rtranscr3.htm rtranscr3.ddo rtranscr2.ddo Account Summary 1402 billfee.cfg acaution.htm astuinfo.ddo acaution.ddo BZKBIL acommhtm.htm acommhtmcp.htm* aconfig.htm aconfig.ddo aerrmsg.htm aerrmsg.ddo astuname.htm astuname.ddo aterment.htm aterment.ddo atermtab.htm atermtab.ddo atermtrn.htm atermtrn.ddo balinfo.htm balinfo.ddo balinfondt.htm balinfondt.ddo billdetl.htm billdetl.ddo billdetlfa.htm billdetlfa.ddo billdetlpy.htm billdetlpy.ddo billtabl.htm billtabl.ddo billtablfa.htm billtablfa.ddo billtablpy.htm billtablpy.ddo rinfotxt.htm rinfotxt.ddo rsubmit.htm rsubmit.ddo billarry.ddo billarryfa.ddo billarrypy.ddo Table 15-4 Student Records Files (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15-15 15 Web Files Used By Function Student Records Files Web Function Account Summary Credit Card Payment Account Summary Credit Card Receipt Host Tran Code 1403 1405 Configuration Files bcrdcard.cfg bcrdupdt.cfg HTML Files Data Definition Input acommhtm.htm astuinfo.ddo acommhtmcp.htm* bcrdcard.ddo Object Files Output BZKCCU bcrdcard.htm bcrdcard.ddo bcrdmsg.htm bcrdmsg.ddo rinfotxt.htm rinfotxt.ddo acommhtm.htm astuinfo.ddo acommhtmcp.htm* bcrdcard.ddo bccrdmsg.htm tepsa1.ddo bccrdmsg.ddo bcrdcard.htm tepsavs.ddo bcrdcard.ddo bcrdmsg.htm Host Program BZKCCU bcrdmsg.ddo berrpgm.htm berrpgmcp.htm* msubauto.htm Select Tax Year 1098-T Summary Information 1408 btxyr98t.cfg acommhtm.htm msubauto.ddo astuinfo.ddo BZKTXY acommhtmcp.htm* 1409 b1098tinf1.cfg btxyrent.htm btxyrent.ddo btxyrerr.htm btxyrerr.ddo btxyrtab.htm btxyrtab.ddo acommhtm.htm astuinfo.ddo acommhtmcp.htm* btxyrent.ddo BZKTRA b1098tarry1.htm b1098tarry1.ddo b1098tarry2.htm b1098tarry2.ddo b1098tdtl1.htm b1098tdtl1.ddo b1098tdtl2.htm b1098tdtl2.ddo b1098terr.htm b1098terr.ddo b1098thdr1.htm b1098thdr1.ddo b1098thdr2.htm b1098thdr2.ddo b1098tsum.htm b1098tsum.ddo b1098tsum03.htm b1098tsum03.ddo b1098ttctl1.htm b1098ttctl1.ddo b1098ttctl2.htm b1098ttctl2.ddo b1098ttctl3.htm b1098ttctl3.ddo b1098ttmtl1.htm b1098ttmtl1.ddo b1098ttmtl2.htm b1098ttmtl2.ddo Table 15-4 Student Records Files (continued) 15-16 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15 Web Files Used By Function Student Records Files Web Function Bank Account Information Degree Audit Host Tran Code 1411 1500 Configuration Files bbankinfo.cfg adegaud.cfg HTML Files Data Definition Input acommhtm.htm astuinfo.ddo acommhtmcp.htm* bbankinp.ddo aerrmsg.htm bbankpgcd.ddo Object Files Output AZKAMU aerrmsg.ddo astuname.htm astuname.ddo aupdtmsg.htm aupdtmsg.ddo bbankacctent.htm bbankacctent.ddo bbankaccttab.htm bbankaccttab.ddo bbankdisp.htm bbankdisp.ddo bbankimage.htm bbankimage.ddo bbankinfo.htm bbankinfo.ddo bbankstatent.htm bbankstatent.ddo bbankstattab.htm bbankstattab.ddo rinfotxt.htm rinfotxt.ddo rinfotxt2.htm rinfotxt2.ddo acommhtm.htm adegaudreq.ddo acommhtmcp.htm* astuinfo.ddo Host Program DZKAUD adegaud1.htm adegaud1.ddo adegaud3.htm adegaud3.ddo adegaudcathdr.htm adegaudcathdr.ddo adegaudhdr.htm adegaudhdr.ddo adegaudpcat.htm adegaudpcat.ddo adegaudprgent.htm adegaudprgent.ddo adegaudprghdr.htm adegaudprg.ddo adegaudptm.htm adegaudptm.ddo adegaudptp.htm adegaudptp.ddo adegaudpts.htm adegaudpts.ddo adegaudscat.htm adegaudscat.ddo adegaudsubhdr.htm adegaud2.ddo aerrmsg.htm aerrmsg.ddo atableftr.htm atableftr.ddo rinfotxt.htm rinfotxt.ddo rinfotxt2.htm rinfotxt2.ddo rinfotxt3.htm rinfotxt3.ddo rinfotxt4.htm rinfotxt4.ddo rsubinf.htm rsubjent.ddo rsubjtab.ddo Table 15-4 Student Records Files (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15-17 15 Web Files Used By Function Student Records Files Web Function Official Transcript Request Host Tran Code 1131 Configuration Files rotrdisrq.cfg HTML Files acommhtm.htm Data Definition Input Object Files Output astuinfo.ddo Host Program RZKOTR acommhtmcp.htm* aerrmsg.htm aerrmsg.ddo amalerr.htm amalerr.ddo rinfotxt.htm rinfotxt.ddo rinfotxt2.htm rinfotxt2.ddo rinfotxt3.htm rinfotxt3.ddo rinfotxt4.htm rinfotxt4.ddo rinfotxt5.htm rinfotxt5.ddo rinfotxt6.htm rinfotxt6.ddo rinfotxt7.htm rinfotxt7.ddo rotrbutton.htm rotrbutton.ddo rotrdisar.htm rotrdisar.ddo rotrdisara.htm rotrdisara.ddo rotrdisaraary.htm rotrdisaraary.ddo rotrdisarc.htm rotrdisarc.ddo rotrdisarcary.htm rotrdisarcary.ddo rotrdisard.htm rotrdisard.ddo rotrdisardary.htm rotrdisardary.ddo rotrdisaro.htm rotrdisaro.ddo rotrdisaroary.htm rotrdisaroary.ddo rotrdisars.htm rotrdisars.ddo rotrdisarsary.htm rotrdisarsary.ddo rotrdisart.htm rotrdisart.ddo rotrdisartary.htm rotrdisartary.ddo rotrdisns.htm rotrdisns.ddo rotrdisnsa.htm rotrdisnsa.ddo rotrdisnsaary.htm rotrdisnsaary.ddo rotrdisnsc.htm rotrdisnsc.ddo rotrdisnscary.htm rotrdisnscary.ddo rotrdisnsd.htm rotrdisnsd.ddo rotrdisnsdary.htm rotrdisnsdary.ddo rotrdisnsf.htm rotrdisnsf.ddo rotrdisnsfary.htm rotrdisnsfary.ddo rotrdisnsinf.htm rotrdisnsinf.ddo rotrdisnso.htm rotrdisnso.ddo Table 15-4 Student Records Files (continued) 15-18 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15 Web Files Used By Function Student Records Files Web Function Host Tran Code Configuration Files Official Transcript Request (continued) 1132 rotrprorq.cfg Data Definition Input Object Files Output Host Program rotrdisnsoary.htm rotrdisnsoary.ddo RZKOTR rotrdisnss.htm rotrdisnss.ddo rotrdisnssary.htm rotrdisnssary.ddo rotrdisnst.htm rotrdisnst.ddo rotrdisnstary.htm rotrdisnstary.ddo rotrdisps.htm rotrdisps.ddo rotrdispsinf.htm rotrdispsinf.ddo HTML Files acommhtm.htm astuinfo.ddo acommhtmcp.htm* rotrproar.ddo aerrmsg.htm rotrprons.ddo aerrmsg.ddo amalerr.htm rotrpronsary.ddo amalerr.ddo rinfotxt.htm rinfotxt.ddo rinfotxt2.htm rinfotxt2.ddo rinfotxt3.htm rinfotxt3.ddo rinfotxt4.htm rinfotxt4.ddo rinfotxt5.htm rinfotxt5.ddo rinfotxt6.htm rinfotxt6.ddo rinfotxt7.htm rinfotxt7.ddo rotrbutton.htm rotrbutton.ddo rotrdisar.htm rotrdisar.ddo rotrdisara.htm rotrdisara.ddo rotrdisaraary.htm rotrdisaraary.ddo rotrdisarc.htm rotrdisarc.ddo rotrdisarcary.htm rotrdisarcary.ddo rotrdisard.htm rotrdisard.ddo rotrdisardary.htm rotrdisardary.ddo rotrdisaro.htm rotrdisaro.ddo rotrdisaroary.htm rotrdisaroary.ddo rotrdisars.htm rotrdisars.ddo rotrdisarsary.htm rotrdisarsary.ddo rotrdisart.htm rotrdisart.ddo rotrdisartary.htm rotrdisartary.ddo rotrdisns.htm rotrdisns.ddo rotrdisnsa.htm rotrdisnsa.ddo rotrdisnsaary.htm rotrdisnsaary.ddo rotrdisnsc.htm rotrdisnsc.ddo Table 15-4 Student Records Files (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15-19 15 Web Files Used By Function Student Records Files Web Function Host Tran Code Configuration Files Official Transcript Request (continued) Data Definition Input Object Files Output Host Program rotrdisnscary.htm rotrdisnscary.ddo RZKOTR rotrdisnsd.htm rotrdisnsd.ddo rotrdisnsdary.htm rotrdisnsdary.ddo rotrdisnsf.htm rotrdisnsf.ddo rotrdisnsfary.htm rotrdisnsfary.ddo rotrdisnsinf.htm rotrdisnsinf.ddo rotrdisnso.htm rotrdisnso.ddo rotrdisnsoary.htm rotrdisnsoary.ddo rotrdisnss.htm rotrdisnss.ddo rotrdisnssary.htm rotrdisnssary.ddo rotrdisnst.htm rotrdisnst.ddo rotrdisnstary.htm rotrdisnstary.ddo rotrdisps.htm rotrdisps.ddo rotrdispsinf.htm rotrdispsinf.ddo rotrsubcc.htm rotrsubcc.ddo rotrsubccfinf.htm rotrsubccfinf.ddo rotrsubcchdr.htm rotrsubcchdr.ddo rotrsublst.htm rotrsublst.ddo rotrsublstf.htm rotrsublstf.ddo rotrsublstfary.htm rotrsublstfary.ddo rotrsublstinf.htm rotrsublstinf.ddo rotrsubnchdr.htm rotrsubnchdr.ddo HTML Files rotrdisnsary.ddo rotrsubccfary.ddo rotrsublstary.ddo 1133 rotrfinrq.cfg acommhtm.htm astuinfo.ddo acommhtmcp.htm* rotrfinrq.ddo amalerr.htm rotrfinrqary.ddo amalerr.ddo rotrbutton.htm rotrbutton.ddo rotrfinlst.htm rotrfinlst.ddo rotrfinlstf.htm rotrfinlstf.ddo rotrfinlstfary.htm rotrfinlstfary.ddo rotrfinlstinf.htm rotrfinlstinf.ddo rotrfinnchdr.htm rotrfinnchdr.ddo rotrfinlstary.ddo Table 15-4 Student Records Files (continued) 15-20 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15 Web Files Used By Function Student Records Files Web Function Official Transcript Request (continued) Host Tran Code 1405 Configuration Files rotrpayrq.cfg HTML Files Data Definition Input Object Files Output acommhtm.htm astuinfo.ddo acommhtmcp.htm* bcrdcard.ddo bccrdmsg.htm rotrpaykey.ddo bccrdmsg.ddo bcrdcard.htm rotrpaykeyary.ddo bcrdcard.ddo bcrdmsg.htm tepsa1.ddo bcrdmsg.ddo astuinfo.ddo aadvdisp.ddo Host Program RZKOTR berrpgm2.htm berrpgm2cp.htm* Advisor 1002 aadvisor.cfg aadvdisp.htm AZKADV acommhtm.htm acommhtmcp.htm* aerrmsg.htm Holds 1006 astuhold.cfg acommhtm.htm aerrmsg.ddo astuinfo.ddo AZKHLD acommhtmcp.htm* aholderr.htm aholderr.ddo aholdhdr.htm aholdhdr.ddo aholdinf.htm aholdinf.ddo aholdary.ddo Additional Services 1412 boptfee.cfg acommhtm.htm astuinfo.ddo acommhtmcp.htm* bofupdt.ddo BZKOPT bofinp.ddo atermtrn.htm atermtrn.ddo boftitle.htm boftitle.ddo bofgroup.htm bofgroup.ddo boffeeckbox.htm boffeeckbox.ddo boffeenosel.htm boffeenosel.ddo boffeeradio.htm boffeeradio.ddo atableftr.htm atableftr.ddo rsubmit.htm rsubmit.ddo atermtab.htm atermtab.ddo aterment.htm aterment.ddo acaution.htm acaution.ddo aerrmsg.htm aerrmsg.ddo Table 15-4 Student Records Files (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15-21 15 Web Files Used By Function Registration Files Registration Files Web Function Drop and Add Classes Host Tran Code 1103 Configuration Files rstureg.cfg HTML Files Data Definition Input acaution.htm astuinfo.ddo acommhtm.htm rcrsdata.ddo acommhtmcp.htm* rcrsinp.ddo Object Files Output acaution.ddo aerrmsg.htm aerrmsg.ddo astuname.htm astuname.ddo aterment.htm aterment.ddo atermtab.htm atermtab.ddo atermtrn.htm atermtrn.ddo raddcrs.htm raddinf.ddo regccomsg.htm regccomsg.ddo regerr.htm regerr.ddo reghdr.htm reghdr.ddo reginfo.htm reginfo.ddo reqhdr.htm reqhdr.ddo reqinfo.htm reqinfo.ddo rerrhdr.htm rerrhdr.ddo rherrmsg.htm rherrmsg.ddo rinfotxt.htm rinfotxt.ddo rpermhdr.htm rpermhdr.ddo rperminf.htm rperminf.ddo rsubmit.htm rsubmit.ddo rwaithdr.htm rwaithdr.ddo rwaitinf.htm rwaitinf.ddo Host Program RZKREG raddarry.ddo reqarray.ddo rwaitary.ddo rerrary.ddo regarray.ddo Table 15-5 Registration Files 15-22 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15 Web Files Used By Function Registration Files Web Function Change Class Options Host Tran Code 1134 Configuration Files rchgreg.cfg HTML Files Data Definition Input acommhtm.htm astuinfo.ddo acommhtmcp.htm* rcrsdata.ddo aerrmsg.htm rcrsinp.ddo Object Files Output Host Program RZKREG aerrmsg.ddo astuname.htm astuname.ddo aterment.htm aterment.ddo atermtab.htm atermtab.ddo atermtrn.htm atermtrn.ddo rcallhdr.htm rcallhdr.ddo rcallinf.htm rcallinf.ddo rccrdhdr.htm rccrdhdr.ddo rccrdinf.htm rccrdinf.ddo rcgthdr.htm rcgthdr.ddo rcgtinf.htm rcgtinf.ddo rcnonhdr.htm rcnonhdr.ddo rcnoninf.htm rcnoninf.ddo regerr.htm regerr.ddo rerrhdr.htm rerrhdr.ddo rgrdtypeary.htm rgrdtypeary.ddo rgrdtypeent.htm rgrdtypeent.ddo rherrmsg.htm rherrmsg.ddo rinfotxt.htm rinfotxt.ddo rsubmit.htm rsubmit.ddo rerrary.ddo rcnonary.ddo rcallary.ddo rccrdary.ddo rcgtary.ddo Table 15-5 Registration Files (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15-23 15 Web Files Used By Function Registration Files Web Function Conditional Drop and Add Host Tran Code 1104 Configuration Files rcdareg.cfg HTML Files Data Definition Input acaution.htm astuinfo.ddo acommhtm.htm rcrsdata.ddo acommhtmcp.htm* rcrsinp.ddo Object Files Output acaution.ddo aerrmsg.htm aerrmsg.ddo astuname.htm astuname.ddo aterment.htm aterment.ddo atermtab.htm atermtab.ddo atermtrn.htm atermtrn.ddo rcdacrs.htm rcdainf.ddo rcdaregh.htm reghdr.ddo rcdaregi.htm reginfo.ddo rcdareqh.htm reqhdr.ddo rcdareqi.htm reqinfo.ddo regccomsg.htm regccomsg.ddo regerr.htm regerr.ddo rerrhdr.htm rerrhdr.ddo rherrmsg.htm rherrmsg.ddo rinfotxt.htm rinfotxt.ddo rsubmit.htm rsubmit.ddo Host Program RZKREG reqarray.ddo rerrary.ddo rcdaarry.ddo regarray.ddo Detailed Schedule 1101 rstusch.cfg acommhtm.htm astuinfo.ddo RZKSCH acommhtmcp.htm* aerrmsg.htm aerrmsg.ddo astuname.htm astuname.ddo aterment.htm aterment.ddo atermtab.htm atermtab.ddo atermtrn.htm atermtrn.ddo rschhdr.htm rschhdr.ddo rschinfo.htm rschinfo.ddo rscharry.ddo Table 15-5 Registration Files (continued) 15-24 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15 Web Files Used By Function Registration Files Web Function Student Schedule Host Tran Code 1102 Configuration Files rstugrid.cfg HTML Files acommhtm.htm Data Definition Input Object Files Output astuinfo.ddo Host Program RZKSCD acommhtmcp.htm* aerrmsg.htm aerrmsg.ddo astuname.htm astuname.ddo aterment.htm aterment.ddo atermtab.htm atermtab.ddo atermtrn.htm atermtrn.ddo rgridftr.htm rgridftr.ddo rgridhdr.htm rgridhdr.ddo rgridhdr2.htm rgridhdr2.ddo rgridinf.htm rgridinf.ddo rgridnth.htm rgridnth.ddo rinfotxt.htm rinfotxt.ddo rgridary.ddo Registration Status 1017 rsturgst.cfg acommhtm.htm astuinfo.ddo RZKSRS acommhtmcp.htm* aerrmsg.htm aerrmsg.ddo astuname.htm astuname.ddo aterment.htm aterment.ddo atermtab.htm atermtab.ddo atermtrn.htm atermtrn.ddo rinfotxt.htm rinfotxt.ddo rregstat.htm rregstat.ddo rregstat2.htm rregstat2.ddo rregstat3.htm rregstat3.ddo rregstathdr.htm rregstathdr.ddo rsrscinf.htm rsrscinf.ddo rsrscrhr.htm rsrscrhr.ddo rsrshdr.htm rsrshdr.ddo rsrscary.ddo Table 15-5 Registration Files (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15-25 15 Web Files Used By Function Financial Aid Files Financial Aid Files Web Function Financial Aid Opportunities Host Tran Code 1310 Configuration Files sfinavl.cfg HTML Files Data Definition Input sfinavlp.ddo acommhtmhp.htm sfinavlp.htm sfinavlp.cfg Host Program acommhtmhp.htm sfinavlp.htm sfinavlphp.cfg Object Files Output sfinavlp.ddo acommhtm.htm acommhtmcp.htm* sfinavlp.htm Financial Aid Links - What do you want to do? 1309 sfinpage.cfg sfinavlp.ddo acommhtm.htm acommhtmcp.htm* sfinpage.htm sfinpagehp.cfg sfinpage.ddo acommhtmhp.htm sfinpage.htm Select Award Year Financial Aid Summary 1311 sawdyear.cfg sfinpage.ddo acommhtm.htm AZKTBL acommhtmcp.htm* 1308 sfinsumm.cfg sawdyeartab.htm syeartab.ddo syearent.htm syearent.ddo acommhtm.htm sfininfo.ddo SZKSUM acommhtmcp.htm* astuname.htm astuname.ddo rinfotxt.htm rinfotxt.ddo sawdyr.htm sawdyr.ddo sfinerr.htm sfinerr.ddo sfsummhdr.htm sfsummhdr.ddo syearent.htm syearent.ddo syeartab.htm syeartab.ddo Table 15-6 Financial Aid Files 15-26 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15 Web Files Used By Function Financial Aid Files Web Function Accept Awards Host Tran Code 1307 Configuration Files sfinacrj.cfg HTML Files Data Definition Input Object Files Output acommhtm.htm sacterm.ddo acommhtmcp.htm* sawdlist.ddo arowsep.htm sawdlistfld.ddo arowsep.ddo astuname.htm sawdlnd.ddo astuname.ddo rinfotxt.htm sawdlndlst.ddo rinfotxt.ddo rinfotxt2.htm sfininfo.ddo rinfotxt2.ddo Host Program SZKACC saccbut.htm saccbut.ddo saclender.htm saclender.ddo sacrjacrj.htm sacrjacrj.ddo sacrjacrj2.htm sacrjacrj2.ddo sacrjamhdr.htm sacrjamhdr.ddo sacrjamsg.htm sacrjamsg.ddo sacrjbafr.htm sacrjbafr.ddo sacrjbafr2.htm sacrjbafr2.ddo sacrjdisp.htm sacrjdisp.ddo sacrjerr.htm sacrjerr.ddo sacrjerr2.htm sacrjerr2.ddo sacrjfnd.htm sacrjfnd.ddo sacrjhdr.htm sacrjhdr.ddo sacrjlend.htm sacrjlend.ddo sacrjlnd.htm sacrjlnd.ddo sacrjlndsp.htm sacrjlndsp.ddo sacrjrej.htm sacrjrej.ddo sacrjterm.htm sacrjterm.ddo sacrjtotal.htm sacrjtotal.ddo sactermcond.htm sactermcond.ddo sawdyr.htm sawdyr.ddo sfinerr.htm sfinerr.ddo syearent.htm syearent.ddo syeartab.htm syeartab.ddo sacrjlend.ddo sacrjary.ddo Table 15-6 Financial Aid Files (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15-27 15 Web Files Used By Function Financial Aid Files Web Function Award Information by Year Host Tran Code 1301 Configuration Files sfinawd.cfg HTML Files acommhtm.htm Data Definition Input sfininfo.ddo Object Files Output astuname.ddo Host Program SZKAWD acommhtmcp.htm* astuname.htm sacrjamhdr.htm sacrjamhdr.ddo sacrjamsg.htm sacrjamsg.ddo sactermcond.htm sactermcond.ddo sawdwhdr.htm sawdwhdr.ddo sawdwinfo.htm sawdwinfo.ddo sawdyr.htm sawdyr.ddo sfinerr.htm sfinerr.ddo syearent.htm syearent.ddo syeartab.htm syeartab.ddo sawdwary.ddo sacrjary.ddo Award History 1306 sfinawdh.cfg acommhtm.htm sfininfo.ddo SZKAWD acommhtmcp.htm* astuname.htm astuname.ddo sawdhhdr.htm sawdhhdr.ddo sawdhinfo.htm sawdhinfo.ddo sfinerr.htm sfinerr.ddo syearent.htm syearent.ddo syeartab.htm syeartab.ddo sawdhary.ddo Student Requirements 1302 sfintrk.cfg acommhtm.htm sfininfo.ddo SZKTRK acommhtmcp.htm* astuname.htm astuname.ddo rinfotxt.htm rinfotxt.ddo sawdyr.htm sawdyr.ddo sfinerr.htm sfinerr.ddo strkchdr.htm strkchdr.ddo strkcinf.htm strkcinf.ddo strkrhdr.htm strkrhdr.ddo strkrinf.htm strkrinf.ddo syearent.htm syearent.ddo Table 15-6 Financial Aid Files (continued) 15-28 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15 Web Files Used By Function Financial Aid Files Web Function Host Tran Code Configuration Files Student Requirements (continued) HTML Files Data Definition Input syeartab.htm Object Files Output syeartab.ddo Host Program SZKTRK strktary.ddo strkrary.ddo strkcary.ddo Unofficial Financial Aid Transcript 1303 sfintrn.cfg acommhtm.htm sfininfo.ddo SZKTRN acommhtmcp.htm* strnhdr.htm strnhdr.ddo strninfo.htm strninfo.ddo syearent.htm syearent.ddo syeartab.htm syeartab.ddo strnary.ddo Academic Progress 1022 sprogpg.cfg acommhtm.htm sfininfo.ddo SZKPRO acommhtmcp.htm* astuname.htm astuname.ddo rinfotxt.htm rinfotxt.ddo sawdyr.htm sawdyr.ddo sfinerr.htm sfinerr.ddo sproghdr.htm sproghdr.ddo sproginf.htm sproginf.ddo syearent.htm syearent.ddo syeartab.htm syeartab.ddo sprogary.ddo Cost of Attendance 1025 scostatt.cfg acommhtm.htm sfininfo.ddo SZKCOA acommhtmcp.htm* astuname.htm astuname.ddo rinfotxt.htm rinfotxt.ddo scoaahdr.htm sawdyr.ddo scoathdr.htm scoathdr.ddo scoatinf.htm scoatinf.ddo sfinerr.htm sfinerr.ddo syearent.htm syearent.ddo syeartab.htm syeartab.ddo scoatary.ddo scoatinf.ddo Table 15-6 Financial Aid Files (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15-29 15 Web Files Used By Function Courses Files Courses Files Web Function Course Catalog Host Tran Code 1123 1123 Configuration Files rcolcat1hp.cfg rcolcat1.cfg Data Definition Input HTML Files acommhtmhp.htm Object Files Output rcatinp.ddo RZKCAT aerrmsg.htm aerrmsg.ddo rsubhdr.htm rsubjtab.ddo rsubinf.htm rsubjent.ddo acommhtm.htm Host Program rcatinp.ddo acommhtmcp.htm* 1123 rcolcat2hp.cfg aerrmsg.htm aerrmsg.ddo rsubhdr.htm rsubjtab.ddo rsubinf.htm rsubjent.ddo acommhtmhp.htm rcatinp.ddo aerrmsg.htm aerrmsg.ddo rcatchdr.htm rcatchdr.ddo rcatcinf.htm rcatcinf.ddo rdeptdes.htm rdeptdes.ddo rdepthdr.htm rdepthdr.ddo rdeptinf.htm rdeptinf.ddo ritemdes.htm ritemdes.ddo ritemhdr.htm ritemhdr.ddo rsubhdr.htm rsubjtab.ddo rsubinf.htm rsubjent.ddo ritemary.ddo rcatcary.ddo rdeptary.ddo Table 15-7 Courses Files 15-30 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15 Web Files Used By Function Courses Files Web Function Course Catalog Available Courses for Current Academic Year Host Tran Code 1123 Configuration Files rcolcat2.cfg HTML Files acommhtm.htm Data Definition Input Object Files Output rcatinp.ddo Host Program RZKCAT acommhtmcp.htm* aerrmsg.htm aerrmsg.ddo rcatchdr.htm rcatchdr.ddo rcatcinf.htm rcatcinf.ddo rdeptdes.htm rdeptdes.ddo rdepthdr.htm rdepthdr.ddo rdeptinf.htm rdeptinf.ddo ritemdes.htm ritemdes.ddo ritemhdr.htm ritemhdr.ddo rsubhdr.htm rsubjtab.ddo rsubinf.htm rsubjent.ddo ritemary.ddo rcatcary.ddo rdeptary.ddo Course Sections 1120 rcrssect1.cfg acommhtm.htm rcrsavl.ddo RZKCRS acommhtmcp.htm* 1120 rcrssecthp1.cfg aconfig.htm aconfig.ddo aerrmsg.htm aerrmsg.ddo aterment.htm aterment.ddo atermtab.htm atermtab.ddo atermtrn.htm atermtrn.ddo rsubhdr.htm rsubjtab.ddo rsubinf.htm rsubjent.ddo acommhtmhp.htm rcrsavl.ddo RZKCRS aconfig.htm aconfig.ddo aerrmsg.htm aerrmsg.ddo aterment.htm aterment.ddo atermtab.htm atermtab.ddo atermtrn.htm atermtrn.ddo rsubhdr.htm rsubjtab.ddo rsubinf.htm rsubjent.ddo Table 15-7 Courses Files (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15-31 15 Web Files Used By Function Courses Files Web Function Course Sections (continued) Host Tran Code 1121 Configuration Files rcrssect2.cfg HTML Files acommhtm.htm Data Definition Input Object Files Output rcrsavl.ddo Host Program RZKCRS acommhtmcp.htm* aconfig.htm aconfig.ddo aerrmsg.htm aerrmsg.ddo atermtrn.htm atermtrn.ddo rcrshdr.htm rcrshdr.ddo rcrsinf.htm rcrsinf.ddo rsubhdr.htm rsubjtab.ddo rsubinf.htm rsubjent.ddo rcrsary.ddo 1121 rcrssecthp2.cfg acommhtmhp.htm rcrsavl.ddo aconfig.htm aconfig.ddo aerrmsg.htm aerrmsg.ddo atermtrn.htm atermtrn.ddo rcrshdr.htm rcrshdr.ddo rcrsinf.htm rcrsinf.ddo rsubhdr.htm rsubjtab.ddo rsubinf.htm rsubjent.ddo rcrsary.ddo 1122 rcrssecthp3.cfg acommhtmhp.htm rcrsavl.ddo aconfig.htm aconfig.ddo aerrmsg.htm aerrmsg.ddo atermtrn.htm atermtrn.ddo rcrshdr.htm rcrshdr.ddo rcrsinf.htm rcrsinf.ddo rinfotxt.htm rinfotxt.ddo rsecftr.htm rsecftr.ddo rsechdr.htm rsechdr.ddo rsechdrlinkhp.htm rsechdrlink.ddo rsecinf.htm rsecinf.ddo rsecnotes.htm rsecnotes.ddo rsecsep.htm rsecsep.ddo rsubhdr.htm rsubjtab.ddo rsubinf.htm rsubjent.ddo rcrsary.ddo Table 15-7 Courses Files (continued) 15-32 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15 Web Files Used By Function Courses Files Web Function Course Sections (continued) Host Tran Code 1122 Configuration Files rcrssect3.cfg HTML Files acommhtm.htm Data Definition Input Object Files Output rcrsavl.ddo Host Program RZKCRS acommhtmcp.htm* aconfig.htm aconfig.ddo aerrmsg.htm aerrmsg.ddo atermtrn.htm atermtrn.ddo rcrshdr.htm rcrshdr.ddo rcrsinf.htm rcrsinf.ddo rinfotxt.htm rinfotxt.ddo rsecftr.htm rsecftr.ddo rsechdr.htm rsechdr.ddo rsechdrlink.htm rsechdrlink.ddo rsecinf.htm rsecinf.ddo rsecnotes.htm rsecnotes.ddo rsecsep.htm rsecsep.ddo rsubhdr.htm rsubjtab.ddo rsubinf.htm rsubjent.ddo rcrsary.ddo Course Section Search 1130 rcrssrch1.cfg acommhtm.htm rcrsavlsrch.ddo RZKCRS acommhtmcp.htm* aconfig.htm aconfig.ddo aerrmsg.htm aerrmsg.ddo aterment.htm aterment.ddo atermtab.htm atermtab.ddo atermtrn.htm atermtrn.ddo rclssrchftr.htm rclssrchftr.ddo rcrserrsrch.htm rcrserrsrch.ddo rcrssrchhdr.htm rclssrchhdr.ddo rdaysrch.htm rdaysrch.ddo rinfotxt.htm rinfotxt.ddo rlvlent.htm rlvlent.ddo rlvltab.htm rlvltab.ddo rsectsrch.htm rsectsrch.ddo rsessent.htm rsessent.ddo rsesstab.htm rsesstab.ddo rsiteent.htm rsiteent.ddo Table 15-7 Courses Files (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15-33 15 Web Files Used By Function Courses Files Web Function Host Tran Code Configuration Files Course Section Search (continued) 1130 rcrssrch2.cfg HTML Files Data Definition Input Object Files Output rsitetab.htm rsitetab.ddo rsubinf.htm rsubjent.ddo rsubjtab.htm rsubjtab.ddo rtime1ent.htm rtime1ent.ddo rtime1tab.htm rtime1tab.ddo rtime2ent.htm rtime2ent.ddo rtime2tab.htm rtime2tab.ddo rwebctsrch.htm rwebctsrch.ddo acommhtm.htm Host Program RZKCRS rcrsavlsrch.ddo acommhtmcp.htm* 1130 rcrssrchhp1.cfg aconfig.htm aconfig.ddo aerrmsg.htm aerrmsg.ddo atermtrn.htm atermtrn.ddo rcrserrsrch.htm rcrserrsrch.ddo rinfotxt.htm rinfotxt.ddo rsecftr.htm rsecftr.ddo rsechdr.htm rsechdr.ddo rsechdrsrchlink.htm rsechdrlink.ddo rsecinf.htm rsecinf.ddo rsecnotes.htm rsecnotes.ddo rsecsep.htm rsecsep.ddo acommhtmhp.htm rcrsavlsrch.ddo aconfig.htm aconfig.ddo aerrmsg.htm aerrmsg.ddo aterment.htm aterment.ddo atermtab.htm atermtab.ddo atermtrn.htm atermtrn.ddo rclssrchftr.htm rclssrchftr.ddo rclssrchhdr.htm rclssrchhdr.ddo rcrserrsrch.htm rcrserrsrch.ddo rdaysrch.htm rdaysrch.ddo rinfotxt.htm rinfotxt.ddo rlvlent.htm rlvlent.ddo rlvltab.htm rlvltab.ddo rsectsrch.htm rsectsrch.ddo rsessent.htm rsessent.ddo Table 15-7 Courses Files (continued) 15-34 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15 Web Files Used By Function Courses Files Web Function Host Tran Code Configuration Files Course Section Search (continued) 1130 rcrssrchhp2.cfg HTML Files Data Definition Input Object Files Output rsesstab.htm rsesstab.ddo rsiteent.htm rsiteent.ddo rsitetab.htm rsitetab.ddo rsubinf.htm rsubjent.ddo rsubjtab.htm rsubjtab.ddo rtime1ent.htm rtime1ent.ddo rtime1tab.htm rtime1tab.ddo rtime2ent.htm rtime2ent.ddo rtime2tab.htm rtime2tab.ddo rwebctsrch.htm rwebctsrch.ddo acommhtmhp.htm Host Program RZKCRS rcrsavlsrch.ddo aconfig.htm aconfig.ddo aerrmsg.htm aerrmsg.ddo atermtrn.htm atermtrn.ddo rcrserrsrch.htm rcrserrsrch.ddo rinfotxt.htm rinfotxt.ddo rsecftr.htm rsecftr.ddo rsechdr.htm rsechdr.ddo rsechdrsrchlinkhp.htm rsechdrlink.ddo rsecinf.htm rsecinf.ddo rsecnotes.htm rsecnotes.ddo rsecsep.htm rsecsep.ddo Table 15-7 Courses Files (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15-35 15 Web Files Used By Function Prospective Student Files Prospective Student Files Web Function Prospective Students Host Tran Code Configuration Files HTML Files Data Definition Input Object Files Output -1 mprodir.cfg mprodir.htm 1250 madmpro.cfg acommhtmhp.htm addrinp1.ddo addrcnen1.htm madmidat.ddo addrcnen1.ddo addrcnen2.htm minppro.ddo addrcnen2.ddo addrcntr1.htm minpreqd.ddo addrcntr1.ddo addrcntr2.htm minpreqt.ddo addrcntr2.ddo Host Program MZKPRO addrfrm1.htm addrfrm1.ddo addrph1fpr.htm addrph1fpr.ddo addrph1fpren.htm addrph1fpren.ddo addrph1pr.htm addrph1pr.ddo addrph1pren.htm addrph1pren.ddo addrstat1.htm addrstat1.ddo addrsten1.htm addrsten1.ddo aerrmsg.htm aerrmsg.ddo atype1.htm atype1.ddo atypeen1.htm atypeen1.ddo macaiary.htm macaiary.ddo macaint1.htm macaint1.ddo macaint2.htm macaint2.ddo macalary.htm macalary.ddo macalevl.htm macalevl.ddo mentlary.htm mentlary.ddo mentlevl.htm mentlevl.ddo methent.htm methent.ddo methnic.htm methnic.ddo mgendent.htm mgendent.ddo minperr.htm minperr.ddo mintgend.htm mgender.ddo mnewinfo.htm rinfotxt.ddo mproinfo.htm mproinfo.ddo mprotary.htm mprotary.ddo mproterm.htm mproterm.ddo mprovinf.htm mreqinfonew.htm mreqinfo.ddo Table 15-8 Prospective Student Files 15-36 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15 Web Files Used By Function Prospective Student Files Web Function Prospective Students (continued) Host Tran Code Configuration Files HTML Files Data Definition Input mreqtablnew.htm Object Files Output mreqtabl.ddo Host Program MZKPRO astuinfo.ddo 1251 mprolog.cfg acommhtmhp.htm alogin.ddo aerrmsg.htm astuinfo.ddo aerrmsg.ddo aupdtmsg.htm minppro.ddo aupdtmsg.ddo macaiary.htm minpreqd.ddo macaiary.ddo macaint1.htm minpreqt.ddo macaint1.ddo macaint2.htm macaint2.ddo macalary.htm macalary.ddo macalevl.htm macalevl.ddo mentlary.htm mentlary.ddo mentlevl.htm mentlevl.ddo minperr.htm minperr.ddo mprolog.htm mprolog.ddo mprostud.htm mprostud.ddo mprotary.htm mprotary.ddo mproterm.htm mproterm.ddo mreqinfo.htm mreqinfo.ddo mreqtabl.htm mreqtabl.ddo rinfotxt.htm rinfotxt.ddo rinfotxt2.htm rinfotxt2.ddo Table 15-8 Prospective Student Files (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15-37 15 Web Files Used By Function Admissions Files Admissions Files Web Function Host Trans Code Create Account 1207 Configuration Files madmint.cfg HTML Files Data Definition Input Object Files Output addrcnen1.htm addrinp1.ddo addrcnen1.ddo addrcnen2.htm mcrtacct.ddo addrcnen2.ddo addrcnen3.htm addrcnen3.ddo addrcntr1.htm addrcntr1.ddo addrcntr2.htm addrcntr2.ddo addrcntr3.htm addrcntr3.ddo addrfrm1.htm addrfrm1.ddo addrph1fpr.htm addrph1fpr.ddo addrph1fpren.htm addrph1fpren.ddo addrph1pr.htm addrph1pr.ddo addrph1pren.htm addrph1pren.ddo addrstat1.htm addrstat1.ddo addrstat2.htm addrstat2.ddo addrsten1.htm addrsten1.ddo addrsten2.htm addrsten2.ddo madmiderr.htm madmiderr.ddo Host Program MZKINT madmint.htm Login 1000 mstulog.cfg madmverf.htm astuinfo.ddo madmverf1.htm madmverf1.ddo madmverf2.htm madmverf2.ddo mallinfo.htm mallinfo.ddo mbuttons.htm mbuttons.ddo mcrtinfo.htm mcrtinfo.ddo mcrtlog.htm mcrtlog.ddo merrmsg.htm merrmsg.ddo minperr.htm minperr.ddo mpererr.htm mpererr.ddo mpererrfld.htm mpererrfld.ddo mpgtitle.htm mpgtitle.ddo mpierr.htm mpierr.ddo mstuladmsg.htm astuinfo.ddo mstulog.htm mlogincd.ddo mstulssn.htm mstuladmsg.ddo AZKVST mstulssn.ddo Table 15-9 Admissions Files 15-38 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15 Web Files Used By Function Admissions Files Web Function Identity Verification Create PIN Host Trans Code 1205 1206 Configuration Files midverf.cfg mcrtpin.cfg HTML Files Data Definition Input mbuttons.htm astuinfo.ddo mcommhtm.htm midverfinp.ddo mcrtpin.htm mlogincd.ddo Object Files Output mbuttons.ddo Host Program MZKVST mcrtpin.ddo mcrtpine.htm mcrtpine.ddo mcrtpinerr.htm mcrtpinerr.ddo mgendent.htm mgendent.ddo mgender.htm mgender.ddo midverferr.htm midverferr.ddo midvinfo.htm midvinfo.ddo mnavlnks1.htm mnavlnks1.ddo mpererr.htm mpererr.ddo mpererrfld.htm mpererrfld.ddo mpgtitle.htm mpgtitle.ddo mpierr.htm mpierr.ddo mpinconf.htm astuinfo.ddo mbuttons.htm astuinfo.ddo mbuttons.ddo mcommhtm.htm mcrtpininp.ddo mcrtpin.htm midverfinp.ddo mcrtpin.ddo merrmsg.htm mlogincd.ddo merrmsg.ddo mgendent.htm mgendent.ddo mgender.htm mgender.ddo MZKVST midverfe.htm midverferr.htm midverferr.ddo midvinfo.htm midvinfo.ddo mnavlnks1.htm mnavlnks1.ddo mpererr.htm mpererr.ddo mpererrfld.htm mpererrfld.ddo mpgtitle.htm mpgtitle.ddo mpierr.htm mpierr.ddo mpinconf.htm astuinfo.ddo Table 15-9 Admissions Files (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15-39 15 Web Files Used By Function Admissions Files Web Function Login - PIN Create Account SSN/PIN Error Page Host Trans Code 1000 Configuration Files mstuverf.cfg HTML Files Data Definition Input Object Files Output addrcnen1.htm astuinfo.ddo addrcnen1.ddo addrcnen2.htm mlogincd.ddo addrcnen2.ddo addrcnen3.htm addrcnen3.ddo addrcntr1.htm addrcntr1.ddo addrcntr2.htm addrcntr2.ddo addrcntr3.htm addrcntr3.ddo addrfrm1.htm addrfrm1.ddo addrph1fpr.htm addrph1fpr.ddo addrph1fpren.htm addrph1fpren.ddo addrph1pr.htm addrph1pr.ddo addrph1pren.htm addrph1pren.ddo addrstat1.htm addrstat1.ddo addrstat2.htm addrstat2.ddo addrsten1.htm addrsten1.ddo addrsten2.htm addrsten2.ddo mallinfo.htm mallinfo.ddo mbuttons.htm mbuttons.ddo mcrtinfo.htm mcrtinfo.ddo mcrtlog.htm mcrtlog.ddo mgendent.htm mgendent.ddo mgender.htm mgender.ddo midvinfo.htm midvinfo.ddo mpgtitle.htm mpgtitle.ddo mstuladmsg.htm mstuladmsg.ddo Host Program AZKVST mstuloge.htm mstulogerr.htm mstulogerr.ddo mstulssn.htm mstulssn.ddo mstupin.htm mstupin.ddo mstuverf.htm Table 15-9 Admissions Files (continued) 15-40 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15 Web Files Used By Function Admissions Files Web Function Login - Enter PIN Host Trans Code 1000 Configuration Files mstupin.cfg HTML Files Data Definition Input Object Files Output madmappl.htm astuinfo.ddo aterment.ddo madmlevl.htm mlogincd.ddo madmlevl.ddo madmlvay.htm madmlvay.ddo madmtext.htm madmtext.ddo mappinfo.htm mappinfo.ddo mapplerr.htm mapplerr.ddo mappnew.htm madmnew.ddo mappnum.htm mappnum.ddo mbuttons.htm mbuttons.ddo mcaumsg.htm mcaumsg.ddo Host Program AZKVST mcommhtm.htm mcompgml.htm mcomappl.ddo mconpgm.htm mcurappl.ddo meitext3.htm meitext3.ddo merrmsg.htm merrmsg.ddo mexpappinf.htm mexpappinf.ddo mexppgml.htm mexpappl.ddo mnavlnks1.htm mnavlnks1.ddo mnavlnks2.htm mnavlnks2.ddo mnavlnks5.htm mnavlnks5.ddo mpgminfo.htm mcominfo.ddo mpgtitle.htm mpgtitle.ddo mstupine.htm mstupinerr.htm mstupinerr.ddo mterment.htm mtermtab.htm atermtab.ddo madmappl.ddo Table 15-9 Admissions Files (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15-41 15 Web Files Used By Function Admissions Files Web Function Review Application Host Trans Code 1201 Configuration Files madmstat.cfg HTML Files Data Definition Input Object Files Output atableftr.htm astuinfo.ddo atableftr.ddo madmdata.htm minpapp.ddo madmdata.ddo Host Program MZKADM mcommhtm.htm merrmsg.htm merrmsg.ddo mnavlnks3.htm mnavlnks3.ddo mnavlnks4.htm mnavlnks4.ddo mpgtitle.htm mpgtitle.ddo mrvapbtnf.htm mrvapbtnf.ddo mrvapbuttn.htm mrvapbuttn.ddo mrvapcohds.htm mrvapcohds.ddo mrvapcohdu.htm mrvapcohdu.ddo mrvapdldt.htm mrvapdldt.ddo mrvapdldthdr.htm mrvapdldthdr.ddo mrvapehhds.htm mrvapehhds.ddo mrvapehhdu.htm mrvapehhdu.ddo mrvapeihds.htm mrvapeihds.ddo mrvapeihdu.htm mrvapeihdu.ddo mrvapfee.htm mrvapfee.ddo mrvapfeep.htm mrvapfeep.ddo mrvapfees.htm mrvapfees.ddo mrvapfeeu.htm mrvapfeeu.ddo mrvaphshds.htm mrvaphshds.ddo mrvaphshdu.htm mrvaphshdu.ddo mrvapinfo.htm mrvapinfo.ddo mrvappihds.htm mrvappihds.ddo mrvappihdu.htm mrvappihdu.ddo mrvappitab1.htm mrvappitab1.ddo mrvappitab2.htm mrvappitab2.ddo mrvappiurl.htm mrvappiurl.ddo mrvapprhds.htm mrvapprhds.ddo mrvapprhdu.htm mrvapprhdu.ddo mrvaprchds.htm mrvaprchds.ddo mrvaprchdu.htm mrvaprchdu.ddo mrvapreq.htm mrvapreq.ddo mrvaprqt.htm mrvaprqt.ddo madata.ddo Table 15-9 Admissions Files (continued) 15-42 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15 Web Files Used By Function Admissions Files Web Function Select Application Type Host Trans Code 1218 Configuration Files mnlevel.cfg HTML Files Data Definition Input Object Files Output madmlevl.htm astuinfo.ddo madmlevl.ddo madmlvay.htm minpapp.ddo madmlvay.ddo madmtext.htm mnavcode.ddo madmtext.ddo mappnum.htm mselmin.ddo mappnum.ddo mbuttons.htm Host Program MZKPGM mbuttons.ddo mcommhtm.htm Select Term 1203 mnterm.cfg mconpgm.htm mcurappl.ddo meitext3.htm meitext3.ddo merrmsg.htm merrmsg.ddo mnavlnks2.htm mnavlnks2.ddo mpgtitle.htm mpgtitle.ddo madmlevl.htm astuinfo.ddo madmlevl.ddo madmlvay.htm minpapp.ddo madmlvay.ddo madmtext.htm mnavcode.ddo madmtext.ddo mappnum.htm mselmin.ddo mappnum.ddo mbuttons.htm MZKPGM mbuttons.ddo mcommhtm.htm mconpgm.htm mcurappl.ddo meitext3.htm meitext3.ddo merrmsg.htm merrmsg.ddo mnavlnks2.htm mnavlnks2.ddo mpgtitle.htm mpgtitle.ddo mterment.htm aterment.ddo mtermtab.htm atermtab.ddo Table 15-9 Admissions Files (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15-43 15 Web Files Used By Function Admissions Files Web Function Host Trans Code Select Major 1219 Configuration Files mnselmaj.cfg HTML Files Data Definition Input Object Files Output madmfmaj.htm astuinfo.ddo madmfmaj.ddo madmfmin.htm minpapp.ddo madmfmin.ddo madmlevl.htm mnavcode.ddo madmlevl.ddo madmlvay.htm madmlvay.ddo madmsmaj.htm madmsmaj.ddo madmsmin.htm madmsmin.ddo madmtext.htm madmtext.ddo mappnum.htm mappnum.ddo mbuttons.htm mbuttons.ddo Host Program MZKPGM mcommhtm.htm Enrollment Intentions 1220 mncoldeg.cfg mconpgm.htm mcurappl.ddo meitext3.htm meitext3.ddo merrmsg.htm merrmsg.ddo mnavlnks2.htm mnavlnks2.ddo mpgtitle.htm mpgtitle.ddo mterment.htm aterment.ddo mtermtab.htm atermtab.ddo atableftr.htm astuinfo.ddo atableftr.ddo madmfmaj.htm minpapp.ddo madmfmaj.ddo madmfmin.htm mnavcode.ddo madmfmin.ddo madmlevl.htm madmlevl.ddo madmlvay.htm madmlvay.ddo madmsmaj.htm madmsmaj.ddo madmsmin.htm madmsmin.ddo madmtext.htm madmtext.ddo madmupdt.htm madmupdt.ddo mappnum.htm mappnum.ddo mbuttons.htm mbuttons.ddo mcolldeg1.htm mcolldeg1.ddo mcolldeg1ent.htm mcolldeg1ent.ddo mcolldeg2.htm mcolldeg2.ddo mcolldeg2ent.htm mcolldeg2ent.ddo MZKPGM mcommhtm.htm mconpgm.htm mcurappl.ddo meicitizen.htm meicitizen.ddo meicitzn.htm meicitzn.ddo Table 15-9 Admissions Files (continued) 15-44 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15 Web Files Used By Function Admissions Files Web Function Host Trans Code Configuration Files Enrollment Intentions (continued) HTML Files Data Definition Input Object Files Output meictznent.htm meictznent.ddo meiearlydc.htm meiearlydc.ddo meiearlydcsn.htm meiearlydcsn.ddo meiearlyent.htm meiearlyent.ddo meifinaid.htm meifinaid.ddo meifincaid.htm meifincaid.ddo meifinent.htm meifinent.ddo meifpstat.htm meifpstat.ddo meifpstatent.htm meifpstatent.ddo meifpstatus.htm meifpstatus.ddo meihdr.htm meihdr.ddo meihousent.htm meihousent.ddo meihousing.htm meihousing.ddo meihousreq.htm meihousreq.ddo meihousreqval.htm meihousreqval.ddo meihsng.htm meihsng.ddo meiminor.htm meiminor.ddo meiminorpgm.htm meiminorpgm.ddo meimnrent.htm meimnrent.ddo meiprevappl.htm meiprevappl.ddo meiprevappld.htm meiprevappld.ddo meiprevatt.htm meiprevatt.ddo meiprevattd.htm meiprevattd.ddo meiprevent.htm meiprevent.ddo meiprvapent.htm meiprvapent.ddo meispecent.htm meispecent.ddo meispecial.htm meispecial.ddo meispecpgm.htm meispecpgm.ddo meitext1.htm meitext1.ddo meitext2.htm meitext2.ddo meitext3.htm meitext3.ddo merrmsg.htm merrmsg.ddo mfirpgm.htm mfirpgm.ddo mnavlnks2.htm mnavlnks2.ddo mnavstat.htm mnavstat.ddo mpgmemsg.htm mpgmemsg.ddo Host Program MZKPGM Table 15-9 Admissions Files (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15-45 15 Web Files Used By Function Admissions Files Web Function Host Trans Code Configuration Files Enrollment Intentions (continued) 1212 mncmpappl.cfg HTML Files Data Definition Input Object Files Output mpgtitle.htm mpgtitle.ddo mresary.htm mresary.ddo mresstat.htm mresstat.ddo mresstatus.htm mresstatus.ddo msecpgm.htm msecpgm.ddo mselfir.htm mselfir.ddo mselsec.htm mselsec.ddo mtblclose.htm mtblclose.ddo mterment.htm aterment.ddo mtermtab.htm atermtab.ddo atableftr.htm astuinfo.ddo atableftr.ddo madmupdt.htm minpapp.ddo madmupdt.ddo mappnum.htm mnavcode.ddo mappnum.ddo mbutton.htm mbutton.ddo mbuttons.htm mbuttons.ddo mcaedcsndt.htm mcaedcsndt.ddo mcafinaiddt.htm mcafinaiddt.ddo mcaformtag.htm mcaformtag.ddo mcaintrntldt.htm mcaintrntldt.ddo mcasubmdt.htm mcasubmdt.ddo mcatext1.htm mcatext1.ddo mcatext2.htm mcatext2.ddo mcatext3.htm mcatext3.ddo mcatext4.htm mcatext4.ddo mcatext5.htm mcatext5.ddo mcatext6.htm mcatext6.ddo mcatrnstddt.htm mcatrnstddt.ddo mcolldeg1.htm mcolldeg1.ddo mcolldeg1ent.htm mcolldeg1ent.ddo mcolldeg2.htm mcolldeg2.ddo mcolldeg2ent.htm mcolldeg2ent.ddo Host Program MZKPGM mcommhtm.htm mconpgm.htm mcurappl.ddo meicitizen.htm meicitizen.ddo meicitzn.htm meicitzn.ddo meictznent.htm meictznent.ddo Table 15-9 Admissions Files (continued) 15-46 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15 Web Files Used By Function Admissions Files Web Function Host Trans Code Configuration Files Enrollment Intentions (continued) HTML Files Data Definition Input Object Files Output meiearlydc.htm meiearlydc.ddo meiearlydcsn.htm meiearlydcsn.ddo meiearlyent.htm meiearlyent.ddo meifinaid.htm meifinaid.ddo meifincaid.htm meifincaid.ddo meifinent.htm meifinent.ddo meifpstat.htm meifpstat.ddo meifpstatent.htm meifpstatent.ddo meifpstatus.htm meifpstatus.ddo meihdr.htm meihdr.ddo meihousent.htm meihousent.ddo meihousing.htm meihousing.ddo meihousreq.htm meihousreq.ddo meihousreqval.htm meihousreqval.ddo meihsng.htm meihsng.ddo meiminor.htm meiminor.ddo meiminorpgm.htm meiminorpgm.ddo meimnrent.htm meimnrent.ddo meiprevappl.htm meiprevappl.ddo meiprevappld.htm meiprevappld.ddo meiprevatt.htm meiprevatt.ddo meiprevattd.htm meiprevattd.ddo meiprevent.htm meiprevent.ddo meiprvapent.htm meiprvapent.ddo meispecent.htm meispecent.ddo meispecial.htm meispecial.ddo meispecpgm.htm meispecpgm.ddo meitext1.htm meitext1.ddo meitext2.htm meitext2.ddo meitext3.htm meitext3.ddo merrmsg.htm merrmsg.ddo mfirpgm.htm mfirpgm.ddo mnavlnks2.htm mnavlnks2.ddo mnavlnks5.htm mnavlnks5.ddo mnavstat.htm mnavstat.ddo mpgmemsg.htm mpgmemsg.ddo Host Program MZKPGM Table 15-9 Admissions Files (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15-47 15 Web Files Used By Function Admissions Files Web Function Host Trans Code Configuration Files Enrollment Intentions (continued) Personal Information 1215 mperinfo.cfg HTML Files Data Definition Input Object Files Output mpgtitle.htm mpgtitle.ddo mresary.htm mresary.ddo mresstat.htm mresstat.ddo mresstatus.htm mresstatus.ddo msecpgm.htm msecpgm.ddo mselfir.htm mselfir.ddo mselsec.htm mselsec.ddo mtblclose.htm mtblclose.ddo addrcnen1.htm addrinp1.ddo addrcnen1.ddo addrcnen2.htm addrinp2.ddo addrcnen2.ddo addrcnen3.htm addrinp3.ddo addrcnen3.ddo addrcnen4.htm aemailinp.ddo addrcnen4.ddo addrcnen5.htm astuinfo.ddo addrcnen5.ddo addrcnen6.htm minpapp.ddo addrcnen6.ddo addrcntr1.htm mnavcode.ddo addrcntr1.ddo addrcntr2.htm mpersoninp.ddo addrcntr2.ddo addrcntr3.htm mpiphinp.ddo addrcntr3.ddo addrcntr4.htm addrcntr4.ddo addrcntr5.htm addrcntr5.ddo addrcntr6.htm addrcntr6.ddo addrfrm1.htm addrfrm1.ddo addrfrm2.htm addrfrm2.ddo addrfrm3.htm addrfrm3.ddo addrph1fpr.htm addrph1fpr.ddo addrph1fpren.htm addrph1fpren.ddo addrph1pr.htm addrph1pr.ddo addrph1pren.htm addrph1pren.ddo addrph2fpr.htm addrph2fpr.ddo addrph2fpren.htm addrph2fpren.ddo addrph2pr.htm addrph2pr.ddo addrph2pren.htm addrph2pren.ddo addrph3fpr.htm addrph3fpr.ddo addrph3fpren.htm addrph3fpren.ddo addrph3pr.htm addrph3pr.ddo addrph3pren.htm addrph3pren.ddo addrstat1.htm addrstat1.ddo Host Program MZKPGM MZKNAM Table 15-9 Admissions Files (continued) 15-48 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15 Web Files Used By Function Admissions Files Web Function Host Trans Code Configuration Files Personal Information (continued) HTML Files Data Definition Input Object Files Output addrstat2.htm addrstat2.ddo addrstat3.htm addrstat3.ddo addrsten1.htm addrsten1.ddo addrsten2.htm addrsten2.ddo addrsten3.htm addrsten3.ddo aemaili1.htm aemaili1.ddo aemaili2.htm aemaili2.ddo aemaili3.htm aemaili3.ddo aemaili4.htm aemaili4.ddo aemaili5.htm aemaili5.ddo aemailu1.htm aemailu1.ddo aemailu2.htm aemailu2.ddo aemailu3.htm aemailu3.ddo aemailu4.htm aemailu4.ddo aemailu5.htm aemailu5.ddo apref1.htm apref1.ddo apref2.htm apref2.ddo apref3.htm apref3.ddo apref4.htm apref4.ddo apref5.htm apref5.ddo aprefen1.htm aprefen1.ddo aprefen2.htm aprefen2.ddo aprefen3.htm aprefen3.ddo aprefen4.htm aprefen4.ddo aprefen5.htm aprefen5.ddo atype1.htm atype1.ddo atype2.htm atype2.ddo atype3.htm atype3.ddo atype4.htm atype4.ddo atype5.htm atype5.ddo atypeen1.htm atypeen1.ddo atypeen2.htm atypeen2.ddo atypeen3.htm atypeen3.ddo atypeen4.htm atypeen4.ddo atypeen5.htm atypeen5.ddo awebpage.htm awebpage.ddo Host Program MZKNAM Table 15-9 Admissions Files (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15-49 15 Web Files Used By Function Admissions Files Web Function Personal Information (continued) Host Trans Code Configuration Files HTML Files Data Definition Input Object Files Output maddrerr.htm maddrerr.ddo malumrel.htm malumrel.ddo malumrlt.htm malumrlt.ddo mappnum.htm mappnum.ddo mbuttons.htm mbuttons.ddo Host Program MZKNAM mcommhtm.htm mdisabil.htm mdisabil.ddo mdisaent.htm mdisaent.ddo merrmsg.htm merrmsg.ddo methent.htm methent.ddo methnic.htm methnic.ddo mgendent.htm mgendent.ddo mgender.htm mgender.ddo mmarient.htm mmarient.ddo mmarital.htm mmarital.ddo mnameinf.htm mnavlnks2.htm mnavlnks2.ddo mnavstat.htm mnavstat.ddo mperemail.htm mperemail.ddo mpererr.htm mpererr.ddo mpererrfld.htm mpererrfld.ddo mperinfo.htm mperinfo.ddo mpermaddrhdg.htm mpermaddrhdg.ddo mperphone.htm mperphone.ddo mpgtitle.htm mpgtitle.ddo mphone1.htm mphone1.ddo mphone2.htm mphone2.ddo mphone3.htm mphone3.ddo mphone4.htm mphone4.ddo mphone5.htm mphone5.ddo mpiecphty.htm mpiecphty.ddo mpiecphtyen.htm mpiecphtyen.ddo mpiemgcont.htm mpiemgcont.ddo mpierr.htm mpierr.ddo mpiph1pr.htm mpiph1pr.ddo mpiph1pren.htm mpiph1pren.ddo Table 15-9 Admissions Files (continued) 15-50 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15 Web Files Used By Function Admissions Files Web Function Host Trans Code Configuration Files Personal Information (continued) HTML Files Data Definition Input Object Files Output mpiph1ty.htm mpiph1ty.ddo mpiph1tyen.htm mpiph1tyen.ddo mpiph2pr.htm mpiph2pr.ddo mpiph2pren.htm mpiph2pren.ddo mpiph2ty.htm mpiph2ty.ddo mpiph2tyen.htm mpiph2tyen.ddo mpiph3pr.htm mpiph3pr.ddo mpiph3pren.htm mpiph3pren.ddo mpiph3ty.htm mpiph3ty.ddo mpiph3tyen.htm mpiph3tyen.ddo mpiph4pr.htm mpiph4pr.ddo mpiph4pren.htm mpiph4pren.ddo mpiph4ty.htm mpiph4ty.ddo mpiph4tyen.htm mpiph4tyen.ddo mpiph5pr.htm mpiph5pr.ddo mpiph5pren.htm mpiph5pren.ddo mpiph5ty.htm mpiph5ty.ddo mpiph5tyen.htm mpiph5tyen.ddo mpiphemlerr.htm mpiphemlerr.ddo mpitmpma.htm mpitmpma.ddo mpstuname.htm mpstuname.ddo mrcconv.htm mrcconv.ddo mrcconvent.htm mrcconvent.ddo mrclangent.htm mrclangent.ddo mrcprlang.htm mrcprlang.ddo mrelatn.htm mrelatn.ddo mrelatnt.htm mrelatnt.ddo mrelient.htm mrelient.ddo mreligio.htm mreligio.ddo mselsent.htm mselsent.ddo mselserv.htm mselserv.ddo mvetent.htm mstdname.ddo mveteran.htm mvetent.ddo Host Program MZKNAM Table 15-9 Admissions Files (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15-51 15 Web Files Used By Function Admissions Files Web Function Select Application Host Trans Code 1217 Configuration Files mpgmsel.cfg HTML Files Data Definition Input Object Files Output madmappl.htm astuinfo.ddo madmappl.ddo madmlevl.htm mselmin.ddo madmlevl.ddo madmlvay.htm madmlvay.ddo madmtext.htm madmtext.ddo mappinfo.htm mappinfo.ddo mapplerr.htm mapplerr.ddo mappnew.htm madmnew.ddo mappnum.htm mappnum.ddo mbuttons.htm mbuttons.ddo mcaumsg.htm mcaumsg.ddo Host Program MZKPGM mcommhtm.htm Previous College Information 1213 madmcoll.cfg mcompgml.htm mcomappl.ddo mconpgm.htm mcurappl.ddo meitext3.htm meitext3.ddo merrmsg.htm merrmsg.ddo mexpappinf.htm mexpappinf.ddo mexppgml.htm mexpappl.ddo mnavlnks2.htm mnavlnks2.ddo mnavlnks5.htm mnavlnks5.ddo mpgminfo.htm mcominfo.ddo mpgtitle.htm mpgtitle.ddo mterment.htm aterment.ddo mtermtab.htm atermtab.ddo maddrcen.htm astuinfo.ddo madrcnen.ddo maddrcty.htm mhslist.ddo madrcntr.ddo maddrsta.htm mhslistfld.ddo madrstat.ddo maddrstn.htm minpapp.ddo madrsten.ddo madmcoll.htm mnavcode.ddo madmcoll.ddo madmcollfnd.htm madmcollfnd.ddo mappnum.htm mappnum.ddo mbutton.htm mbutton.ddo mbuttons.htm mbuttons.ddo mclupdlnk.htm mclupdlnk.ddo mclupdmsg.htm mclupdmsg.ddo mclupdt.htm mclupdt.ddo mclupinfo.htm mclupinfo.ddo MZKHCL Table 15-9 Admissions Files (continued) 15-52 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15 Web Files Used By Function Admissions Files Web Function Host Trans Code Configuration Files Object Files Output mcommhtm.htm Previous College Information (continued) College Information Locate College HTML Files Data Definition Input 1222 mselcol1.cfg Host Program MZKHCL mconfbuttn.htm mconfbutt.ddo mdegawd.htm mdegawd.ddo mdegent.htm mdegent.ddo mdispinst.htm mdispinst.ddo merrmsg.htm merrmsg.ddo merrmsgc.htm merrmsgc.ddo mhsdiplm.htm mhsdiplm.ddo mhsdiprc.htm mhsdiprc.ddo mhserrmsg.htm mhserrmsg.ddo minpinst.htm minpinst.ddo minstbuttn.htm minstbutt.ddo mnavlnks2.htm mnavlnks2.ddo mnavstat.htm mnavstat.ddo mpererr.htm mpererr.ddo mpererrfld.htm mpererrfld.ddo mpgtitle.htm mpgtitle.ddo mpierr.htm mpierr.ddo maddrcen.htm astuinfo.ddo madrcnen.ddo maddrcty.htm minpapp.ddo madrcntr.ddo maddrsta.htm mnavcode.ddo madrstat.ddo maddrstn.htm madrsten.ddo mappnum.htm mappnum.ddo mbuttons.htm mbuttons.ddo mclupdlnk.htm mclupdlnk.ddo mclupdt.htm mclupdt.ddo mclupinfo.htm mclupinfo.ddo MZKHCL mcommhtm.htm mconfbuttn.htm mconfbutt.ddo mdegawd.htm mdegawd.ddo mdegent.htm mdegent.ddo mhsdiplm.htm mhsdiplm.ddo mhsdiprc.htm mhsdiprc.ddo mhserrmsg.htm mhserrmsg.ddo minstbuts.htm minstbuts.ddo minstbuttn.htm minstbutt.ddo Table 15-9 Admissions Files (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15-53 15 Web Files Used By Function Admissions Files Web Function Host Trans Code Configuration Files College Information Locate College (continued) Select College Name 1226 mselcol2.cfg HTML Files Data Definition Input Object Files Output mnavlnks2.htm mnavlnks2.ddo mnavstat.htm mnavstat.ddo mpgtitle.htm mpgtitle.ddo mselcol1.htm msinst1.ddo maddrcen.htm astuinfo.ddo madrcnen.ddo maddrcty.htm minpapp.ddo madrcntr.ddo maddrsta.htm minpsel1.ddo madrstat.ddo maddrstn.htm mnavcode.ddo madrsten.ddo mappnum.htm Host Program MZKHCL MZKHCL mappnum.ddo mcommhtm.htm Add Previous College 1227 mselcol3.cfg mconfbuttn.htm mconfbutt.ddo merrmsg.htm merrmsg.ddo mhserrmsg.htm mhserrmsg.ddo minsent.htm minsent.ddo minstbuts.htm minstbuts.ddo minstbuttn.htm minstbutt.ddo mnavlnks2.htm mnavlnks2.ddo mnavstat.htm mnavstat.ddo mpgtitle.htm mpgtitle.ddo ms2info.htm ms2info.ddo mselcol1.htm msinst1.ddo mselcol2.htm msinst2.ddo maddrcen.htm astuinfo.ddo madrcnen.ddo maddrcty.htm minpapp.ddo madrcntr.ddo maddrsta.htm minpdate.ddo madrstat.ddo maddrstn.htm minpsel1.ddo madrsten.ddo madmcoll.htm minpsel2.ddo madmcoll.ddo madmcollfnd.htm minpsel3.ddo madmcollfnd.ddo mappnum.htm mnavcode.ddo mappnum.ddo mbuttons.htm MZKHCL mbuttons.ddo mcommhtm.htm mdegawd.htm mdegawd.ddo mdegent.htm mdegent.ddo mdispinst.htm mdispinst.ddo mhsdiplm.htm mhsdiplm.ddo mhsdiprc.htm mhsdiprc.ddo Table 15-9 Admissions Files (continued) 15-54 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15 Web Files Used By Function Admissions Files Web Function Host Trans Code Configuration Files Add Previous College (continued) High School Information 1214 madmhs.cfg HTML Files Data Definition Input Object Files Output minpinst.htm minpinst.ddo mnavlnks2.htm mnavlnks2.ddo mnavstat.htm mnavstat.ddo mpgtitle.htm mpgtitle.ddo maddrcen.htm astuinfo.ddo madrcnen.ddo maddrcty.htm mhslist.ddo madrcntr.ddo maddrsta.htm mhslistfld.ddo madrstat.ddo maddrstn.htm minpapp.ddo madrsten.ddo mappnum.htm mnavcode.ddo mappnum.ddo mbutton.htm mbutton.ddo mbuttons.htm mbuttons.ddo Host Program MZKHCL MZKHCL mcommhtm.htm mconfbuttn.htm mconfbutt.ddo mdisphs.htm mdisphs.ddo merrmsg.htm merrmsg.ddo merrmsgc.htm merrmsgc.ddo mgedinp.htm mgedinp.ddo mhmschlinp.htm mhmschlinp.ddo mhsdiplm.htm mhsdiplm.ddo mhsdiprc.htm mhsdiprc.ddo mhserrmsg.htm mhserrmsg.ddo mhsinfo.htm madmhs.ddo mhsinfofnd.htm mhsinfofnd.ddo mhsinfohmged.htm mhsinfohmged.ddo mhsupdlnk.htm mhsupdlnk.ddo mhsupdmsg.htm mhsupdmsg.ddo mhsupdt.htm mhsupdt.ddo mhsupinfo.htm mhsupinfo.ddo minphs.htm minphs.ddo minstbuttn.htm minstbutt.ddo mnavlnks2.htm mnavlnks2.ddo mnavstat.htm mnavstat.ddo mpererr.htm mpererr.ddo mpererrfld.htm mpererrfld.ddo mpgtitle.htm mpgtitle.ddo mpierr.htm mpierr.ddo Table 15-9 Admissions Files (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15-55 15 Web Files Used By Function Admissions Files Web Function Locate High School Host Trans Code 1225 Configuration Files mselhs1.cfg HTML Files Data Definition Input Object Files Output maddrcen.htm astuinfo.ddo madrcnen.ddo maddrcty.htm minpapp.ddo madmhs.ddo maddrsta.htm mnavcode.ddo madrstat.ddo maddrstn.htm madrsten.ddo mappnum.htm mappnum.ddo mbuttons.htm mbuttons.ddo Host Program MZKHCL mcommhtm.htm mdisphs.htm mdisphs.ddo mged.htm mged.ddo mgedsel.htm mgedsel.ddo mhmschlsel.htm mhmschlsel.ddo mhomeschl.htm mhomeschl.ddo mhsdiplm.htm mhsdiplm.ddo mhsdiprc.htm mhsdiprc.ddo mhsinfo.htm mhsinfofnd.htm mhsinfofnd.ddo mhsinfohmged.htm mhsinfohmged.ddo mhsupdlnk.htm mhsupdlnk.ddo mhsupdt.htm mhsupdt.ddo mhsupinfo.htm mhsupinfo.ddo minphs.htm minphs.ddo minstbuts.htm minstbuts.ddo mnavlnks2.htm mnavlnks2.ddo mnavstat.htm mnavstat.ddo mpgtitle.htm mpgtitle.ddo mselhs1.htm mshschl.ddo madrcntr.ddo 1226 mselhs2.cfg maddrcen.htm astuinfo.ddo MZKHCL maddrcty.htm minpapp.ddo madmhs.ddo maddrsta.htm minpsel1.ddo madrcnen.ddo maddrstn.htm mnavcode.ddo madrsten.ddo mappnum.htm mappnum.ddo mbuttons.htm mbuttons.ddo mcommhtm.htm mconfbutt.ddo mconfbuttn.htm mdisphs.htm mdisphs.ddo Table 15-9 Admissions Files (continued) 15-56 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15 Web Files Used By Function Admissions Files Web Function Host Trans Code Configuration Files Locate High School (continued) HTML Files Data Definition Input Object Files Output merrmsg.htm merrmsg.ddo merrmsgc.htm merrmsgc.ddo mged.htm mged.ddo mgedinp.htm mgedinp.ddo mgedsel.htm mgedsel.ddo mhmschlinp.htm mhmschlinp.ddo mhmschlsel.htm mhmschlsel.ddo mhomeschl.htm mhomeschl.ddo mhsdiplm.htm mhsdiplm.ddo mhsdiprc.htm mhsdiprc.ddo mhserrmsg.htm mhserrmsg.ddo Host Program MZKHCL mhsinfo.htm mhsinfofnd.htm mhsinfofnd.ddo mhsinfohmged.htm mhsinfohmged.ddo minphs.htm minphs.ddo minsent.htm minsent.ddo minstbuts.htm minstbuts.ddo minstbuttn.htm minstbutt.ddo mnavlnks2.htm mnavlnks2.ddo mnavstat.htm mnavstat.ddo mpgtitle.htm mpgtitle.ddo ms2info.htm ms2info.ddo mselhs1.htm mshschl.ddo mselhs2.htm msinst2.ddo madrcntr.ddo madrstat.ddo Add High School Information 1227 mselhs3.cfg maddrcen.htm astuinfo.ddo madrcntr.ddo maddrcty.htm minpapp.ddo madmhs.ddo maddrsta.htm minpdate.ddo madrcnen.ddo maddrstn.htm minpsel1.ddo madrsten.ddo mappnum.htm minpsel2.ddo mappnum.ddo mbuttons.htm minpsel3.ddo mbuttons.ddo mcommhtm.htm mnavcode.ddo mdisphs.htm mdisphs.ddo merrmsg.htm merrmsg.ddo merrmsgc.htm merrmsgc.ddo MZKHCL Table 15-9 Admissions Files (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15-57 15 Web Files Used By Function Admissions Files Web Function Host Trans Code Configuration Files Add High School Information (continued) Submit Application 1216 msubcert.cfg HTML Files Data Definition Input mhsdiplm.htm mhsdiplm.ddo mhsdiprc.htm mhsdiprc.ddo mhsinfo.htm madrstat.ddo mhsinfofnd.htm mhsinfofnd.ddo mhsinfohmged.htm mhsinfohmged.ddo minphs.htm minphs.ddo mnavlnks2.htm mnavlnks2.ddo mnavstat.htm mnavstat.ddo mpgtitle.htm mpgtitle.ddo mcommhtm.htm astuinfo.ddo mnavlnks4.htm mselmin.ddo msubappl1.htm Submit Application Thank You Continuous Flow Process 1223 1221 msubpgm.cfg mnextpg.cfg Object Files Output Host Program MZKHCL MZKSAP mnavlnks4.ddo msubappl1.ddo mcommhtm.htm astuinfo.ddo minstinf.htm mselmin.ddo MZKSAP minstinf.ddo mnavlnks4.htm mnavlnks4.ddo msubappl2.htm msubappl1.ddo msubappl2a.htm msubappl2.ddo msubappl3.htm msubappl3.ddo msubauto2.htm msubauto2.ddo msubinfo.htm msubinfo.ddo msubpayinf.htm msubpayinf.ddo addrcnen.htm addrinp1.ddo addrcnen.ddo addrcnen1.htm addrinp2.ddo addrcnen1.ddo addrcnen2.htm addrinp3.ddo addrcnen2.ddo addrcnen3.htm aemailinp.ddo addrcnen3.ddo addrcnen4.htm astuinfo.ddo addrcnen4.ddo addrcnen5.htm memphistinp.ddo addrcnen5.ddo addrcnen6.htm minpapp.ddo addrcnen6.ddo addrcntr1.htm mnavcode.ddo addrcntr1.ddo addrcntr2.htm mpersoninp.ddo addrcntr2.ddo addrcntr3.htm mpersrefinp.ddo addrcntr3.ddo addrcntr4.htm mpiphinp.ddo addrcntr4.ddo addrcntr5.htm mrsctzninp.ddo addrcntr5.ddo addrcntr6.htm addrcntr6.ddo addrerr.htm addrerr.ddo addrfrm1.htm addrfrm1.ddo MZKDIR Table 15-9 Admissions Files (continued) 15-58 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15 Web Files Used By Function Admissions Files Web Function Host Trans Code Configuration Files Continuous Flow Process (continued) HTML Files Data Definition Input Object Files Output addrfrm2.htm addrfrm2.ddo addrfrm3.htm addrfrm3.ddo addrph1fpr.htm addrph1fpr.ddo addrph1fpren.htm addrph1fpren.ddo addrph1pr.htm addrph1pr.ddo addrph1pren.htm addrph1pren.ddo addrph2fpr.htm addrph2fpr.ddo addrph2fpren.htm addrph2fpren.ddo addrph2pr.htm addrph2pr.ddo addrph2pren.htm addrph2pren.ddo addrph3fpr.htm addrph3fpr.ddo addrph3fpren.htm addrph3fpren.ddo addrph3pr.htm addrph3pr.ddo addrph3pren.htm addrph3pren.ddo addrstat1.htm addrstat1.ddo addrstat2.htm addrstat2.ddo addrstat3.htm addrstat3.ddo addrsten.htm addrsten.ddo addrsten1.htm addrsten1.ddo addrsten2.htm addrsten2.ddo addrsten3.htm addrsten3.ddo aemaili1.htm aemaili1.ddo aemaili2.htm aemaili2.ddo aemaili3.htm aemaili3.ddo aemaili4.htm aemaili4.ddo aemaili5.htm aemaili5.ddo aemailu1.htm aemailu1.ddo aemailu2.htm aemailu2.ddo aemailu3.htm aemailu3.ddo aemailu4.htm aemailu4.ddo aemailu5.htm aemailu5.ddo aerrmsg.htm aerrmsg.ddo apref1.htm apref1.ddo apref2.htm apref2.ddo apref3.htm apref3.ddo apref4.htm apref4.ddo Host Program MZKDIR Table 15-9 Admissions Files (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15-59 15 Web Files Used By Function Admissions Files Web Function Continuous Flow Process (continued) Host Trans Code Configuration Files HTML Files Data Definition Input Object Files Output apref5.htm apref5.ddo aprefen1.htm aprefen1.ddo aprefen2.htm aprefen2.ddo aprefen3.htm aprefen3.ddo aprefen4.htm aprefen4.ddo aprefen5.htm aprefen5.ddo atableftr.htm atableftr.ddo atype1.htm atype1.ddo atype2.htm atype2.ddo atype3.htm atype3.ddo atype4.htm atype4.ddo atype5.htm atype5.ddo atypeen1.htm atypeen1.ddo atypeen2.htm atypeen2.ddo atypeen3.htm atypeen3.ddo atypeen4.htm atypeen4.ddo atypeen5.htm atypeen5.ddo awebpage.htm awebpage.ddo maddrcen.htm madrcnen.ddo maddrcty.htm madrcntr.ddo maddrerr.htm maddrerr.ddo maddrsta.htm madrstat.ddo maddrstn.htm madrsten.ddo madmdata.htm madmdata.ddo madmupdt.htm madmupdt.ddo malumrel.htm malumrel.ddo malumrlt.htm malumrlt.ddo mappnum.htm mappnum.ddo mbutton.htm mbutton.ddo mbuttons.htm mbuttons.ddo mcaedcsndt.htm mcaedcsndt.ddo mcafinaiddt.htm mcafinaiddt.ddo mcaintrntldt.htm mcaintrntldt.ddo mcasubmdt.htm mcasubmdt.ddo mcatext1.htm mcatext1.ddo mcatext2.htm mcatext2.ddo Host Program MZKDIR Table 15-9 Admissions Files (continued) 15-60 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15 Web Files Used By Function Admissions Files Web Function Host Trans Code Configuration Files Continuous Flow Process (continued) HTML Files Data Definition Input Object Files Output mcatext3.htm mcatext3.ddo mcatext4.htm mcatext4.ddo mcatext5.htm mcatext5.ddo mcatext6.htm mcatext6.ddo mcatrnstddt.htm mcatrnstddt.ddo mclupdlnk.htm mclupdlnk.ddo mclupdt.htm mclupdt.ddo mclupinfo.htm mclupinfo.ddo mcolldeg1.htm mcolldeg1.ddo mcolldeg1ent.htm mcolldeg1ent.ddo mcolldeg2.htm mcolldeg2.ddo mcolldeg2ent.htm mcolldeg2ent.ddo Host Program MZKDIR mcommhtm.htm mconfbuttn.htm mconfbutt.ddo mconpgm.htm mcurappl.ddo mcreqf.htm mcreqf.ddo mcreqg.htm mcreqg.ddo mdegawd.htm mdegawd.ddo mdegent.htm mdegent.ddo mdisabil.htm mdisabil.ddo mdisaent.htm mdisaent.ddo mdisphs.htm mdisphs.ddo mehfpstat1.htm mehfpstat1.ddo mehfpstat2.htm mehfpstat2.ddo mehfpstent1.htm mehfpstent1.ddo mehfpstent2.htm mehfpstent2.ddo meicitizen.htm meicitizen.ddo meicitzn.htm meicitzn.ddo meictznent.htm meictznent.ddo meiearlydc.htm meiearlydc.ddo meiearlydcsn.htm meiearlydcsn.ddo meiearlyent.htm meiearlyent.ddo meifinaid.htm meifinaid.ddo meifincaid.htm meifincaid.ddo meifinent.htm meifinent.ddo meifpstat.htm meifpstat.ddo Table 15-9 Admissions Files (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15-61 15 Web Files Used By Function Admissions Files Web Function Continuous Flow Process (continued) Host Trans Code Configuration Files Data Definition Input Object Files Output Host Program meifpstatent.htm meifpstatent.ddo MZKDIR meifpstatus.htm meifpstatus.ddo meihdr.htm meihdr.ddo meihousent.htm meihousent.ddo meihousing.htm meihousing.ddo meihousreq.htm meihousreq.ddo meihousreqval.htm meihousreqval.ddo meihsng.htm meihsng.ddo meiminor.htm meiminor.ddo meiminorpgm.htm meiminorpgm.ddo meimnrent.htm meimnrent.ddo meiprevappl.htm meiprevappl.ddo meiprevappld.htm meiprevappld.ddo meiprevatt.htm meiprevatt.ddo meiprevattd.htm meiprevattd.ddo meiprevent.htm meiprevent.ddo meiprvapent.htm meiprvapent.ddo meispecent.htm meispecent.ddo meispecial.htm meispecial.ddo meispecpgm.htm meispecpgm.ddo meitext1.htm meitext1.ddo meitext2.htm meitext2.ddo meitext3.htm meitext3.ddo memphist1.htm memphist1.ddo memphist2.htm memphist2.ddo mempsel.htm mempsel.ddo mempselent.htm mempselent.ddo merrmsg.htm merrmsg.ddo methent.htm methent.ddo methnic.htm methnic.ddo mfirpgm.htm mfirpgm.ddo mged.htm mged.ddo mgedsel.htm mgedsel.ddo mgendent.htm mgendent.ddo mgender.htm mgender.ddo mhmschlsel.htm mhmschlsel.ddo HTML Files Table 15-9 Admissions Files (continued) 15-62 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15 Web Files Used By Function Admissions Files Web Function Host Trans Code Configuration Files Continuous Flow Process (continued) Data Definition Input Object Files Output Host Program mhomeschl.htm mhomeschl.ddo MZKDIR mhsdiplm.htm mhsdiplm.ddo mhsdiprc.htm mhsdiprc.ddo mhserrmsg.htm mhserrmsg.ddo mhsinfo.htm madmhs.ddo mhsinfofnd.htm mhsinfofnd.ddo mhsinfohmged.htm mhsinfohmged.ddo mhsupdlnk.htm mhsupdlnk.ddo mhsupdt.htm mhsupdt.ddo mhsupinfo.htm mhsupinfo.ddo minphs.htm minphs.ddo minstbuts.htm minstbuts.ddo minstbuttn.htm minstbutt.ddo mmarient.htm mmarient.ddo mmarital.htm mmarital.ddo mnameinf.htm mstdname.ddo mnavlnks1.htm mnavlnks1.ddo mnavlnks2.htm mnavlnks2.ddo mnavlnks3.htm mnavlnks3.ddo mnavlnks4.htm mnavlnks4.ddo mnavstat.htm mnavstat.ddo mperemail.htm mperemail.ddo mpererr.htm mpererr.ddo mpererrfld.htm mpererrfld.ddo mperinfo.htm mperinfo.ddo mpermaddrhdg.htm mpermaddrhdg.ddo mperphone.htm mperphone.ddo mpersref1.htm mpersref1.ddo mpersref2.htm mpersref2.ddo mpersref3.htm mpersref3.ddo mpgmemsg.htm mpgmemsg.ddo mpgtitle.htm mpgtitle.ddo mphone1.htm mphone1.ddo mphone2.htm mphone2.ddo mphone3.htm mphone3.ddo mphone4.htm mphone4.ddo HTML Files Table 15-9 Admissions Files (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15-63 15 Web Files Used By Function Admissions Files Web Function Continuous Flow Process (continued) Host Trans Code Configuration Files HTML Files Data Definition Input Object Files Output mphone5.htm mphone5.ddo mpiecphty.htm mpiecphty.ddo mpiecphtyen.htm mpiecphtyen.ddo mpiemgcont.htm mpiemgcont.ddo mpierr.htm mpierr.ddo mpiph1pr.htm mpiph1pr.ddo mpiph1pren.htm mpiph1pren.ddo mpiph1ty.htm mpiph1ty.ddo mpiph1tyen.htm mpiph1tyen.ddo mpiph2pr.htm mpiph2pr.ddo mpiph2pren.htm mpiph2pren.ddo mpiph2ty.htm mpiph2ty.ddo mpiph2tyen.htm mpiph2tyen.ddo mpiph3pr.htm mpiph3pr.ddo mpiph3pren.htm mpiph3pren.ddo mpiph3ty.htm mpiph3ty.ddo mpiph3tyen.htm mpiph3tyen.ddo mpiph4pr.htm mpiph4pr.ddo mpiph4pren.htm mpiph4pren.ddo mpiph4ty.htm mpiph4ty.ddo mpiph4tyen.htm mpiph4tyen.ddo mpiph5pr.htm mpiph5pr.ddo mpiph5pren.htm mpiph5pren.ddo mpiph5ty.htm mpiph5ty.ddo mpiph5tyen.htm mpiph5tyen.ddo mpiphemlerr.htm mpiphemlerr.ddo mpitmpma.htm mpitmpma.ddo mpstuname.htm mpstuname.ddo mrcbcntr.htm mrcbcntr.ddo mrcbcnty.htm mrcbcnty.ddo mrcbcten.htm mrcbcten.ddo mrcbstat.htm mrcbstat.ddo mrccitzn.htm mrccitzn.ddo mrcconv.htm mrcconv.ddo mrcconvent.htm mrcconvent.ddo mrcczncntr.htm mrcczncntr.ddo Host Program MZKDIR Table 15-9 Admissions Files (continued) 15-64 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15 Web Files Used By Function Admissions Files Web Function Host Trans Code Configuration Files Continuous Flow Process (continued) HTML Files Data Definition Input Object Files Output mrci20.htm mrci20.ddo mrci20en.htm mrci20en.ddo mrclangent.htm mrclangent.ddo mrclglstat.htm mrclglstat.ddo mrclgltime.htm mrclgltime.ddo mrclgtment.htm mrclgtment.ddo mrcnonctzn.htm mrcnonctzn.ddo mrcntvcntr.htm mrcntvcntr.ddo mrcocntrd.htm mrcocntrd.ddo mrcocntyd.htm mrcocntyd.ddo mrcorgcntr.htm mrcorgcntr.ddo mrcorgcnty.htm mrcorgcnty.ddo mrcorgcten.htm mrcorgcten.ddo mrcorgdisp.htm mrcorgdisp.ddo mrcorgstat.htm mrcorgstat.ddo mrcorgtblhdr.htm mrcorgtblhdr.ddo mrcorgtext.htm mrcorgtext.ddo mrcostatd.htm mrcostatd.ddo mrcpaddrtx1.htm mrcpaddrtx1.ddo mrcpaddrtx2.htm mrcpaddrtx2.ddo mrcpaddrtx3.htm mrcpaddrtx3.ddo mrcperment.htm mrcperment.ddo mrcpermres.htm mrcpermres.ddo mrcpresnum.htm mrcpresnum.ddo mrcprlang.htm mrcprlang.ddo mrcprlvent.htm mrcprlvent.ddo mrcprslvng.htm mrcprslvng.ddo mrcsevis.htm mrcsevis.ddo mrcsevisent.htm mrcsevisent.ddo mrcsevisnum.htm mrcsevisnum.ddo mrcusentrdt.htm mrcusentrdt.ddo mrcvdates.htm mrcvdates.ddo mrcvisaent.htm mrcvisaent.ddo mrcvtype.htm mrcvtype.ddo mrelatn.htm mrelatn.ddo mrelatn1.htm mrelatn1.ddo Host Program MZKDIR Table 15-9 Admissions Files (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15-65 15 Web Files Used By Function Admissions Files Web Function Continuous Flow Process (continued) Host Trans Code Configuration Files HTML Files Data Definition Input Object Files Output mrelatn2.htm mrelatn2.ddo mrelatn3.htm mrelatn3.ddo mrelatnt.htm mrelatnt.ddo mrelatnt1.htm mrelatnt1.ddo mrelatnt2.htm mrelatnt2.ddo mrelatnt3.htm mrelatnt3.ddo mrelient.htm mrelient.ddo mreligio.htm mreligio.ddo mresary.htm mresary.ddo mresstat.htm mresstat.ddo mresstatus.htm mresstatus.ddo mrvapbtnf.htm mrvapbtnf.ddo mrvapbuttn.htm mrvapbuttn.ddo mrvapcohds.htm mrvapcohds.ddo mrvapcohdu.htm mrvapcohdu.ddo mrvapdldt.htm mrvapdldt.ddo mrvapdldthdr.htm mrvapdldthdr.ddo mrvapehhds.htm mrvapehhds.ddo mrvapehhdu.htm mrvapehhdu.ddo mrvapeihds.htm mrvapeihds.ddo mrvapeihdu.htm mrvapeihdu.ddo mrvapfee.htm mrvapfee.ddo mrvapfeep.htm mrvapfeep.ddo mrvapfees.htm mrvapfees.ddo mrvapfeeu.htm mrvapfeeu.ddo mrvaphshds.htm mrvaphshds.ddo mrvaphshdu.htm mrvaphshdu.ddo mrvapinfo.htm mrvapinfo.ddo mrvappihds.htm mrvappihds.ddo mrvappihdu.htm mrvappihdu.ddo mrvappitab1.htm mrvappitab1.ddo mrvappitab2.htm mrvappitab2.ddo mrvappiurl.htm mrvappiurl.ddo mrvapprhds.htm mrvapprhds.ddo mrvapprhdu.htm mrvapprhdu.ddo mrvaprchds.htm mrvaprchds.ddo Host Program MZKDIR Table 15-9 Admissions Files (continued) 15-66 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15 Web Files Used By Function Admissions Files Web Function Host Trans Code Configuration Files Continuous Flow Process (continued) Data Definition Input Object Files Output Host Program mrvaprchdu.htm mrvaprchdu.ddo MZKDIR mrvapreq.htm mrvapreq.ddo mrvaprqt.htm mrvaprqt.ddo msecpgm.htm msecpgm.ddo mselcol1.htm msinst1.ddo mselfir.htm mselfir.ddo mselhs1.htm mshschl.ddo mselsec.htm mselsec.ddo mselsent.htm mselsent.ddo mselserv.htm mselserv.ddo mtblclose.htm mtblclose.ddo mvetent.htm mvetent.ddo mveteran.htm mveteran.ddo HTML Files madata.ddo Residency/ Citizenship 1210 mrescitzn.cfg addrcnen.htm addrinp2.ddo addrcnen.ddo addrcnen3.htm addrinp3.ddo addrcnen3.ddo addrcnen4.htm astuinfo.ddo addrcnen4.ddo addrcnen5.htm minpapp.ddo addrcnen5.ddo addrcnen6.htm mnavcode.ddo addrcnen6.ddo addrcntr3.htm mrsctzninp.ddo addrcntr3.ddo addrcntr4.htm addrcntr4.ddo addrcntr5.htm addrcntr5.ddo addrcntr6.htm addrcntr6.ddo addrfrm2.htm addrfrm2.ddo addrfrm3.htm addrfrm3.ddo addrph2fpr.htm addrph2fpr.ddo addrph2fpren.htm addrph2fpren.ddo addrph2pr.htm addrph2pr.ddo addrph2pren.htm addrph2pren.ddo addrph3fpr.htm addrph3fpr.ddo addrph3fpren.htm addrph3fpren.ddo addrph3pr.htm addrph3pr.ddo addrph3pren.htm addrph3pren.ddo addrstat2.htm addrstat2.ddo addrstat3.htm addrstat3.ddo addrsten.htm addrsten.ddo MZKRES Table 15-9 Admissions Files (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15-67 15 Web Files Used By Function Admissions Files Web Function Residency/ Citizenship (continued) Host Trans Code Configuration Files HTML Files Data Definition Input Object Files Output addrsten2.htm addrsten2.ddo addrsten3.htm addrsten3.ddo aerrmsg.htm aerrmsg.ddo atableftr.htm atableftr.ddo maddrerr.htm maddrerr.ddo mbuttons.htm mbuttons.ddo Host Program MZKRES mcommhtm.htm merrmsg.htm merrmsg.ddo mnavlnks2.htm mnavlnks2.ddo mnavstat.htm mnavstat.ddo mpererr.htm mpererr.ddo mpererrfld.htm mpererrfld.ddo mpgtitle.htm mpgtitle.ddo mpierr.htm mpierr.ddo mrcbcntr.htm mrcbcntr.ddo mrcbcnty.htm mrcbcnty.ddo mrcbcten.htm mrcbcten.ddo mrcbstat.htm mrcbstat.ddo mrccitzn.htm mrccitzn.ddo mrcczncntr.htm mrcczncntr.ddo mrci20.htm mrci20.ddo mrci20en.htm mrci20en.ddo mrclglstat.htm mrclglstat.ddo mrclgltime.htm mrclgltime.ddo mrclgtment.htm mrclgtment.ddo mrcnonctzn.htm mrcnonctzn.ddo mrcntvcntr.htm mrcntvcntr.ddo mrcocntrd.htm mrcocntrd.ddo mrcocntyd.htm mrcocntyd.ddo mrcorgcntr.htm mrcorgcntr.ddo mrcorgcnty.htm mrcorgcnty.ddo mrcorgcten.htm mrcorgcten.ddo mrcorgdisp.htm mrcorgdisp.ddo mrcorgstat.htm mrcorgstat.ddo mrcorgtblhdr.htm mrcorgtblhdr.ddo mrcorgtext.htm mrcorgtext.ddo Table 15-9 Admissions Files (continued) 15-68 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15 Web Files Used By Function Admissions Files Web Function Host Trans Code Configuration Files Residency/ Citizenship (continued) Personal References 1230 mpersref.cfg HTML Files Data Definition Input Object Files Output mrcostatd.htm mrcostatd.ddo mrcpaddrtx1.htm mrcpaddrtx1.ddo mrcpaddrtx2.htm mrcpaddrtx2.ddo mrcpaddrtx3.htm mrcpaddrtx3.ddo mrcperment.htm mrcperment.ddo mrcpermres.htm mrcpermres.ddo mrcpresnum.htm mrcpresnum.ddo mrcprlvent.htm mrcprlvent.ddo mrcprslvng.htm mrcprslvng.ddo mrcsevis.htm mrcsevis.ddo mrcsevisent.htm mrcsevisent.ddo mrcsevisnum.htm mrcsevisnum.ddo mrcusentrdt.htm mrcusentrdt.ddo mrcvdates.htm mrcvdates.ddo mrcvisaent.htm mrcvisaent.ddo mrcvtype.htm mrcvtype.ddo addrcnen1.htm addrinp1.ddo addrcnen1.ddo addrcnen2.htm addrinp2.ddo addrcnen2.ddo addrcnen3.htm addrinp3.ddo addrcnen3.ddo addrcnen4.htm astuinfo.ddo addrcnen4.ddo addrcnen5.htm minpapp.ddo addrcnen5.ddo addrcnen6.htm mnavcode.ddo addrcnen6.ddo addrcntr1.htm mpersrefinp.ddo addrcntr1.ddo addrcntr2.htm addrcntr2.ddo addrcntr3.htm addrcntr3.ddo addrcntr4.htm addrcntr4.ddo addrcntr5.htm addrcntr5.ddo addrcntr6.htm addrcntr6.ddo addrfrm1.htm addrfrm1.ddo addrfrm2.htm addrfrm2.ddo addrfrm3.htm addrfrm3.ddo addrph1fpr.htm addrph1fpr.ddo addrph1fpren.htm addrph1fpren.ddo addrph1pr.htm addrph1pr.ddo addrph1pren.htm addrph1pren.ddo addrph2fpr.htm addrph2fpr.ddo Host Program MZKRES MZKREF Table 15-9 Admissions Files (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15-69 15 Web Files Used By Function Admissions Files Web Function Personal References (continued) Host Trans Code Configuration Files HTML Files Data Definition Input Object Files Output addrph2fpren.htm addrph2fpren.ddo addrph2pr.htm addrph2pr.ddo addrph2pren.htm addrph2pren.ddo addrph3fpr.htm addrph3fpr.ddo addrph3fpren.htm addrph3fpren.ddo addrph3pr.htm addrph3pr.ddo addrph3pren.htm addrph3pren.ddo addrstat1.htm addrstat1.ddo addrstat2.htm addrstat2.ddo addrstat3.htm addrstat3.ddo addrsten1.htm addrsten1.ddo addrsten2.htm addrsten2.ddo addrsten3.htm addrsten3.ddo maddrerr.htm maddrerr.ddo mbuttons.htm mbuttons.ddo Host Program MZKREF mcommhtm.htm merrmsg.htm merrmsg.ddo mnavlnks2.htm mnavlnks2.ddo mnavstat.htm mnavstat.ddo mpersref1.htm mpersref1.ddo mpersref2.htm mpersref2.ddo mpersref3.htm mpersref3.ddo mpgtitle.htm mpgtitle.ddo mrelatn1.htm mrelatn1.ddo mrelatn2.htm mrelatn2.ddo mrelatn3.htm mrelatn3.ddo mrelatnt1.htm mrelatnt1.ddo mrelatnt2.htm mrelatnt2.ddo mrelatnt3.htm mrelatnt3.ddo Table 15-9 Admissions Files (continued) 15-70 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15 Web Files Used By Function Admissions Files Web Function Employment History Host Trans Code 1231 Configuration Files memphist.cfg HTML Files Data Definition Input Object Files Output addrcnen1.htm addrinp1.ddo addrcnen1.ddo addrcnen2.htm addrinp2.ddo addrcnen2.ddo addrcnen3.htm astuinfo.ddo addrcnen3.ddo addrcnen4.htm memphistinp.ddo addrcnen4.ddo addrcntr1.htm minpapp.ddo addrcntr1.ddo addrcntr2.htm mnavcode.ddo addrcntr2.ddo addrcntr3.htm addrcntr3.ddo addrcntr4.htm addrcntr4.ddo addrfrm1.htm addrfrm1.ddo addrfrm2.htm addrfrm2.ddo addrph1fpr.htm addrph1fpr.ddo addrph1fpren.htm addrph1fpren.ddo addrph1pr.htm addrph1pr.ddo addrph1pren.htm addrph1pren.ddo addrph2fpr.htm addrph2fpr.ddo addrph2fpren.htm addrph2fpren.ddo addrph2pr.htm addrph2pr.ddo addrph2pren.htm addrph2pren.ddo addrph3fpr.htm addrph3fpr.ddo addrph3fpren.htm addrph3fpren.ddo addrph3pr.htm addrph3pr.ddo addrph3pren.htm addrph3pren.ddo addrstat1.htm addrstat1.ddo addrstat2.htm addrstat2.ddo addrsten1.htm addrsten1.ddo addrsten2.htm addrsten2.ddo maddrerr.htm maddrerr.ddo mbuttons.htm mbuttons.ddo Host Program MZKEMP mcommhtm.htm mehfpstat1.htm mehfpstat1.ddo mehfpstat2.htm mehfpstat2.ddo mehfpstent1.htm mehfpstent1.ddo mehfpstent2.htm mehfpstent2.ddo memphist1.htm memphist1.ddo memphist2.htm memphist2.ddo mempsel.htm mempsel.ddo Table 15-9 Admissions Files (continued) SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15-71 15 Web Files Used By Function Admissions Files Web Function Host Trans Code Configuration Files Employment History (continued) Client Requirements Freshman Essay Client Requirements Publications and Honors Admissions Credit Card Payment 1280 1281 1403 mcreqf.cfg mcreqg.cfg bacrdcrd.cfg Data Definition Input Object Files Output Host Program mempselent.htm mempselent.ddo MZKEMP merrmsg.htm merrmsg.ddo mnavlnks2.htm mnavlnks2.ddo mnavstat.htm mnavstat.ddo mpgtitle.htm mpgtitle.ddo HTML Files mappnum.htm astuinfo.ddo mappnum.ddo mbutton.htm minpapp.ddo mbutton.ddo mcommhtm.htm mnavcode.ddo mcreqf.htm mcreqf.ddo mnavlnks2.htm mnavlnks2.ddo mnavstat.htm mnavstat.ddo mpgtitle.htm mpgtitle.ddo mappnum.htm astuinfo.ddo mappnum.ddo mbutton.htm minpapp.ddo mbutton.ddo mcommhtm.htm mnavcode.ddo mcreqg.htm mcreqg.ddo mnavlnks2.htm mnavlnks2.ddo mnavstat.htm mnavstat.ddo mpgtitle.htm mpgtitle.ddo bacrdcrd.htm astuinfo.ddo bcrdcard.ddo bcrdmsg.htm bcrdcard.ddo bcrdmsg.ddo binfotxt.htm binfotxt.ddo mcctyphdr.htm mcctyphdr.ddo MZKCRQ MZKCRQ BZKCCU mcommhtm.htm Admissions Credit Card Receipt 1405 bacrdcd.cfg mnavlnks6.htm mnavlnks6.ddo msubauto.htm msubauto.ddo msubinfo.htm msubinfo.ddo aerrmsg.htm astuinfo.ddo aerrmsg.ddo bacrdcrd.htm bcrdcard.ddo bcrdcard.ddo baerrpga.htm tepsa1.ddo bccrdmsg.htm tepsavs.ddo bcrdmsg.htm BZKCCU bccrdmsg.ddo bcrdmsg.ddo mcommhtm.htm mnavlnks6.htm mnavlnks6.ddo mpgtitle.htm mpgtitle.ddo msubauto.htm msubauto.ddo Table 15-9 Admissions Files (continued) 15-72 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15 Web Files Used By Function Parent/Guest Payment Files Web Function Admissions Logoff Host Trans Code -1 Configuration Files mlogouts.cfg HTML Files Data Definition Input Object Files Output Host Program mlogouts.htm Table 15-9 Admissions Files (continued) Parent/Guest Payment Files Web Function Parent or Guest Payment Host Tran Code 1410 Configuration Files bpgplog.cfg HTML Files Data Definition Input acommhtmhp.htm bpgpinput.ddo Object Files Output Host Program AZKVPA aconfig.htm aconfig.ddo aerrmsg.htm aerrmsg.ddo aterment.htm aterment.ddo bpgplog.htm bpgplog.ddo bpgpverf.htm bpgpverf.ddo bpgpverf1.htm bpgpverf1.ddo rinfotxt.htm rinfotxt.ddo rinfotxt2.htm rinfotxt2.ddo atermtab.ddo Parent or Guest Payment - Credit Card Payment 1403 bpgpcrdcard.cfg acommhtmhp.htm astuinfo.ddo bcrdcard.ddo bcrdmsg.htm bcrdcard.ddo bcrdmsg.ddo binfotxt.htm BZKCCU binfotxt.ddo bpgpcc.htm Parent or Guest - Credit Card Receipt 1405 bpgpcrdupdt.cfg acommhtmhp.htm astuinfo.ddo bcrdcard.ddo bcrdmsg.htm bcrdcard.ddo bcrdmsg.ddo bpgpcc.htm tepsa1.ddo bpgperrpgm.htm tepsavs.ddo BZKCCU Table 15-10 Parent/Guest Payment Files SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 15-73 16 Known Browser Issues Macintosh Computers 16 Known Browser Issues Since there are differences in the way the various types and versions of Web browsers display the Student pages, we are providing a list of the known differences that you may incur when using Student SelfService. Macintosh Computers Netscape Navigator 7.1 This section includes a list of differences found while testing different versions of Netscape Navigator on a Macintosh computer. • After selecting on a Web page, the button displays Processing (as it should) but the button is not disabled during processing. If the button is selected again, the selection is ignored. • Use CTRL+H, CTRL+2, and CTRL+3 instead of ALT+H, ALT+2, and ALT+3 to access the Help, Site Map, and Exit pages. Safari 1.1 This section includes a list of differences found while testing Safari on a Macintosh computer. • When you select an item from a drop-down menu, the menu item moves a little to the left. SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 16-1 Index Index A AAFILE Update program (AZKAAU) 14-13 ABKGEM (CP/Luminis Profile Extract) 3-120 to 3-121, 14-4 to 14-5 ABKLDI (Luminis Data Integration Extract) program 3-122 to 3-123 ABKLDI (Student/Faculty Luminis Data Integration Extract) program 14-6 to 14-10 ABKLSE (WebCT Profile Extract) 3-124 to 3-125, 14-10 to 14-12 Academic Program Maintenance screen (110) 6-46, 6-47, 6-49 academic progress 8-25 program (SZKPRO) 14-86 Accept Awards deadline 3-58, 8-11 program (SZKACC) 14-78 to 14-80 setting on Screen 331 3-61, 8-9 Account Summary 6-5 to 6-6 credit card payment 6-5, 7-16 setting availability for a term 3-4, 14-21 setting payment subcodes 6-7 setting viewing options 6-6 to 6-7 ACINPM copybook Course Section options 3-73 to 3-75 Course Section Search options 3-74 institution information 3-73 Registration options 3-39 adding menu items 3-97 to 3-102 menus 3-104 to 3-111 adding classes 7-4 Additional Services - Fee Code Query screen (W51) 3-32 Additional Services - Fee Codes screen (W29) 3-31 Additional Services - Group Query screen (W50) 3-32 Additional Services - Group Title/Description screen (W28) 3-29 to 3-30 Additional Services - Groups screen (W27) 3-26 to 3-29 Additional Services option 3-17 addresses Display program (AZKADR) 14-14 emergency contact 5-7 on admissions application 11-24 recording in DBD 11-28 viewing in SIS 11-72 next of kin 5-7 permanent address 11-10 on admissions application 11-9, 11-22 recording in DBD 11-26 to 11-27 viewing in SIS 11-71 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 previous address on admissions application 11-36, 11-40 record in DBD 11-41 to 11-42 recording in DBD 11-37 to 11-38 temporary mailing address on admissions application 11-23 recording in DBD 11-27 viewing in SIS 11-71 types to view/update on Web 3-13, 3-53 Adjust Charge/Payment screen (406) 6-10, 11-65 Administrative Table Load Web page (ATBLLOAD.HTM) 3-113 admissions applying for 2-2, 11-1 to 11-2, 11-6 to 11-64 Client Requirements 11-12, 11-50 to 11-51, 14-44 College History 11-12, 11-32 to 11-34 creating a new student account 11-6 to 11-11, 14-48 DV DBD values for list boxes 3-66 to 3-68 Employment History 11-12, 11-46 to 11-47, 14-46 enrollment intentions 11-12, 11-12 to 11-18 flowchart 11-2 High School History 11-12, 11-29 to 11-31 Information program (MZKADM) 14-41 to 14-43 navigation bar 11-5 Navigation Program (MZKDIR) 14-45 Other Links 11-3 to 11-4 paying application fee 11-63 to 11-65 Personal Information 11-12, 11-19 to 11-28 Personal References 11-12, 11-43 to 11-44, 14-52 Prospect program (MZKPRO) 14-51 Requirement Rules screen (MRR) 3-45 Residency/Citizenship 11-12, 11-35 to 11-42, 14-52 reviewing applications 11-57 to 11-60, 11-66 to 11-67 submitting an application 11-61 to 11-65, 14-53 to 14-54 term inquiry table 3-113 TSRVWEB.INI file settings 3-79, 3-82 to 3-84, 11-4 viewing Web application data on SIS screens 11-70 to 11-78 Web page design 11-3 to 11-5 advisors Display program (AZKADV) 14-15 viewing a list of 6-43 alternate credit hours 7-11 alumnus relationship defining DBD values for 3-67 recording in DBD 11-25 viewing in SIS 11-70 AMFILE Update program 14-16 application for admissions 2-2, 11-12 to 11-64 status 2-2, 11-68 I-1 Index application fee 11-57, 11-62, 11-67 default fee for non-residents 3-43 default fee for residents 3-43 for multiple applications 3-55 for non-residents 3-55 for residents 3-54 initial status for an Application Type 3-54 initial status if not set for an Application Type 3-43 paying by check or money order 11-63 paying by credit card 11-63 to 11-65 requiring before submission 3-43 application type 11-5, 11-16, 11-18, 11-57 DBD values for 3-66 defining admissions office for 3-45 Approved Academic Programs screen (134) 3-45, 3-64 architecture 2-8 to 2-10 ATBLLOAD.HTM (Administrative Table Load page) 3-113 auto-admit processing 3-45, 11-68 automated Login ID generation for applicants 11-6, 11-7 available course sections 2-3 ACINPM copybook options 3-73 to 3-75 setting availability for a term 3-4, 14-21 awards Accept Awards program (SZKACC) 14-78 to 14-80 accept/decline awards by year 8-6 defining years viewed on Web 3-57, 8-34 displaying on Accept Awards page 8-9 Distribution screen (317) 8-13 Entry screen (318) 8-13, 8-18 financial aid history 8-19 financial aid information by year 8-16 financial aid summary 8-4 General Messages screen (338) 8-14 Message screen (339) 8-12 selecting year to display 8-34 set display on Accept Awards page 3-61 student requirements 8-20 AZKAAU (AAFILE Update) program 14-13 AZKADR (Address Display) program 14-14 AZKADV (Advisor Display) program 14-15 AZKAMU (AMFILE Update) program 14-16 AZKHLD (Student Holds) program 14-17 AZKMSR (Marital Status Display) program 14-18 AZKMSU (Marital Status Update) program 14-18 AZKPIN (Change PIN) program 14-19 AZKTBL (Table Load) program 14-20 AZKVPA (Parent/Guest Payment) program 14-23 AZKVST (Verify Student) program 14-24 B bank account information 6-39 to 6-41 program (AZKAMU) 14-16 Bank Account Information option 3-17 I-2 billing making credit card payments 6-8 to 6-10 parent/guest payments 12-3 to 12-4 Tuition Calculation program (BZKTCL) 14-36 viewing account summary 6-5 to 6-6 birth date entering on admissions application 11-19 matching for ID verification 3-42 recording in SIS 11-25 setting display on Web page 3-51 using for identity verification 11-7 viewing in SIS 11-70 browsers for Macintosh computers 16-1 Budget screen (312) 8-24 BZKBIL (Student Account Balance) program 14-25 to 14-28 BZKCCU (Credit Card Payment) program 6-9, 11-64, 14-29 to 14-34 BZKTCL (Billing Tuition Calculation) program 14-36 BZKTRA (TRA 1098-T Form Display) program 14-37 BZKTXY (TRA Tax Year Selection) program 14-38 C call number 7-6, 9-8, 9-11 Campus Pipeline 14-4 passing profile data to 3-115 PIN 1-1 profile load process 3-120 to 3-121 TSRVWEB.INI file settings 3-79 Campus Pipeline/Luminis Profile Extract (ABKGEM) 3-120 to 3-121, 14-4 to 14-5 Campus-Wide ID (CWID) 11-11 customizing Admissions Login page if not using 3-70, 11-6 logging in with 2-4, 3-8 career level on Enrollment Intentions page 11-14 specifying for academic programs 3-64 specifying for application type 3-45 career table 3-113 Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) 3-72 changing a student’s PIN on Screen 103 (Personal Data) 2-5, 3-10 on Web 5-11 program (AZKPIN) 14-19 checklist for implementation 3-1 classes changing options 7-11 viewing a student’s schedule 7-13 to 7-15 Client Requirements how to include in admissions application 11-51 to 11-56 on admissions application 3-48, 11-12, 11-50 to 11-51 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 Index college history on admissions application 3-47, 11-12, 11-32 to 11-34 viewing in SIS 11-74 College Scholarship Service (CSS) 8-30 Communications Flags screen (204) 10-2, 10-6 conditional drop/add 7-8 configuration 2-8 cost of attendance 8-23 to 8-24 program (SZKCOA) 14-85 Course Availability program (RZKCRS) 14-58 to 14-59 Course Catalog 2-3, 9-3 to 9-4 academic year 3-14 options 3-14 to 3-16 program (RZKCAT) 14-56 to 14-57 Course Fees screen (TCF) 9-8, 9-12 Course Section Maintenance screen (129) 3-66, 9-7, 9-11 course sections available 2-3 ACINPM copybook options 3-73 to 3-75 creating new PIN for applicant 11-8 new student account 11-6 to 11-11 test and production Web environments 13-1 to 13-8 credit card payment account balance 6-5 confirmation 11-64 for Account Summary 6-8 to 6-10 for application fee 11-63 to 11-65 for Official Transcript Requests 6-52 to 6-53 for registration fees 7-16 program (BZKCCU) 6-9, 11-64, 14-29 to 14-34 subcodes 3-55, 14-33 types accepted 3-43 criminal conviction on admissions application 11-19 recording in DBD 11-25 setting display on admissions application 3-52 CSS Cascading Style Sheets 3-72 College Scholarship Service 8-30 PROFILE registration 8-30 customizing error messages 3-72 Web pages 1-4, 2-3, 3-71 to 3-72, 5-15, 5-16, 8-31, 8-33 CWID 11-11 customizing Admissions Login page if not using 3-70, 11-6 logging in with 2-4, 3-8 D data exchange 2-8 to 2-9 Data Synchronization Events screen (1SE) 3-126 to 3-128 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 data synchronization methods Campus Pipeline/Luminis Profile Load 3-115, 3-120 to 3-121 Luminis Data Integration (LDI) Solution 3-115 Luminis Profile Load 3-122 to 3-123 on-demand 3-115, 3-126 to 3-128 system events 3-115 WebCT Profile Load 3-115, 3-124 to 3-125 date of birth entering on admissions application 11-19 matching for ID verification 3-42 recording in SIS 11-25 setting display on Web page 3-51 using for identity verification 11-7 viewing in SIS 11-70 deadlines displayed on Review Application page 11-58 for accept/reject financial aid awards 3-58, 8-11 for early decision 3-55 for financial aid 3-55 for international student 3-55 for transfer student 3-55 for Web application submission 3-55 missed dates listed on Select Application page 11-67 set to display on admissions application 3-42 defining user ID 9998 3-1, 3-2 Web specifications 3-6 to 3-9 degree audit 3-65, 6-16 to 6-20 modeling 6-16, 6-21 to 6-22 program (DZKAUD) 14-39 setting options for 3-11 Degree Requirement Definition screen (611) 3-65 degree sought defining DBD values for 3-67 recording in DBD 11-34 viewing in SIS 11-74 detailed schedule 7-13 program (RZKSCH) 14-71 to 14-73 setting availability for a term 3-5, 14-22 disability type defining DBD values for 3-67 recording in DBD 11-25 setting display on admissions application 3-51 viewing in SIS 11-70 disabling Social Security link 3-81 United States Postal Service link 3-81 display options for Web pages 3-6 Document Tracking screen (306) 8-21 documentation in related guides 1-3 drop/add classes conditional 7-8 restrictions 7-4 DZKAUD (Degree Audit) program 14-39 I-3 Index E early decision display field on Web page 3-46 displaying deadline on admissions application 11-18 setting deadline for application types 3-55 ELM (Electronic Loan Management) 8-29 e-mail addresses on admissions application 11-20 recording in DBD 11-25 to 11-26 types to view/update on Web 3-13 updating for your institution’s offices 3-77, 8-33 viewing in SIS 11-71 viewing/updating student information 5-9 emergency contact adding information for 5-4 changing information for 5-7 on admissions application 11-24 recording in DBD 11-28 setting display on admissions application 3-47 viewing in SIS 11-72 employment history on admissions application 11-12, 11-46 to 11-47 recording in DBD 11-47 to 11-49 setting display on admissions application 3-48 viewing in SIS 11-49, 11-77 Enrollment Intentions defining DBD values for 3-67 on admissions application 11-12, 11-12 to 11-18 program (MZKPGM) 14-50 viewing in SIS 11-73 error messages customizing 3-72 troubleshooting during implementation 3-114 ethnicity defining DBD values for 3-67 recording in DBD 11-25 setting display on admissions application 3-51 viewing in SIS 11-70 events 3-115, 3-118 F FAFSA (Free App for Fed Student Aid) 2-3, 8-29, 8-30 fees for delivery of Official Transcript Requests 6-54 for Official Transcript Requests 6-54 for submitting admissions application 11-57, 11-62, 11-67 felony conviction on admissions application 11-19 recording in DBD 11-25 setting display on admissions application 3-52 viewing in SIS 11-70 I-4 Fin Aid Intentions entering on admissions application 11-15 recording in SIS 11-17 setting display on admissions application 3-50, 11-16 financial aid 2-3, 2-7 academic progress 8-25, 14-86 accept/decline awards by year 8-6, 14-78 to 14-80 accessing Department of Education information 8-30 Education Loan Management (ELM) System 8-29 Federal Aid Application 8-29, 8-30 Federal Direct Loan Servicing System 8-29 National Student Loan Data System 8-29, 8-30 public financial aid information 8-29 public scholarship search tools 8-29 Student Government Services 8-29, 8-30 application and information links 8-28 to 8-30 award history 8-19 award information by year 8-16, 14-82 to 14-84 award messages 8-12 to 8-13 award year table 3-113 cost of attendance 8-23 to 8-24, 14-85 e-mail address 3-79, 8-33 external links 2-3 general messages 8-14 links to resources 8-29 to 8-30 opportunities at your university 8-31 to 8-33 student requirements 8-20, 14-88 to 14-91 submitting CSS PROFILE registration 8-30 summary 8-4, 14-87 transcript 8-26 to 8-27, 14-92 to 14-93 Financial Aid 1 (W26) screen 3-57 to 3-60, 3-113, 8-34, 14-82, 14-88, 14-92 Financial Aid Deadline displaying on admissions applications 11-18 setting for application types 3-55 flowchart of admissions process 11-2 Forgot My PIN displaying link on Login page 2-5, 3-9 using link on Login page 5-11, 5-12 to 5-13 Form 1098-T 6-35 to 6-38 TRA Form Display program (BZKTRA) 14-37 TRA Tax Year Selection program (BZKTXY) 14-38 Free App for Fed Student Aid (FAFSA) 2-3, 8-29, 8-30 Fund Attribute screen (331) 3-60, 3-63, 8-9 G GED on admissions application 11-29 setting code for display on Web page 3-52 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 Index gender defining DBD values for 3-67 matching for ID verification 3-42 recording in DBD 11-25 setting display on Web page 3-50 setting for ID verification 3-41 viewing in SIS 11-70 General Info TSRVWEB.INI file settings 4-1, 5-1, 6-1, 7-1, 8-1, 9-1 generating SIDs for applicants 11-6, 11-7 GPA college 11-74 high school 11-74 grades 6-3 to 6-4 changing grade type 7-11 college GPA 11-74 Grading program (RZKFGR) 14-60 granting student access to 6-4 high school GPA 11-74 midterm 6-4, 14-62 Report program (RZKGRD) 14-61 to 14-62 setting availability for a term 3-4, 14-21 term table 3-113 graduation checkout requesting 6-48 to 6-49 setting availability for a term 3-5 viewing on Screen 110 6-49 viewing on Screen 117 6-49 graduation information 6-45 to 6-49 setting availability for a term 3-5 viewing on Screen 110 6-49 viewing on Screen 117 6-49 H help page 1-4, 3-71 high school history on admissions application 11-12, 11-29 to 11-31 setting display on admissions application 3-47 viewing in SIS 11-74 holds defining DBD values for types of 3-69 viewing a list of 6-23 Home Address page 3-81 home schooled on admissions application 11-29 setting code for use on admissions application 3-52 housing intentions defining DBD values for 3-67 recording in DBD 11-17 setting display on admissions application 3-50 viewing in SIS 11-73 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 HTML customizing Change Name page 5-15 customizing Change SSN page 5-16 customizing Financial Aid Opportunities page 8-33 customizing text on Web pages 3-71 to 3-72 I I Forgot My PIN displaying link on Login page 2-5, 3-9 using link on Login page 5-11, 5-12 to 5-13 I-20 status entering on application 11-39 recording in DBD 11-41 viewing in SIS 11-76 identity verification 11-7 implementation checklist 3-1 troubleshooting errors during 3-114 INS SEVIS Number entering on application 11-39 recording in DBD 11-41 viewing in SIS 11-76 institution home page TSRVWEB.INI file settings 3-78 institution Home page links 3-78 institution name 11-3 institutional coursework 6-29 defining DBD values for 3-69 options 3-17 program (RZKTSC) 14-77 international student deadline setting for application types 3-55 IRS Form 1098-T 6-35 to 6-38 TRA Form Display program (BZKTRA) 14-37 TRA Tax Year Selection program (BZKTXY) 14-38 L language defining DBD values for 3-67 level determines program selection on Enrollment Intentions page 11-14 specifying for academic programs 3-64 specifying for application type 3-45 links Other Links on Admissions Web pages 11-3 to 11-4 I-5 Index login options 3-7 to 3-10 resetting number of attempts 3-7 setting maximum number of attempts 3-7 SID generation for applicants 11-6 using student’s CWID 2-4, 3-8 using student’s SSN 2-4, 3-8 when forgot PIN 5-12 to 5-13 Luminis 14-4 passing profile data to 3-115 PIN 1-1 profile load process 3-120 to 3-121, 3-122 to 3-123 TSRVWEB.INI file settings 3-79 Luminis Data Integration Extract (ABKLDI) 3-122 to 3-123 N Name and Personal Information program (MZKNAM) 14-49 National Student Loan Data System (NSLDS) 8-29, 8-30 navigation bar on Admissions pages 11-5 Netscape known issues on Macintosh computers 16-1 next of kin adding information for 5-4 changing information for 5-7 defining DBD values for 3-69 nickname setting display on Web page 3-50 viewing in SIS 11-70 NSLDS (National Student Loan Data System) 8-29, 8-30 M marital status defining DBD values for 3-67, 3-69 Display program (AZKMSR) 14-18 recording in DBD 11-25 setting display on Web page 3-51 Update program (AZKMSU) 14-18 viewing in SIS 11-70 viewing/updating student information 5-14 menus adding 3-104 to 3-111 adding items to 3-97 to 3-102 removing items from 3-92 to 3-96 renaming 3-89 to 3-91 midterm grades 6-4, 14-62 modeling for Degree Audit 6-16, 6-21 to 6-22 phase (not ready to calculate tuition) 6-6 Multiple Course Enrollment (MCE) 9-8, 9-12 MZKADM (Admissions Information) program 14-41 to 14-43 MZKCRQ (Client Requirements) program 14-44 MZKDIR (Admissions Navigation program) 14-45 MZKEMP (Employment History) program 14-46 MZKHCL (Previous College and High School) program 14-47 MZKINT (Admissions Create Account) program 14-48 MZKNAM (Name and Personal Information) program 14-49 MZKPGM (Enrollment Intentions) program 14-50 MZKPRO (Admissions Prospect) program 14-51 MZKREF (Personal References) program 14-52 MZKRES (Residency/Citizenship) program 14-52 MZKSAP (Submit Application) program 14-53 to 14-54 MZKVST (Identity Verification & Create PIN program 14-55 to 14-56 I-6 O Official Transcript Request 6-50 to 6-53 Official Transcript Request 1 screen (W23) 3-22 to 3-23, 6-54, 14-64 to 14-65 Official Transcript Request 2 screen (W24) 3-24 to 3-26, 6-54, 14-65 to 14-67 Official Transcript Request program (RZKOTR) 14-63 online help 1-4 operator number 3-2 P Packaging screen (325) 8-14, 8-25 paper applications viewed on Web 11-68, 11-69 Parent or Guest Payment 12-1 to 12-4 Parent/Guest Payment credit card subcodes 3-20 to 3-21 defining payment term 3-21, 12-2 program (AZKVPA) 14-23 setting availability for a term 3-4 pass/fail grading option 7-11 passing profile data to Campus Pipeline/Luminis 3-115 to WebCT 3-115, 3-124 to 3-125 payment subcodes for Account Summary payments 3-19, 3-19 to 3-20, 6-7 for Admissions Applications fees 3-55 for Official Transcript Requests 3-25, 6-54 for Parent/Guest payments 3-20 to 3-21, 12-2 permanent address on admissions application 11-9, 11-22 recording in DBD 11-10, 11-26 to 11-27 Personal Data screen (103) 3-10, 11-8 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 Index Personal Information on admissions application 3-47, 11-12, 11-19 to 11-28 reviewing DBD values for 3-69 Student Services feature 2-6 personal phone numbers on admissions application 11-21 viewing/updating student information 5-8 personal references on admissions application 3-48, 11-12, 11-43 to 11-44 on SIS Screen 2PR 11-45 recording in DBD 11-44 viewing in SIS 11-76 personal Web page URL recording in DBD 11-26 viewing in SIS 11-71 phone numbers on admissions application 11-21 viewing/updating student information 5-8 PIN 2-7 changing 2-5, 3-10, 5-11 creating PIN for student with valid SID 3-41 to 3-42, 11-7 deleting 2-5 forgetting 2-5, 3-9 recording number in DBD 11-10 replacing a deleted PIN 11-8 setting maximum number of attempts to enter 3-7 using to log in 11-11, 11-66 PIN Question and Answer 2-5 changing 5-11 to 5-13 setting display of 3-9 Postal Service link 3-81 previous address on admissions application 11-36, 11-40 recording in DBD 11-37 to 11-38, 11-41 to 11-42 Previous College and High School program (MZKHCL) 14-47 primary language defining DBD values for 3-67 recording in DBD 11-25 viewing in SIS 11-70 programs AAFILE Update (AZKAAU) 14-13 Academic Progress (SZKPRO) 14-86 Accept Awards (SZKACC) 14-78 to 14-80 Address Display/Update (AZKADR) 14-14 Admissions Create Account (MZKINT) 14-48 Admissions Information (MZKADM) 14-41 to 14-43 Admissions Navigation (MZKDIR) 14-45 Admissions Prospect (MZKPRO) 14-51 Advisor Display (AZKADV) 14-15 AMFILE Update (AZKAMU) 14-16 Billing Tuition Calculation (BZKTCL) 14-36 Campus Pipeline/Luminis Profile Extract (ABKGEM) 14-4 to 14-5 Change PIN (AZKPIN) 14-19 Client Requirements 14-44 Cost of Attendance (SZKCOA) 14-85 Course Availability (RZKCRS) 14-58 to 14-59 Course Catalog (RZKCAT) 14-56 to 14-57 Credit Card Payment (BZKCCU) 14-29 to 14-34 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 Degree Audit (DZKAUD) 14-39 Detailed Schedule (RZKSCH) 14-71 to 14-73 Employment History 14-46 Enrollment Intentions (MZKPGM) 14-50 Fin Aid Applicant Award (SZKAWD) 14-82 to 14-84 Financial Aid Summary (SZKSUM) 14-87 general options 14-1 Grade Report (RZKGRD) 14-61 to 14-62 Grading (RZKFGR) 14-60 Identity Verification & Create PIN (MZKVST) 14-55 to 14-56 Institutional Coursework (RZKTSC) 14-77 Luminis Data Integration (ABKLDI) 3-122 to 3-123 Marital Status Display (AZKMSR) 14-18 Marital Status Update (AZKMSU) 14-18 Name and Personal Information (MZKNAM) 14-49 Official Transcript Request (RZKOTR) 14-63 Parent/Guest Payment (AZKVPA) 14-23 Personal References 14-52 Previous College and High School (MZKHCL) 14-47 Registration (RZKREG) 14-68 to 14-69 Registration Status (RZKSRS) 14-73 Residency/Citizenship (MZKRES) 14-52 Student Account Balance (BZKBIL) 14-25 to 14-28 Student Holds (AZKHLD) 14-17 Student Requirements (SZKTRK) 14-88 to 14-91 Student Schedule (RZKSCD) 14-70 Student/Faculty Luminis Data Integration Extract (ABKLDI) 14-6 to 14-10 Submit Application (MZKSAP) 14-53 to 14-54 Table Load (AZKTBL) 14-20 TRA Form Display (BZKTRA) 14-37 TRA Tax Year Selection (BZKTXY) 14-38 Transfer Credit (RZKTCD) 14-74 Unofficial Financial Aid Transcript (SZKTRN) 14-92 Unofficial Transcript (RZKTRN) 14-75 Verify Student (AZKVST) 14-24 WebCT Profile Extract (ABKLSE) 14-10 to 14-12 Prospect/Preapp Entry screen (2E5) 10-2, 10-6 public scholarship search tools 8-29 R registration 2-6, 7-4 ACINPM copybook options 3-39 controls 3-1 menu 7-1 program (RZKREG) 14-68 to 14-69 term table 3-113 Registration and Schedule 1 screen (W25) 3-37 to 3-39, 7-12 registration status program (RZKSRS) 14-73 setting availability for a term 3-5, 14-22 viewing 7-16 I-7 Index religion defining DBD values for 3-67 recording in DBD 11-25 setting display on admissions application 3-51 viewing in SIS 11-70 removing menu items 3-92 to 3-96 renaming menus 3-89 to 3-91 requesting graduation checkout 6-45 to 6-46, 6-48 to 6-49 institution information 2-2, 10-1 to 10-6 official transcript 6-50 to 6-53 resetting number of login attempts 3-7 Residency/Citizenship on admissions application 3-47, 11-12, 11-35 to 11-42 program (MZKRES) 14-52 viewing in SIS 11-75 to 11-76 resident status setting display on Web page 3-50 viewing in SIS 11-73 respcode.txt file 3-72 reviewing applications 11-57 to 11-60, 11-66 to 11-67 RZKCAT (Course Catalog) program 14-56 to 14-57 RZKCRS (Course Availability) program 14-58 to 14-59 RZKGRD (Grade Report) program 14-61 to 14-62 RZKOTR (Official Transcript Request) program 14-63 RZKREG (Registration) program 14-68 to 14-69 RZKSCD (Student Schedule) program 14-70 RZKSCH (Detailed Schedule) program 14-71 to 14-73 RZKSRS (Registration Status) program 14-73 RZKTCD (Transfer Credit) program 14-74 RZKTRN (Unofficial Transcript) program 14-75 RZKTSC (Institutional Coursework) program 14-77 S Safari Web browser 16-1 schedule term table 3-113 screens 021 (Employment History) 11-49 048 (SIS Holds & Comments) 6-24 103 (Personal Data) 2-5, 3-10, 11-8 110 (Academic Program Maintenance) 6-46, 6-47, 6-49 117 (Graduation Checkout) 6-49 129 (Course Section Maint) 3-66, 9-7, 9-11 131 (Section Registration Controls) 9-8, 9-11 134 (Approved Academic Programs) 3-45, 3-64 136 (Transcript Display) 6-28, 6-31 142 (Transfer Credit Articulation) 6-34 144 (Transfer Credit Summary) 6-34 148 (Reg Holds & Comments) 6-24 1SE (Data Synchronization Events) 3-126 to 3-128 1T2 (Transcript Request Log) 6-56 1T4 (Web Transcript Request Scroll) 6-55 204 (Communication Flags) 10-2, 10-6 206 (Admission Decision) 11-68, 11-69 I-8 222 (Web Application Scroll) 11-78 248 (AM Holds & Comments) 6-24 2E5 (Prospect/Preapp Entry) 10-2, 10-6 2PR (Personal References) 11-45 305 (Transcript Tracking) 8-22 306 (Document Tracking) 8-21 312 (Budget) 8-24 317 (Award Distribution) 8-13 318 (Award Entry) 8-13, 8-18 325 (Packaging) 8-14, 8-25 331 (Fund Attribute) 3-60, 3-63, 8-9, 8-12 338 (General Messages) 8-14 339 (Award Messages) 8-12 348 (FAM Holds & Comments) 6-24 406 (Adjust Charge/Payment) 6-10, 11-65 413 (1098-T Audit Inquiry) 6-38 438 (Student Bank Account Information) 6-41 448 (BR Holds & Comments) 6-24 548 Housing Holds & Comments) 6-24 611 (Degree Requirement Definition) 3-65 CDA (Conditional Drop/Add) 7-8 MRR (Admission Requirement Rules) 3-45 SIN (SIS Installation Specifications) 3-117 TCF (Course Fees) 9-8, 9-12 W01 (Web Term Calendar) 3-3, 3-113, 4-4, 6-4, 6-45, 7-8, 14-25, 14-41, 14-61, 14-70, 14-71 W02 (Web Student and Faculty Specifications) 3-1, 3-6, 14-39 to 14-40 W03 (Web Registration Access Groups) 3-33 to 3-36 W04 (Web Required Admissions Pages) 11-5, 11-18, 11-57, 14-45 W05 (Web Admissions Page Display Options) 3-49 to 3-53, 11-20, 11-22 W06 (Web Admissions Application Type/Term Options) 3-54 to 3-56 W20 (Student Personal Information) 3-1, 3-12 to 3-13 W21 (Student Records 1) 3-14 to 3-17, 6-3 W22 (Student Records 2) 3-18 to 3-21, 6-53 W23 (Official Transcript Request 1) 3-22 to 3-23, 6-54, 14-64 to 14-65 W24 (Official Transcript Request 2) 3-24 to 3-26, 6-54, 14-65 to 14-67 W25 (Registration and Schedule 1) 3-37 to 3-39, 7-12 W26 (Financial Aid 1) 3-57 to 3-60, 3-113, 8-34, 14-82, 14-88, 14-92 W27 (Additional Services - Groups) 3-26 to 3-29 W28 (Additional Services - Group Title/Description) 3-29 to 3-30 W29 (Additional Services - Fee Codes) 3-31 W50 (Additional Services - Group Query) 3-32 W51 (Additional Services - Fee Code Query) 3-32 WA2 (Web Admissions System Options) 3-40 to 3-43 ZEF (List of Available Events) 3-116 ZEQ (Event Queue Administration) 3-117 scthelp.htm 1-4, 3-71 Section Registration Controls screen (131) 9-8, 9-11 security 2-7, 2-9 to 2-10 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 Index selective service status defining DBD values for 3-67 recording in DBD 11-25 setting display on Web page 3-51 viewing in SIS 11-70 setting up user ID 9998 3-1, 3-2 WebCT course URL 3-79 WebCT home page URL 3-79 SEVIS Number entering on application 11-39 recording in DBD 11-41 viewing in SIS 11-76 SID generation for applicants 11-6 Social Security (SSA) link 3-81 Social Security Administration customizing text on Change SSN page 3-71 SSN customizing Admissions Login page for 3-70, 11-6 logging in with 2-4, 3-8 recording in DBD 11-10 student account Balance program (BZKBIL) 14-25 to 14-28 paying via the Web 7-16 Student Bank Account Information screen (438) 6-41 Student Government Services (students.gov) 8-29, 8-30 Student Holds program (AZKHLD) 14-17 Student ID generation for applicants 11-7 Student Personal Information screen (W20) 3-1, 3-12 to 3-13 Student Records 2-6 reviewing DBD values for 3-69 Student Records 1 screen (W21) 3-14 to 3-17, 6-3 Student Records 2 screen (W22) 3-18 to 3-21, 6-53 student schedule 7-13 program (RZKSCD) 14-70 setting availability for a term 3-5, 14-22 viewing 7-13 Student Services 2-6 Student/Faculty Luminis Data Integration Extract (ABKLDI) 14-6 to 14-10 subcodes for Account Summary payments 3-19, 3-19 to 3-20, 6-7 for Admissions Applications fees 3-55 for Official Transcript Requests 3-25, 6-54 for Parent/Guest payments 3-20 to 3-21, 12-2 subject table 3-113 submitting an application 11-61 to 11-65, 14-53 to 14-54 summary of financial aid information 8-4, 14-87 system events 3-115, 3-118 SZKACC (Accept Awards) program 14-78 to 14-80 SZKAWD (Fin Aid Applicant Award) program 14-82 to 14-84 SZKCOA (Cost of Attendance) program 14-85 SZKPRO (Academic Progress) program 14-86 SZKSUM (Financial Aid Summary) program 14-87 SZKTRK (Student Requirements) program 14-88 to 14-91 SZKTRN (Unofficial Financial Aid Transcript) program 14-92, 14-92 to 14-93 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005 T Table Load program (AZKTBL) 14-20 temporary mailing address on admissions application 11-23 recording in DBD 11-27 term defining DBD values for Admissions 3-66 earliest term for passing events to CP/Luminis 3-118 selection 2-6, 4-2 to 4-4 setting default 4-2 specifying expected graduation 6-45 to 6-49 synchronizing data for 3-126 test environment 13-1 to 13-8 TouchNet 13-1 Enterprise Web program 1-3 using Payment Gateway for account bill 6-6, 6-8 using Payment Gateway for application fees 3-43, 11-64 voice solution 3-2, 6-10, 11-65 TRA 1098-T Form Display program (BZKTRA) 14-37 1098-T Web page 6-35 to 6-38 Tax Year Selection program (BZKTXY) 14-38 Transcript Request Log screen (1T2) 6-56 Transcript Tracking screen (305) 8-22 transcripts Display screen (136) 6-28, 6-31 financial aid 8-26 to 8-27 institutional coursework 3-69, 6-29, 14-77 transfer credit 3-69, 6-32 to 6-33, 14-74 unofficial 6-25 to 6-26, 14-75 transfer credit 6-32 to 6-33 Articulation screen (142) 6-34 defining DBD values for 3-69 program (RZKTCD) 14-74 Summary screen (144) 6-34 Transfer Credit options 3-17 transfer student deadline displaying on admissions application 11-18 setting for application types 3-55 troubleshooting during implementation 3-114 T-Serve installation 1-4 System Administration Guide 1-4 TSRVWEB program 1-3 I-9 Index TSRVWEB.INI file settings for Admissions 3-79, 3-82 to 3-84, 11-4 for Campus Pipeline/Luminis 3-79 for common links on Web pages 3-80 for Financial Aid office 3-79, 8-33 for General Info menu options 4-1, 5-1, 6-1, 7-1, 8-1, 9-1 for institution home page 3-78 for institution information 3-80 for institution name 11-3 for institution’s Home page links 3-78 for naming links at top of Web pages 3-78 for WebCT 3-79 Visa issuance date entering on application 11-39 recording in DBD 11-41 viewing in SIS 11-76 Visa type defining DBD values for 3-68 entering on application 11-39 recording in DBD 11-41 viewing in SIS 11-76 W Web U United States Postal Service link on Update Address page 5-5, 5-6, 5-7 United States Postal Service link 3-81 University Financial Aid Opportunities 8-31 Unofficial Financial Aid Transcript program (SZKTRN) 14-92, 14-92 to 14-93 unofficial transcript 6-25 to 6-26 program (RZKTRN) 14-75 updating e-mail addresses and URLs for your institution 3-77 institution name 11-3 WebCT course URL 3-79 WebCT home page URL 3-79 URL for WebCT course page 3-79 for WebCT home page 3-79 for your institution’s Web sites 3-77 user ID 9998 3-1, 3-2 V variable credit hours 7-11 verify identity 11-7 program (MZKVST) 14-55 to 14-56 Verify Student program (AZKVST) 14-24 veteran status defining DBD values for 3-67 recording in DBD 11-25 setting display on Web page 3-51 viewing in SIS 11-70 viewing advisors 6-43 holds 6-23 list of official transcript requests 6-55 to 6-56 Visa expiration date entering on application 11-39 recording in DBD 11-41 viewing in SIS 11-76 I-10 browsers 16-1 display options 3-6 login options 3-7 to 3-10 Term Calendar screen (W01) 4-4 Web Admissions Application Type/Term Options screen (W06) 3-54 to 3-56 Page Display Options screen (W05) 3-49 to 3-53, 11-20, 11-22 System Options screen (WA2) 3-40 to 3-43 Web application Scroll screen (222) 11-78 status 2-2, 11-68 Web application submission deadline displaying on admissions application 11-18 setting for application types 3-55 Web environments for test and production 13-1 to 13-8 Web PIN creation 3-41 to 3-42, 11-7 Web Registration Access Groups screen (W03) 3-33 to 3-36 Web Required Admissions Pages screen (W04) 11-5, 11-18, 11-57, 14-45 Web Student and Faculty Specifications screen (W02) 3-1, 3-6, 14-39 to 14-40 Web tables loading 3-113 Web Term Calendar screen (W01) 3-3, 3-113, 6-4, 6-45, 7-8, 14-25, 14-41, 14-61, 14-70, 14-71 Web Transcript Request Scroll screen (1T4) 6-55 WebCT passing profile data to 3-115, 3-124 to 3-125 Profile Extract (ABKLSE) 3-124 to 3-125, 14-10 to 14-12 setting course URL 3-79 setting home page URL 3-79 TSRVWEB.INI file settings 3-79 Z ZEF screen 3-116 ZEQ screen 3-117 SCT Plus Student Self-Service Implementation Guide February 2005